The Tagalog language_Part 1 of 3 by Filipiniana Online

THE TAGALOG LANGUAGE. /'

COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMATICAL SELF-INSTRUCTION

AND

TREATISE

PARTICULARLY

ADAPTED

DESIGNED

FOR

USE OF THOSE ENGAGED IN GOVERNMENT SERVICE, OR IN BUSINESS OR TRADE IN THE PHILIPPINES BY

CONSTANTINO LEN DOYRO, ..?

FOR

TWENTY-SIX YEARS INTIMAT ELY CONNECTED AND COMMERCE

THESE

ISLANDS.

_ ...........SECOND

(ALL

EDITION

RIGHTS RESERVED .)

PRINTED BY JUAN FAJARDO . MANILA,

P. 1.

1909.

WITH

TRADE

2842

ERRATA Only those errata are listed which are considered important, leaving others which are merely orthographical errors to be corrected by the reader. INTRODUCTION LINE

EnRon.

SIIOULD

Ill~

P AGE.

FROM TOI' .

languages Malay worrls Lhe too, exists demostrlltivc sin or at Tagalog. thees Ei ctionary frenl' nor that tungco pronouns afford. associated with an went rregulal' quality .Magtapi ang breath did of verbalized senses his Panaitim by notwithstanding mediate . Yn6tang tought

lauguage Indian words a nd the too, there ex ists. demonstrllti v!\ sein or Tngal en lhese Dictionllry (I'iar

TEXT not than tungcod pronouns and the articlo for proper nouns of persons afford prefixed to and vent il'l'egulnr equality Magto g pf and breadth do 01'

express"d nction thi s Pnnllyimtim be however immediate Tnr;tang, tllught

:21 a:j

路w 49 53 63

1'01'

il to th e instl'llln ont, nnrl that P P I'SOIl

20路2 1 路W -1,7 12 last (j

Ins!

:W J 39

7 13 2-1,

10 3\!

64 72

17 34

106 108

11 US 136 139 141

156 156 157

1'0.

XOV[

141 145

11 1.0 Ihp person e ven pl1tongo Maghnyud

with an to the avent pntongb Mllgbliyuc!

X f[ X \'[II XL XL XLY T L LYII[ LXX\, LXXVT[ LX XX \ ' [[

2 20

38 14

36 3S 3 27

3X 4f)

2:l

I i)H 171

III

I7iI

III

I !-SO

IXS

10 l\l

UIO

JI)

TEXT.

I LING

I SHOULD BE

ERROTt.

gilt niya Ybinigay Maca1ll.cad na Macabapis na maraming in ,,Inaaano Lungmab\. Mal60b FOllrty Casiyahan particle qu inacamtnm state na

gil,1ed Ililit rbinibi,r;(iy Maealahicad na Macahabapis nR maramlng an GID 8ano Lungmalabl Mngl60b Forty Casiyahan p8r~i cip l e

quinacamtau estate

ta is fool eal'snare cautiollP prolluLlcenul e

If aug as if were to Adan loing路cloth same appreheurlerl five fi look UpOll sampon of Board Suoh ve rb eppert

en~j]a r e

cautious Konouuqeable and as if there were bu Adam loi ll-cl oth so me apprebeurl five a look at

swnpon of the Board Such a verb ex pert

PAGE \

190 IH2 19-1 215 215 220 228 2.:15 269 275 277 289 303 303 319 . 321 335 il-l7 351 355 361 362 364 3GG 368 376 1:l82 390 3943U7 397 402 405 -l19

ETtOM TOP.

19 6 38 33 34 32 43 6 29 32 1

17 35 last

23 11

5 15 4

35 25 8 22 33 39 32 48 14 27 19

2L 19 11

4 19

433

-l0

TABLE OF CONTENTS. (An alphabetical index will be found of the Grammar).

just following the end PAGES.

PREFA CE INTROD UCTION.

II.

ORTHOGRAPH Y. PRO NUNCIATION. PROSODY. TilE GRA~IMAR

Preliminary Rem.ark

3· 916 17-26 27

LES ONS.

II. lIT.

1\'. V.

VI.

VII. VII[.

IX. X. XL

xn.

The Arti cle . First Exercise. Geuder. Declension or the Article Second Exercise Number, aud the Adjective. Declension of the Article. . 'rbird Exercise. Th e Ligaments . and the Rendering o[ th e Verb " To b e". Fourth Exercise Demonstrati ve Prououlls Fiftb Exercise. Interrogative Pronolln . Si.;'i:th Exercise. Personal aud PossessiYe Pronouns. Seventh Exercise. The Substantive. . Eightb Exercise. Relative Pronouns. Ninth Exercise. ·Intensives. . Tenth Exercise. • Numeral Adj ectives; Cllrdinal and Ordinal NUIllerals. . . . Eleventh Exercise. . Numeral Adjectives; Adverbial, Distributive. aud Partitive Num erals . Twelftb Exercise

27-29 2930 '1 0-33 33

3337 37 3740 -l0 -l1 43 4344 44-48 48

-l9-53

54 54·5 5 59 5962 62 63-67

67 6 -71 71-72 72-76 76

LESSONS.

XI[[. XlV. XV . XVI. XYl l. XVIlI. X IX. XX. XX l. XXlI .

xxm. XX [,'.

xxv. XXVI. XXVIl.

xxvm. XX lX. XXX. XXXl. XXX lI.

xxxm. XXX lV. XXX, . XXXVI.

THE T AGA LOG L ANGUA GE.

Degrees of Comparison; Com parative of Equality. 'fhirteenth Exercise. Degrees of Compariso n; Comparatives of Sup· eri ority, of Inferiority, and tbe SutJerialive. l!'ourteenth Exercise. Dim inutives. Fifteenth Exercise. The Verb. Um Verbs. Conjugatiou . Sixteenth ExerC'ise. Mag·Pag Verbs. Conj ugation The Subjunctive Seventeenth E xercise. aa lJfalJfa Verbs. Conj ugation. E ighteenth Exercise. The Passive Voice. Coujugation. Nineteenth Exercise. The Passive Voice (continned ). Conj ugati on . T wen tieth E xercise. Instr umental Rassi\'e Middle Voice. Conjugation . Twenty·First Exercise. Local Passive Middle oice. Co njugation . '.Pwenty·Second Exerqise. Use 0 the Verbal Parfiicle U1i! Twenty Third Exercise . . Use of ~he Verbal Particle Um (co ntiuued). Twen t~.Fourth Exercise. Irregularities in the Coujugation of Um Verbs. Con jugation. Twenty ·Fifth Exercise. Use of the Verbal P arti cle Mag . Twenty-Sixth E xercise. Use of the Verbal Particle Mag (continued). Twenty~Se venth Exercise. Use of the Particle Pag iu the Passive . Twenty·Eighth Exercise. Use of th e Verbal P article lila. Conjugation. Twenty·Nin th E xerci se. The Partici'p le. Thirtieth E xercise .. The Past Particip le. 'rhilty·First Exercise. In Passive -Mea ning and Use Thirty·Second Exercise. . Y Passi ve -Meaning and Use Thirty·Third Exerci se. An Pilssive-Meaning and U e . Thirty.Fourth Exercise. The Proper Use of either Voi ce of Ihe Verb . Thirty Fifth E xercise Modifi cativ e Verbal Padicle Man=Pan. Conjugatiou. Verbal Compounds. Thirty·S ixth Exercise

PAGES.

76 ·79 79 80·83 8384 8486 86·87 8798 99 99·103 103 103·107 107·108 108 114 114 114·118 118 119 119·127 127 123·134 134·135 135·138 138 139·141 141 141·146 146· 147 147·151 151 152·1 55 155·156 156·159 159 160·165 165 166170 170 170·177 177 178·1 82 183 183· 188 188· 189 189·194 19.1 194·199 199200 2()O·213 213214

LESSONS .

XXXVII.

XXXV III. XXXIX. XL XLI. X LII. XLIII. X LI V. XLV.

XLVI.

XLVII.

XLVIII. XLIX. L. Ll.

LIf . LIlI.

Ll Y.

TAB LE

OJ,'

PA GES.

C ONT E NTS.

Ca.

Modilicatiye Verba l Pa rticle Macalila .

C (jU '

jugation . Thirty·Seventh E xercise. Mod ificatiY e Verba l P a rti cl M(tgp(t= Pa. CO ll jugation . Thirty.Ei gh tb Exercise . Modifi catiYe Verba l P a rticle lIi a'llli= Pa'lni COll jtlgation. A ng , At Thirty Nint h E xercise CO llModificativ e Ve rba l P a rticle Pa= Pa . jugation . Ana. Fortiet h E xercise. ModificatiYe Verbal Particle Magra= Pagca. Con· jugation. B agall, B arF) ' F orty·F irst Ex ercise. Modificat i\"e Verba l Parti cle llI ag!iin=PafJnin . Conjngation . Gaya, Colin. Forty-Second E xercise. Mo.dificatiYe Ye"bal P a rti cle Magsi = Pallsi. 'o n· jugation. Casi, D i, Dil';, Dina, iJiJon. Fo rty·'l'hird Exer<~i se. Mod ifi cativ e Verba l Particle lJiag,<a= Pagsa. Oon· jngati on . loii, l aao, ~lrin, l nl !, L aoi. Fo rty Fonrth Exercise. . . . . Modilicutive Verba l Pa.rtiole M(m hi = Panhi. Oon· jugation . L ~ob, Oeol, 1'0110, (Juilti = Cala. Forty FifLh Exercise. Modificative Verba l P article

i 1-1,·:&2 1 221 222 230 231 231·236 236·237 237 ·2-1,5 2-1,5·2-l6

i 46·25 1 i5 1·252 252-258 258

i5!)· 26;! 263 263269 :&7U 270·277 27i

Magpaea;:~:.aea.

Conj ugati on . Saan, Smw . 27i 2 3 F orty ·Si xth E xercise. 283·28-1, Modifi ca tive V erbal Pa rticle lIl(lgpali=P agpali. Co nju gation . Sila, I i!Jft, S,icat. 2 4·290 F orty·Seventh Exercise . 2\) 0 Mod ifi cative Verbal P a rti cle Ma..rJca})(t= Pagea]1a Conjuga tion. l 'abl, Tagll. l 'alayrl. T amblng. 291·295 F orty Eighth Exercise 2!l6 Modifi ca tive V erba l p a tti ·I e lIi agcan=Pagcan . Conju gati on . Tap ai, Tita, l 'u/oy, Ton.geul. 297·30 1 Forty.Nintb Exerc i e. 30 1·302 T he Gerund . Toni, Utdft, Yari. 302·306 Fiftieth E xercise. 306 307 Use a nd Intercha nge or Ten es. 307 ·311 F i fty·F irst E xe rcise. 311·312 Verba l P ec u l iuriti o~. Diminutive Vorbs. 312·3 18 F i fty ·S co nd E xe rcise . 318 Use o f Nany I\Jld Sa iu tlt e Ol'j ectil' e Cuse. 3 19·322 Fifty.Th ird E xercis . 3 :2 2·3 ~ 3 T he Adv erb . AJ verbs or ~j u ll n(' \' . PI Ile-e, a nd Tim e. 1l23·32fJ Fifty·Fo urth Ex r(·ise. 3t!l ·330

LESSONS.

LV . LVI. L \' II.

LvnL LIX. LX. LXI. LXU . LX[lI. LXI\'. LXV. LXVI.

Lxvn. LXVIII. LXIX. LXX, ApPENDIX . INDEX

THE TAG ALOG

LANGUAGE .

The Adv orb. Adycrbs of Degree and Affirmatiou, Negative aud Dubitative Adverbs. F ifty·Fifth Exercise. The Preposition . Fifty·Sixth Exercise. The Coujunction . Copulative, Adversative, Al· ternative, Causative, Conditional, and Illative Co ujun ctions Fifty·Seventh Exercise. The InterjecLion . Fifty·Eighth Exercise. ' Recapitulation of Particles. An and Ca. Fifty Ninth Exercise. Recapitulation of Particles. In, lYla, and ~1J![aea. Sixtieth Exercise. . Recapitulation of Pal'ti cles. ]J:[ag , Man, and ]Jtlapag. Sixty·First Exercise. Reca pitulation of Particles. Pa, Pag, Pagea, Pala, and Pan. ixty·Second Exerci1\e. Reca pitnlation of Parlic/es . Pinaea, Sang, Tag, Taga, Tig, aud Y ea. SixtY·Third Exercise. How to Express Ideas not Haviug Nati ve 'rerms. Sixt Fourth Exercise H ow to Express Ideas uot Having Native Terms . (continued) . Sixty·Fifth Exercise. Figures of Diction . Paragoges, Epethenses, In· versions, and Con tractions Sixty Sixth Exercise. Syntax-Regimen. Sixty·Seventh Exercise Syntax-Coustruction of Senteuces Sixty·Eighth Exercise The Colloquial Language Sixty.Ninth Exercise. The Ligaments • Seventieth Exercise. Proverbs. Reading and Translating Exercise.

P AGES .

330333 333·334 334·337 337338

338·346 346·347 347·31)0 350·35 1 351 ·356 356·357 357·362 362·363 363·3 ',7 367 36837 L 37 1372 372375 375376 37638-1, 3843 5 R86391 391·392 392·397 397 397·-1,06 406 4064L7 ,417 4L 7·421 -1,21·422 -1,22·-1,26 -1,26·427 429·437 438. 4-1,8 449

PREFACE. The trcatise herouy submitteu to tho judgment or the public, though ushered in as the second edition of that published in 1902, might, howevec, be properly termed a nell' book. The title excepted, there is scarcely a chapter of the former edition which was not changed or recast in tbe present one. Without materially changing tbe former general plan, all unnecessary or clumsy matter has been discardeCl, while some nell' and. we believe, interesting material has been added. This will be found to be more particularly the case with the Introduction, Orthography, and Prosody, each of which has been entirely rewritten; with the Syutax, which is entirely new and constitutes the most important addition; and witb the alphabetical index, which has also been added, and which renders the treatise valuable as a book of reference. In answer to those who may feel inclined to find fault with the present edition for not being more condensed thau the prfl vious one, we have to say that this has been done on purpose. If a treatise of a language which, strictly speaking, has neither dictionaries nor other literature\ is to fulfil its mission, it must be grammar, dictionary, and litera~y work at the same time. When the peculiar character of the language and the age and class of persons most likely to undertake it study are taken into account, certaiuly, the 0111y sllccessful way ei tber to present the language adequately or to assist the student materially, is to put forth a treatise which will be comprehensive enough to cover the field which a paucity of literature has len uncovered. We are conscious, however, that the validity of tile preceding statement will not be well perceived a lJl'iol'i, and we will abide by the opiniou of dissenters ONLY AFTER THEY HAVE ACQUIRED THE LANGUAGE. The author has here to acknowledge hi s obligations to Rev. A. E. Chenoweth, M. A., of the Methodist Publishing House in this city, au eamest Tagalog student himself, for hi s generous and valnpble assistance i!l going over the manuscript, and in revisin g the final proof路sheets and offering such suggestions and making such chauges as were required to briug the book np to its present improved shape. In a word, neither pains nor expense hal'e been spared to increase the usefulness and typographic correctness of the issuo which is now offerd to the public, and with this predication tbe author throws himself on the mercy of his readers.

Manila , P . 1.. SepLcmbel', 1900.

)

INTRODUCTION. The language which the following pages purpose. to illu . trate is that spoken by th.e F.ilipinos oE Manila and surround~ng pr~vll1ces, extending in every directIOn from what IS called the Provll1ce 01 Rlml, to th e North, through the central and northern parts of tbe ~rovillce of ilulacan, into that oE Nueva Ecija; to the ea t and northeast, II1tO the districts of Infanta and Priucipe on the Pacific noast; to the west. across Manila Bay, into the Province oE Bataan; and to the south, throucrh the extensive tract occupied by the provinces oE Cavite, Lagu~a, Batangas and Tayabas. This lan guage is known as the Tagalog, a denomination whi ch distiuguish es it from the lbano g. Paugasiuan, Pampangan, IIo ca no and Bicol, the names of the oth er five 'p rin ci pal vernaculars spoken, in their respective districts, by the remaining portion of th e Christian population of the Island of Luzoll. Outside Luzon, Tagalog is al 0 ~poken in the adjacent islands of Mindoro and Marinduqu in the China Sea, and in Polillo and some other minor islets in the Pacific. Its inrluence may also be noticed more to the SOQth in the speech oE the inhabitan t of th e islands which form what is known as the District or Subprovince oE Romblon , which ar reckoned, geographically and politically, as belonging to the Bisayan group. On the I.sland oE Luzon, the languages adjacent to Tagalog are approximately as follows: On the northernlUo t border of Nuel' u Ecija is found' the Ibanag or Cagaylln, a dialect more or les mixed with llocano, which is spoken throughout the provinces of Nueva Vizcaya, lsabela and Cagayan. In th e samc direction, but somewhat to the west, is met the Ilocano, spoken in the eastern halE of Pangas in an and on north throughont the .provinces of Union, Ilocos Sur and Norte, and somewhat throngbont Benguet and the other mountain provinces. On the west of Nueva Ecija, Tagalog encoun ters to somo .extent the Pangasinan dialect, ~poken in tbe western half of the province of the same name and, more or less , ill tbe northern part of Tarlac province. Coming s(lOth along th e we tern lille of Nueva Ecija aud also on tbe same side of Bulaclin, the Pam pangan is met, which is almost exclusively the dialect of the province of that namo, and also extends up into the s6uthern Ii alf of 'rarlac province. To the southeast of Manila, Tagalog euconnters th e Bicol, spoken throughout the provinces of Ambos Camarines, Albay and Sorsog6n. The delimitation of tbe language boundaries of Tagalog, especially to the north of Manila, can be mnde with but very sInall degree of precision, in view of the numerous cases oE its encroachment into the territory of otber dial ects, 01' of other dialects into its own Tbus, along the banks of the water course kn own as "Rio Grande de la Pampanga," where it flows througb the province of the same name, it would be difficult for a stranger to say whetber Tagalog or Pampanl!:lu IS tbe vernacular, as natives know and nse indiscriminately tb e one and tbe othel路. On the other bano, Pampangan is spoken m路doors by many a native family in southern Nu eva Ecija, whil e there are e \' n mUllicipa~ities ill the same province, as tbat of Sail Juan de Guimba, anel p~rtLDlly that of Aliagn, wbere, owing to anciellt settlements of

IV.

THE TAGALOG LANGUAGlt.

people fro m 11ocos, Ilocano comes to be th e prevailing tongue. At the present time, also, Ilocanos are settling all over the northern portion of Nueva Ecija, and thus their tongue may come to be the prevailing one over this part of the province. On the southern boundary, a remarkable instance of the encroachment hy Tagalog is fomid in its beil1g spoken in and about the townships of Mambulao and Paracale of the Province of Camarines Norte, and, therefore, far into the juris· diction of the Bico!. '1'he gold mines with which the district abounds attracted, from the earliest times of Spanish rul e, a current of immi· gration of people from '1'ayabas, more especially from the town of Lucban, who co mmunicated their language to their descendants and the other inhabitants. Beyo nd its natural bounds, Tagalog is und erstood by every native oE average education throughout the Islands. Although the people of whom Tagalog is the vernacular, the T\lgals, as they are called, are essentially one and the same race with the other sections of th e Christian native inhabitants of the Archipe1ago, still they form, however, the most energetic and cultured portion of the whole population, live in the most thickly populated district, and their language is th e most euphonious, the most homogeneous and the most developed by contact with Spanish and the other Philippine tongues. Shortly befo re the colhlpse of the Spanish rule over th e Islands, the Tagals dame into special prominence by their uprising in 1896 , f~ ll o.wed by. outbr6{lk~ "v:hic.h ,almost amounted to a permanent sta~e o[ lIlsu rrectlOn agaInst theIr rnlers. After the collapse; by their marching in military array through the territory of the other provinces; by their es tablishment of the Filipino Republic· at Malolos, which at once ass umed control over all Luzon; and by subsequent fighting against th e Aimericans; the Tagals secured a political pre· dom inance over the othe r sections of the country which they still retain to a large extent, and which is so mewhat similar to tha t which, diffe rence of race as ide, the Bu~is of Celebes, th e Kayall3 of Borneo, aud th e H ovas of Madagasca r exercise over the other trib es of those islands. When, the rebellion having been suppressed, the principles of Ameri ca n ru le were allowed free play, Tagalog journalism and litem· ture were bro ugh t into existence to such !In extent that, although not contribnting to the purification an d ' stability d the language, nevertheless did largely co ntribute to its diffusion, so that tbe Tagalog has come to be almost the only public vehicle for conveying the This diffusion is . still further promoted by tpe native thought. language baving its natural seat and place of cult1vation in Manila, th ~ .Capital of the Arch ipelago, where J,here are centered all the pl'lnclpal official bureaus, Gove l'l1ment and private institutions, and other business establishments which draw large crowds of professional men, stud ents and business people from all other sections of the Islands; people who, on fiudiug th eir local tongues superseded by Tagalog in th e. transaction oE th eir business, carry back along with them into tbelr respectiv e provinces a disposition whi ch is as the germ which wIll make Tagalog soon to become the quasi official native language from Aparri to Zamboa nga. :Accordiug to the census of 1903, the populAtion of the prov o . ID ces Il1 Luzon and of the other Islands in which Tagalog is th e vern acu lar, amo unted to 1,460,000, a fignre neither surpassed nor el'en reached by any other dialect of those spoken in Luzo n. The ' language spoken by the Christian population outside .Luzon,

lNTRODtlC'fION.

Marinduque and Mindoro is, with the exception of those spoken ill the Babnyan and Snln g roups, known by the generic term of Bisayan, a designation, however, which is geographic rather than linguistic. Here, it is true, a greater popu lation is encountered, numbering over three million people; but if the matter is viewed from the standpoint vf the unity of language, and the fact is taken into consideration that the differences of Bisayan AS it is spoken in Samar or Romb lon, and the same as spoken ill Cebll or Mindanao are in some cases greater than those which we find between Pampangan and Tagalog for instance, there may be even some reason for proclaiming Tagalog as the language most widely spoken in t he whole Archipelago. The term tagalog is by natives applied equally to the people and to ,he language, and, naturally, offers to the mind the suggestion of what its origin may hav 3 been, a point which hitherto has, by no means, been established. The difficnlty of ascertaining the real origin of the terms by which the races an'l tribes inhabiting this part of the world are designated, may be seen in the barren discussion en tered into, and different opinions rendered by so high auhorities on all matters or the Malay Archipelago as Marsden, Crawfurd, Abbe Favre and others, about the origin 9f the words malaYI~ aud jawi, 01' rath er bahasa ma o laylt and bahasa jawi, as applied to the Malay lauguage. The 拢hilippine philology CRnnot boast of such em inent champi ons nor could it have had reCOUl'se te any histori c or literary sou rces for its materials, and, unabl e to do oth&rwise, it made the structure of the term, and its su posed meaning in rolation to certain 10cIIl circumstances, the basis for th e theory of the origin of the word. From this diving into the waters of the' gmmmati cal pond of the langu age, tagrilog has emerged as a contracted compound, fOl'med with the prefix tfJga, main'y used in forming compound nouns indicative of the placo of birth or residence of any person, a nd the noun ilog, " riv er;" thus, taga路ilog contracted to tagalog , meaning 路" natives from the river, " "borderers;' in reference, it seems, to the Pasig riv er on the banks of which a large portion or the people speaking th e language, lives. Des pite all analogies of form and locality, it is however very doubtful that this may be the rea l origin oE the word. It is true that the two components taga and ilog ex ist in the language with the above mentioned import, but it is difficult to see any reason why they should combine in s~ch an anomalous way for a designation of this kind. Although the sold ering of a prefix and a root into a compound is frequently attended with syncopation and other phouetic changes at the point of contact, we fail, however, to disco ver a sinl1:le instance in which th is takes place with the prefix taga, either in Tagalog or in Bicol where taga is used not only for the same pUl'pose as in the former, but as a verbal particle as well. In point of signification , we find taga neve l' applied to the root ilog I1S a term of general designation for peo ple living about any other water course over the Islaqds, as we naturally might be led to expect from the well known habit of Filipinos and generally I"ialays of settling along the banks of river? and streams The roots having a significa tion more or less connected with that of i log, to which taga is applied, are: 1Jangpang, clalampCt.sig=da1ampasigan, "bank;" ba.llbay=baybctyin, "beacb; " holo, "head," beginning of a river; ilaya, "upland," "and generally that tract of land lying in tbe direction of the source of any wat er course;" and !!allli, "bur," "the point wh ere n I'il'e l' cntpl's into t.lI C sea." It may be, and is frequently said: tagal'angpallg, tagatiuittllgp(ioig = tagad,,'allgpasiga1lo,

TFIE TAGALOG LANGUAGE, VI. tagabaylJ1iy=tagaoayoayin, tagai/ayCL an,l tag'!uauu, to designl1Le people issuing from, 01' resid ing at, some o[ the pla?es Indicated by the l1bove ro?ts; but th e genius of th e language shows Itself averse to the launclll,ng forth of the compound (((galing, refusing, so to say, to recognize the river as aEEo-din g the basis for the building , of any expression ha ving an~, tbing; to no with birth 01' residence thereat, It may per路 haps be all eged, with apparent good reason, that the language has th e compound tagal'agat, "seaman;" from dagat, "sea;" which , seems to co ntradict the above sta tem ent; but we are here on another grouud and <lne showing the use of the prefix for a different purpose, namely, th~t or formiug frequentatilre nouns indicative of the person engaged III a trade for a mouey consid erati on, Tb e sense in taga1'agat is not, th erefore, one in reference to the desceut 01' residence, but one of life路support, and one whi ch refers to th e person as engaged in the sea.faring business for a sl1lary, or as living on tbe products of the sea. The lauguage offers num erous compo unds of the same kind with rooLs expressing various ways of getting a living, Among many others, menti on is here made on ly of tagapagbantay, "sentry, " "watchman; " from bantay, "to watch;' tagap ag aing, "cookman," "person in charge of tbe boiling of rice for food." Tagalog being, for purposes of philological research, merely an oral la :lguage a nd tbe Philir:lpines having only been brought to light by discovery and ll.onquest with in comparatively recent times, no direct testimony, of co nrse, ca n be adduced in evidehce for the elucidation of the rigin of bhe nam es borne by tbe various tribes found liv ing therein; but we may, h wever, in the absence of any oth er路 bistoric data, assume with some degree of confidence tbat if the term tagft log weI' ever deriv.ecl hom tagailog in the sense of "borderers," or "people settling along tbe bunks of a river;' there would not be wanting some tradition recorded by the ea rly Spanish friars as to intercourse with tbeir similarl y designated neighbors, the tagapamng, "those of tb e plain;" tagaMq!~id, " highlanders;" etc., or th e same tribe, as tbere exist records of tbeir , fends and qnarrels Nor is tagalog or tagailog in with Pam pangans, Pangasinans, etc, thi s sense a geogru phi ca L designation wbich might not ha ve been ~pp lied with equal propriety to the same or any other people living IU ana logo us cond iti ons of locality throughout the fslands, Th e hyp oth esis, tben, built for explaining tbe origin of this ~ame does not see m to be founded on any solid grammatical, trad, .ltlOllal, or geographi cal ground, It ~eems ratber tbe res ult of ern路 ploying only tb~se means at hand prompted by the exigency of giving mom e n~al''y so lutlO~ to, a dIfficult question, thus avoidiLlg tbe trouble, 01' palliating th e inability, of searching elsewbere, ' Beyond this patcbing oE the diffi culty, no otber researches tbat we are. aware of hal'e ever been made public, either to strengthen or to rectify or am end what, in all probability, is an erro neous derivation, and the qu estIOn seems insolvable or one that will baffle all efforts to solve i~ with on ly the means afforded by the resonrces at bOlDe. It IS, only when going into the geograp hy and bistory of tbe Malay AJ'chlpelag~ that th,e possibility offers itself to tbe mind of the ~ord taga/o.') bavlDg been received h'om Java, 'rhe terlDs for "dry fI eld culture," and "field," in the Javanese and Malay languages are, t,agal and o,rna, The expression tagal'yuda for "battle field' occurs frequently ,In, ,Jav,anese literature, Tagal is 11lso found in Tagalog ~'Itl~, tbe, sl/l:Ul flCatlon "permanency," "persisting," "endul'UDce," "last, lUg; WhICh, notWithstandillg it~ dissilllilarity with that it has in tbe

VII.

INTRODUCTION .

original languages, may. however, hav e som ethiu g to do with th e point here at issue. Omct is found , both ill Bico l aud in 13itsyan, with The suffixing of 09 exactly the same signification of " ri ce fi eld ," shown by the Tagalog corresponding word seems to be agreeabl e to the genins of tbe Janguage in bOlTowing from th e Javan ese. rrh e cases are num erous in whi ch (b e Javan ese term is tu gali zed with this mild guttural append age, whi c h, fro m th e frequ ency with which it is found ending genuin e lo gal og word s, we may , (bus fa r, regard as an euphonic terminot:on peculiar to tb e lan g ua ge. Tbe fo ll ow in g is a Ji st of some J a l'anese word s to whi ch th e ending 09 or 9 bas been eith er ad ded or su bs titn ted for th e fi nal COnSOn!lllt on tbeir being ad opted in to T agalog '1'he signifi cati on not otherwise indicated, is the sam e in both la ng nages . JAVANESE.

Layar. Tum. Kapur. Nul'. P a i1u. 'fana. Tabur. Timur.

(East).

TAGAL OG.

Layag. Ttilog. Apog. NlOg. Pago ng. T a noug. Sabog. Tim og. ( outh).

SrON rFr CATlo N.

Sail o f a sh ip. To slee p. Lim e, calx. Cocoa nut. A ki ng of tortoise. T o in q ui re. T o s!:utter .

That th e people oE Ja va were accus tomed fo r cen turi es to sail forth in parties for predatory or s ettlin ~ [imposes to th e other I sla nd s of tbe Malay Archipel ago, tbat th eir fleets even so met im es set a t defiance those of Purtllgul in th e days of th e prep onderan ce of thi s little kingdom, (1) are events noted by Ma rsdcn in h is History of Sumatra and by oth er hi stori a ns of tb e Archi pelago. In conn ecti on witb these migrations and expediti ons, Crowfurd (2) meuti ons a number of J avanese uam cs wbi ch were g iv en by th e emi g ratin g parties to the places of their settl ements or po ints of call about tu e Archipelago, and he says tba t th ese even extend, a nd may be traced , to tbe Philippines. Som e of th e na mes a re tak en from Javanese geograpby as, for inslan ce, .lIlatamm, tb e na mo of a provin ce in Java, which we find • tra nsferred to tb at of a place in th e Island of Lomboc; others refe r to saLUe local circnm sta nce cOlln ected WIth th e art of navigation, a3 in the case of L ctb,.than,aj i, in th e same i IUlld which in Javanese means "King'S an chorag ." Nam es a re eyon ro und which are commemoratory of the e vent of tb ese etll emenls as t hat oE Kutajawa; "Javanese castl es;" at th e rivers of Dili a lld ASllh a n Oil the north·eastern coast of Sumatril, at the lirs t of whi ch, according to Crawfurd, a colony of fiv e thousand perso ns 0 tublishod itse lL In the Philippilles we find as of pro babl e Javull e e ori g in , "010" (the Spanish Jolo) wbich is in Java th e original ll ume of tb o pl aco which is now Su rakarta, or perhaps th e Javan ese aud Malay worJ slIltdt, a torch; and a lso the word n i/a, from tb e Sall skrit nila, "bJuc," "indigo; " in reference to the nnm o .lIIctynila, " Manil a;" may, the urst (I) .Tollo de Barra., cited by Cra wford •• tloe mo.t authenti c snrt intelligent of a ll tbe PortuKuese hi.toriaD. of 11 di •. d., cribe. tloe JIlvnoes e e xpedition ng.ilt.~ Molaec_, in J8nltory of 1613. aCIlrcely three yoa ra alter it s cspttne by AllJllquerclue, as conai.tiD g of nothing le3s tbaD 1:.1.UOO meo with muc b arLiliery. (2) G rammar and Dictionary of tue Malay Language. Dieeer(qUon, palles COLXXXI-ll.

VIII.

THE TAGALOG

LANGUAGE.

syllab le, being the Tu galog equi valen t fo r "to ha vO," which, as in the case of Mayilibig, May cauayun, etc. , rende rs self路 explunatory all com路 pounds of th is kin d. . ' . Seeing the fr equency WIth whICh Javanese ?OIOOl sts transferred names of places in their own island to .those of th eIr sett.lements B;broad, one feels even inclined to look to th e word T alaga, a corrupllOn of the Sanskri t tal'aga, "a pond;" which is the name of a district in .Java, as affording also the possibility of having given rise to the term tagalog . Wh at in some degree seems to lend support to this hypothesis is th e presence, in th e pa rt whICh we may regard as the home of t'agalism and not fa r away from the Capital of the Ar?hipelago, of such an extensive lJoncl as th e Lake of Bay may he conSIdered to be, whi ch matches well with th e original signification of the word. The transposition of the last syllable as seen in tagala for talaga is, in th e same way as th e appending of og which has been ~poken of in a foregoing paragra ph of this so me chapter, of frequent occurrence in th e tagalizing of Javanese words. Similar transpositions may be seen in the fo llow ing: Ja v. lidah= Tag . eli la, "tongue;" Jav . darihi= T ag. dali l'i , "fin ger;" Jav. topong= Tag. lJotong, "crown;" and in others. T he above data, of eourse, are not intended as conclusive evidence of th e origin of ta.qa/og , but only as a tentative effort made in honesty While it is readily to guess at the right deri vation of the term. admitted that f ur, he r research may disclose facts leading to theories at va riance with th e one here ex posed, . or oven furnishing us with absolute certainty, we, however, in the meantime and in view of the ap parent unreasonableness of the j?resent theory, may look, with some degree of assurau ce, 0 th e island of Java as the place of the origin of the wo rd. 'We are wi thout th e direc t means of ascertaining the antiqnity of Tagalog, but we may confidently aSSlJme that it is of a very remote origin, nay, if what is predi cated of it in this sketch proves true, one far more remote t han Malay, perhaps even more than Sanskrit. What seems even more probable is that it did not originate with the No original monuments, inscriptions 01' race that now speaks it. an y other written records being here available, we must have recourse to circumstantial evidence in estimating the epoch of this origin What spea ks already in fa vor of a high degree of antiquity, according to the standard of Malay philology, is the presence of word s tak Ella from th e K awi, the ancient la nguage of Java. Kawi (1) words are more numerous in Tagalog than perhaps in any other language of th e Malay Archipelago, the Javanese exoepted; but it IDay be obj ected that th ey have been imported through the latter language at a later period . That this is generally the case, and that Javanese was th e larges t recipient aud distributor of the Kawi lexical !nheritance! is not here deni ed. The facb, however, of Tagalog having, ID some ID stances, ' borrowed from the original source is proved . by such Kawi words as pa a, "leg' a nd "foot, " the Sanskrit pada, from th e Kuwi padha; olap, "cloud;" from lokap, "cloud; ' #g68, "h.eart," "core," from tyas, "heart.; ' and others which are not found in Ja vanese. Among tbe Kawi words common to the two languages, ay{.w, "refu sing," " caring not," "not choosing;" affords a proof of (ll The word cau-i, corresponding in orthography to that of kawi, is found r.Juan de Noce~~'s Sp~~i8h-TRgRlog lJictionary (see page f8, edit. 1860) with the qengonza, Jargon. There can be no doubt that here the real kawi ~peech IS meant, clothed with a signification which agrees well with the poor notice which the author, no douht, had of that Javanese language. .

~eaDing

lx.

INTRODUCTION.

1'agalog having drawn words directly from the K awi and not from t,he Kawi throuO'h the Javanese. Uuder the orlhogr~phical scope aud phonetic character of the two lauguages, ayllo agrees, both iu form alld signification, more with the kawi ayu/Oct. Had it been imported from modern Javanese it would have, tb en, to appear shaped more iu accordauce with the form ctjtt in which ay!l1ua is found in the latter. The opinion of Humboldt, bearing on the point of the clo e relation of Tagalog with that ancient dead language of Java, as given in his work "Ueber die Kawi-Spracbe aut del' In sel Java," may fiud here adequate place. "'1'be non San hit portion (of the Kawi) agrees in the most wonderful manner with the T aga log o[ the Philippines. This accord will not be fouud to consist in merely general grammatical relations only, but goes deeper iuto the thought-castiug methods of the people." (2nd book, page 28) He eveu ventures the hypoth esis of a possible derivation of tbe structure ot Ju\ranese from Tagalog, which is by no meaus improbable (1). .\t any rate, be is autbority for the statement that Tagalog is "the most perfect living specim~n of tbat Great Malay Polynesian Language which is considered a the pareut stock from which all the other tongues ot th e Malay brauch have spruug." This may be true, but n ot perhaps in the sense intended by tht: great philologist, not, at least, until it is made clear how this "Great Malay Polynesian Language' is to be understood. It is not proposed here to di cuss rurther the inmaterial point of the autiquity oj. th e la nguage. 'l'agalog, it will be seen, consists, mainly, of an element clearly derived from Malay, and of another whi cl" not being traceable to any Malay source, Ir ay be regard ed as abo riginal. An attempt will he mad e further on in this outlook to collect in tables this falay aud all otber foreign elements so as to isolate the aboriginal oue, aud ther by render, by contra t, its respective office in the languaue more mani fest. In the comparison with each other and with other foreign tongues, such theories will be advanced and such data adduced in ev idence to show how these various elements came to be soldered into a compact frame, as, it is believed, to enable the reader to judge for himself of th e remo te origin of th e language. '1'he Malay race that we see inhabitiug, bcsides the poniusula of this name in the southernmost extremity of the A iatic continent, the vast insular region from Madagascar in the wes t to Easter Island in the east, New tJ:uinea excepted, and from Hawaii and Formosa in the north to New Zealand in the south, appea ls to our minds as one that must Iiaye >lc~omplished great deed in th e remote past. If we only pause to consider that th e conqu est aud possession or the illlmeuse insular extension which the race, almost exclusively, now occupies and holds, subject to fore ign yoke, is the work of t.he Malay effort, we must at once concede to these people so me or the ability and daring which, in historic tiLD es, have made other maritime peoples great. We may imagine the remote ancesto rs of the present Malays coming forth in swarms from tbe llLlknown confines of their cradleland in Asia and spr-eading themselves over th e adjacent islands of the archipelago to the almost complete elimi nation of th e aborigina l inhabitants, possibly by extermination of the latter in their own hom es, or, perhaps, by driving them away and Jocking them up in that (1) Nimmt man daB hier Geasgte Zllsamrnen , BO ~cb6i nL uarauB 8U [olgan, dass das Jav. urBprt\oglich Beinen ForlDeDbau VOID Tag. nb teitete. (ard. bOOk, page 322),

. THE TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

Papuan stronghold of New Guinea; and then. a~ain onw~rd and onwllrd , in every directi on, . over the vast PaCl~c IOto .the mnumerable islands of the MICroneSian and the PolynesIan archIpelagos, nay, perhaps oven into the American contin ent itself. When the distance is measured from Sumatra to Madagascar, and from there to Easter Island and Hawaii, covered by these people in their ranges over such a vast extension of sea, wit~ th e v~l'y im pe rfect means we tunst snppose they possessed at a perIOd leavlDg no traces in history nor auy traditions among the race; when the extent of skill and human labor put forth for the enterprise is fathomed, and th e indomitable spirit and length of time which must have been required fo r the adventure and its execution in so vast a scale are considered, it is impossible not to feel admiration for tb e peo ple that accomp lished this grea t exploit. Nor can he doubt路 ed the capacity wbich the race once exhibited for improvement, wben we consider to wbat high degree it imbibed and carried out Hindoo civi li zation in q ui te historical times, as shown by the numerous inscriptions and temple ruins over tbe Island of Java, more especially tbose of Brampanam, Gun om Prau, and Borobodo, of whicb Wallace, in its reference to the latter, says: (Wallace, 'rbe Malay Archipelago, page 81) "The amount of human Jabor and skill expended on the Great Pyramids of Egypt si nks into insignificance when com路 pared witb that :r,equired to complete th is sculptured hill-temple in the interior of Java;" whi le, e n the other hand, sparks of the primitive energy may partially be seen in later times in the co urage with which the now almost baroarous Acheenese tribes of th e north of Sumatra, in the . 16(路h century, bid defiance to, nd threatened to everthrow the establisbments and the maritime power of Portngal in this pad of the world . ' . But the race is now on the wane, fai nt with cxhaustion after the gigantic effort, and seems to have lost in compactness as much as it gained in expansion . Such a profound observer of the Malay character as Marsden, calls attention to the fact of the race's decline in the following terms: (See History of Snmatra by Marsden) "Malays have an appearance of degeneracy. They seem rather to be sinking into obscurity, tbough with opportunities of improvement, than emerging to a state of civil 01' political im portance." There can be little doubt that Malays, with their present aversion to work and nonchalimt disposition, and their imperfect notion of honor and equity are rendering even more precarious the inferior position they hold among the other races with which they live in the same territories their forefathers conquered with personal effort and which the latter occupied as masters. The intellect and capacity of Malays fo r the acquirement of knowledge seems, on the whole, rather deficient. They are hright in yo?th and show a ready disposition for imbibing knowledge which chlefly?epends on memory, and fo r the practice of many manual arts; but thIS early acuteness and quickness of mind ceases with them and th~y become mere ant~matons, incapable alike of improvement and ~Istake, at an age wblch finds other races still adva ncing toward a higher develo.pment of both mental and physical ability. Even. III that part of the Malay A rchipelago where the race has come Illto esrly contact with more advanced nations, Malays have sh0.w~. tbemselves jncap~ble, not only of maintaining the standard of the clVIilzatlOO thus acqUIred, but of preserving such historic relics

INTRODUCTION.

XI.

of same as would have created among tbe:n a strong traditional race spirit and formed a nucleous of feeling to serve AS a basis for future national life. They eveu lost all trad ition of tbe two greatest monuments of Hindoo civilization, the Kawi language, depositary of all the history and literature of the nation; and the temples of Buddha, tbe only records found of a past Javanese graudeur. Raffles (according to Humboldt's testimouy), (1) in 1 17, could find only one person in the Island who knew something of tbe language. And it was not until 1797 thAt a Dutch eugineer, detailed to construct Il. fort, discovered those architectural temple ruins in the ueighbourhood of Brambanam, so deeply were they covered with vegetation. Not ouly in Java do we find tbe same insoucianc~ of the race, but everywhere else. Tbe Malay islander may, on some particular occasiou, by irresponsihle impul se, run amuck and perpetrate tbe most atrocious acts or do the greatest feats of heroism; but, in tbe main, he is an impassive creature. This, witb the geueral absence of vigorous thought and strongly marked tend encies in ilis cbaracter, and with a lack of sound orientation in his aspirations, makes him an easy prey of races which, while considered by him as inferior, are of much more aggressive and industrious disposition. Tbe confidence held by some in his alleged aptitude for selfgovernment seems to be misplaced when we see the assiduous care he b~stows upon his fighting cock, or his cLewing of betel, while he pays no attention til his crop being encroach ed upon or taken in payment of debts by tbe cunning Chinese merchant, or bis condemned property held up for sale by tbe sheriff, the Malay remaining apparently unconcerned in the whole transaction AS long as those cherished objects of his affection are not interfered wit . In the Philippines, where, by a policy which seems to be less wise than well· meant, the race bas been afforded the best opportunity for a display of its alleged native qualifications, the cases are frequent of either an utter failure in the realization of the expectations held , or of the turning of office-tenure into a channel of personal elation or in the display of that tricky disposition which, setting aside every regard for the public welfare in the discharge of official duties, seeks only the satisfaction of such racial prejudices an d individual inclinations as may be calculated to bring the race or the person into notoriety or undue prominence. Tb ere are, no doubt, instances of sound and couscientious discharge of duty, but it would be very bazardous to take this as conclusive evidence of the aptitude of the race. Despite all past and present training in tbe I slands, it seems, however, certain tbat the race cannot maintain its uuity as such against tbe tendency of tbe people for intermarryiug witb other races that cannot be incorporated into their own. At any rate, the study of the languages now in use ov,,1' the Islands seems to bear testi mony of the race's past ability and of (1) Obgleich aber das Kawi .ieh auC die.e Weise im Javaniechen Puppen.piele in lebendigem Gebrauch erhalten hat, so iet die ' eigentliche Kenntni •• des.elben doch auf der InspI al. erloschen anzoseben. Was bei den Puppenspielen herge.agt wird, ist dUTCh alte Ueberlieferun/l: auswendig gelernt. und eben.o die hinzogetugte Javanieche Ueber"elzung, so daCs der hersagende Dalang kaum etwas - .elhst davon zu veTstehen braucht. Dies muss wenigslens dara"s schlieesen. dass Raffies versichert, dass zu seiner Zeit nur ein ein "i~es Individuum als der Spracbe wirklich kundig angeseben werden konnte. (0. d. K-S_ 8. d. I. J. 2nd. book, pages 6·7). Denn Raffles fand nUT einen ein zigen Mann, welcher im Stan de wa" den I). Y. (Brata Yuddba) au~zulegen. lind auch dieser mussle doch oft ZUf bIasseD Erratbung des Sinnes seine Zuflucht nehmen. (Td., 2nd book, page 201)

xn.

T HE T AGALOG LANGUA GE .

its present decline. T a(! alog, tbe one bere considered! show,s si~ns of a language in decay, onl y rescued f rom co mplete rulU b.y I::lpamsh, wbicb revived it by furni sbing it with n ew matter to thlDk upon, aud by tb e diligence of tbe Spanisb fr ia rs, who pi.cked it up from its grave, gave it the R oman characters, wro te out Its grammar, and made it known to t he world outside. (1) This may be inferred from the lack in i ts present system of certain co nsonants wh ich there is reaso n to believe once eXIsted, and from the di sappearan ce from tbe lang nage of a number of verb·building particle , the past existence of whicb is revealed by the fa?t of . tb elf being still found therein conglo merated with th e root, or ID theIr independ ent verb·building co ndi tion in oth er Philippine tongues. The langua ge bas onl y three fnnd a mental vowels whi ch, in pronun ciation, are expan ded in to fiye sound s by a process somewhat simil ar to that of th e guna in Sanskrit. 'fhe consonant system is fo nnd to consist of fiftee n sounds which may be thus classified: STRU NG. Gutturals Palatals Cerebrals Dentate Labia ls Semivowels Liquids Sibilant

c=k p u=w r s

MILD.

h g

d b y

NASAL.

ng n

The absence of f classes T agalog among the most developed langnages of thE: P h ilippines, fo r it is a well known fact that this consonant is on ly fon nd in the rnd er langnages of th e wild tribes and in the Ibanag. , The vowel and consonant systems th e languages combines well i nto syllab les of a distinct and agreeabl e souud, the strong and the mi ld labial, and tb e stro)Jg dental, at th e begino,ing of words and syll ab le" , combined wi th th e sha rp vowels a, i, tt, prevailing. The language forms, usually by incorporation in various ways of oue or mo re particles with a, generall y, di ssyllabic kernel or stem, a compoUlid wbich, besides embodyi ng th e radical siguifi cati on, adds some other accessory relation determ ining its grammatical offic e, or the part of speech into wh ich it shoul d be class ified. Sometimes, too, tb e word building power (1) In a ti me when lhe merits and servi ces, in tbis and otber respscts, of these early pioneers of ci vili zation in these lelands are belittled through ignorance or p rejudice, the autbor may be excused if be quotes bere the words in wbich Humboldt, for his com parison of tbe Javanese and the Kawi languages, greatlY' lamented not to fi?d ther e tbe valuable and abundant information he found in tbe works of tbe Spanish fnars, .... ,," und wenn man von Java so ausllibrliche und in. Einzelne gebende Kenntnl ss besilsse, als man de m sorgsamen Fleiss der Spanischen Missionare von d e ~ Di a l ekl . V e ~ehi ed enheinte n d el' Philippini schen Inseln, bis auf die Lauteigen. tb ll mhckellen elD zelner Orl scilaften herab, verdankt, so wlirde sich bierilber mit Gewis8beit ents beid en lassen ," (U, d , K·S n, d. L J., 2nd, hook, pages 2()()·201). And ~llT tber on, s peaking of tbe languages of Mada28scar and refuting Crawfurd'. tbeorte. , h e says: -auch Iller sind die F rilchte der GrOndlicbkeit und des unermlidlichen F leis.es der Spaniscben Geistlichkeit sichtbar. Ueherall wo sie im 17 und nocb ilD 18., Jahrh?ndert bei Ausse~·Europiliscben Nationen tblltig gewe.en ist, gieht es l~l\lfmlttel, die schon d arln elDen un8cb!ltzbarea Werth haben, dass sie alJemal elDen sebr g"ossen Tbeil der in den Spracben Iiegenden Tbatsachen entbalten, " (ard bOQk, page 2lfi),

INTRODUCTION.

till.

these pnrti eles goes far beyond the determination of the radical idea into such modifications of the original meaning as generally require the use of adverbs 01' qualifiers of the same kind in other languages. To the process of affixation, that of reduplication and of phonetic change are added, which seem to be' as the first steps taken by the language towards tbe acquiremeut of a defiuite inflectional cbaracter, or perhaps these are vestiges of its once having possessed a more developed one. '1'here is a particle set aside for the expression of the plural with nouns; also distinct number forms with the personal and the possessive pronouns, one dual, one inclusive and another exclusi.e; and again tbe process of reduplication, coupled with several others, with the interrogative and demonstrative pronouns, and, under certain circumstances, with tbe verbs as well. There is no inflection for gender, there existing only words in路 dicative of sex, but there is some reason to believe tbat the language had once a kind of inflection for personal nouns aud, in a certain sense, t()o, for the expression of persou with verbs. The verbal conjugative mechanism is of remarkable ingenuity and one, as far as our knowledge enables us to judge, not to be found it! any otber Malasian or Polynesian langnage. Voice is made known by particles annexed to the root, and tense is expressed by affixation coupled with permutation and reduplication, while mood is only indicated b楼 the use of directives 路 or prepositions or by the syntactical arrangement. The radical element contains no more substantive terms than a few which in iheir crude state may be classified as nouns, adjectives or verbs; but even in this thei primitive condition they may be, and are generally, confirmed in their respective characters by association with certain particles. There are few abstract nouns among the radicals, but the language affords the means of easily forming as many as may be required. The same radical element provides, either in a pure or in a ('ombined state, one article for common, and another for personal nouns; personal, possessive, demonstrative, and interrogative pronouns, and a large number of intensives and directives. The numerals as well as the system of numeration are mainly the same as in the other languages of the Malay Arch:pelago, from which, it is believed, they have been imported; but there is same reason to believe that tbe adop&ion of the one now in use superseded an ancient native system. '1'here is no substantive verb nor any well defined relative pronoun, but there exist 'varions ways of palliating these deficiencies, o~' it may be said that, within the peculiar character and structure of 'the language, such important elemeuts as th~se are not to jt as essential or necessary as they are to other languages. The syntax is free and well adapted for the precision of thought and musical cadence. Thl; loose and apparently rough pitched speech which we sometimes notice in the native talk seems rather attributable to ignorance, and laziness 'in the native mind than to any deficiency in the languA~e .

The logic with which the language proceeds in forming oompounds, may be seen in saan=sa+an, "where," from sa, "in," "~t," and an, "a su.ffix denoting place;" sma=si+ ana, "w.hol" from si, "the article of personal nouns;" and ana, "what?" anaman=ana+man, "what(so)ever," alit~路 man=alin+man, "which(so)ever," sinaman=sina+man, "who(so)ever," from, respectively, ana, "what?" alin, "which?" and sino, "who? ' and mati,

THE T AGALOG LANGUAGE. XIV. "tbough," "although;" etc. ,Vortby of menti'on also is the figurative sense found in the expression o[ certain abstract notions. Thus, from ittang, "debt," and Mob, iuward," the expression iltang-loob, for "gratitude," is formed; from bongii, "ft'uit, " "product,' and t6log, "sleeping, " bat/gang tOlog, " dream;' from paticl, "pwrting asund er, " "disuniting," and ca, "a prefix used in forming nouns of companionship and indicating one only of tbe parties, ' is fo rmed capaticl, "brother, " "one set loose of those that were tied with the same string.' There are other expressions of a knavish import as rnacati (mg eamay, literall y, "itchy hand," " hand affected with itch," for "petty thief, ' "pir.kpocket;' etc. and quite a number of enpb emisms for such things and actions as it would be indecorous to mention. Tbe language seems to have undergone little change for centuries. This uncbangeability may be explained , on one side, by that immutable cbaracter of all oriental institutions, and on the other side, by the small progress wh ich the people have maqe in civilization. No important change can be appr'lciated fo r the three centuries of which we are in possession of written specimens and other records, for th e first religious books composed by t he Spanish fr iars could well serve fo r the present day. The differences fo und in the langu9g~ of tbe Lord 's Prayer and otffier forms of prayer between the early and late editions are due chiefly to a better understanding of tbe native idiom and not to any bsolescence or archaism in tbe expression . Although the American occupation, with the boundless liberty it brought to every manifestation of the native life, did not fail to involve and revoluti@n ize the langHage, putting. it into the hands of the present innovators by whom iti is being converted into an almost unintelligible highly elaborate jargon, still we refuse to consider this as a practical and permanent move, as i ~ is not th e course tbat the language would take of itself if left to the good setlse of the common people. But with all th is apparent stationary cbaracter, th ere must have been an epoch, in a very remote past, when the Malay element now found in the language did not exist. Other changes must have taken plac,e at a later period which we can only presume by certain facts which tb e comparison with the other dialects spoken in the I slands discloses. We may confidently assume that th e palatal strong sound of th e English eh, as found still in th e words maehiln, " monkey;' hicho, "chewing betel; ' and a few other Tagalog, as well as in certain Bisayan words, and the palatal nasal of tbe Spanisb 1i, as still found in inyo and ninyo, "your(s)" (plural); were formerly more numerous in the language. We may also believe that th e palatal mild sound of the French j, as found in the Ibsnag, may once have been common to Tagalog. From the consideration of certain words in "the languages of ~adagascar which have corresponding ones in Tagalog, we may also mfer that the sound of v, now vanished, was used in many words and combinations now written with b. We may go back to a time when. the. language had not yet acquired the guttural sound of h, wantmg m the Ihanag, Iiocano, Panpangan and Pangasinan, and when 'm was i~ certain words replaced . by p, as shown by tlle present bihasa, :'tame;," m respect to the ancient m路ihasa. There w.as, no doubt, a time m wh tch l' was used in many words which we find now written with l, as the Bieol and Bisayan ol路an=Tag. ulan, "rain;" and LYJany other words, show. Tbe langQage shows also signs of having exchanged form er labial and liquid consonants fo r present nasal ones. That ?evelopment and permutation of consouant sounds is still going on lU the language, variatious of the following kind in oue and th~

xv.

INTRODUCTION .

same word seem to prove: lacom=sacom, "to clasp;" lampal=sampal, "to slap;' dilal=m{tlal, "to open the eyes; " igo=bigo, "to hit tbe mark;" saysay=salaysay, "to explain; " hintay ~iniay, "to wait;" etc. We are unable to determine whether the pluralizing particle in Tagalog, which is not found in the Ibanag, is a late acquisition in the IMter, or a rejection in the former language; but in so far as the particle exists neither in Malay nor in Ja\1aneSe, we may suppose that it has been handed down from the language oE the aborigines, a nd traces may also be found oE a change in the acceut being formerly resorted to for the expression of the pi ural. If we consider, as we ought to do, tbat Iloca no has not beeu developed to the same degree as Tagalog, we may tbink of a time iu the latter when th e verbal pasive suffix an, now almost entirely cenfined to iudicate place, was used to indicate botb place and cause, and that the prefix y=i was later applied to the latter purpose. Compare the sentence: " Why do you weep now?' in

and in

TAGALOG.

!LOCANO .

GAuia ti gapfJ ti paguibitnu ita?

GAnong ytinatangis mo ngay6n?

Of those moelificative prefixes which are as the exponents of the verbal signification, we may oonsider that taga and pam, for instance, still foun.? in the Bi col for expressing, respectively, the occasional, and the frequ'ent performance oE !In action , and the first of them also in Bisayan for the wearing of weapons aud oE pieces of personal apparel etc., were los to Tagalog together with others which, no doubt, once had a separate e istence and became later co nglomerated wi th the root. Of these latter he following seem to be some: PARTICLE

Ba (prefix). Hi do. Al (infix.). Tig (prefix). Tum do.

Baconot. Himatay. Salaua!. Tigmanoc. Tumbalic.

SIGNIFICATION

To be overwhelmed. To swoon away. Trowsers. Bird used for divining. To turn around.

These alterations, we may conjecture. have takeu place in the Malay period, that is to say, aCter the inEusion of Malay, and show the gain anel loss by the respective languages. The changes and other phases of langnage evolntion in that constitnent which is the primitive and most important portion of the fund contributed to the partnership which brought Tagalog to its present condition, we can only conjecture from certain tendencies in the langnage, and from such indications as mark the course of the development of speech in the human mind. The author finds himself greatly embarrassed, both on account of personal incompetency and of the complexity of the case, for a proper classification of Tagalog into one of th e three great families of languages into which modern philology has divided all forms of human speech, if he is to do anything more than mention the family into which it appears already classified, perhaps too hastily, everywhere in school books. When it is found that all the amount of talent and research hitherto employed have failed to give auy tolerable degree of stability, both in its nomenclature and rauge, to the present system; when the point has not yet been settled of whether the actual languages have all sprung from the same primitive source

THE TAGALOG LANGUAGE. XVI. a re of sporadic origin; and so great a confusion reigns as to the real meauing and scope of such wo rds as "inflectional," "agglutinative" and "monosyllabic," in reference to language; he may be excused for not making the atte mpt. H e only asks permission to introduce here a brief statement of the affin ities which he believes to have detected between Tagalog and those two bases ~f philological classifi~ation, the He?rew a nd the Sansk ri t Jang uages, leavmg the reader to classIfy the same, If he pleases, according to his particular theories, as Semitic or as Arian, or else to cast it into that AllOl'hJ/lian group which seems to have been created for the reception of all otber languages which are imperfectly known and in which Tagalog is included by philologists. As in Tagalog, so it is found in Hebrew that when the adjective is put before th e noun, there is a suppression of the substantive verb, or rather of the particle which in Tagalog may be said to stand for th e substantive verb. The comparative and, to a certain extent also, tbe superlative, are in both languages expressed in the same way. No true relative pronoun is found in either language. The nearest affinities of th e Tagalog verb seem to be with that of the H ebrew and other Semitic languages. The tenses in the two are only three, present, past, aud fnture. In Hebrew, as in Tagalog, the infinitive and the imperative are alike, the negative imperative is expressed by the fnture, and also sometimes the past tense. In H ebrew, too, th e participle refer!! to the three tenses of the verb. No real similarity, however, may be said to exist in the phonetic system, as no traces are found in Tagalog of the characteristic three consonant word-stem of the Semitic languages. Students of Hebrew, however, may find so e other affinities In the compariso with Sanskrit we find, in the phonetic system of the two languages, besides a syllabic alphabet, the three primary vowel sour'ds, the dipthongs ai and au, the absence of the short vowel a, the paucity of jj sounds and the prevalence of the sound a (ah). For the modification and expa)lsion of the sound . of certain vowels, Tagalog uses frequently what may be considere-d the Sanskrit gunation and wl'iddhition. In the cousonant system is fouud the allllSVara, which bears close resemblauce to the ligament or nasal ending peculiar to Tagalog. We may mention too, a kind of wl'icldhttion of the feminine Sa nskrit termination i in~() the Tagalog termination ay of feminine colloquial pretty names. A dual personal pronoun is also found in Sanskrit. '1'he possessive case of personal pronouns serves in both languages for the expression of the posses路 sives. The indefinite pronouns are, in both languages, formed from th e interrogatives by means of a suffix corresponding to the English "ever," "soever." Close resemblance exists also between the Sanskrit a路yam, i -yam, i路clam (is , ea, i cl in Latin) and thl3 Tagalog demon strative iyan, "that," "that Dear you." . The redup.!ication, which in Tagalog plays such an important role III the conjugative mechanism for discriminating the various tenses, is found also in Sanskrit used for one of the aorist forms with some verbs of the third class. We find, too, that the suffix in is !n .the latter .app!i,ed to some of t.he same various purposes to which It IS. appiJed In lagalo~. A s notICed by Humboldt, (1) the Sanskrit Ilommal verbs, to w.hICh class all Tagalog verbs belong, have a remarka?!e analogy wlt~ the Tagalog conjugative form. Flllally, we find 1D both languages the same great freedom iu the syntax.

(I)

U. d. K路S d. I. J., 2nd book, pege 367.

lNTRODUCrION.

XVII.

Of much greater importance for philology and ethnology, than the point of classification, is the question of the real derivation and origin of the language, and an attempt wi!! be made in this outlook to show that the theory of its Malay parentage, although coming from high authority, does not seem to be supported by facts, and that its origin seems to be traceahle to a far more distant source than the present habitat, or snpposed past cradle of the race. Tagalog has been described as a language in decay and such it is indeed; but, on the other hand, it is a lauguage of very noble ancestry and of great philological value for the elucidation of important points conuected with the question of population and race in this 'part of the world. This decay is not so much discernible in its present relative degree of impoverishment as in the manifold traces it show3 of a remote flourishing past. Everything seems to point back to a language of a high-grade structure and of great powel: and euphony, origiually spoken by a class of people who, as far as mental power can be measured by language structure, must have attaineu a high degree of civilization. Certain well ascertained affini ties found to exist in the languages spoken, with the exceplion of New Guinea, from Madagascar to Easter Island and Hawaii, together with tbe occupation of such a vast area by a kind of people who, for ethnological purposes, are practically one aud the same race, led to tho belief, or rather to the supposition, of thll existence or an ancient parent lang.uage from which all those now spoken \n such a vast region are derived. This ancient parent speech iR generally designated as the "Great Malay-Polynesian Language" and variously subdivided into the Malayan proper, the Indonesian, and the Polynesian group, iu the first of which Tagalog is classed by Humboldt. (U. d. KS d. I J, Indroduction, pages IÂˇII). '1'he assertion of the same derivation for all these languages is made in the face of, and reudered consistent with, the theory that considers Malays as mere colonists in tbe countries they now occupy, and with the existence in these same countries of an autochthonic Palman race whose remnants are still seen in tbe Philippines and elsewhere. This parent language is also described as belonging to the Malay stock, that is to say, as the one originally spoken by the MRlay people, and the possibility of the race baving adopted that of the aboriginal islanders in some part of the extensive area, has received little, if any, consideration. It is much in this way that Marsden says: (History of Sumatra, page 35, foot-note) "I have elsewhere reo marked that one general language prevailed, however mutilated and changed in the course of time, througbout all this portion of the world; from Madagascar to the most eastern discoveries east.ward of which tbe Malay is a dialect much corrupLed or refined by a mixture of other languages." Favre seems to share Marsden's opinion, if we are to judge frOID what he says in the Introduction to his Javanese Grammar, (1) Humboldt goes even farther in his application of the term "Malay' to the languages spoken by the race in contradistinotion to any otber of the Neg~'ito or Papuan stocks. After going to sOlDe length in explaining the inconven ience of adopting the terms "Poly-

â€˘

(1)

W. Mareden lut Ie premier qui remarqul\ et indiqull ce premier 1an-

R81le qui a preva1u dane tout I'arcbipel, et a merne etend'i eon influence, d'un COle, jueq'a MAdagaecar, et, de I'autre, a la nouvelle 'Guinee, aUl< liee de III m.... du Sud, et mllme jnequ'a celles du Pa cifique, aux Flandwicb, etc Ce langualle " re~u Ie nom de .qra"d langage polynisien. (Grammaire Javanaiee, Introduction, page XXI),

X\'rTl.

TilE

TAOALOG

LANGUAGE .

ncsian Langnage" and "Malay Language" for designating the family or group of those p<lken ill the whole inEnlar region; the former, because it would seem to i nclude also those spoken by the Negl'it ,) or Papllan race, a nd the latter, because of the exclusion it seems to imply of those of Madagascar and the Ph ili ppines wbich, according to him , ought to be con idered as bel,)Dging to tbe same trunk, he says tb at he came to th e term "Malay Trunk of Languages," because "be thereby had in mind more tbe people than the~ langnage.' (L) Tbus, th e belief is prevalent tbat tbe various languages spoken by tbe race are derived from this IVIaiay trunk, and that tbey, therefore, stand to it in th e same relation tbat the Romance languages stand to Latin . Ooly Crawfurd, wbo early in his History of the Malay Archi· pelago practically expressed the same opinion as that expressed by Humboldt, came later to disclaim any such relationship of tbe Ian· guages of the Malay Archipelago with the alleged parent trunk. He wrote a very able dissertatiou, filling not less tban 29 L pages of tbe "Grammar and Dictionary of the Malay Language' which he pub· lished in 1852, devoted to the comparative study of these various languages; but with all this, it does not appear that he succeeded in cbanging th e opposite views, as Humboldt's theory still holds It was also that of the author in a less mature state its ground . of acquaintance with the subject and under the, for him, distressing circumstances whic h led to a hasty publication of .the first edition of this book in 1902, but he now believes that there exists no sound foundation f r the theory. It is because the immediate or direct derivation of these Ian· guages from one alld the same pa~ent stock, as understood by Humboldt, does not eem to be applieable to Tagalog; and because. to all appearance, we are here confronted with the case of a small part of a large race that 8peaks a language belonging to a different stock than that to whi ch the other languages spoken by the whole, or at least. by the majodty, of the same community, belong, that an attempt IS here made at showing the different origin of the Philippine tongues by going into such a comparative study and statement of facts as, in our opinion, may support this hypothesis. ~h ere can be no vali d objections raised against this view of ~he. eubJ ect,. either ou historical or on ethnological grounds. The Phil· Ipp10e Archipelago is perhaps that portion of th e whole insular region where the ra ce assumes the most variegated cha racter, and oue o'f the fe.w places where living specimens of the aboriginal inhabitants We find in tb e midst of the Indogermani c language are s~JlI fou~d . speak10g natlOns, a tongue so distinct and peculiar as the Basque; an~ the present race of gypsies speak a jargon which still betrays then' descent f"om India. The same case of the descendants of a conquering ~eopl.e, a~ those of the aucieut Normans wilo, upon descending from S';and1Oavla lUtO Gallic territory lost their own language aud ~dopted th~t .of the conquereu peopi~, may have taken place also 10 the PhILJPPID~S. As noticed by Cmwfurd, (Dissertation, page Xl ~ven Wltbont gOlDg beyond tile bounds of the Malay Archipelago and 10 the. present day, we find, for example, on the West coast of Bor· npo, trIbes of aboriginal inhabitants gradually losing t heir own langnages by the admission of mnch Malay and fi~all'y adopting the (1) I~h bin ?ber. '~icht nur um einen AU8druck zu wahlen, der 8ich von den gewohnhcben mmder enlfernte. Bondero darum bei dem Namen MalayiBChfr Sprachetnmm gebl ieben, weil ich dobei nicht an die Spracae. 80ndern an d •• Volk gedacht habe. CU. d. K·S. a. d. 1. J. 2nd book page 211).

INTRODUOTION.

XIX.

latter, so that notbing remains to distinguish a trihe but its name.·' The reverse · of this would necessarily be the case where Malays were few in number and mere settlers. They would gradually lose their own tongue, adopting that of the domiuant race, but at the same time communicating to thQ latter some portion of their own. • The present race conditions in these Islands afford no meaus of appreciating- separately the aboriginal anu tbe Malay elements of 'ragaJog; for the language of the wild tribes seems to be es· sentially the same with that of the other sections of the Cbristian population; and that of the Negl·ito tribe, which is the only one we might suppose to be that of tbe aborigines, is either unknown or it has lost its value for comparatil'e research. Tbere can be no doubt that, although perhaps with some mixture of Papuan blood, the other tribes known by the general term of Igo1Totes who are now wild, became so from a more advanced state of civilization. As noticed by Humboldt, tbe name Ttwajas, as applied to certain wild tribes of Celebes, sounds as one of unmistakable Sanskrit origin and served once to designate one of the civilized Malay branches; aud in the Philippines, too, tbe word Taban(lo, as applied to a wild tribe in the Calamianes, suggests a ·Malay origin. The languages spoken in Celebes, where amon/!: the native population there is found /!:reat diversity of raCt3, are described liS containing a Celebe -Malay element and a Papuan element, which along with other peculiadies, found also in the languages of the Philippines, give some notion of their probable origin. Tbis fact and th"t of the high degree of ci vilization wbich is knowu to have been attained in the past by the Bugi race, together with their alphabet and auci ent literature, may lead to the discovery of many important facts bearing on the point of tbe relationship of t,heir language alld those of the Philippines with the others of the ~lalay alld the Papuan stocks; but in view of the impossibility of utilizing this source for the preser.t inquiry, we must have recourse to the comparison with other languages. Tbe ,plan here followed will aim at separating from Tagalog all foreign elements fou nd tberein so as to isolate, cousider apal't, and apprecia'e the importance of, that otber element which must be regarded as aboriginal; or if it is not admitted to be aboriginal, at least it must be considered -as primitive, since it is not traceable to the Malay or any other foreign source. It may be, however, traceable to the Bugis, for there is same reason to believe that the lIugis once formed with Tagalog one and the same language. _ But before going further iuto the subject, i~ is believed necessary to state here clearly what the nature and scope of tbis illquify will be. It shouid be well understood that a complete rejection of tlie prevalent theory is not here intended or a im ed at, and that the possibiliEy is not here ddnied tbat the other languages of the Malay Ardlipelago and of the PolyneSIa, reviewed by Humboldt, may not be directly or immediately derived from such a Great Malay.Polynesian Language; nor that Tagalog may not stand to the same source in a degree of relationship as tbat in which English and Spanish, for iustance, sland to Sanskrit. What is here contendlld is: tbat Tagalog does not stand to Malay ill the degree of relationship whicb Bumboldt wishes us to believe, or speaking more strictly, that it is not a dialect of Malay. But as there is. perhaps no term in linguistic science so uncertain of meaning aud 60 arbitrary in application as the terin :'dialect," it becomes nece sary to fix the boundaries of the signification 111 which it iti used lUr the purpooes of the I resellt inquiry. For, iu

x)t. a sense, if tbe theory of one and the same . primitive orlgm ~f. all the languages is accepted. a ll of tbem a re di a lects of the aborlgmal one' wbile, in Rnother sense, it may be even said that every man bas' his own di alect, as he has his face a nd his other personal • characteristics whi ch di stinguish him, indIvidu ally, from all his other T be term is Dot used bere in the narrow sense fellow creatures. of th e special mode of speaking oue langu age peculiar to some locali ty or class of people, as that which is fo und to exist, for instan ce, iu English and Spa nish as spokeu in Europe and in Ameri ca; nor in that in whi ch it may be applied to the c'lrrupt E nglish spoken by the un edu ca ted ll'ishman or by the a verage indio vid ual of other races in the E nglish Colonies; nor in the sense either or the difference fO Ulld at present to ex ist between the tongues of tbe various locali ties 01' ancient States of Italy and the Toscan 01' lingua vo/ga1"e which is now the Italia n offi cia l la nguage; nor, too, in that of the diverse f orms in whi ch, ancien tly, Greek was spoken in Athens and in other parts of Greece or th e Greek Colonies, which are des· ignated as Attic, Dori an, Ionian, etc. The term is used here in the broad sense of a langnage related to another in such a way that th e taking away f rom t he offshoob of that portion known as having been inherited f rom t he paren t, would render it useless as an instrll ment fo r the conveyance of intelligible thought. This conditio~ is not fo un d in the E nglish with regard to th e Latiu language. It is quite certain that if it were stripped f~o m its Latin elemeut the language would still remain practically the same. Th.is, however, could not be done with Spanish, fo r instance, without rendering its other constituents Celtic and Arab ic, e c, incapable of being twisted into intelligible speech. In poiu t of £a t, under th e actual conditiou of languages, only those would be co nsidered as of common paren tage wh.ich possess a com mon structu re, since structure has proved to be a more important fa ctor fo r classifica ti on than the raw ma terial. What is, therefore, in· tended to show here, is this: that Tagalog is not. a dialect of the Malay, in the sense in whi ch di alect is here considered; and that it cou ld not have been derived immediately from the same source as that fro m which the present Malay is supposed to have been deri ved; al so, that its n ative or aborig inal element is to it what the Saxon element is to the present EngliSh ; and that if the language werb shorn from th e other elements traceable to a Malay source, still its efficiency as an ins trument of speech would practically remain th e same. The groun ds on which Humboldt built the theory of a com· mon parentage of all the languagt!s spoken by the Malay race and that of their d irect derivation from one and the sam e parent Ian· guage, as stated by him, a re: (U d. l{.S d. I J., 31'd. book, page 2 l7) "the uniformity iu their words, roots and grammatical COll' struction, " and (chapters 7·10, pa ges :&57 282 of lhe salle book) "their accor.d in prououns, in num erals, in word·building and in w~ rd . d eclen s JOn ." But as he, however, noticed in cr'agalog some· thmg pecu!iar and not found in th e other languages, which seemed to de~troy thIS accorrl, he held it to be the grammatical forms and relics of those assumed ' in its origin by the common parent lau· guage. Thus, th e same peculiarities which others considered valid enough for a new subdivision and . the creation of a "Tagalog Group of the Malayan Languages," are by him referred to the p.a rent language, and he finds them to be out of use and replaced by

clrcumlooutory phrases and other separate

£Ol'llIS

of expression iu the

tNTROl>tlCT!ON.

txt.

prasent Malay. (1) As the words quoted in the foot nole show, he did not entirely fail, however, to perceive that these peculiarities might warrant the classification of Tagalog in a different group, for he further says: (3nl book page 288) "With Tagalog, one believes at first sight to have arrived in a new lerritory.' (2) Its value for purposes of comparative research 'in the other languages of the Malay branch he places at that of Sanskrit in regard to Greek. (3) Now, if ·the statements of a retention by Tagalog of the forms of the parent language and that of th eir replacemeut by circumlocntory forms in the present Malay are true, we must, in view oE the indisputable superiority of Tagalog over Malay, gather up a good lot of philolo · gical snbtleness to acco unt for the causes which brought about the rare pheuomenon of the declin e of a language just in the place where the people attained the highest degree of cnltnre, and where it received the earliest and most invigorating influence of the contact with, and infusion of, other more highly developed ones . It will be impossible for Humboldt to indicate in the Malay these circumlocutory phrases into which, he thinks, the peculiar forms of Tagalog were resolved. It is impossible to .ead the works of Crawfurd and Humboldt without feeling admiration for the men who went so deeply into the realm of philological research; bu,t, with all due regard for their labors, in what respects Tagalog at least, one is led to regret that they conld not have written on the spot, but had to depend on grammars and dictionaries fo their inquiries. Cl'awfurd, although he disco vered deviations of Tagal",g from Malay, failed to perceive the philological value of the lauguage. Humboldt, on the contrary. did perceive the valne. but, thus far, he failed to classify properly th e language. Crawfurd ·was loo m1'!ch influen ced by race culture; Humboldt, by race unity. The errors rouud in their books are, in part, of the nature of those which are unavoidable wben grammars are made the only basis of philological research, and in part due to deficiencies of the sonrces from which they drew the data for their inquiries. Crawfurd used San Agustin's, Humboldt, Totanes' grammar; wbile each of them depended on P. Juan de Noceda's Dictionary for lexical comparison. Although such a brief consideration of their works as is re quired for the purposes of the present inquiry is to be given in further chapters of this outlook, it is well, however, to make here a few remarks on that of Humboldt. Had the great philologist acquired orally his knowledge of Tagalog, he would probably have arrived at diffe'rent conclusions as to the character and origin of the language. At least, quite opposite in ferences as his, a reader ac· quainted with Tagalog is apt to draw from his profound research ll) Denn die Spracbe auf Malacca iBt gerade elie, aus welcber Bicb der Ge.ammtbau deB StammeB am wenigBten erBcb opfend erklaren In'Bt, da dieBe Spracbe sicb unter allen ib,en ScbweBterBpracben am meiBten von grammatischen Formen )oBgemacbt, dieBelben abgeBcblilfen und durcb umscbreibende RedenBarten erBet zt bat. AnB dleBem GeBichtBpunkte uti •• man den Stamm eber den TagaliBcben nen· nen . (U. d. B·S. a. d. I. J., Brd. book pageB 21O-2ll). (2) Bei der Tag. glaubt man auf deu erBten Anblick in ein ganz neueB Gebiet zu kommen. (3) Die TagaliBcbe Spracbe ita aber gerade in dieBen UnterBucbungen von der h(jcbBtan Wichtigkeit, 1. weil Bie eine !lberaus graB Be UebereinBtimmung mit dem Malayiscben zeigt, 2. weil Bie unter dieBen Spracben die reicbBte gramma. tische AUBbiidung beBitzt, und die Grammatik der Ubrigen erBt aUB ibr vollkommen verBtaoden werden kaon . Sie Btebt darin zu ibnen in einem ganz Ilbnlicben Verblltnife, ale die SanBkrit-Grammatik zur Griecl.iecbeo;..... (Srd. book, pages 214 ·Ua),

XXII.

THE

TAGALOG

LANGUAGE .

made into tbe language. Very properly be says: (3rd. book, page 47ll). "With the dismembering of the language which grammar effects, goes away much of what serves to bind the speech in its entirety, aDd often just the fin est and most essential portion of it is lost. " " Also is fouod so predominant in the gramm ar the general language type t.hat the special or peculiar oDe is th ereby obscured, and by reading the bare grammar one is misled into classifying as kindred languages some of those which are of a very different kind." And again (2nd book. introduction, page 3). " Nor can the study of languages be separated from t.hat of their literature, for the grammar and the dictionary sho ·.\· only the dead skeleton, while literary works, the li ve construction, show." It was in this way that sucb a n important factor as the T agalog accent, always imperfectly und erstood and never well explained by the Spanish friars, escaped successful consideration·. There are fo uud in the book oome not important, but very curious lexical errors as, for instance. the one which appears in the co mparative word table of the second volume. in page 249, c(lnsisting in giving as a synonym of bitqnid, "hill;" (Berg) · the Tagalog word lagaN , "saw;" he having in this bee n induced in to er rol' by the Spanis h sierra. which means primarily "a saw;" and secon darily "a ridge of mountains; " another is fo und in tbe same volume, page 282, where th e Tagalog word diquit. "to glue," "to stick;" is given as tbe equivalent of "to strik e' (schlagen); because diquit, 1n the dictionary, is given as a translation for "pega ," peqar in Spanish meaning "to strike," and "to glue, ' "to stick;' as well. In page 337 is found dagot (instead of dacot. (tbe wrong spe ling is, no doubt, a misprin t, for the word is ri ghtly spelled in the 'r:hmediately following compound cm'acot) as tbe counterpart of "cuff," "a hlow admin istered witb t he fist" (Faustcblag); in stead of that of "handful, ' because in Spanisb }1U11ada="cuff;" but }1ul1arlo= "handful. ' · All of wbich goes to prove tbe feeble guidance books afford (1) Oth er lexical errors which appear in connection with theories refuted here will be noticed in the proper place. But. by far, the largest and the most serious cause of error is the source from which Totanes ' Grammar may be he drew the materials for his work. consid ered a good treatise for the clergy; but J. Juan de Noceda's Dictionary is, by rea·on of its very superabundance of lexical matter. greatly cf'nrusing and misleading for those who never had th e occasion It is also well Dot to of hearing uativ es speak th e language. lose sight of the intimate and circumscribed character of such bO"ks. They have been composed, often co mpulso rily. f()r use among indivi· duals of the same calling as the autbor, not in order to initiate tbem in the mysteries, nor fo guide th em in th e acquirement, of the language; but to aid . and to complement the knowl edge of it th ey bad first to acquire by direct observation in tueir oral intercourse with natives. There exists DO well·defined scientific plan in their arrangement. 'l': ese grammars are narrow-sco ped and aim chiefly at presenting the vocabulary mostly req uired for the di charge of the sacerdotal business of tbe pupil. The ' auth ors, filled with religious zed and pietism, use the Latiu ttlrminology in giving the meaniug of such terms as refer to (1) The reader will e8sily understand that if the.e errors are here mentioned it is only for the purpose of illustrati nl1 the unavoidable mistakes which even the cleverest s cholar is liable to make by depending exclusively on gram· mars for hi. investigations. and beca"se tbese errors are not due to any imperfect ncq nai nt anC8 of tbe writer with Spani s h. hut to his imporfect acquaintance wilh lagalol!.

hTR(lD UCTlO:'l.

X X ITI

objectionable or so calleo vulgar things, for which, however, thero are euphenisms or unobjectionable form s of expression in every language; (1) or they go into avowals of a dom estic chara cter; (2) or th ey burst . into humorous expresions or other familiariti es of speech (3) which show clearly that th e authors never contemplated the possibility of th eir works being read abroad . The misleading chara cter of Padre Jnan de Noceda's Dictionary lies in its designed far.rea ching scope. On th e f ront page of the edition of 1860, it is describ ed as "Compuesto por varios religiosos doctos y graves y coordinado por el P . Juan de Noceda y el P . Pedro rle San Lucar, y ultim amente aum ent ado y corregido por varios religiosos de la Orden de Agustinos Calzados." (4) 'fhe book is therefore a compilation of all those whi ch had been previously published on the subject. It was issued fo r the fi rst tim e ill 1754, and wen.t through th e press again in 1832 and in 1860. 'fhe author, in the Preface, disclaims any ri ght to th e credit whi cb might be attributed to him for original autllorship, sayin g that he profited by the labors of those who had work ed before him, and goes on pointing the Rources from whi ch he de rived materi als for his work an d apportioning to each its due share in the aggregate. III order to preclude the doubts that might arise a8 to th e accurateness of the contents from th e fact of some terms therein co r;tained not heing used or understood by natives, he says expressly tbat it should not, however, be inferred therefrom th at such terms did not exist in the language, "for not all these words are used in every and all places . In some commnnities tber e will he fonnd some of th em in use, in other commnnities, others:' "This aside f rom tbe fact th at the Tagalog nation cOllsists either of the Comintang, or of tbe tin gues, or of the Court Tagals, and it is not possible to concord the words used in the higblands with tb ose used in tb e plains, th e natives living in tbe plains being so unlike those li ving in tbe woods." (5) Now this Oomintang and these tingues, that th e Sl'ani , h jesuit speaks of, require some explauation here. The fi rst Spa niards found the native (1) Pbrases found in P. Noceda's di ctionary : "verbum turpissimum, " "est verbum immu.ndum." ! 'pera vcerenda mullieris," "natura mullieris cuando ss diB~

formia/' etc.

(2) Digo yo a un indio, en ocasi6n de querer sacar ya de Is escuela II un bijo suyo, y el cbiquillo no querer salir tod. via, por DO esl ar perfeccioDado en la letra (como de becbo me esul sucedienda aCLUslmente), "If I say to ana· tive who is willing to witbdraw bie sou from scbool, aDd tbe boy reCuses to do so, ss be is not yet well trained in biB penmansbip (as, in fact, it is occurring to me at tbi. writing)." (Arte de la Lengus Tsgala por Fl. Sehastian de Totanes, psge 68). (3) En varias partes del srtp. conoe{ Is di 6cultad y levanl a Is caza. pero oe me fu e, porque no llegue a enteDderle bien . En el maca potencial erre.... • "Iri several parts of the treatise I noticed the diC6cuify and even drove out Ibe game; but I could Dot fetch it, for I did not succeed in making it out well. In the potential maca I erred.... (Pr610go. Vocdbulario de la Lengua Pampanga pOI Fr. DielZO BerjZsi'io. Introduction. Publisbed for the 6rst time iQ 173 1). (4) Composed by s~veral learned and grave members of tbe Reli gions Orders and compiled by P. J. de N. and P. P. de S. L .• baving lately bee" revised and fnlarged by several members of the sboe-wearing Re ligious Order of Saint Agustin. (0) ' • . .. porque no todas estss palabras se usan en todos los pueblos. En unOB Be usarAn unfia y en otros otras, y que mucho S8 hallen variadas 18s voces cusndo se notan variados .,\n los mismos ju egos de elIas en muchos pueblos . Fuers de que la nsci6n T.gala se campone )'a del Comintang, ya de los tinjZues ys de los tegalos de Corte, y no es posible concordar las voces de los monte~ con I.s de las valles, discordando tanto Jos indios de los valles de los indios de los montes.

XXIV.

TilE TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

population in the Islands divided into clans and tribes of heretogeneou9 variously mixed races and of a very different degree of rudeness. Some of them were found to live in communities and were in a state of rudim entary civilization; others, isolated in families or clans, led a savage life in tbe woods. Tbe languages spoken by the two sections we re as d ifferent liS the people were different in race and culture f rom each other. It was the earnest effort of the Spanish friars at those early days to b'ring these wild tribes of tingues or reo montados into th e plains and mllke them settle iu communities around a cburcb, tbat th ey might thus be more easily christianized aud watched over. For this purpose tbey bad to go deeply iuto their languages and the knowled ge tbus acquired was later incorporated by them in grammars aud di ctionaries. Tbus P. Noceda's came to be the melting· pot into whi ch the residuum of these (wo diverse languages, together with all their localisms, were cast for fusion, and it is just iu this that both its philological value for the study of tbe two elemeuts and , its misleading character for tbe foreign student consists. One of the elements in this mixture is tbe Malay, or an element, which, more or less adulterated, we still may trace, to tbe languages of the Malay Archipelago; the otber, is quite a different elemeut, wbicb, in so far as it is not traceable to the above source, we may regard as aboriginal. Botb tbese elements are found co ·existent and variously· mixed in act ual Tagalog:, sometimes the Malay being the usual or baving displaced tbe a boriginal, sometimes the aboriginal being the usual or having displaced the Malay, term. As to which of the two elements is the predominant one, is a matter for toose only who have acquired tbe Ian· guage orally to appreci tel according to tbe frequency or rarity with whicb either the one or tbe qtber appears in the speecb of natives. 'fhe study and comparison of bo~h elements, based on the dead and indiferent condition iu whi ch they are found in a dictionary, is very confusing and may lead to entirely opposite conclusions. Despite the intimate' and narrow·scoped cbaracter of P. Noceda's Dictionary as described in tbls chapter, and despite the fact of its being particularly intended for use of men wl10se business it was to administer to the religious wants of tbe people of whom Tagalog was tbe vernacnlar, it was, however, tbought necessary, in order to precl ude tbe possibility of tbe miscon ce ption to wbich its motley contents might give rise, to have what was considered to be localisms and archaisms printed ill bolder type in the Spanish.Tagalog part of Ibe edition of 1860, and to have a notice inserted at the end informing the reader of their local or obsolescent character. (1) This Spanisb·Tagalog part of the dictionary, we must suppose. was the one Humboldt made use of for his research, as it w~s only by bis previous knowledge of Spanish that he w.ent into acquaintance with Tagalog. Apparently, no notice was taken by bim of the above ml"nti(jned nole, or, most probably. such a note never appeared in tbe previous editions of the book, and tbus Humboldt could not tak e advantage of the warning For every Spanish term tbere ' are given in the book several Tagalog translations, one or more of whicb were in general use and understood tbroughout tbe Tagalog community; otbers were Oomintang speech or localisms, . .

(\)

NOTA.

Con el fin de que no se confuDrlan lo~ principianteo en el

1~loma tagatog al ver variao raizes 6 terminoo tagalos para cada palabra castellaDa.

SID saher cllat deben usar. Fe ba creido util poner esta nota aclaratoria para ad. verlirles que too lerminoB que eollin con letra baBlardil1a oon de U80 geDeral y regularmente 108 eDtieDdeD tod08, pero 108 que van can letla di8tiniB 6 Bon an ucuadcB, 6 Ee UBan Bolo en algunoB puebloB 6 provinciaB dQI lagaliBmo,

INTRODUCTION .

xxv.

while there are others which at present are neither used nor unclerstood. That the latter were, however, in use among one or th e other section of the native inhabitants at the early day in which the dictionary was composed, cannot well be doubted witbout impeacbing lhe veracity and diligence of the Spauish friars, and when the same or the corresponding terms are found in languages abroad or in the others spoken in the Philippines, they are of great philological value for det,ermining the origin of Tagalog. The delusilre effects of this double vocabulary may be seen in the fact tbat it served to Humboldt and Crawfurd for the building of quite opposite theories, and for drawing quite opposite conclusions as to the origin and derivation of the lauguage. To show that this aboriginal element is the most substantial constituent ot tb03e found in !lotual Tagalog, is one of the purposes of the present inquiry. The nature and scope- having thus been stated which this sketch is to cover, it only remains to say what the startiug point is for the same. That Malays are mere settlers in the countri es they now occupy, is generally admitted, and it had to be so admitted in view oE the remuants, which could not otherwise have been accounted for, o[ a former Papuan race still found in some of these Malay cou ntri es, and of their presence, lo the exclusion oE auy otber race, in New Guinea. The country pE origiu of Malays, or th e place from which they originally emigrated to the Archipelago, has beeu a matter of much speculation; but if the characteristics of the race aud the insular co ndition oE the region they now inhabit are taken into account, their descension from lhe Asiatic contiuent into Sumatra comes as a neces sary inference. According to Humbold t, Sumatra; accoL'diog to Craw[urd , Java; are the places ~ere that "G rea t Malay Polyne3ian Language, " the parent stock of all the languages spoken by the .race, originated, and the focuses from whi ch Malay civili zatiou and Malay lan gua~'3 irradiated and were disseruinated over the vast region now inhabited by these people. Outside those influences which we know, historically, to have altered the conditions of civili zation and language, and those changes which may he traced to the cou rse by which speech is developed in the hnman mind, we are aware of no others that have disturbed the philological unity and the original character of the eleme nts still remaining oE the parent speech in th e langunges 1l0W spoken in the two places assigned for its origin. In fact, for the purpose of determiuing the degree oE malayization of Tagalog, there are no others to which we may have recourse. Such a brief comparison, therefore, of Tagalog with Malay and Javanese a is consistent with the bonnds of an outlook of this kind, and with the meagre knowledge which the author has been able to acquire of those two langnages, is here undertakell with a view to ascerta in , as exactly 8S possible, the degree of relationship of Tngalog to those SO Ul'C' es. Tables are given hereafter oE words of a Malay, Javanese, Sanskrit and Arabic origin fonnd in Tagalog, as far as the author has been able to detect by going carefully over the "Dictionuaire Malais路FrauQais par L'Abbe P. Favre," "Gl'arnrnaire Javanaise," and "Grammaire de la Lallgue Malaise" of the Sl1me author; Marsdeu's "Malay Grammar," and Crawfurd's "Grammar aod DictlOuary of the Malay Language," after having added some terms not found in the works cf the above writers and rejected others which ,,;ere evidelltly erroneous; the orthography being, as far as pOS ' SIble, the same as that nsed by Crawfurd in his dictionary. Not to swell the lists into und ue proportions, all words common to the 4

XXVI.

TilE TAG ALOG LANGUAGE.

Malay and Ja \'an eso are inclnded in the Malay table, their Javanese fellowship being indicated by th e sign (J), while Javanese words not found in Malay are given i n a separate list. In the Malay table, the or tu ograp by of th e J avanese words had, of courile, to be somewhat di sregarded; bu t as, fo r the purpose of this inquiry, only the number aud the meaning of the words are of value, it is believed that a more regulal' orthograpby ca n be dispensed with, inasmuch as the nature of th e conclusions to be derived from the preseuce of these words in Tagalog wo uld not thereby be affected, It being important to show what changes, both in meaning a nd in spelling, th e words underwent on their being adopted into the language, and in ord er th at it may be seen whether they were imported for th e expression of new ideas or merely for addition to the vocabulary, both th eir spelling and meaning are given on thfl Tagalog side, wh ile on a fifth column and r!ght opposite the adopted word, the list is given of such uati ve words as are found in Tagalog to be synonyms of those whi ch ba ve been imported, The fo llowin g is th e list of the Malay words, including also those which a re co mm on to Malay ann. Javanese,

Malay. (1)

Signification.

Tagalog.

-------~

Ayar, Aku, An gcat, An g in . An ak. ALHim. Apa. Api . Ampuh. Ampat. Am pun . Amburn . Am bil. Arang. Alull. Asin.

(J) (.I) (.I) (Jl (.I) (.I) (J) (J)

'''bat? Fi re. T o overfl ow. F oul'. P a rdon. (J) Dew. (J) T o take. (J) Charcoal. (.J) Wa vc. (J) Salt.

Oyo. Ac6. R cat. Hangin. Anac. Anim. Pa. Apuy. Apao. Apat. Ampon. Amhol. Ambil. Oling. Alon . Asln.

Smoke.

Hasap.

H eart. Ashes.

Hati. Abo.

Finish ed .

AMs.

Fine Gall. Yard. To pay. Odour. Onion. Mangrove.

Halos. Apd6. Halamanan. Bayad. Baho. R l Ual1g. Bacao.

Asap. Ati. Abo.

(.I) (.J)

Abis. Alns. Ampadu AJam an. Bayar. Ban, Bawang, Bakaw.

Water. 1. T o Ii t. Ail'. Child .

(J)

(.I) (.1) (J)

(J)

S I X.

Synonyms,

Signification. Low tide. I. 'fo carry. Ail'. Child. Six. Else. Fire. To overflow. Four. Assistance. To sprinkle. T o repeat. Charcoal. \\rave . Salt. ('f' o apPlY~ )1 s,moke to the nostrils. Middle. A shes. ( To end a law ~ suit. . Fine, Gall. Gardeu. To pay. Slink. Garlic. Mangrove.

TUbig. Bubat. Oala. (obs.) Ano. Gllnao. AgÂˇyo. (obs) Saclolo. Uilig, hamog. Co ha. Daloyon. Tapa. Ibotor. Gaboc.

apus.

â€˘ amyl>. Lasoua. T anga!.

. (1) For the same words written io Arabic, Javaoese aod Sanskrit. which are !llveo here traoBliterated into the Romao character. see the "Dictioonaire Malals Fra09d1S par L'Abbe Favre," Maoila not aCCording tbe mea"B o( having the same printed in their respective proper characters .

lNTRoDUCTIoN.

Mal.y.

Signification.

Tagalog.

XXVII.

Signification.

Synonyms.

----~------------------------------------

Bacung.

(.J)

Bangun. Batu. Butaug. Bapa. Babi. Barang. Bara.

(J)

Barung.

(J)

Baris. Balu. Balik. Balut. Basah. Baham. Bini. Beluk. Bilang. Buaya. Buwah. Bohung.

(J)

Buka. Bukit. Buta. Butit. Budu Bunoh.

(J) (J) (J) (J)

(J) (J)

(J)

(J) (J)

Bubu.

(J)

Bubung'.

(J)

Bulu. Bulau. Busor. Bakam. Bakas. Bankai.

(J) (J)

Bongsu. Badil. (J) Bli. Bingtang. (J) Buuting. (J) . Bablid. Batu-brani. Barklis. Brat. (J) Bras. (J) Bt!.lalang. (J)

1Aplant. kind of kind of(I Bacong. flow er. To arise. Bangon. 'l'o rise. Stons. Batb. Stone. - Stem. Batang. Floating sLick. Father. Bar a . Father. Hog. Babuy. Hog. Any. Balang. Any. Live coal. Live coa l. Baga. Booth. IB arong-ba- tHu t. rong. I Streak. Badis. Streak. 'i\ idow. Widow. Balo. 'l'o return. Balic. 'l'ocomeback. 'l'o wrap . Balot. 'l'o wrap . Wet. Basa. Wet. New. Bago New. Wife. Binibini. Lady. 'l'o tacli. Biloc. 'fo tack. To count. Bilang. 'l'6 count. Alligator. Boaya. Crocodile. Fruit. Bough. Fruit. 'l'o liEl. Bulaan. Liar. 'l'o open, Buca. \ Tot h row ~ l open. ~ Hill. Buquld . Hill. Blind. Bota. Blind. Grain. ButiI. Grain Burb. Salt food. Pickl ed fi sh. 'l'o kill. Bono. 'l'o fight. I A kind of fi sh I B b \ A kind of fish ! 路trap. \ 0 o. ( trap. House roof. Bobong. House roof. DOwD, thehai r ~ te~ument of Bolo. Down. { aDlmals. A

Buhat. Dapi. 'l'ata. Pag.iI.

Dampa. Gohit. Polas. oui. Bogong. Baysac. Guinob. Songsong. Olat. Auoy. Siuongalin. Agtas_ Borol. linang. Pilacquiu. Bagoong. Bucan. Yau-io. g Balangcas.

Moon. Bouan. B6sol1;. Bow. ! Indentatiou iu I I the flesh. ~ Bacam. 'l'race. Bacas. Corpse. Bangcay. \Youn gesq ( child. I Bungs6. Fire arms. Baril. To buy. BilL Star Bi toufn. Pregnant. BunUs. Girdle . Babat Batobalani. Loadstone. Bundle. Baja. Heavy. Bigat Rice. Bigas. Locust. B,Uang.

Moon. Bow. I Cup pin g I glass. 'frnck. C1orpse. \Y oungest ~ . child. Shot gup. Buttering. Stur. Pregnant. Eye baud. L oadstone. To fasten. H eavy. Rice. Locust

Balahibo. Manilong.

Acab Taryac.

l \ angol.

Bundala.

Bogo ng. Loba . Dayupay.

THE TAGALOG LANduAGE.

XXVIII.

Tagalog.

Signification.

Malay.

Biilang.

(J) ~ S h 0 u I de r Balicat. blane. Balangao. Piebald.

Cbabut.

(J)

To pluck.

Gabot.

Chuchuk. (J)

To pierce.

T6soe.

(J) Chuba. Cincbin. Chambul'U. Cbarmin (J) Cbalup. (J) Dayung. (J) Da yang. Dawun . (J) Dakap. (J) Dagang. (J ) Datuk. (J) Datang. (J) Dada. (J) DalJau. (J) Dapat.

'1'0 attempt. Finger ring. J ealous. Mirror_ To dip. Oar Maid. Leaf. '1'0 embrace. Trader. Chieftain. To arrive. Breast. Lake.

Suba. Singsing .. Guimbolo. Salamin_ Solop. Gayong. Dayang. Dabon. Daquip. Dagang. Data. Dating. Dibdib. Dfmao.

To e able

Dapat.

Dapur. Darah.

Oven. Blood .

Dapog. Dug6.

Continent.

Dalatan.

Bal ikat.

(J)

Darat. Dalam. Duduk.

(J) Palace. (J) ~ Tosound with Ibe lead. (J) To seat.

Duloug.

(J)

Tray.

D6laug.

Dend eng. (J) Gading.

Wall.

Dingding.

Ivory. A com posi t-/ ion of resin and lime to \ be used on ( the botton of ships. To bite. To revolve. To hurry. Cutlass. To roll up. Sap. To exchange. '1'0 hang. Scissors.

Garing.

Cagat. Guiling. Gupay. G610c. G6101lg. Gata. Ganll Gantong. Gunting.

Multiple.

Ganda.

Complete.

Ganap.

Duga.

Gala-gala.

Gigit. Gi li ng. Gupuh . Golok. Gulung. Gatah. Ganti. Gantung. GUDting.

(J) (J) (J)

(J) (J) (J) (J)

Ganda . G!J.nap.

Slgnlfical/on.

(J)

Da lam. D oga. Loc-Ioc.

Gala路gala.

SynonYls.

Shoulder. Rain bow. Top I u c k grass. ) T o pierce the ears. To Iry. . Finger ring. Jealousy. Mirror To soak. Oar. Miss. Leaf. To seize. To trade. Chieftain. '1'0 arrive. Breast. Lake. ~ '1'0 be permitted. Oven Blood. High arable land_ Palace. ~ Tosound with the lead. To seat. A kind of ta ble tPadition wall. Ivory .

Bahag. Boag.

i Bosb6s. Balac. Simpac. Paniboc-b6. Blibog. Babad. Saguan. Dalaga. Huli. Baliuas . Sapit. Laut. Sueat, mangyari. Calan .

! t

Bacood, mi路 nangon_

I I

Taroe suboc. . Op6, licmo_ Latoe. -

{ThC samel composition J Capul. ' as in Malay. Ocab.

To bite. To mill rice. To move. Cutlass. To roll. Sap. '1'0 reward. To bang. Scissors. P:~~t, accl'U-!

Palit. Lauit, sabit. Gopit. Tamil.

To fulfill.

Tupad.

Dali. Hac. Bidbid.

XXIX. Synonyms.

INTRODUCTION .

Signification.

MillY·

Tagalog.

Ipa!'.

(J) To tickle. (J) Bracelet. Duck. He, she. To tie. (J) To beed (.I) Bl~:~her.in·l

Q.uiliquili. Galang. Itic. Siya. Gacot. Ingat. H!pag.

Iring.

(J)

Iliug.

Iling. ljao.

(J) (J)

!tam. Idung. Iris. Isap. Impun. Jaib. Jauh. Jamah. .Jarum. Jalan.

Black. (J) Nose. (J) To shred. (J) To such. (J) To assemble. To sew. Far. To touch. (J) Needle. (J) Road.

Jaling.

(J)

Jangka.

(J)

Janggut.

(J) (J)

Gilik. Galang. Itik. fya. Ikat. Ingat

Jarumat. Jaruk. Jiirat .•

To follow.

To incline. Hilig. G;:en, uori.} Hiluo.

Itim . 1I0ng HiIis. Higop. Ipon . Tani. Loyo. Dama Carayom. Daan.

Fishing net.

Daling.

Space meas · Danca!. ure. Beard. Yangot. Sewed. Dal6mat.

(J) Citron. (J) Snare.

Daloo. Dalat.

Jampi.

Medicine.

Dampi.

Jarang.

Scarce.

Dalaug.

Kayu. Kayit. Kawah. Kawau. Kaual. Kaka. Kanan. Kapur. Kami. Kamu. Kasih. Kikir. Kita. Kira.

(J) Tree. Cahuy' (J) To hook . Ca ito (J) Caldron. Caua. (J) Herd. Cauau. (J) Guard. Caua!. (J) Elder. broLher \ Cacao or sIster. (J) Right haud. Canan. (J) Lime. Apog. (J) We . Caml. (J) Yeo Cay6, cam6. (J) Affection. Casl. (J) File. Quiquil (J) We. Quita. (J) To think. Quila.

Signification. To tickle. Bracelet. Duck. He, she. To tie. To heed.

Bigquis. Bahala.

Sister·in law.

Diso, bayao.

! !

Galamgam. Balog6. Papan, bibi.

To 11 ny. accompa· ~ S6 nod , sam,.

To lean. Green, uori· pe. Black. Nose. To slice. To sip. To assemble. To sew. Far. To touch. Needle . Road. To tie rattans to fi s h in g enclosures. ~ Span. (meas· UTe). Beard.

I l

~ ManI'b a Iang.

Haguidhid. Pisano Hipo. Lansang~n.

\ Bitana.

Baang. \ Yam an, ayos, talli. Lucbuu. Pickled. Silo, pocot. To detain. .( Medi cated !T al ( fomentatiou \ ap . ) R are, u 0 t ( Labuuo. compact. Tree. Fishing hook. Toga. Taliasi. Caldron. Herd. Bantay. To watch. To repair.

Elder brother. Coya. Right haue1. Lime. Pirali. We Yeo jlntimat e lG.UIT10, liyag. frieud. File. AI·a!. We. Doubt. Acala.

ttt.

rrHE

Malay. Kilik. Kilat. Kwali. Kuku. Kukuk. Kutu. Kodok.

Signification.

Tagalog.

{TO carry un· } Quilic. del' the arm. (J) Lightning. Quilat. (J) Iron pan. Cauali. (J) ) N?il (of the ( Cocb bngers). . (J) ) To crow as a } C ocooc. coc k . Louse. Coto. (J) Frog. Togac ) A copper mQ' } C' ney, upang.

Kupong. Kuping. Kurang. Kurung. Kulit.

TA!lALO!l LAN!lUAOlt.

(J) (J) (J) (J)

Signification.

SynonyMS.

) To carry un· del' the arm. Lightning. Iron pan.

Carahay.

Nail. Cock's crow .

Talaoc.

Louse. Frog.

Cayom&.r. Palaca.

1Aserving .w,lI b~ as a weightmeas· ure for gold. Crooked ear. Want. To cage. Hide. Hundredth part of a piccu!. Eye brow. Gold clasp. To chew bete!.

Ear ring. Cupi. To want. CUlang. Cage. Colong. Skin. Pan it. Hundredth ~ Kliti. p.art or a Cati. p coul. K an ing. Ey brow. Qullay. Ranching. (J) Clasp Can sing. RUfi ah. To chew. Ngoya. an} {TO car Rand un g. (J) obj.ect Oll the Candong. ~ To ,lap. waist. Caban. Keban. Chest. Chest. Ramuning. A kiud oftree. Camoning. A kind oftree. Kap o ua . } (J) Nephew. kau. Pamangquin . Nephew. To assemb le. Campun. Kampung. To side with. Kom·bali. (J) To give back. Bali. ) To sprain the} ankle. Kambin g. iJ) Goat. Cambing. Goat. Kambang. J) A fl ower. Cambang. '1'0 stretch. Kambar. (J) Twins, Cambal. Twins. Karbau. (J) Buffalo. Calabao. Buffalo. Kl'l\s. (J) Strong. Galas. To ·nflame. Kri s. (J) Dagger. Calis. Sword. Laya. 'ro fade. Laya. To· fade. Layang. \ Layang.la.! Swallow. Swallow. ( yang. Layiug. Differeut. Laiu·lain. Different . .Layar. (J) Sail of a ship . . La.yag. Sail of a ship. Laut. Qcean . Laot. Ocean Laki. .I) Male person. Lalaqui. Male person. l..angit. (J) Sky. Ullgit. Sky. Lada. Black peppel'. Lara. Black pepper. ) To cut up a} Lapah. . {To cut up a carcass. Lapa. carcass. ) Lalaua, laua· 1 S 'd Laba laba, Spider. ) pi e1'. laua.

Hican. Alangan. Tangca!. Balat.

Sapopo, sac· lolb.

Guibic. Oli.

1Anuang, ml\.lag.

da·

lua .. Lanta. Campapalis. lba. Uala.

Gagnmbli..

xxxt.

I NTRODUCTION.

Signification.

Malay.

{ A kind oHurt· i Labi.labi. \ Ie.

Labi·labi .

P ast

Lala. Lida h. Lipan. Lima. Lela

Tagalog.

Lalo.

Tongu e D ila. Oentipede. Olah ipan Limn. (J) Fi ve . (J) {SW i ve l can· (Lila. non. (J)

Slgnlficatlom.

Synonyms.

\ ~ kind of turt· ~ I e. \ To go for· ~ ( ward. Tongue. Centipede. F ive. Crucible.

PaMs. L

a amp s.

Alopiban. Cala. (obs) Lantaca.

Jj. Restlessness. lLiga li g , gamgam. Knee. Tohod. Knee. Lutut. {An aquatic (J) { An aq u a t i C} L6mot. Lumut. plant. plant. Out. Onto Luar. Louas. \ Wild' ginger \ A medi ciual } L . Langkwas. I plant. angcoas. I p lant. R eady. Langkap. Handa. Langcap. To prepare. ) T O be in , _ Stocks. Lunggu. Bilan&6. stocks. r Pangao. S1 ade. Lingdung. Shade. Linclong. Anino, lilim. (J) To untie. Elapsed . Lapas. L ipa. Alpas. Lilbih . (J) More, E xcess. Uabl. Tira. Spleen. Li mpah. (J) Live r. Limpa. Orilat. Lampu· A k i nd of) ) A kind of Lp.mpoyaug. I plant. (J) plant yang. { Swaddl i ng . Lampin. (J) Tv swaddle . Lamp(n. cloth. Maal. Deal'. Dear. Mahal. Mabalaga. (J) E ye. Mata. Mata. Eye. Eoliga. Panaguipos, Mati . To die. Matay. Dying. hilabos. Manuk. (J) F owl. Fowl. Man'lc. Ibon. Manis. (J) Sweet. Tamis. Swee t. valamay. { Maternal u n·/ Mamak. Uncle. Amain. I Mama. cle. Masuk. To enter. To enter. Pasoc. Silid. Minum . (J) '1'0 drin k. I nnm. To driuk. Misi. Mustaches. MCsay. Mustaches. { Mau i balang, Muda. Unripe. Umipe. Mmlt. hilao. Murah . (J) Cheap. Chcap. Mu rp" Mimpi . (J) :gream. Pa nagu ini p. To dream. Arap. Mardeka. (J) Manumited. Mahal'lica. Manulllited. Timaua. Nanah . (.1) Pus. Nana. Pus. Nenek. (J) Grand[ather. Nono. Cfrand[atlter. Amba. Nan gca: J ack fl'Ll iL. Naugca. Jack [l'Llit. {'1'o open the f I-lieab. Nganga. To gape. Nanga. mouth. Ngamoc. (J) Gnat. Lamoc. Gnat. Nicnic. Ng ur. (J) Coco nut Niyog. Coco nut. ~ Fu r row. (as Ombac. (.T) Wa ve. H omlmc. upr l ied Lo billows).

Listlh.

Restless.

Balisa.

XXXII.

TIlE

TAGALOG

Malay.

(J) (J)

Spike, nail. Suitable.

Pait. Payong. Paco. Patot.

Padi.

(J)

Rice.

Falay.

Panas.

(J)

Eager.

Panas.

Pa1'ang.

Pasang.

Palang . (J) Cleaver. Pm·ao. (J) Sbip. Palo (J) To beat. \ T o t u l' n I Palin ( away. I g d ri ve )To } Pasac. (J) . into. Pisano Flood tide.

Pihak.

(J) Side.

Petak.

(J)

Perak . Pibh. PollUn. Pukat. Pukul. Pulo .

garden. Silver. (J) '1'0 choose. Capital. Drag net. (J) '1'0 strih e. (J) Island.

Pait. Payung. Poku. Palut.

Pm\\,. Palu. Paling. Pasak.

(J)

Bitler.

(J) Umbrel!a.

Punai.

Pihac.

i Ament comp art-I in a Pitac. ~

Pirac. Pili. Pohon. P 6eot. Poeol. Polo.

Green pigeo n.

Ponay .

Puluh . Pusat.

(J) (J)

Ten. Navel

Pouo. Posod.

Pangku.

(J)

Lap .

Pangeo.

Panggang. (J)

'1'0 roast.

Pangan.

Pingan .

Bowl.

Pingan.

'To lop.

P oneo!.

Panggal.

(J)

LANGUAGE.

Tagalog.

SI,nlfication.

Paduman. (.J) { '1'he mariner's} Paraluman. compass. (J)) A kin d of 1Pagong. P:1iiu. tortoise. P in tu. (J) Door. Pinto. Pantas. Expert. Pnntas. Pandan . (J) Pandanus. Pandan. Prisai. (J) Shield. Palisay. Piirchick. '1'0 sprinkle. U isic. Rakst. (J) To ad here. Gacot. Rahun. (J) Poison. Laso n. Raios. (J) Hundred. Gatos: Ribu (J) Tboljsand. Libo. Rusa. Deer. Usa.

Signification.

~ynonyms.

Bitter. Um brella. Spike, nail Usefulness. Ocol. U .n hull e d I Q uinal as. rice. r Fatigued. H angad . {A kind OIl p _. blunt knife. r un g!. Ship. Dauo,ng. '1'0 beat. Hampas. \ Face turned I Lihis. away. ( { Sogasag, ca· W edge. lang. Flood tide T aog. ~ Chip 01' small portion set aside.

Separation. Silver. Hirang. T o choose. CRpital. BataU!i n. Drag n et. Lambat. Balasbas. '1'0 strike. I sland. {Lanatan lia· . Green pIgeon. Ia n. ' 'Ten. Toro . (obs). Navel. ) T o take in } Sin a pop o· one s arms. nan. { T 0 l' 0 a s t ( Talibobo. meat. Plate. (vessel). Humangar. { Gampon, qui· Maimed. mao. { Themarin er's co mpass. { Akindof tortoise. Door. Pinid. Expert. Sirhi. Pandanus . Shield . . Calasag. 'fo sprinkle. Sa bog. 'fo fasten. Dicquit. Poison Camandag. Hundred . Daan . Thousand . Deer.

XXXIII.

INTRODUCTION.

Signification.

lIalay.

Tagalog.

T o tumble.

Gu iba.

Rabung_ Rembayan. Saya ng. (J) Sakit. Sagu. (J)

Sprout. Buck . Pity . Sick. Sago.

Laboug. Lambayan. Saya ng. Saq ui t . Sago.

Sapu.

To sweep .

Sap u.

Ribfih .

(J)

Sabung.

(J)

Game cock.

Sabo ng.

Sarung. Salah.

(J) (J)

Sh eati.l . Wrong.

Salong. Sala .

Salut.

(J)

To overlay .

Salot.

Salin .

(J)

Si.

(.J)

Sikn. Sinal'.

(J) (J)

Sipat.

(J)

Sila. Siser. Suku.

(J) (J)

Snkat.

To transcribe. Sali n. Parti cle pre· fi x e d t 0 \ Si. nouns . El ow. S ico. Ray. Sinag. \ M.e as uri n g I Si at. I hn o_ I p To sgu t. Si lo. Comb. S isil. On e fourth . Soeo.

Measure_

Sticat.

Snluh. Sulam. Susu.

push for- f (J)j To ward. (J) Torch. (J) To embroider. (J) Dug.

S I u ung. Solo. Sola m. S050.

Susun_

(J)

Soson .

Surung.

Layer.

A kind of delieacy mad e \ San Ian. (J) ( out of coeoa nut and sugar. Sand uk_ (J) Ladle_ I R efuse of th e I Sapah . 1 botel mix ture. f Sapit. (.1) Pin cers. Sumpah. (J) Oath. Surnpit. (.J) Narrow_ Sirnpan. (J) Ta lay. Tai. (.1) Excrement. Tau. (.1) To kn ow. Tahan . (J) To abid-~!" 0'1' Talln. Year. Tail. 'I'ahil. il wh·,') 'Jllll'tlaw'l{I,lIlIJJ,,) '1'0 laugh~'!IJM

(Jr

Sa n tan .

Synonyms.

Signification.

'1' 0 d I' 0 P H 6 10g. l ag ) dONn. pac. Sp rout. Buck. P ity. Aua. Damdam. Sick Sugo. \ T o . bes mear I Ualis. I Wi th ocher. ! '1'0 let cocks ) fight. '1'0 sheath. Balindang. ·Wrong. Mali. I Fel'l'u l e i ul ) tbe k n i f e • . Pah id. \ / h andle. '1'0 trauseribe_ Hipuo. The ar t ic le oC personal na mes., . Elbow. R ay. Amigay. T o mark out { Dorol. { a IlI1 e. ! T o squat. T ingcayad Flax comb. I-TalC a pound. J M easllre of I length.

Go ahead.

Lo ob. ,

T orch. Toembro ider . Soot. D ug ( T o range iU } Snpin. 1 layer,. I I Th e same kiu d of de~icaey as In Malay.

San doe. Ladlo. • C~\lO~.JQ'llglJu'l' S 1 (.) ljml::lIlU'l' apa . Ohew?;\J~1}~J'1 (l) "i}/:1 o tlT Sipit. P ill cers . · Blgtillg. Sumpa. I Oath. :Ji "J~ .JI:.\WUI'l' Sum p it. ,lJU, I SYl'i ll ge. J J Simpat!~":.lI ''', I , T o p l'est:Jtlltl. : , Tago. I h:ol~ lI rl:~ To e. ·JII " · I Excl'en~ewt."l Du ml. .JlnJh l '1'aotao. \'lW ~j!let9(1br~1' [l'lI laslas. Taban. Mld"I!'1 Ttl Is~ajl. IJIH "dJ '1'i nL YflJ~'I' '1'a6n. 'Ytl/t\I!" lUll } 'I'ahil. "'JlII'1; T ahil. III II IJ '/ > (t) . IJJII J\'! ' T una. _IlIJ!lJjl To lau gh?h ll1lt ILij;aa<:,iiglM(1' J

""'II

XXXIV.

THE TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

Mllay.

Slgnlflcatlon.

--:-----

Tagalog.

'rauad. To barga in Tacot. To fear. To m eas l:lre 1. Tacal. by capacity. \

Tawar. Takut.

(J) (J)

TakaI'.

(J)

Taogan.

(J)

Hand.

Tailgau

(J)

To weep. To ask.

Taugis. Tauong.

Tangis. Taoa Tatal. Tanak. Tanllrn . Tapak. TabuI'. Tarum . Tali . Tasik.

(J) (J) (J)

Chip of wood . Tata\. To boil. Tanac. To plant. Tanim. The palm of} Ta ac. the hand. p

1 (J) 1T~db e scatter- ( ~abog. (J)

(J) (J)

Indigo. Rope.

(J)

Sea.

TaY01;n· Tali.

Tiyung. Tiyup. Tipis. Timun. Timur. 'rungan.

Tasic. of lName a} Siyol. bird To blow. Hihip, hiyip. Nipis . (J) Thin . (J) Cucumb~r. Catimon. East. Timog. An insect. Tongao.

Tutup.

(J)

To shut.

TutuI'. Tuba. Tuma. Tulak. Tulung. Taga r. Tangah.

(J) (J)

To inform. Toto I. A plant. Tuba. Louse. Toma. '1'0 push. 'rolac. Help. T610ng. lJ ard. Tigas. Midday. Tanghali. A pecu liar~' form of tur· Tangcoloc. ban. Staff. Tongcod. To grasp. AngcQP. · P,ushed a way. Taogq uil.

(J)

(J) (J)

(J)

Tllngkuluk. Ton~k8t.

Tangkap. (J) Tangkis (J)

Totop.

J l'angatanga/ nan. Tunggal. Unique. Tonggali. TllLak. '1'0 cut. Tatac. To penetrate} Tlltas. the skin with · Tastas. { out wound ing 'rtintu. (J) Certain. TanLo. Tanda. (J) Mark. Tanda.

-Tangga.

Stair.

Slgnlflcatlon.

Synonyms.

To bargain. 0511.. Fear. Alingin. I To measure I by capacity. ITo hO l d'}Q' . I grasp. UlmqUlm. To weep. L.ohog, luha. 1'1'0 ask, inI quire. Chip of wood. To roast rice. Co16. To plant. Palad.

Foot print.

Hasic, samTo sow. { bulat. Indigo. Rope. Lubid. T o extract the I Dli t { salt. (ga . To Chirp. To blow. Thin. Uucumber. South. An insect. To lay hands { on. To inform. A plant. Crablouse. To push. To help. Hard. Noon.

Pocotpocot. Ibabli. I

Ompa. Toos. Ac ral. Sacloib. Ganit.

~ A kind of bel~ met. Staff. '1'0 press. To push away.

Pisil. S' .d ~ n g q. u I , smgqUlI. Long hand ' j H d ladder. an anan. One by one. Casahiy. To cut metals. 'raga.

To unsew. Cerlai n. Mark.

TUllay. Quintal, ·tala.

xxxv'.

INTRODUOTION.

Sl 6nlfication.

Malay.

To be towed.

Tondn. Tlindang Tabu. Tabas.

(J) (J)

To kick. Sugar cane. 'fo clear the! ground. f (J) To ransom.

Tagalog. Tonda. Tindac. Tub/). Tabas Tub6s.

Tabus. Tampuh. (J)

To fall upon.

Tampo!.

Tnmpuk. (J) Tumpang. (J) Tampar. (J) Tumpas. (J) Timba. (J) Tumbuh . (J) Tambak. (J)

To heap. To lodge. Slap. Extirpated. Bucket. To grow. Dike.

Tompoc. Tum pang. Tampa!. Tapus. Timba. Tubo. Tambac.

Tumbak . Timbaug Timbun . Timbu!. Tra. Taraju. Trus. Talinga. Tiiluk. Tiilan. Talor. Utus. Utnc. Upah. Ubi. Ubat. Uba'l. Urat Usir. Usung Untung. Ujan Utang Unus

(J) Spear. Tomboc. (J) To weigh. Timbang. (J) To pile . T imbon. (J) To float. Timbolan. Stamp. Tala. (J) Scale, b,alance Talaro. (J) Through . T aos. (J) Ear. Tainga. Cove. Looc. To swallow. Lonl6n. Egg. Itlog. (J) To send. Otos. (J) Brain. Otac. (J) Wages. Opa. (J) Yam Obi. Gunpowder. Obac. (J) Grey hair. Uball. (J) Root. Ogat. (J) To pursue. Osig. To bear be-) tw ee n two ( Osong. with a pole. J (J) Gain Ontong (J) Rain. Olll.n . (J) Debt. Otang. (J) To draw. Honos

Signification.

Syn,nyms.

\ Fishing line} 1 at the stem Hi lit. l of a sh ip . To kick. Sload . Sugar cane. Tibos. To cut out.

Caingin.

To ransom . Baui. To break { upon . H ea p. Bougt6n. Lain over. Patol6y. SlAp. '3ontoc. Finished . Lipo!. Bucket. Tauing. Olar. To grow. Trench Cali. To strike with 1 Sibat. { a spear. f To weigh. '1'0 pile. Patong. Buo'y Lutallg. Quinta!. Mark. Scale Limpas. T o pierce. Ear. S6god. Cove Lagoc. To swallow. Egg To order. Sugo. Brain . Wages. Himngal. Yam. Gunpowder. Grey hair. Roo t To pursue. H abol. Tu bear b e. } tw ee n two Touang. { with a pole. Luck. Paquin!ibang Rain On6s Debt

{ T~f !~~kmb~~ } Hallgo. (J) 'l'o exchange. H6lip . To replace Palit. (J) Head. Ol/). H ead The following is a list oE the exclusively Javan ese words fo und in Tagalog.

Urup. Ub.

Javanese. Asu. Ari.

Signification. Dog. Kiug.

Tagalog. Aso. !Iari.

SI ~nlflcation . Dog. King.

Synonyms. Ayam , bana) gan.

XXXVI. J~yanese,

Aran. Aju. Banlir. Bacha. B!11ulang Buri. Dariji. Garis. Gawe. Galu;pung. Jampi. Jarang. Kopyak. Lakn. Machan. Pitu. Pari. Salnka. 'ralu. Tnrn . Uchap. Wolu.

THE

TAGALOG

LANGUAGE.

Tagalog.

Signification.

Name. Ngalan. Do not. Ayao. Just. Banal. To read. Basa. I Hide of au } Bololong. 1 animal. Rear. Huli. Finger. Daliri. To scratch. Galis. Gana. To do. Flour. GaJapong. Medicine Dam pi. Scarce.

Dalang.

Skull. (cap).

J T 0 bee u I' l rent.

Co pya.

'j Laco.

Tiger. Seyen. Skate fish. Sil-.er. 'rhree. To 51 ep '1'0 sp ak. Eight.

Machin. Pito. Pagni. Salapf. Tatlo. T610g. Usap. Ualo.

Symyms.

Name. To refuse. H ouag. Virtuous. Tapat. To read. Lal6s. She ll of a { crab. Rear. Li cod . Finger. Galamay. Itch. . Dosdos. To do. Magano. Rice flonr. I M ed icat ed I T { fomentation. I apa. Rare, scarce. Labnao. I A kind of I C J 1 l.elmet. \ a o. J To merch- I B ]' ) andise. \ a lUas. Monkey. Baculao. Seven. Manap it. Skate fish. PaoL Silver money. Three. Mampat To sleep. Gopiling. Sab1. To talk. E ight. Saga (obs).

The follow ing is the list 01' Sanskrit words in Tagalog which, probably, found their way in 0 the langnage through the Kawi and the Javanese. For the purpose of better appreciating the orthographical changes, the form which may be considered that of the original spelling is given together with that of their Malay spelling, it being necessary, of course, to put each in the Roman character.

Sanskrit, Anyaya.

Malay,

Signification,

\Ani ya. ya(J) } 'Tyranny.

Tagalog, Anyaya.

Gold.

Am a~.

Asa. Ari . Arga.

Hope. Sun . P rice.

Asa. Arno. H aiaga.

IGca.

Kncha.

Glass.

Casa.

Kuta. Koti.

Kota.

Fort.

Cota.

Masa.

Amas

Asa. Hari. Arga.

(J)

Keti.

Kasturi . Kasturi Kusumba. Kasumba } (Tel. ) Gaja. Gaja h. Cukra. Chuka. Cinta. Chita.

1T.en m i Jr-l Cati . lon. . Musk.

Castoli.

Safflower.

Casubha.

E lepha nt. ' Gadia. Vinegar . . Snca. Feeling. Sintll..

Signification,

Synonyms,

I Dabas, tamo 1arm . paiasan. \ Sixth part ~ . of a tahil) Guint6. of gold. Tiuala. To hope. Sun, clay. Bayau. Price. I Glass bra- ( B6bog. I celet. Fo rt. Moog. I Ten mi llI lon. Musk.

Saffron.

Dilao.

Elephant. Vinega r. Love.

Lala . Illig.

INTRODUCTION.

Sanskrit.

Mally.

Tagalog.

Signification.

Sampaga.

Oari ta.

Salita.

Jam bu. Xantavya Til·ra. Tamraka. Talaka Daya. Deva. Divi. Dupa. Dosa. Dusta. Wana. Puti. P arixa. P arapata. Baga. Vyaya. Abyaca. Vija. Visa. Battara.

Signification.

Story.

Synonyms.

,woo,

Th,

Campaka. { 0k~~ m p a - } (Jhampaka. Charita.

XXXVII.

see n ted champaka flower.

Story.

{ Cacana, saysay.

\ A name of ~ A ted color lee l' t a i n Damb6. fruit. fruit. Tabek. Greeting. Saugtabl. To respect. Ablt. Timab. Tin. Tinga. Tin. Tambaga. Copper. Tumbaga. Copper. Talaga. Pond. Talaga. Pond. 'frick. Daya. Dllya. Fraud. Diwa. A god. Diua. Spirit. Duwa. Two. Dalaull. Two. Dupa. Incense. Dupaau Censer. Dosa . Sin. Dusb. Penance. Dusta. False. Dusta. To curse. PaQah. Pana. Bow. Arrow. Pu tib . White Puti. White. Busilac. Preksa To inquire. Tocsb. To tempt. Parpati . Pigeon. Salampati . Pigeon . ) To distrib· I T b hi Bahage. To divide. Bahagi ute. \ om a . Biyaya. E xpenses. Biyaya. Gift. { Habituat- I B'h ) ~~bituat- (Damag. Biyasa. ed I 1 asa. Biji. Seed. Binhi. Seed. Batag. Dita, aboBisa. Poison. Bisa. Poison. abo

Jambu.

Batara

th'l

0", of principal Hi n d 0 gods.

B th I a a a.

God.

!\ B~ndaba-l Steward. hc.

Bandaga-l B d . ra. \ lin aarl. Varrta. Brita.

Steward. News.

Balila.

Mana .

Manah.

Relic.

Manll.

Manikya. Masa. Mega. Muka. Mula.

Manikam. Masa Mega. Muka. Mula.

Gem . Time. Cloud. Face. Beginning.

Manic. Masa. Bigha Muc· ha. Mula.

News. I nheritan-l ceo Pearl seed. Time. Cloud. Face. Begiuning.

Lliba

Laba.

Profit.

Laba.

Profit.

Loxa

Lnksa.

Sama.

Sarna. Sutra. Saksi.

Sutra . Sui.

) Ten thous-I L a and. BCS • Fellow.

Samb..

Silk. Witness.

SuUa. Sacsl.

DO.o. B6bot.

1Ten

and

Panah6n Ulap.

Buhat. Paquin abang.

thous·

T;ann;:.com - Calagoma. Silk. Husi. Witne3s.

XXXVIII. Malay. Sanskrit,

TnE TAG ALOG LANGUAGE.

Signification.

Tagalog.

Signification. To prepare.

Sadya.

Sadiya.

Prepared .

Sad-ya.

Sajja.

Sanjata.

Weapo ns .

Sandatlt.

Sandi.

Joint.

Fandig.

Tulasi.

Sulasi.

Sweet basi!.

Solasi.

Synonyms.

Handa, laan. Sapiao Weapon. A . .. t I Casocany JOIO . " soan Sweet basi!.

The following is 路 tbe list of th e few words of Arabic origin found in Tagalog, hav ing evidently been introduced through Malay, and showing th e slight deg ree of influence which Mobammedanism had ill thebe Islands. It is well to note that the term ?'ibtt, "thousand," is also given in the Malay J avanese table. This is on account oE its doubtful origin , for while Crawfurd in his dictionary gives no indication of what it may be, Favre, on the contrary, believes 'it to be Arabic. (1) Uta?', "nerve;" wi ll also be fou ud in the Malay table, because it may be that it was through Javanese and not through Malay it has been introd uced .

Arable, Utar.

Utac. Paningcayad, tingcayad.

Inki yad.

\ Sohm',,"n, obe路

Api um . Arak. Ilahi. Taksir. Ribu. Lezal.

Opium. Ampion . Alak. Liquol'. Divine. Lah i. Sluggish. Taksil. (10,000). Libo. Savory. Lasap . Measuring string Sipat. or rul e. Writing. SuI at. To prostrate. Lahar. {Amen, peace be) to you (a salu- Saht mat. tntion). Trousers. Salana!. Jud ge, judgment. H6com. Timidity. Hi ya. Married party. Asaua Occult science. Alimoan.

Sipat. Surat. Sujud. Salam. Seluar. Hukum. H eya. Zauj. Allmun.

Signification,

Tagalog,

Signification, Nen-e. dience.

Brain T o sit cross-legged. (the respectful posture in ch urcb). Opium . Wine, liquor. Nobility. Dull, stupid. (1,000) To relish. To mark ont with a line Writing. To kneel down. Thanks Trousers. Judge . Blush, ashamed. Married parly. Awful, dark place

Before goin g further into an examination of th':lse lists, attention is invited to the fa irl y general accord whi ch the result shows with that given I,y Crawfurd, despite both having been obtained by quite different processes. The totals are: (2) (1) .A ucun diclionaire ne donne I'e tymologie de ce mot malais; maiA on trouve en Beb. ribbo, d'ou probablement l' Ar. db... C'est 111. qu'iJ faut aller chercber I'origine du rib.. malBis. II fant remarquer cependant qu'en Reb. et en Ar., II signifie dix mi1Je. (2nd vol., pages 43536 .) . (2) The Tagala Dictionary, with its appendices, contains 16,842 words among wblCb I enn detect no more tban 442 tba~ are foreign, belonging to the followinll langua~es : Malay 113, Javanese 27, common to tbe Malay and Javanese 1169, I:anekrlt 83, Arable 7, Persian 2 and Telinga 1. (Orawfurd, Dissertation, page cxiv).

XXXIX.

INTRODUCTION.

\'Ialay. As &iven by Crawfurd. As given here. Mo re in C I' a wfurd's. More here.

Common to Malay and JavaJavan ese. nese.

Sauskrit.

Arabi c.

113

25D

121

263

2,*

-l

The character and description of the words whi ch are common to Tagalog on one side, and to Malay, Javanese, Sanskrit and Arabic, on the other, deserve special notioe. The pronouns and numerals excepted, the greater number of the l'emaini ng words consists of nounS, the part of speech most liable to the iuvasion of fOl'eigu terms, being, for the most part, the nam es of uatl)ral objects; a few adjectives aud verbs. There is no particle aruong them nor any otl,er word indispensable to the constrnction of a grammatical sentence. For the meaning of the majority of the borrowed terms there are found na tive synonyms in the language; others, as anfjin, "air;" apuy, "fire;" bituin. "star;' lallfjit, 'sky;" etc., which refer to the great objects of exterual Nature, are onl)" a proof that the imported words replaced native ones, since the language of the rudest people cannot be snpposed to have been destitute of snch terms Nor can it be supposed either that the primitive inhabitants, even in the earliest period of their language, did not possess terms for the designation of such primary notions and actions as "leaf," "tree," "face," "blood," "to drink," "to plant,' 路 etc. At any rate, we find nati\7e terms for some of these things in other tongucs of these Islands. The former existence of some others which appeal' in the listA as having no native synonyms, we may logically infer from their necessary association in meaning with certain others still found in the language. We cannot conceive of the absence of a native word for "lightning," which must have been superseded by the borrowed Malay word quicllat, when we find in the language the native term lintic, "thunderbolt;" nor for the imported hihip=hiyip, "to blow," when the native word bubulusan, "bellolYs," exists. We find th e absence of a native synonym for the borrowed term itlng, "egg,' incompatible with the presence of the aboriginal one halimhim, "to brood ," "to hatch; " that of a native synonym for the imported 010, "head," with the pre . sence of p6god, "to behead, " etc. If this and the probability of the Malay intruders having put out of use some native terms without supplying substitutes therefor are taken into account, we may even be justified in believing tbat the language gave away more lexical matter than it received from such SOUl'c.is. Of course, we must not expect to find all tb e words, which are given in the list as native sy nonyms for those borrowed, in general use at the present day; but all oj' them are giveu in Noceda's Dictionary and we cannot doubt their' former existence in the language,

XL.

TRE TAGALOG

LANGUAGE .

With the exception, therefore, of personal prooc.uns, numerals, the particle si and the adverb pa, for most of which, however, there exist native synonyms, all other borrowed terms are of the nature of those whi ch have no power to change the character of the Ian路 guage, nor do they add appreciably to its lexical sLOCk. They have no syntactical value and , in other respects, they fall short evet of the importan ce of French words in English or of Arabic words in :spanish or P ortugu ese. The Malay lex ical element, therefore, although numerous enough, is, however , extrin sic and unessential. It may be objected that the words here given are not all; and we know well this to be the case. ,Ve are, however convinced that for whatever others might be de tected, the language will furnish synonyms in the same proportion and that, therefore. the above conclusion would thereby still remain practically unshaken. '-lole must not, how ever, stay excillsively by lexi cal comparison, but rather go into the other departments of grammar. A language should not be considered as an aggregate of words, but as an assemhlage of forms. The study of th e grammatical construction leads deeper into the lallguage, and accord ill grammatical forms is th e ffiOst reliable evidence of parentage. But, as forms are fewer than words the purposes for which thought communicatiou is established are essentia lly the 'Same throughout mankind, the probability is here greater of co ming across forms appareutly common, and the risk is also g rea ter of clas iEying as kindred, languages which iu fact have sprung from differeut trunks. T he compariso n with Malay is here first takeu up aud will cover, briefly, the sa e points which, more extensively, were covered by Humboldt in his inquiry. As already stated, these points are: a general uuiformity of their words, roo ' s and grammatical con路 struction; or more specifi cally, th eir accord in the pronouns, in numerals, in word building, aud in word declension. On this suppossed accord is founded by him the theory of the direct derivation from one and the same stock of all languRges spokeu by the Malay race. But before going fnrther into the examination of the grammatical fo rms, it is well first to compare briefly the alphabet and the phonetic character of the two路 languages. The Malay alphabet is described as consisting of the six vowels: a, 13, e, i, 0, ui a, e i, 0, ~I, having generally the sound they have in Spanish, and the sound of e and e corresponding with that of the same vowels in French. The vowel sys tem of the Malay affords no appre路 ciab le deviation from that of the Tagalog, except perhaps in the presence of a Bat e, corresponding, il; seems, to the Javanese pepet, whi c h is !lot found in Tagalog. The soulld , however, of this and the oth er vowels is but very imperfectly marked in Malay, not so much owing to any special tend ency in the language, hUl; owing rather to th e application to the same of the Arabic character, for bere, too, exists good reaso n to believe l;h a t the threc-vowel system of Tagalog is also at the basis of that of Malay. Greater differe nce exisl;s in th e consonants, which may be better appreciated by contrasting the two systems: Malay Tagalog

b, ch, d, g, h, j, k, I, m, n, ng, n, p, r, s. t, b,

d , g, h,

k I, m, n, ng,

IV,

s, t, U, ~ IV y.

In Tagalog, there ll,re wanting the ch, j , and 11. R 1', which also appears to be wanting, is found includ ed in the ambiguous sound

XLI.

INTRODUCTION.

o[ d, the' latter belDg u.ed as iuitial all II fill nl, ). a~ liqui rl an d me· dial, or as initial of Rny other than the nrs. syllabl e III th e word . The souud or the Malay ch is described to be that of the same con · sonant in the English word "church," that of .i the sam e as th e Rnglish d in "soldier," Qnd that. of . 11 th e one )\'hi ch th! s con s on a ~t has in Spanish. The sound of eh IS stlll found , th ough not frequ ently, 111 Bi ayan, Rnd in the Tagalog words mach-in, " monkey;" hicho, " chewed betel;" the first of wbi ch is the J a van ese m achan "tiger;" tha t of j , in th e Ibanag. Th e sound represented in Ma lay by Ii is fo und in Tagalog, aside from Spanish words, in iny,) a nd ninyo, "yours," " to you" (plural), as th e proper way of pronouncing t.he combina tion ny, but with no character ror it in th e alphabet. I his seelDS to indi cate that the language once made g rea ter use of th ese Malay sounds, bu t , later fell back to the primitive sys tem . By fa r th e greatest differel1 ce in th e consonant sys tem of th e two languages is f ound in the soun d of h, which in 1I1alay is described as that of a silDple .aspirate, whil e in T aga log it is a g uttural, or, if this be nol admitted, a very strong as pirate. In the phonetic character th ere is fo und so me fa il' acco rd in what respects the prevaleut di ssyllabi c fo rm ba is of the radicals, anrl in the general accentuation of bil e penultim ate sy llab le; (m ouosy ll ab ic roots are, however, much mQl'e num erou s in Malay, and words accented on the last syllable much more num erous in T aga log); bu t t he accord goes no further. As noted by Orawfurd (Dissertation , pages cvi ii·cix) , (1) the case of syllable ending in a consonant, neither a liqnid nor It nasal, is of more fr quent occurreuce in T agalog th a n in Malay, a nrl he mentions the frequ ency with whi ch .q is round end in g a sy ll a bl ~ in the former. \V ords beginning with the guttural 01' strong aspira te consonaut h are not found iu l3lay, Whil e th ose beginnin g with n{; are more numerous in 'ragalog thau in · Malay. H e could co unt onl y fifteen words ill th e latter whi c h begin with thi s guttural nasll l consonant. Were he better acquainted wi th hi s subj ect, 01' had he ever heard Tagalog poken by natives, he would 1I0t theu have failed to note the prevalence of the endings ay a nd oy, nor wou ld he ha r e failed to mark them as distin ctly beloug ing to th e language in vi ew of th e fact of the important use to which , th e form er llspecially, are put. Another prosodial 'ragalog peculiarity to be noted iu the CO LlI' parison with Malay is the infrequency with whi ch the liqui ds land " are round in the rormer coalescing with other co nsona nts Iu no geuuine Tagalog word that we know of appears an y of th e f' two liquids combined with anoth er consona nt a nd a vo wel ill the lirst, wl,ile it is very rarely found in th e las t, sy ll able of a word . This absence o[ a combination which is I'requ ently met with in .Java nese, and , although not so fre..qu entty , al so in [alay, does not see m, hOI" ever, to be due to any well· defin ed repu gnan ce of th e lan guage for syllables of this kind, uor to any deli ciency in th e native organ, fo r alar'o, trabajo, gracia, and similar Spani h words are taga lized witb· out any change of the consonaut sound anrl also es ity prononn cerl by natives. But, curious enough, Tagal g. wh en borrowing from th e Malay or the .Javanese, refuses to all 0 11' tb e,(' co mbin a ti ons to beco mf' naturalized without first having th em ex panded to two syllables by (1) {'r.wfurd .tiow. him.elf poorlv ."ql1ainl erl "ilh the 'l'n~nlog and the Spani~h alpbabets when he • • ys: (puge OV·CVI). "It bas, (T"~.lo~) bowever, tbe consonant. v and j, sound. unkoown Lo the Javauese and tbe Malay, altbougb 1 'trongly suspect tbat the cbaracter called by tbe Spanis h writers v is really no other than the English 10,"

XLII.

TilE TAGALOG

LANG AGE.

inserting between t he other cou30naut alHI the liquiu a vowel of the same kind as tbat fonnd in the original term, in the way the Mal. bli=Tag. bili, " to buy;" Mal. 1,raw=Tag. parao, "ship;" etc., show. The accord, th erefore, whi ch is claimed to exist in the phonetic character of the T aga log a nd the Malay does not seem to be such as to support th e theory of a common immediate derivation of the two languages f rom one and th e same parent stock. H av ing thus reviewed the differences in the alphabet and in the phoneti c character, the compari~on is now carried over to the other departm ents of the language. Tbat certain necessary accord must exist in the form and meaning of the words acquired by a language with those of the language f rom which they have been acquired, is only obvious. Ooe can see this ' acco rd in English with regard to the numerous words borrowed, either directly or indirectly, from Latin, without thereby the relation in whi ch it stands to that source being in the least altered. The value whi ch, for the support of the theory of a: direct derivation of T agalog from Malay, is to be attached to the number and class of most of th e words given in foregoing lists, has alrl'ady been estim ated . To the personal pronouns and numerals found therein, more va lue, no doubt, should be attached, and it was in consideration of thi s th at Humboldt has made of each class of these words a basis for his inquiry; but while acknowledging their greater importance, still we may be permitted to mention tbe substantive character of the~e words whi ch brings them nearer to the nature of nouns than to that of prepositIOns or dl 路ectives. The mere accord of the personal pro nouns in two differen languages doe, not seem, however, to afford suffi cient reason to regard them as having sprung directly from one and the same trunk. The case may he cited of tbe English "I" and " thou ," and the Spanish "yo" and "tu," both of which 路are traced, through th e Latin and Greek "ego" and "tu", "Eyw" and "Cll)," to the Sanskrit aham and tvam. , notwithstaoding the fact of the different degree of relations bip in whi ch th e two languages stand to Latin. Humboldt himself (3rd book, page 257) discovered that the Malagasi ahe, nhi. which is the form of th e objective case of the personal pronoun deprived of the initial iz, is ' the same as the Sanskrit allam, aud he believes (2nd book. page 33) that the point as 路 to whether or not the Kawi borrowed personal pronouns directly from Sanskrit requires further investigation. Even he once thonght of the Kawi twan being identi cal with the Sanskrit twan, (1) and he surely would not have changed his conclnsions had he found this to be the case. But, aside from the above facts, it does not appear that there exists the general accord which is predicated of .the personal pronouns in the two languages. As far as structure is cOlJcerned, we found that the ending yo of tayo, one of the forms of the Tagalog first person pronoun in the plural, and of cayo the form of the second perSOLl pronoun, also in the plural, could not well be accounted for by Humboldt; nor, as far as our knowledge goes, could they yet be related or traced to any other language of those spoken by the race. That yo in. cayo and not ca belongs to the radical, and is, therefore, the more Important of the two portions of the word, may be seen in the. fact of its persistency in inyo and ninyo, tbfl forms of the possessl ve case. (1) 2nd hook, page

3a.

XLIII.

INTRODUOTION.

As th.e forms of the personal pronouns are morE) num erou S in Malay than in Tagalog, in order to render the differences more perceptible to the eye, those of the one and th e other language are shown side by side in the following table: MALAY.

TAGALOG. Person.

Singular.

1st.

Aco

2nd.

lcao, ca.

Si.r a.

3rd.

Plural.

~ Cami,

tayo, quita=cata.

ku; hamba, IAk" d""/ sabaya=s a- f Kita, kami. ya, beta, pa· tek, guna.

Cayo, cam6.

(OgkoW' di kaw deng· kaw'kaw.tu-

Sil!\..

wan =tuan. {Iya. ia, dla , inlya,=iula,

L JMar'ika·itu.

fie .

Plural.

Singular.

Kllmu , mu.

the Tagalog pronoun of th e second person in the singular, ca is the form wbich icao geuerally assum es wh en coming after th e verb. Of the three plural forms of the first person prououn , carn t is exclusive, ta.'lO incJusi,'e, and qwita 0 1' cata, du al. On th e Malay side, we find that diik" is an eupbonious form, and 70'11 a contraction, of 'Uku; all the others, which more or less mean "slave," "servant,' are forms of submission which also serve Ior the plural , with se,qala, "all ," "everyone;" or any other word indicating plurality, add ed. The simplc plural forms are kami and Kita, th e form er corresponding exactly in meaning with its Tagalog counterpart; ki ta, however, cor· responding, not with qui/a but with ta.llO, in Tngalog, although its meaning in Malay corresponds with that of th e same form in other languages of the Philippines. In a way similar to that found in the Malay pronoun of toe first person , dikaw , dengkaw are the euphonious, kaw the contracted, forms of allrJkaw; t(oall= tttan being the submissive form which likewise is userl for th e plural with th e addition of some word indicating plurality . The simple plural form is karnu, with its contraction mu, .;orresponding with the, but locally used Tagalog form, camo, and with the general Olle used in Bicol and Bisayan. For the full and well fixed Tagalog form siVa 01 the third person pronouu in the ~ingular, there are found the loosely spread forms t.lla, ia, (Z'ia, ill'iya, inia, and lia in Malay; while for the Tagalog plural silti, there exists no propel' correspondiug form in Malay, the singular forms with the word n?'atlg, "people;" or the expression marilca·itlt, "these people here; " serving to palliate the deficiency. When comparison is made of the clean, compact and well·defined forms of the Tagalog personal pronouns and of their power for the expression of every shade of meaning in respect to pprson, number and case, with the broken, dispersed and ambiguous forms of those of the Malay, faint and purposeless in thei~ reference, the mind receives a first impression of the superiority of the Tagalog forms over those of Malay. For, the fact must be apparent to an'y unbio.sed mind that' the Malay personal pronQllns could not well devel?pe the power of expressing cnse and number, inasmuch ns case IS dependent on their position with regnrd to the noun, and

XLIV.

THE 'l'A GALOG LANGUAGE.

number on tbeir association with certain other words. One feels, th erefore, somewbat amazed at CI'aw1'urd's opinion to tbe effect that: "The neares t III proach of the Tagalog gramma r to the Mil· lay au d J a vanese, in so fa r} s th e m~re words lire co ?cer?e~, exists in the personal pro noun ; (DIssertatIOn, page CX UIl for It IS ratber: "the widest di fference" that he shou ld have said. This is the more surp rising as in tbe Grammar (page 25), speaking of tbe Malay p ersonal pronoun, he says: "Witb exceptions to be presently uamed, th e prououns like tbe nouns, are devoid of uumber, of ge nd er and of ca e, a statement whi ch, except in respect to tb e gend er, co uld not be a pplied to tb e Tagalog jJronouns. He was not, it se~m , iu a pnsition to a ppreciate well, not ouly the far greater syntactICal value of the rragalog p ersonal pronouns, but also the weight which in th e differentiati on is to be attr.i buted to th e endi ug yo, a distindly aboriginal element, found in tbe first person inclusive plural, and ill the seco nd person plural, prouonn s; aud to tbe i and si fon nd iu the fi rst sy llab les of idt",si.llft and silu, whi ch are pec uliar Tagalog word·building prefixed p arti cles. As to yo, sufficient has a lready been stated . As to i, it is found by Hum boldt, or rath er by his coutihueI" Bnscbmann, (3rd book, page 797) that it forms th e basis of tbe third person vrolloun in tbe lang uages of th e San· skrit fa m·il y. It is also found that in Tagalog it forms tbe first sylla ble of th e demostrutive i to, iy{m, while t he sound 0 of icao may be related to tbat of tb e demqstrati Ve of the far away object, yaon, aud to tbe adverb of th e terminus a quu, cl4on. Si is a prefixed particle a lso fou nd in Malay befo re nouns as in si kucia, "tbe team horse; " but usnally befnl'S those of pel's n , to denote familiarity 01' conte mpt. Ie is, besides, fouud in 'sial a, " wllo?" Sl. an l~ "suc!! a one." . T his particle is in Tagalog tb e arti Ie indicating personality and is never used with common noun s, except wi th those indicative of persons standing in tb e nearest deg ree of relationsbip tv the speaker I t is likewise found in isino?, " who?" and in tbis, tb erefore, may be said to bear the greatest analogy in the use to th nt it bas in tbe Malay; but tbe ana logy goes no further. Far from denotiug familiar ity or contempt in Tagalog, it denotes, on the contrary, sucb a great respect [01' tbe perso n in co nnection with whose uam e Or title it is used , as even to embody a referellce to the latter being uni que in kind and excl usively belongiL1g to tbe speaker. Tbi s may be seen, for instan ce, iL1 tbe om ission of tbt:: possessive prononn in the phrase si allul "(my) father," " the father (of mine); aud in tbe fact tbat if anybody werc addressed or referred to in tbis way wbo was not tb e speaker's real pareL1t., the expression would be und erstood to be one of an ironic ki nd 01' one lack ing in respect. But wb ere tbe particle is used in a way not th e slightes t approach to whi cb can be fonnd in a ny oMle r lan guur:e (except, perhaps, in the ma of th e language of Hawaii aud of those of New Zealand, ur, perhaps, in the ilay=ile!/ of the Malagasi) of those spoken by the Malay race, ~n~ wbi ch recalls to memory the Greek exp ression xai oi 7rEpi aur6v, 15 III the plnral sinu (sineltt in Bicol, sirit in Bi ayan) which, in so ~ar . as . it requires aRsociatio n with a noun , is distinctly an article JO~ICatl\1e of corupamonsb ip, so that the ex pression sina. Martin, de· spIte the fact or Marton being in t he sing ula r, will be understood as Mw·tin's faroily or Mtf.l·tin togetber witb bis associates in any other kind of relatiou. Tbe Malay leita, althougb not differing in structure from the sa~ e pronoun in 'fagAlog, diflers. however, widely in sense aud. use . (Jlttta =catu IS but seldom used in TAga log in the nom inative CASE" I1nd wben so used, it is decidedly dual, for it means, "tbou aud I

INTllODUCTION.

XLV.

alone" and not "all of us," as it is the case in Malay. Quiti£=catCt, while still retaining its dual character, is more freq uently used as referring to the speaker in the posse sive, and to the person spoken to in the nominative, case, with verbs in ' th e passive and in sen· tences tbe subject of whi ch is the second person pronoun in the singular and t,he agent that of th e first person pronoun also in the 1 2 singular. It would not be possible in Malay to, say "thon (art cudgeled ) 3 Th e construction lLl Malay, (by me)" in the same way as in Tagalog, as far as our acquaintance with this la ng uage euab les us to know , 1 2 3 would be this: an.Qkaw di pllklll·k,l, while in Tagalog it would be: 2

1·3

hinahampas quita=cata, whi ch bows well the dil'ferent meaning aud use of the Tagalog pronoun. Graw furd did not fail to record these differences, (1) but un oble to acco uut for th em iu any otb er way, he gives it as his opinion tbat Malays and J avanese probably borrowed from Tagalog these forms of the pronouns, Just what way tbis could be done he leaves the reader to conjecture, although sucb a borrowin g as this would seem to go again this tbeory of the inferiority of Tagalog and of a rocus of Malay civili zation whicb, irradiating from Java, exten..d ed itself in every direction over tbe wbole fn dian Archipelago His opinion, th erefore, ' altbough coming from such a high autbority in matters pertaiuiug to the Indian Archi pelago, will have no effect in cbangiug or otherwise altering the co urse of the present inquiry . It will be seen that certa in forms of so me Tagalog personal pronouns and certain elements of otbers bear close resemb lance or are even identical with the same in Malay; there are, howevet·, forms of the Tagalog personal pronouns and certain elemen ts in otb ers which are dist nctly aboriginal. Tilis fact tends to show that th e langnnge here. a elsewhere, whil e adopni ng in some cases the Malay form, retained, however, the original meaning, declension, use, etc. ; or perhaps, if we are to judge I'rom what is ti ll found in other Pbilippiue tongues, it fir5t adopted tbem an d then fell back again The accord s hows itself most in to the primitive pronouns. (2) th e fir~t and second person prononns in th e singular. It falls short, however, of the one that we find . to exist betwoe n the S1;>anish JIO and me, th e English 1 and me, and the Ge rm an ich, m i?' and mich , whi ch are no~, languages sprnng· immediately from the same trunk; while the differences in others, in the declension , and in th e use and meanin g oE ' all, mark them as distinctly aborigiual words a nd do not seem to Wllrrant the assumption of baving bee n directly deriv ed from th e sallle sOIll'ce as those of the Malay. The forms of the possessive pronouns iu Tagalog, as in most (1) Tbe Tagalog dual pronoun, and pronoun of the firs t person plural excluding the person addressed, have no such meanino: in Malay and JavRnese in which they can be uaed a. singuler. or plurals, altbougb, perhAps, more frequently as tbe latler. (Dissertation, page eXll 1.) (2) That in the Pbilippine Arcbipelago, as it . is at present and has for long time past been constituted, there exist wholly aboriginal forms of personal pronouns, tbe Tiruray. a dialect spoken by a tribe in the southwestern coas t of Mindaoao leland, proves. The persooal prononns therein are: beglte'l. l' HI;" bef!m.!.:::go, "thou;" been=en, "he," "she;" betom = lom. . IIwe;" "both of us;" brf.l"~.rI = gILf!,t " t· wel " not "thou aud 1;" betQ= to, "W8' (dua l;) begtnw= gom . "y e j" ben'o =1'0 "they, "

XLVI.

THE

TAGALOG

LANGUAGE.

other languages, are eit her the same with, or derived from, the genitive case of the persoual pronouns, and, th erefore, if this were Rlso the case in Malay, it would suffice to refer to the differences found in the personal prononns of 路the two langnages, and, then, to draw the same conclusion ; but Malay has not succeeded in developing any possessive p1'0nOUnS, a clenci ncy which the lang uage palliates by placing the personal pronoun a fter the noun of the object possessed, or by using words belon ging to other parts of speech, as p'IIlnya=ampu'f/!/ja, "owning;" a fact whi ch, ind ependently f rom any otber, shows clearly enough its iu[eriority in res pect to Tagalog. A more substantial acco rd thau in the personal, will be found to exist in th e demostrative. pronouns of the two languages, and, to all appearance, at least, the inflnence of the Maluy seems to be here predom inant. Sti ll, there exist oertain features hoth in the form and in th eir application which flo to impair this accord a nd seem to inoicate that the Tagalog aborig inal element refused, here too, to be displaced. 'rh e following tRbl e sh ows these pronouns in th e two laugnages: TAGALOG.

This here.

This.

Dini.

I tu=ya1'i.

That, (neal' yo u.)

Iyan .

MALAY.

That, (fa r away.)

This.

That.

Yarin.

ini.

itu.

Speakin g pRoperly , the Malay ~m is not found at present in T agalog. That it, owever, OBce existed in the langua ge, is proven by the obsolete val" Rtions dim? and . i, by subsisting in identioal form in the verb pl11'inz, "to co me here," whi ch is still in use, and by existi g also, with the sa me signification, in the Bicol language. The rraga log yal'i, now otsolescent, is not fo nnd in Malay among the demonst rati ves, but it is probably the jadi of the latter, and dadi of the Ja vRnese, languages, me:tuing "to become." The meaning of th e Malay 'ini is, therefore, divided into two accessory ones in Tagalog, namely, dint an d ito: dini indicating greater proximity than ito. On th e other hand , it may be seen that ito in Tagalog does not point out th e far away object, as it does in MaIRY, but it has the meaning o~ i ni in the latter la nguage. It is found, as already stated, in Bicol, however, with the sa me sig'"ification as in Malay. Another peculiarity of Tagalog, as far as tLe demvnstrative pronouns are concerned, aud o~e. ~ ot .to be found in Malay. n~r even in English, is that of the diVISIOn It makes o~ th e wide range oE meaning found in the Malay it,, ~ and in the Engli sh that, into iyan, fo r the reference to an object lymg nearer to the person spoken to than to the speaker, and varin for reference to an object far away from both interlocutors, as is Rlso the case in Spanish with ese and aquel. Anotber difference worthy of noti ce is that of Lhe impossibility oE using the Malay ?emon.stratives subs tantively. as can be done in Tagalog, they being, III th iS sense, rep laced by the perso nal prononns in Malay. It does uot seem that the co mparison of the demonstrative pronouns reqni res a ny fUI'Lher discussion, fnr a sufficient number of facts, it is believed, bas been bl'Ougbt to li ght to show their accord and disagreement in the two lunguRges, and to enable the reader to judge as to the degree of arfiuity and as to the weight they may have on the poi n t here at issue. . 'rh~ long struggle a lauguage carries on beEore it succeeds 111 aCclulrtng a clean separate term tor the expression of the relative prouonn , IS a well known fact, as is also known the circumlo-

INTRODuCTION.

XLVII

cutory means aud Lhe olher parls of speech, which, uulil l:,eu, it It is not surprising, uses aud has r~cours e to for the purpose. therefore, to find in Tagalog no specific term or parti cle exclusively set aside for the relative pronuun, nor to find the Malay yang used to perform, besides the function of the relative some of those which are assigned to the definite and indefi ni te artic le in English, and also to find it associated with tbe personal pronouns for the expression of that which, what, and similar terms whioh in English include bolh the That the iVlalay yang has not rolative and tbe antecedent as well. reached the full development of a relative pronoun, that it is rather the definite article, moy be seen in the fact tbat it cannot be employed as au interrogative and in that of its being used as a translation of the English article To the ends for which the comparison is herc made, it wou ld be sufficient to record the fact of the lack of acco rd of the relative pronoun in the two languages and tben to draw conclusions; but, the superiority of Tagalog over Malay having often been spoken of in this sketch, and finding this matter of superi ority intimately connected with the point here at issue, it is thought conven ient to say sometbing about a seeming deficiency in Tagalog whi ch might leau the reader to beli eve that iu tuis point the language shows it~elr inferi or to its-alleged sisler one. It has already beeu mentioned how a wkward ly lhe Malay yang fills the office of a relative, and it is well to sa y that the functions performed by the relatives in Malay and other languages possessing a word coined for th e purpose, are in Tagalog entrusted to certa in bich are intended for the euphonic particles ailed ligaments, linking in various ways of mutuall y related worels and senteL1ces to each other. The deficiency, then, which olle may be inclined to believe as a result of th e lack of a specific term, is tbus palli ated in such an efficient way as, IDOst probably, the Mal!ty yang could not effect. But this mauner of ex pressing the relati,e in Tagalog is neither exclusive nor iudispensable. Th e language possesses other means, not found in the Malay, nor, to ou r knowl edge, in any otbel' language of th e Indian Archipelago, the Malagasi exce pted, wbich practically dispense witl! tbe use of the above parLicl es. The Tagalog verhs, it will be seen, can assume cer tai n forms whi ch, associated with the article, may h.e used in the way of participial nouns, and inclnde a referen ce both to th e in direct object of the sentence, as the antecedent of sOIDe relative prononn, and to the relative pronoun as well. It will be seen that in ~u ch expressions as ang lIdinaquip , "the thing with which something was seize::d;" the sense of the words "with which" is included in th e signification imparted by the prefix y; and that in ang pinaghanapan, "Lhe place iu which something was looked for; " th e sense of " ill which" is included iu the significa路 tion imparted hy the su[fix an, which , it IDay be said, performs th e fUDctions of our relative, and thus the language shows, here also, its superiority over the Malay. In most Europeau languages tbe interrogative, are found to be thlo same as the relative, pronouns; but as Tagalog is not provided with relative pronouns in th e sense of our Europeau languages, it follows that interrogatives had to be iIDported or manufactured at home. This latter the language did aud accomplished iu a very satisfactory maDner. It does uot appear, however, that Malay bas ever used its relative as interrogative, nor that it has been very suc. cessful in coining terms for thi s kind oE pronoulls, as shown by the following table of the interrogatil'e prollOuus ill the two languages;

XLYTIT.

TilE

TAGALOG

LANGUAGE .

MALAY .

TAGALOG.

;,Anui', "wba~? ' "whiclJ?" ;,alin?, " whi cb?" one? " (discriminative); ;,sino¥ " who?"

ilpaP, "whet?" siapa? "wbo?'

Siapa is in !\Jalay formed as sino in Tagalog, from si, "a particle used prefixedly with nouns;' and apa, " jVhat;" and thus, .,·i r apa, "who?' and the T aga log pronoun, from si, "the arti cle of 'personal names," and ;,a11li?, " \\·hat' ·'? thu s, SI r n:no=co ntracted iisino?, "who?" In the arne way as ;,svno? in Tagalog, siapa is in Malay used for persons; but it can also be used adjectively in the latter, as .~ iapa omng ittl? "w hat (who) person is this?" shows, while it ca nnot be so used in Tagalog; the Malay apa, used for things, correspond ing with the Tagalng anU. In Malay, tb ere fore, a proper di criminative in terrogative for peroons and things as the Tagalog a/in? "wh ich? " " whi 2h one?" is wanting, and the word s nama, " name" , and mana. " where?" have to be resorter! to for palliating this defi· ciency. It appears that the VIal ay interrogative pronouns are invariable in tb eir reference to number, and incapable, therefore, of assuming the red upli cative plural form of t)le Tagalog ones. This, together with Ihe absence of a discriminative internogativ e co rresponding to the English "whi ch?" " whi c on e?" and with the dependence in which th ey stand, in Millay, to otb r parts of speech fo r precise reference, place them below the same in Tagalog, a nd rend er their accord with the lat~er a so mewh at precarious one. The fo llowing the list of th ose other pronou ns, generally termed refl ective, indefinite, istribntive, etG., whi ch are found in the two languages: TAGALOG.

MA LAY .

-----------------------------------Sm'ili, "seH;" il)(i, "other;" anomlin, alinnu;,n, sil11omtin; " what(so)evel' ," " whi ch(so)e\'er," " who (so)ever;" ba· lmlg na, "any; " btiua,t, i~ti, "each," "e\~e ry."

Di:l'i, send'i,,·i, kpndiri, "self;" layin, "other;' (tpaha'-ang, bUl'angmana, "what(so)ever," "which(so)ever;" bo.l·ang·siapa, " who(so)ever; ' barang, "any;' tiyap, masing·musing, sasatu, SaSa01'CL1}g "each," ."every.' -

Tbe closest resemb lance, it will be noted, in this kind of pronouns, is between the refle cti\1e for " self" and the indefinite for "auy' in the two languages. Th e Malay layin is found in Bicol with th e sa me meanin g The Tagalog indefinite pronouns anoman, alinman nnd sinonu:tn, cOlTespo ndiog with whi ch there are in Ma lay but loose rouud·about expressious, a re lormed from th e interrogat,ives .iust in the sa me way as in English wbat r eve1'=ano t- man, etc.. Although th e value of this kind of pro noun s for co mp!trative re ea rch is less than th at of those of th e other classes, it deserves, .however, to be noticed th at bere also th e abo rigin a l 'l'agalog element shows itself as predom inant. '1 he co mpariso n or the pronouns is herp closed anel deviations enough; it is beli eved, ba ve been noti ced to show that the accord on tbi g ·point of Taga log and Malay is not such as to wanant their classification a sister languages. ] be point com in g next, or those co vered by Humboldt' · in· quiry anel one of th e base~ fol' his th eo ry ot a common pa rentage of all these lal:!guages, is the acco rd which , he claim , they a ll show ID tbe expression of the num erals,

XLTX.

INTRODUCTWN.

Numerals are described to be the most abstract thing of the human miud and one not to be affected by any other surroundings. Thus, it has been suggested that th e systems of enumeration, iu the languages oj' two different peoples, is a more solid basis of eomparison of their languages If numerals do not vary in exp ression in the same degree with other kind of words, it is because, of all words, they are those which most obstinately maintain their iden tity of value. Of course, it is a well known fact that not all of them maintain this unity of expression with the same obRtinacy. The expression of the unity, for instance, varies in relation to the different kind of objects with which it is considered associated, while, on the other hand, the wide range of dispersion which the numbers "three" and "seven" have attained is well known. . While admitting, generally, and for purposes of the comparison here made, the truth of the above statement, still we may be permitted to draw some distinction between this tenacity of numerals considered as words or language elements, and their tenacity considered as ciphers, or arithmetical elements, of the people into whose language they have been adopted. The EUl'opean system of num eration has been taken from the Arabs, but in Spanish, th e European language which has borrowed most largely from tile Arabi c, the numbers are designated by terms derived from the Latin language. We may confidently assume that this would never have been the case had not the nation had a well devtlloped arithmetical system into which the numbers were deeply fixed and estabJished before the infusion of Arabic terms. With rude nations or with those that, although not entirely uncivilized, have mad e no appreciable advance in mathematical science, the contrary takes place, and we have a good example thereof in Tagalog and in the other ton~ues spoken in these Islands. Though the native syste.ns of numeration and the names by which the numbers were known, were, we must suppose, strongly fixed in the people's mind, they eaSIly gave way to those in Spanish, and we find at present these native systems superseded by the Spanish one to such a large extent that inuumerable people who are wholly unacquainted with tbe latter, make use, however, of the Spanish numerals in all their countings. 'This impairs the reliability of the numerals as a basis for comparing the different languages spoken by uncultured tribes, and the comparison in other respects does not sbow the full accord which is claimed to exist in the system of numeration of' tbe- Tagalog on one side, and that of the Malay and the otber languages spoken by the Malay people, on the other. The numbers in Tagalog and in Malay which offer the greate3t importance for comparison are brought side by side in the following table: ENGLISH.

One. Two. 'fhree. . Four. Five. Six. Seven . Eight.

â€˘

TAGALOG.

MALAY_

Isl1. Dalauit. Tatlb. Apat. Lima Anim . Pilb. Ualb.

SaÂˇsatu. Dnwa. Tiga . Ampat. Lima. Anam . Tujuh Dalapan .

THE T,\GALOG

ENGLISH.

Nine, Ten. Eleven. Hundred Thousand,

LANGUAGE,

TAGALOG.

Siyam , Pouo, polo (local) Lablng isa. Sang daan , Sang libo.

MALAY.

Sambilan, Sa·puluh. Sa·blas. Sa ratus. Saribu.

There exists, it mal be seen, identity only in the number "five, " and resemblance JD those of "four," "six," "ten" and "thousand." All the others may be regarded as entirely different or as containing some aboriginal Tagalog element. The Malay sa , seems practically to be the same ' with the the Tagalog is(t, bub the fact should not be lost sight of, however, that the i of the first syllable, which we have already noticed in icao a nd in other words, is also here a Tagalog element. Isa has a substantive character, while the Malay sa·sat'u, whi cu according to Humboldt may be a corruption of sa batLl, is ;]sed adjectively, as its meaning "one pebble" seems to indicate, and may be referred to sal'o in Bico!. Buschmann, Hum· boldt·s continuer, has attempbed ('1rd. book, page 266) to explain the Tagalog dalaua as a redupli cation of dna or luu, saying that the last a see ms to be "enigmatic" (riithselhaft); but, thus far, no one can see for what pur·pose such a reduplication could have been done, and we have good reason t.o regard this numeral, although ori· ginally derived from Sanskrit, a one containing, in its new form, an aboriginal rragal~ element. '1'1I1l Tagalog taUb is referred by Humboldt to the Sanskrit tri and has, therefore, no value for the comparison here made with Malay. The term fo r "eight," in Ta· galog ualo, is referred to the Javanese wolt~, while that for " nine," siyam, is clearl y an exclusively Tagalog on . Among the terms for high nnmbers, th e Tagalog daan, " hnndred;" is not found in any other language of those spoken by the race, a singularity which has been ackn owledged by Humboldt. (l) To its meaning, "way," "passage;" so me ethi cal idea, no doubt, was attached by the people, and Bu schmann 's argum ent, therefore, referring it (3rd book, page 765,) to tbe word dahan, " leaf; " is without the leas t foundation. The other terms for high numbers, lacsct, (10,000); and yota, (100,000); have been borrowed from 'the Sanskrit and have, therefore, lIO value for (;oUJparative purposes. Iu ~he counting of those tribes th at have adopted the decimal system of numeration, the lDanner in whi ch they ex press the number "eleven" aud "nine" is of importance for e~hnol ogi ca l and philological research . The form labing i s(( iu Tagalog is peculiar and dissimilar from that used in Malay. In the latter the ending bias may be considered as a su[fix COrt'e ponding to the English " teen." Iu th e Tagalog labing i Sli, labl is the a Iverb "more, " and the meaning comes to be "one more,' "one in excess", (than , or,:>f "ten'" understood) . ~n the Ma l~y sambilan, "nine;' sa, the first syllable, is the term used for tb e unIty, and bdan I S, accord ing to Crawfurd, the word ambel, "to take; " the meaning, therefore, heing "one taken ", (from "ten," understood). Thus the Malay "n ine' is for med by subtraction from, the Tagalog " eleven," on the contr!jry, by addition to, "ten." . Humboldt (3rd. book, pages 277 -27 R) has attempted to explain It1 the same way as the Malay sambilan the formation of the Taga. (I) Dar TIlg. daa .. sheinl ein go r." ffndf JeS ""orl 7.0 sin.

(al d . book, page 262.)

iNTRODUd'l'to}l.

Lt.

log styam, but there is not the slightest foundation for such atl identity of formation of the number in the two languages, and siyam , thus for, still remains a genuine Tagalog word. As a proof of the ease with which, in th e counting of rud e tribes, new systems are adopted, it may be meu I iOlled that, ill Father Francisco de San Jose's tim e (about th e middle part of the 17th century), the forms may catlfm,q isa for "21;" may cali mcing . is(l for "41; " etc. were still in use. 'rhe sam e was th e case still later, in 1<'r. Gaspar de San Agustin s tim e, (1703) whil e some oth er methods were also used, showing a lack of fi xedn ess which made him exclaim: "Hut Tagals are, in the ma nn er of counting, fi ckle and poor arithmeticians." (1) These form s cannot well be identifi ed with the special Malay one salikur and san bilang ·/ikm·, "2 L' and "29; " for the latter is in Malay appli ed only to th e numbers between 20 and 30; nor with the other tcingah·tiga lJuloh, "25;" for, th e con· struction and meaning are different iu th e two languages, that of the Tagalog being "there is one for three, fo r fi ve sco re etc.," an d that of Malay, "half of three score. " 'The form cag al'o, fo r " 11 ;' is still used in the Bico!. Although the above noted di screpancies may app ea l' sufficient to sbow that the accord whi ch ex ists iu the Tagalog and Malay numerals is not of such a kind as. to support t he theory of tb sir common parentage, it still remains to be noted that, to all ap pea rance, the ado tion of that part of this system of numeration which we may regard as having been tak en from th e Malay, superseded a native one. In Noceda's Di cti onary, on treating of th e word Imin, the following pas&age is fo und : "'rheir ancient maun er of counting was thus: l'sain, "one;" Dlt/lain, " two;' Mampat, " three;" Agyo, "four;" TOlldong, "five;" Gala, "six;" Manapi t, "seveu; " Saga, "eight; " Bulair, "nine; " TOI'O, "ten.' (2) Also is found in th e same dictionary (page 25) the expression sang bahala, for " 100.000,000," which is perhaps the same as th e Javan ese sa-bam. The difference~ found in the form of expression of th e cal" dinals in the two languages are, of course, also found in th e oth er llumerals. III the forming of th e ordinals, it is to he noted that bere also, the prefix i=y, fonnd in ic£to , iscC , etc., is prefix ed in 'l'agalog to the Malay ka, and that, therefore, th e Millay kalima, "fifth; " for instance, despite its similarity of form, is very different from the Tagalog ycalima. The term for "first ," in Malay pc'l,·tama, is taken from Sanskrit; while the Tagalog una is a native word. It does not appeal', then, from a co mparison of the numerals in Tagalog and in Malay, that th ere exis ls an y solid ground for believing them to be one and the same language, or languages baving sprung directly from the same trunk. The next point, covered by Humboldt's inquiry, on whi ch he bases his theory of an immediate derivation of alltb ese languages from one snd the same f!arent slock, is th e all eged accord in the . word· building of them all. In speaking of the grammatical forms we have already mentioned (see page XL) the possibility of coming across apparently identical forms in two different languages and th e risk (1) Pero 108 Tagalos en eT con tar, 80n varios y maloe aritmetic08. (Gram . mar, chapter VI, parag 2.) (2) Anti~uamente conta ban aeL leai.. , uno. Duai.. , do. . M.mpat, Lr ••. Agyo, cuatro. T07ldong, cinco. Cala , .eis. Manopit, aiete. Saga, ocho. Bli/air, lIu~ve, Toro, diez. (Dictionary, page lbO).

tIt. which the searcher is liable to incur of erroneously classi~Y l ng them as sisters to each other. The first item mentioned by Humboldt (3rd. book, page 2801 of accord in the word·building of the two languages, is that of the f<,rmation of abstract nouns from verbal or adjectival roots. It is a fact that both Malay and Tagalog make use of .. the prefix, Mal. ka=Tag. ca, and the suffix, Mal. an=Tag. an·han, for the purpose. Thic accord may be seeu, for instance, in the Malay ka ·mati an, and the Tagalog ca·matay·an, " death; ' from, respectively, mati and matay, "to di e;" but we do not find mentioned by Humboldt the fact that this mann er of forming a bs tra ct~ is not exclusive in rragalog, and that, coupled thereto, the language has also the form with the verbal prefix pagca, thus, pagcamatay =camatayan, "death." In the comparison of the two languages and in connection with the attempt here made at sep'l" ating from all foreign elements in Tagalog, that other element wh(ch is regarded as aboriginal, reference has often been made to the language having sometimes adopted the Malay term and rejected the Malay formation, and son::etimes, on the contrary, of adopting the Malay word· building method and rej ecting the native term, etc. Here, it seems, while the language adopted the Malay method, it, however, preserved at the same time its own. Nor can the Malay suffix an. when used without the prefix ka, be identified with the same in Tagalog. In Malay it forms ouns expressive of the action, in Tagalog nouns ex pressive of the place or instrument for the action, of the. verb. This may be seen in the Malay minuman, "what is drunk." "the kind of drink; " and th e rragalog inunllin, "the drinking vessel. " It is to be regretted to at Humboldt did not mention other noun·building processes of Tagalog which are not found in Malay and cannot be fully described in a sketch of this kind . The reader is referred to the proper chapters in the Grammar for further acquain · tance with this subj ect, as only the brief notice of some which is found in the following table, can be given here.

Part.

Root.

Signification.

Compound.

~Ignlflcatlon

Ca.

Sama. Hapon . Poto!. Solid. Ama. Ama. Nacao. Sulat. Biro. Tali.

Accompanying. Afternoon . To break. To spin. Father. Father. Stealing. Writing. Jest. Tying.

Casamll. C1ahapon. Capotol SlDalid. Iuaama. Magamlt. Magnunacao . Manunulat. Magpabiro. Panta li.

Companion. Yesterday. Bit. Thread. Godfather. Father and child Thief. Writer. Jester. Tying rope.

" In. " Mag.

Man . Mapag. Pan .

The adjective building Tagalog prefix ma is not found used for thi~ purpose in any other language of the Malay people, the Malagasl excepted. In Malay, adjectives, except those formed with the verbal prefi x ber and a noun, as be/"· bud'~ "wise'" from lmdi, "wisdom;" . are d!stinguishable from the nouns o~ly by their position, :~hu~, ptttth ,~ayu~ m,eans: "the wh iteness of cloth; " and kayin putih, willt; cloth; while In Tagalog the expressions are, respectively, ang caput~an nang cayo, and ang cayong mapuU, a fact which shows the Tagalog construction as being that of a language which has attained a greater development than that of Malay.

ttt!. Neither in Malay I'or in any other language of those spoken by the race, nay, perhaps not even in any other spoken in the world at large, is there anything identical with the Tagalog verb, a near approach to which is found only in that of the langnages of Madagascar. The review which is intended to give to this part of speech in the present ontlook will be found further on in the chapter devoted to word·declension, and in the comparison of same with that of the Javanese language, the verb-building processes in the two languages being here only considered. It will be found that in both Malay and Tagalog the verb in the infinitive, or rather in the second person of the imperative, may be a radical or a compound word, and that radical verhs are fewer in comparison with those formed from other parts of speech by the application of parLicles. As far as comparison can be made here, some hint of the • verb·building processess in the two languages is given in the following table: TAGALOG.

MALAY.

Root Soay , "dispute"

Verb.

Part.

Kind.

Signification.

Root Bantah, "dispnte"

Part.

To be en· Ma·soay. Intrans. gaged in Be/,dispute.

Ma-

Verb.

- -- - -

Kind. Signification. - ----

Ber-banTo be ip Neut. dispute. tah.

Mem-ban· Ofact. To dispute. tah. Mem-banTo contra· Trans di ct. Mag·soay. Trans. " " both Mem-i tab-i. Magparties. MagpaTo cause Mem- Mem-ban· Caus 'ro dispute Caus. Magpa- soay. tah·kan. over. dispute. katz To dispute M e m- Mem·banTo dispute Man-oay Freq. Manfrequent- and re· tah ·ban- Freq. frequently. Iy. dup. I tah. Mem\ To dispute in th e Mag·so. Mag-an. Reflect. with each second ay·an. other. me m - B," membantah. To be con· bel' and 'ro dispnte Soay.in. Pass. -m. tradicted. l'ed. of Refl. with ea<;h Pag-soayD ' the ra· other. Pag-in Do (int.) 0, mtens. d l. ca I , ID. Bel' ban .\ To contra01', bel'- tah-bau Inst. dict be - red. of yY-soay. pass. cause of. the rad . tah·an. ) S-um·oay. Of act. To dispute Mem-

-Um-

"~hi

+ an. Loc. To contra· DiPag-an. Pag-soay. an pass. dict at.

To be cou· D i·b an.' P tah. ass. tradicted.

This is what is reqnired in order to show the verb·building process· es in the two languages; but the verb in Tagalog may adjoin other particles and assume other significations, and bas, besides, a much more complex conjugative mechanism which there is no room in a sketch of this kind to describe, so the reader is, in this co nnection, referred to the extensive view of the subject which is given iu the Grammar.

Ltv. To the ends for which the comparison is here made, It may snffice to say that the accord in the verb路b nilding processes of Tagalog and Malay lies only in both lauguages generally req niring the IlSSOciatiou of certaiu parti cles to develope the verbal power from the root. The particles employed for the purpose and the sense which they impar t to the action of the verb a re gen erally different in the two languages. 'fhe Malay verbal particle mem, with its vilrio us forms me, meng. men, and meny , which seems to be somewhat similar in strncture to the Tagalog mag, is used in l\1alay to form ,"erbs of action , while the formation of this kind of verbs is generally in trusted in 'fagalog to the particle t~m . Th e particle of intra nsitive verbs is in Malay ber, and in Tagalog ma; also all other particles and senses im parted, as the table shows, differ in tbe two languages. The dissimilarity ap pears to be greater in the particles used in each lang uage for the passive voice. The Malay passive parti cle is d路i, sometimes be)' and tel', and is always a prefix; the Tagalog particle is in, either prefixed, infixed ar suffixed, alone or associated with other particles . The suffix i, it will be seen, is in Malay used to form transitive verbs; while i-y is in Tagalog a prefix forming a speci al kind of passive and imparting senses very di ffe rent from the one it imparts in Malay. It will be an error to identify th e M'alay suElix kan with the Tagalog an. Kan s used in Malay to fo rm causative verbs; an, in 'fagalog, to form a special kind of passi .. e. This as ide from the fact that there is some reason to believe that kan is the Malay preposition akan suffixed to tbe verb, while an in Tagalog ca nnot be tvaced to any such origin. In Malay tbe use of the various inseparable particles is mostly co nfin ed to th e written language. They are but rarely used in speech, and there is greater reason for believing that the simple radical was once fo und sufficient fo r all ideas of a rude people, than for believing with Humbold t that th ese particles have been originally more nu路 merous aLd became later, either conglomerated with the root, or replaced . by other separate forms o~ expr~ssion. The co mparison of the word路building methods in Malay and 'fagalog might be ca rri ed further to th e other pa rts of speech, but no other poin ts are covered by the review which Humboldt gives to the subject in the tbird book, pages 279282 . Thus far, the accord whi ch is claimE;d to exist on this point between Malay and Tagalog do es Dot seem to be such as to warrant their classification as languages derived immediately from one and the same parent stock. Less than the space of one page is devoted by Humboldt to show the accord of tbese languages in word-declension, the fourth and last basis fol' hi s theory. H e commences by saying: (3rd. book, page 282). "Also the comparison of the scanty word-declension found in these languages shows by remarkable accord their clos(l parentage, and especially that of Malay with all the other remaining languages." (1) 'fhis is the point in whiCh, most probably, Tagalog ~tudents can hardly concur with the great philologist. Our own opinl.on is to the effect that, had not Tagalog shown any other deviations froll Malay than that which is found to exist in the word-declension of the two languages, still it would be entitled to be classified as a distinct langnage a nd one of a distinct parentage from Malay. ""Vord-declension ' 01' " word inflexion ' (Wortbeugung), as under . (1) .Auch die VergleichuDg der wenigen Wortheugong. welche diese Sprachen besll zen, zelgt durch auffalJende Uebereinetimmungen ihre Dabs Verwaodscbaft, uo<\ lIameotlicb die der Mal. mit den lIbligeu.

lNTRODUCTION.

LV.

stood by Huinboldt, cannot be properly said to exist in any of the languages spoken by the Malay race; but least of all can this be said The only thiug foul~d in Malay of the present Malay language which may be termed, with some degree of propriety, iuflexion or declAnsiou, is found in the contracted possessi ve case, and in the simple plural, forms of the personal prououus; in the occasional rE'o duplicative plural with nouns, and in the yerhal forms, that is to say, in the enlarged form which a root assumes by adjoining a particle which gives it a verbal signification. The iutenogatiYe kah, which is frequeutly used suffixed to the verb. has no definite verbal character, for iL is used also in couuection with all other classes of words. As to the personal pronouus, it bas already been said that ku and ml', although generally affixed to nouns and verbs for tbe possessive case, are also used as nomiuative forms, or ratiJer IlS forms for every case with or without a preposition precediug; and that the In fact, for plurals kita, kami, kaml' Ilre also used for the siugular. the plural iu Malay, the same forms of submission which were given as singulars in the table are used with segala, "all ;" or some other word indicating plurality, added. As to th e reduplicative plural form with nouns, it is fouud that it is only occasionally used, aud that the use of any of the adjectives bUliak, sakalian, "many;" "all;" etc. or of a numeral, is more frequently resor:ed to. As to the verbal forms, it has just beeu said that th eir use is almost entirely confiued to the written language, and that they seem lo be a late acquisition, llot the relics of a former stage of developme nt in the language. Generally speaking, therefore, it may be said that there exis ts uo declension or inHexion at all in Malay. If there is a language, among tbose spoken by the Malay people, of which it can be said with allY degree of proprie!,y to be inflective, such a language is the Tagalog. It is quile certain that noue of the otherd went 60 far in the way of acquiring a definile inflexional character, and Humboldt himself seems to acknowledge this fact in the statement he makes and which is given in this outline. (pages XX-XXI. and foot-note 1) Tagalog has an article of comlDon aud propel' nouus oE things with declension in the singular, and auother of personal llouns with declension, both iu the singular an d in th e plural. Nothing of the kind is found in Malay. All the prououns a re inflected and have case forlDs, the demoustratives for the singular, all others for the singular and the plural, persoual prououus having, besides, two forms in the possessive case. Superlatives of a cer tain kind and rliminu路tiYes, the laOtter especially, are formed from the root by redupli cation and affixation, that is to say, by an interual modification of lhe word which, if uot properly inflexion, is, however, the [il'st step taken ~n ~he direction of acquiring one. There is no iufiexiou for gender, it IS true, but the attempt made by ~he lauguage at providing itself with gender forms may be soen in the use to which the endings ay and oy, when tagalizing proper nouus of persons, are put, after the terms having beeu made adaptable to the phouetic character of the language hy certain other chauges in their structure, ay being applied to the name of the female, oy to tilat oj' tile male, person. In his review of the 'I agalog verb, Humboldt says: (3rd book, page 349, parag. 42). "No Tagalog verb co ntaius in itself auy indication of person." (1) The degree of trutll which IDay be attached to the (\)

Kein Tag. Verbum

eDth~lt

die Andeutuog der PersoneD to sich.

LVI.

THE TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

preceding statement depends largely on what ideas one entertains abo nt inflexion, and on what construction one places on the writer's Humboldt, surely, never pretended that whatever words "in iL1ielL" is found of inflexion in Tagalog should have attained the degree of development whicu it attained in Latin , for instance, nor could ue pre end eiLher that the Spanis!l friars of the sixteenth century should have the same philological knowledge and the same ideas about inflexion as he !lad in the n ineteenth. It is a fact that they were not wholly successfnl in the adaptation of the Spanish alphabet to Tagalog, nor in the manner in wh ich they attempted to express by the accent linguistic peculiarities which would have been better expressed by other orthographical signs. The facts are: that tbe second person pronoun in the singular has in Tagalog two forms, iciio an'i ca, the former being used alone or before, and the latter being used after, the verb; that in th e possessive case this and all other pronouns have two forms, one prepositive and the other postpositive. Now, if it is considered that the forms of the possessive case are those by which the agent of the action expressed by the verb in the passive voice is indicated; that ca, the postpositive form o' the second person pronoun singular in th e nominative, and the postpositil'e forms of the possessive case of tb e same and the oth~ pronouns are generally monosyllabic, and, therefore, shorter than tbe prepositive ones; one cannot refrain from asking: For wba urpose th ese double. monosyllabic, postpositive forms but fo r that of being suffixed to the verb? And wbat else was required but that tbe first Spanish friars should have written, for instance, naparitoca, instead of napaTito ca, "th u camest here;" (pa)patayinco, instead oE (pa)patayi1 co, "I will kill it;" ibigaymo, instead of ibigay mo, "give it" etc, to hav.e, here also, what is generally called inflexion in other languages? :tn fact, this has been done by them to some extent in tbe writing f the Ibanag and the Pangasinan, and was also d('ne in Malay with leu, ml~, 11a, by those wbo later transliterated the language jnto the Roman character. That the presence of tbese shorter forms co uld have no other purpose but tbat of affixation, the language shows clearly in the fact that it leave~ the postpositive construction without any ligament or tying particle of those it requires in the case of any other two words mutually related and following each other. Thus, in the case of a prepositive construction of the examples given above, it could not be said : icao napa1"ito, but icao ay naparito; aquin (pa)patayin, but aquing (paJpatayin; iyiJ ybigay, but iyong ybigay. In the active voice it is found also that the postpositive construction is the one more generally used. That Humboldt himself has somewbat taken the same view with regard to the suffixing nature of these postpositive forms of the possessive case or the personal pronouns, the following passage seems to indicate. (2nd book, page 124). "Tbe 'fagalog annexes to the passive form, in cases when the agent is expressed by a pronoun, the same always in the genitive, and where this genitive becomes a contracted su ffix, in this form . One is thereby compelled to consider the passive form as a substantive connected with the suffix of the possessive pronoun. " etc. (1) He acknowledges (3rd book, page 373) that the man conj ugation is founded chiefly on phonetic changes. (2). (1) Die 'faga\iBcbe Wgt der PasBivform, weDD die baDdelDde PersoD durcb eiD ProDomeD ausgedrOckt wird, daBBelbe immer im Geoitiv uod wo die.er GeDitiv zum abgekfirz~n Suffix w!rd, in dieBer Gestalt 3D. MaD wird alBO darlurcb gezwun 路 geD, die Pssslvform alB eID mit Sufih: des Besit zpronomeDB verbundeDee Subst. aDzueebeo, etc .

. (2) -Die eigeDtbOmlicbkeit der 3.- Conjtrg; (mlln) herubt grlS.stentheil. aul der mit Ibr verbundeDeD Bllcbstabenveranderung, uDd iet in80fern phonetish.

LVII.

lliTRoDUC nON .

Humboldt refuses in another pad of his work (3rd book, page 3.16) to regard these postpositive forms as snffixes; because, he says, "In the case of a genuine suffix, the accent changes from a radical paroxytone to an oxytone compound," thus giving to understand that no such chan!!'e takes place in Tagalog. In this he is somewhat mistaken, for there exists the oxytonitlg of the compound with many imperatives. Proceeding with the review of the Tagalog verb, he immediately says: (3rd book, page 3.19, parag. 43). "Neither is the number connected with the person indicated in any other way." (I) Still .this is trne only with certain conditions. We have seen in the preceding paragraph that by aFfixation of the postpositive forms of the personal pronouns it. would be possible to give a certain kind of person and number inflexion to the Tagalog verb in the passive voice. This, however, could not well be done in the active voice, for here the nominative is the case required, and as a double nominative form is found to exist only in the second person prononn singnlar, the use of the personal pronoun with all the others may, therefore, appear indispensable for the expression of nnmber. The fangnage, however, which frequently leaves the subject understood, bas also in this point taken a fi~st step to the Rcquisition to a definite verbal number form. Among the numerous verbal particles there is one, magsi, that, it will be seen, has no other province tha'n that of expressing mnltitude of subjects and is not used in the passive, and that the particle mag denotes, too, sometimes, the plural, and sometimes, the dual number. Most frequently, however, nga, th~ pluralizing p~rticle man{ja in disguise, is introduced to denote plurality, so that, for instance, nagaa1'al will denote that somebody or ~ome people is or are studying; but nangagaaral will denote that it is neither I, nor thou, nor he, but that it is we, or ye, or they that are studying, without the use of a plural noun or prO[loun being required. The above particles refer to the subject, but the language has, besides, a verbal particle, magca, to denote the multitude ur plurality in tbe object. Thus, the expression may idang ang alila co, will simply indicate that "my servant owes some money;" but nagcacautang ang alila co will indicate that he "has many money debts, that he is deeply in debt." Speaking of tbe Tagalog verb, Humboldt admits in another place (3rd book. page 1S95) that number is sometimes denoted by the conj ugation or by the verbal particle. (t) Whatever may be said in this respect of Tagalog applies with equal fOlce to the other languages of the Philippines whose unity and common parentage have been called in question only by Crawfurd. We find that the Bisayan, or rath er the Panayano, has gone further in the differentiation of numb er with the verb, for in the paSsive, we find, for instance, that guimMhat co, means: "it was made by me;' and guimpamithai namon, "ib was made by us." As an attempt to tense differentiation in the same tongue, by rejecting the reduplicative process, the forms nagabithat =nagbubuhat, "I work;' magabuhat=magabuMhat=magbubilhat, "I shaH work ' may be mentioned. But where the wide stride made by 'Tagalog in the way of acquiring a definite inflexional conjugation is shown', is in the peculiar forms the verb assumes for the expression of voice and tense. (\) Eben80wening wird der mit der Person verbundene Numerus auf andere Wei.e _ngedeutet. (2) Er wird im flectirten Verbnm durch d â€˘â€˘ Pronomen angedeutet. Biebeilen aber wird er aucb durch die coni ugation8form angegeben.

LYIIT.

THE TAGALOG

LANGUAGE.

This inflexional conjugation, or rather tendency to acquire inflexion, is understood to be the attempt a language makes at providlpg itself with new or. more precise grammatical forms by soldering ready路 made stems with meanipgless particles, or with sounds, into one compound, and then, at having the latter altered by enlarging or otherwise ohanging its internal structure, in order to add some accessory or at modified signification to the radical idea. Whether the alteration takes place at the beginning, at the middle, or at the end, or whether at two or at all these points at the same time; that is to say, whether prefixes, infixes, or suffixes, ooe or two at the same time, are used for the purpose, the attempt is not im paired; nor even when there is found in the language a separately coined word for the expression of the same accessory or modified idea which the internal modification has added to the compound. , Tagalog, in this respect, far surpasses any other language of those spoken by the race, and in some of its complex grammatical forms, perhaps even the Sanskrit itself, it being a matter of doubt whether the language should Pot be classified as belonging to the Sanskrit family. To show how the language proceeds in pressing a number of accessory ideas into one grammatical form, the demonstrative ito, has here been selected for the purpose. Ito at once suggests a primi. tive form, to, no .longer found in the language, combined with the actual prefix y=i We have therefore: RADICAL.

Ito. Diversification of the radical signification.

Nominal and adjectival. lto, "this."

y erbal

and adverbial. D-itO, "here."

Primary verbal compound.

Pa-r-ito. "to come here." Pa-r-'i to-hin. "To be ordered to .place oneself here."

Y-(ca)-pa-r-ito. Pa-r-ito-han. "To come here on ac- "To come here to pay couut of. " a visit to."

Secondary verbal derivative,

Mag-l'a-r-ito. "To order to come here." Pag-pa-I'-ito-hin. "To be ordered to come here."

I-(ca)-pag-pa-r-ito. "'fo order to come here for the sake of. "

Pag-pa-?'-ito-han. . "To order to come here to pay a visit to."

Potentialization of the secondary verbal derivative.

Maca-l'ag-pa-r-ito. "To be able to order to come here." Maca-cl-um_ito =maca-r-ito. "To be able to place oneself here."

Maca-pa-r-ito. "To \>e able to come here. "

t NTiwbuc1'!oN.

tit.

Ma(;a-pag':'pa~d-um-ito. Maca-pag-pa-r-tto. "To be able to order to place one· "To be able to order to come here." self here." Na-pa-l'-ito-hin. Na-d-um-ito . "To have bt'en able to place oueself "To be able to be ordered to place oneself here." here." N a-pa-?·-ito-han. Na-pag-pa-d-t'm-ito . "To have been able to order to place "To be able to come here to pay a visit to." oneself nere. " N a-pag-pa-r-ito-hin. Na-y-pag-d-ito. "To have been able to be placed "To be able to be ordered to come here. " here." Na-y-ca-pag- pa-r-ito. N a-y-pag-pa-d-itu. "To have been able to order to be "To be able to order to come here for the sake of." placed here." Na-pag-pa-?·-ito-han . "To be able to order to come here to pay a visit to." These are only the forms corresponding with the English in finitive, and they must still undergo other changes for the ex pression of tense. Thus, we have: Y -qu-in-a-pa-pa-?·-iLO. "To come here for the sake of. " (present) Y -ca-pa-1Ja-r-ito. The same as above. (Cuture). Na-pag-pa-pa-l'-ito-han. "To be able to come here to pay a visit to." (present.)

None of these particles is found to exist, either as a sub· . stantive word or as a directive in the language, nor can they be separated from the verb as is the case with the separable particles iu German. They have the same properties the zero has in our system of numeration; lire without significance if alone, and highly significant if combined with the radical. Those passive forms of the Tagalog verb which are formed with the particles in=hin and an=han are . in the infinitive, imperative and future, inflective in nearly the same sense this can be said of Latin. 'rhus, Lat. am-ol'=Tag. sinta-hi?!, sinta·han, Lat. amabor=Tag. sisinta hin, sisinta·han, etc. The other tense forms consist in phonetic change and in reduplication, that is to say, in certain internal modifications in the structure of the radical or the compound, and thus the process is one which approaches nearest to the inflective as it is understood of the Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin languages. It is mainly this that renders Tagalog quite a different language froin all others with which it was intended to classify it as being allied or sister thereto. None of the others spoken by the race uses this process, and outside the race. it is found that those having in their conjugative mechanism reduplication, use it for the past tense. Only Tagalog uses reduplication for the present and the future tenses, and in this it shows itself more logical than the others; for if with reduplication continuanqe or further development of the action is indicated, these ideas agree more wit,h the present and with the future. than with the past, tense. Humboldt acknowledges this singularity of Tagalog in various places of his work. Speaking of verb tense·forms, he says: (2nd book, page 153). "The 'ragalog is in this the most regular; it is the only one which uses the reduplication of syllables for the ex·

t:t. pression of tense." (1) In another place, (2nd book, page 79) ha says: "In 'ragalog the expression of tense by a chauge of letters and by reduplication forms in this point an exception," (2) It seems, therefore, that some inconsistency exists between bis views of the matter as contained in the preceding remarks and what is found furth er on, when, speaking of the Tagalog language, he says: (3rd. book, page 316). "In the grammat:cal form and at the fir3t glance, it seems as if the dissimilarity (of Tagalog) from the other languages were exceedingly grea t. In ~he essentials of it, however, one soon discovers that the accord here is one even more remarkable. The common characteristic of the word not altering for declension or conjugation, and that of the expression by particles of the adjoined modifications are here the same, and such is also the case with the soldering of t hese particles at the beginning of the word." (3) And again (pages 288289). "It (Tagalog) possesses long and ingeniously elaborate forms, and has a grammar complex and diffic ult of reviewing. But upon closer examination, is found, hete also, the same system of the Polynesian language; looseness of iuflexion and expressiou of the gramma tical relation by separate particles." ('*) Now, th'ese views of the great philologist are somewhat difficult to understand. That there are case forms in the two articles, and in the personal, demonstrative and interrogative pronouns; that all of them, except the article 0 common nouus and the demonstrative pronouns, ha vtl also plural forms; that the passive voice, in lI).any cases, is expressed by a par'ticle adheriug to the eud and not to the beginning of the root, hall been showu, it 's believed, in this and former chapters of this outlo ~ l1umboldt, itj seems, could not well uuder· stand the nature a these particles, nor accurately appreciate their importance and Qffice in the language. For him this particle word·buildiug system lies at the basis of all these languages and is the form wh ich they all have originally assumed, the particles having been later worn away and replaced by other separate forms of ex· pression. His theory in this point is, that Tagalog has more than any other preserved the form of the parent language, and that these particles, therefo re, are liable to be discarded in a more With all due regard for an ad\'anced stage of development. opinion coming from such a high authority, we beg to say that facts seem to point out a different course. The decay which we appreciate in 'ragalog· is largely due to its comparatively present particle impoverishment. It is a fact that these particles are less numerous in other Philippiue tongues which Rre known to be in a stage of developmeut less ad vancec1 than Tagalog. Every particle going out of use is a net loss to the lauguRge. That this is the • (1) Am regelmasBigBten iBt auch hierin die Tag. Sprsche; Bie iBt die einzi&e, welche die Sylhenverdopplung zur TempuBsndeutung gebrsucht. (2) 1m Tag. mscht die Bezeichnuog der Tempora durch BuchBtBbenverilnderung nnd Reduplication hiervon eine AUBoahme. (8) In der grammatiecheo Form Bcheillt zwar auf den erBten Anhlick der UnterBchied gegeo jeoe UherauB groBB, im WeBeotlichen mimmt man aher bald die, noch merkwUrdigere UehereioBtimmuog wahr. Der allgemBine Charakter, daBB daB Wort Bich oicht verHodert, um declinirt oder coojugirt zu werden, und dass die ihm heigegehenen Modificatioo"o du~ch Partikelo aUBgedrUckt Bind. ist anch hler der nllmliche, uDd ebeoBo die Aoheftnng dieser Partikeln an den Anfang de. Wort •. (4) Sie beBitzt lange und kUostlich gebildete Formen, und hat eine Bchwer zu Ubereehende, verwickelte GralIlmatik. Allein genauer untersucht, lIndet sich daBselbe SYBtem der Polyn . Sprache wieder, FJexionBlllsigkeit in Declination und AndeutuDg der grilllllllatiscben Verbilltllisse durch abgesonderte Partikel~.

tit.

tN>rROhucl\-tbR.

~ase, the particles taga and para which we must 8uppo~e once existed

in the language, since they are still found in other Philippine tongues, will show. Taga is in Bicol the particle forming verbs denoting lhe occasional, pam l the frequentative, p~rformance of an action. It is possible, therefore, t9 say in Bicol: 2 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 nagta(taga)sllmt aco. nagpa(pam)si~rat aco 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 "I write occasionally." "I (am) (constantly) (writing)." And it will be equally possible to say the same by means of adverbs as in English, 1 2 3 1 2 3 nagsus/ll'at aco (cun boot cun mins拢tn) nagsus/trat aco gttil'aray 2 1 3 1 2 1 3 "I write occasionally." "I am constantly writing." While in Tagalog it could only be said: 1 2 3 1 2 3 hihirang sumgmusitlat aco parating sungmusitlat aco 312 3 2 1 2 "I seldom write." "I am constantly writing." and we cannot conceive of Tagalog being more developed, in this point, tban Bicol, becanse it possesses but one of the two different forms found in the latter for th e expression or the same idea. We are aware, however, of a theory in language science to the effect that grammatical forms are more numerous and synthetic in proportion as we approach tbe origin of the language, and that these, later, are resolved into briefer and more analytic forms and expressions; but we contend that the theory is not applicable to 'l'agRlog, for, bere there are fonnd both tbe one and the other form. Thus, the apparently cnmbrous form 1

(maca) (pagpa) (I'ito) of the foregoing examples (see page LIX) can be resolved into the simpler and more analytic one, similar to 1 .2 3 1 the same in the English language; mangya1'i magotos lJarito, "(to be able) 2 3 (to order) (to come here;)" and equally so for the others there given and all similar compounds. We find something of this kind in the English language, when we say, for instance, "to overdo" instead of "to do too much," and we caunot see why the language should be more developed if it possessed only one of the two forms. As to Hnmboldt's theory of the word in Tagalog undergoing no change for conjngation, a charactel'istic, according to him, which reuders its orig.in and parentage to be the s~me as that of Malay and the other langnages spoken by the race; iu so far as the Tagalog tense路forms are concerned, and in regard to the influence which this may have for pnrposes of language differentiation, we believe that the fact of saying ill! Tagalog.

Malay.

magstlln'tlat aco

alm {lndak surat for "I shall write;"

cuts as wide a difference in tbe degree of relationship of the two langn{lges, with regard to the supposed parent language, as tbe fact of saying in :

Spalllsh.

English.

~~~~

1~~w~

Italian.

German.

10 scrive1'fJ

1ch verde sclweiben

cuts between Spanish and Italian on one side, and English and German on the otiler, with regard te th e Latin scribam. The comparison of Tagalog with th e Javanese is now taken u p; but in order to avoid the unn ecessary length which a direct comparison as that made with Malay would require, and in view of the fact of f req uent identity or close analogy of th e Malay and the J avanese, it is though t convenient to use occasionally the comparison of these two languages as a pojnt of reference for the comparison wi th Tagalog. On po in ts, th erefore, where identity or resemblance is said to exist of the Malay and the Javanese, the reader should understand that the same di ffe rences which· have )jeen noticed between Malay and Tagalog, exist, too, between the latter and the Javanese. Beginning with the al phabet, we find that the vowel system is essentially the same in bo th languages. As in 'ragalog, so in Ja;vanese the sound of e (laling) and i, those of 0 and u, are frequently The peculiarity most interchanged or confo unded with each other. deserving to be n ticed of the J avanese vowel·combining system and one in which H sl ows th e widest deviation from Tagalog, is the absence of t he dipht ngs ay and au, hich are of so frequent occur· rence in the latter. It is far beyond the scope of the present sktltch to go into t lte intricacies of the J avanese alphabet. It is only to be noted that its present complex and highly elaborate arrangement in which, although not disposed in the metrical order of the Dewanag1'i, still the in· fl uence of Sanskrit is manifest, seems to be th e continuation or perfection of an ancient simpl er wri ting character, in which, probably, not only the Javanese, but also th e Malay were written . This ancient Javanese alphabet, there is some reaSOll to believe, was the same as, If the fact of all or very similar to, the ancient Tagalog one. syllab les in J avanese beginning with a consonant, and the one of syllables in 'r agalog frequently beginnin g with a vowel or being oth erwise com plex, are taken into I' ccount, the lack of something as the vimma in the Tagalog alphabet and its inadequateness for express · ing the sounds of the language, suggests the belief that this ancient alphabet could have been invented for the Javanese language only. The same general accord which is found to exist in the vowel, exists also in th e consonant, systems of the two languages. 'rhe presence of the consonants ch, j and 11, and the absence of the strong aspirate h. which in Javanese may be said to be a mere sign for the eye, render th e diffe rences with Tagalog the same as have been appreciated of th e latter with Malay. As noticed by Crawfurd (Dissertation, page xix) the phon etic character of the Javanese, a.lthough it much resembles that of th e Malay, still shows some con· slderable differences. The pronunciation of the Javanese is less soft than that of the Malay and , th erefore, comes nearer to that of Tagalog. Ano ther difference affecting the pronunciation is the greater . recurrence or nasal sounds and of the sound ii , and the more frequ ent coalescence of I and l' with the other consonants and a vowel in the syllable. It has already been noticed (see page XLI) that Crawfurd could

LXnt. oount in the Malay dictionary only 15 words beginning with nli; but he INTRODUOTION,

himself has counted no less than 590 words beginuing with this nasal in Javanese, and in this, therefore, the latter shows greater analogy to Tagalog. The fact that the fusion of two a's into one is freqnently found in Javanese, while it is seldom, if ever, found in Tagalog, is to be reckoned as a difference in the two langnages. 'fhe greater accord existing in certain points of the phonetic character of Javanese and 'fagalog over the sarno of the latter and the Malay is, it may be seen, counteracted in other points so that, in the main, the amount of difference comes to be the same or nearly the same as that appreciated of these latter two languages. So far as the phonetic character is concerned, the same inferen ce must, therefore, be drawn; there seems to exist no real ground for the belief that Tagalog and Javanese are languages sprung directly from the same trunk. As to the pronouns, it is found that there are in Javanese not fewer than 20 forms for the pronoun of the first, and 12 for that of tile second, person, owing to the fact that there are forms which belong to the popular, and to th e ceremonial, language, while others have been taken from the Kawi or reco ndite language of the Island ; but of all these, however, the only forms common to Javanese and Malay are: aku, ku and mtt. Considering the num erous forms for the pronoun of the firsb and of the second person, it is remarkable that the Javanese has no proper form to express that o[ the third person; for dewe in the popular, anJ pillambalc in the ceremonial, language mean strictly "self." The forms of submission, here too, serve for the plural as in Malay. Thus, kawula, abbreviated kula, for example, means "slave or servant" as iVell as "I" and "we." The differences having been noted which exist between the Malay and the Tagalog personal pronouns in the chapter devoted to the comparison of these two languages, no further data are here required to he adduced in evidence for sho wing that the accord found to exist between the Javanese and Tagalog persoual pronouns is even poorer than that found to exist iu those of the latter and of Malay language. In the same way as -in Malay, possession in Javanese is indicated by putting the pronouQ representi ng the possessor after the noun of the tbing possessed. However, in the expression of the possessive case with nonns, and coexistent with th e Malay method, is fonnd the more advanced process of putting the particle ing between the nonn of the object of possession and that of the possessor, as in Tagalog. The somewhat more snbstantial accord which was said to exist (see page XLVI) in the demonstrative, over the personal, prononns in Malay and in Tagalog is found t!J be even greater in those of the Tagalog and the Javanese; for in the latter is found 0. characteristi;: i sonnd for the designation of the near, an a sonnd for that of the distant, and an lot sound for that of the middle, object, which, although ~o not coincide, correspond, however, better with the same in Tagalog, as may be seen in the following table: This. That (near you) 'fhat (far away.) Ito, ini, Yal路i . Iyan. Yaon. lki. lku. lka. The demonstratives in Tagalog, it has been remarked, can be used hoth as substantives and adjectives. In Javanese, the above

ENGLISH. 'fAGALOG. JAVANESE.

TUE TAGALOG LANGUAGE. LXIV. forms are used as adjectives, and the forms maku, kae and kiye in the popular, wa7w, pttrlikt~ and puniki in the ceremonial, language are used as substantives Of course, these and the other Javanese pronouns are likewise devoid of gender, number and case, as in Malay. The terms sing in the popular, ingkang in the ceremonial, and kan in either, language sen' e in Javanese to render the relative Vronoun ; but, th e same bere with thes~ words as in Malay with yang, th e Javanese term have no defin ite relative character nor well fixed office in the language, th ey being also used for th e same purposes for which the definite article is used in English and in most other European languages. . As it is generally the case with any other words in Javanese, the interrogatives have forms for the popular, and for the ceremonial, language; but in every other respect they do not, upon the whole, differ, especially t.hose used in the common langnage, from the same in Malay . Sintm in tbe ceremonial, and sapa in the popular, language correspond with tbe Malay Slapa, and the term in the popular language is form ed ill the same way as this last is formed in Malay, wbile the term pttnapa in the ceremonial, and apa in the popular, language correspond to the same form in Malay. As in the latter, so in tbe Javanese bhe interrogative fo r persons is used adjectively, and all of them are, besides, used as merely a mark of interrogation . As to the other pronouns, we have seen that the reflective for "self," dewe and 1(iyambalc, al'e used as substitutes for the pronoun of the tbird person . 'rhe fo rm fo r the indefini te "any" is, as in Malay, ba1'ang, and t at for the English distributive "each," although peculiar in itself, offer no interest for the purpose of this comparison . No compound pronouns are given in Javanese. The accord, then" found to exist of the pronouns in Javanese and Tagalog is, the demonstratives excepted, either the same as, or even smaller than, that founu to exist between the same in Tagalog and in Malay . Thus far, it does not seem to be such as to support the theory of buth languages having been derived directly from the same parent stock. That the differences in the comparison of the numerals may be more easily appreciated, the fo rms of expression for the same in Malay and in the popular Javanese language are offered to view in the follow ing table:

ENGLISH .

One. Two. Three. Four. Five. Six. Seven. Eight. Nine. Ten. Eleven. Twenty. TwentyÂˇon e. Hundred.

MALAY_

JAVANESE.

Sa, sawatu, suwatu, Sa, sawiji, siji. satu. D.uwa. Loro, roro. Tiga . Tiiln. Ampat. Papat. Lima. Lima. Anam. Niiniim . Tujuh. Pitu. â€˘ Dalapan, dulapan. Wolu. Sambilan, salapan. Sanga. Sa-puluh. Puluh. Sa-bIas. Sawalas. Dnwa puluh. Rongpuluh. Duwa puluhÂˇsatu. Salikur. Ratus. Salus.

INTRODUCTION. The difference which one may be iuclined to appreciate iu the expression of the unity is not a real one The trne numeral is sa in both languages, but the unity in Malay is considered in refPfence to batu, "a pebble;" while in Javanese lhe reference is to wiji, (the Tagalog billhi) "a seed." The form lO/'0=1-oro for ".two," offers some For reck01llng the numbers deviation from the general form dua. between twenty and thirty, the Javanese has a nomenclature of its own uot found iu Tagalog, and only occasioually found in Malay_ In adopting the widespread Malay decimal system of numeration, Tagalog incliued more to the Javanese, than to the Malay, nomm clature for the numbers "tilree," "seven" and "eight" It also inclined to the Javanese in rejecting the numerous Malay adjuncts. The cardinals in Javauese are adjectives aud not nouns as in Malay, and so in the construction they follow the noun instead of preceding it. The ordinals are formed with the prefix ping, of which no traces are found in Tagalog, sapisan, "firsti" being formed somewhat irregularly. The comparison of the numerals in Tagalog aud in Javanese discloses the fact that there exists a greater accord of the cardinals iu the two languages than that which is found to exist of the same numerals in Tagalog a nd in MalaYi but in the ordiuals it is found tLiat Tagalog inclines more to the Malay system, in so far as it uses a prefix which, although containing a native element, is the same as that used iu Malay. To the fact, however, that the numbers froql eleven to twenty are formed in Tag!tlog in a manner different, both in word and in sense, from the same in Malay and Javanese, is accorded more importance for comparative research than that which may be attached to any degree of accord existing in the mere structure of tbese words. Nor is it necessary to state again here the reasons we have for believiug that the importance of numerals in this connection has been somewhat overrated, or to go further into arguing the case in order to conclude that the accord in this point is not such as to make the two languages appear as derived directly from one and the same trunk. What is fouud peculiar iu the Tagalog uumerals has been already atated, and the reader is refer!'ed to the proper chapter for auy additionpl data he may require. As to the word·building methods of the two languages, we find that the noun -building one of k(c)a H'oot + an is common to both. The same as in Malay, we have in Javauese karnt£l'ahan iu the popular language, meaniug "liberality;" from nl1wah, ' ·Iiberal." But Javanese has other noun· building processes (none, however, corresponding with the Tagalog pagca r root) whicb, ill this point at least, brings it nearer to Tagalog. The signification of the Javanese uominal compound is sometimes identical with, sometimes differeut from, the same iu Tagalog. Examples of ideutity are:

Tagalog. Pag-gaua. Pa-ligo-an. Nacao-au.

Signification. The doing. Bathing place. 'fhing stolen.

Javanese. Pang-gawa. Pa·(aldlls an. Begal.an.

Slgnlflcatlon. The conductiug. Bathiug place. Thing stolen.

Examples oE dissimilarity are:

' I, a m6 go.. Anao an.

beheading "I The instrument. Brood, litter.

IPa· alO b Ieh . i1

Anak an .

Butcber. Doll. 9

L..."'CVI.

THE TAGALOG

LANGUAGE.

'rhe greater analogy which the preceding facts_ show to exist in the noun-building processes of Javanese and Tagalog over those of the latter aud Malay, is of importance; for,. as the above comÂˇ pounds are, fo r the most, derived from verbs, similar analogy will be found to exist in the verb-building methods: The fact, however, that J avanese has no adjective building particle, and that adjectives, therefore, are, as in Malay, only known by their position in regard to the noun , greatly impairs the value which, for purposes of parentage, might be attached to affi nities of this kind _f As in Malay, so in Javauese a word, be it a noun or a prououu , is determiued to the signification of a verb by the application of particles, aud tense is ex pressed by adverbs or modals, ' the J avanese auxiliary for the past being wus, which corresponds to the Malay sudah, talah, etc.; aud those for the future, anip and bade, which correspond to llIau and andak in Malay; but the verb iu J avauese deserves, however, more careful consideration than the same in Malay, as it shows greater analogy with the same part of speech in Tagalog than that which has been noticed with Malay. Not that there are in Javanese the numerous verbal pa.rticles foun:! in Tagalog, nor even all those which are found in Malay; t mt there are some which there is some reason to believe Tagalog has borrowed from the Javagese language. The partioles which the Javanese popular language has in common wi th in 'Malay, are: â€˘ The suffixes

~ =~ke. l - akan. di-

for transitive verbs.

'1'he prefixes (for the passive voice. { kaA proper Javanese particle is the prefix a- for transitive verbs . 'rhe particles which the language has in common with Tagalog, are: The infixes, m, pl'ect:ded by the suku, thus forming -um-, for neuter verbs, and Âˇin-, for the passive voice. The particles which Javanese has in common with Malay and the peculiar Javanese prefi x a- have no value for the comparison here; but the others which the language bas in common with Tagalog have an importance thflt can hardly be exaggerated. Tagalog is fo und to contain a greater numoer of verbal p'articles tban any ' other language of those supposed to be of the same parentage. These particles, it will be seen, begin all of them, except one, with nI, and have two 'forms, one beginning wit.h nI for the active, and another, generally beginning with . p, for the passive voice of the verb. The particle which makes the except ion in this general accord of n!-beginning prefixes is Un!, which, besides, has no propel' form for the passive voice. Over and above its oddity of form , the particle has in the langnage no definite office; it s.o m~tim es intrudes ,?-pon the functions assigned to other particles, or IS Itself vague Ol' arbitrary in its appliG8tion, as thp. urn-verb has freq uently th e same meaning a3 the mag or same other 111 begtnniug one. E very thing seems to iudi cate its exotic and superfluous character, and thus the particle might well be discarded without great loss to the language It may be, however, that casual observers find that Un! is necessary for the formation of certain intransitive verbs and for others which denote acquisitive acts, alleging, perhaps; that in the case of roots of an ambiguous import as alis, "moving;" hili, "bartering;" etc., from wiJicb intransitive verbs or verbs denoting an acquisitive action,

lNTRODUCTtoN.

LXVII.

on one side, and transitive verbs or verbs denoting actions of an alienatory kind, on the other, are formed, as: umalis, "to go away;" oumiii, "to buy;" and mag alis, "to take out; , magbili, "to sell;" etc., the action denoted by the um verb could not well be expressed otherwise; but if the. genius of the language and the methods it employs with other similar roots are carefully considered, it will soon be found that, as in the case of magidang , "to borrow a great deal;' and magpaittang, "to lend;" from {dang; "debt;' if um did not exist, the forms would be magalis, "to go out;" magpaaUs, "to take out;" magbiU, "to buy;" magpabili, "to sell;" etc. In fact, natives say: magpasial, for "to take a walk;' magcomprar, for "to purchase;" from the Spanish pa· sear and comp,·m·, which have the same meaning as umalis and bumili. It is also true that outside Manila, in districts where little or no use is made of the particle, people say nalis, nacm=b)iU for "gone out," and "purchased ;· ' and in the Bisayan, the using of um or ma is altogether voluntary. As the particle is neither found in Malay nor in any language of the others reviewed by Humboldt, the Malagasi excepted, we may assume that it was imported from Javanese into Tagalog. Even greater importance than to the presence of um, is to be attached to the presence of the passive particle ill. Although 'fagalog has two more particles for the passive voice of the verb, still ·in· is the principal, as it enters into the composition of certain tenses with the other two. lt is to be noted carefully that ·in· js in Javanese always an infix, while in Tagalog it is sometimes a prefix, sometimes an infix, and sometimes a suffix. That it cannot become a prefix in Javanese is explained by the fact tbat in- requires a vowel with which to be combined and as no word in the language begins with a yowe!. the particle finds no means of application as a prefix. The fact that it cannot become a suffix, lies in the different nature of the Javanese con· jugation from that of the Tagalog, and is of importance in the present comparative study. In=hin (in Ilocano en, in Pangasinan ni, and in Bicol and Bisayan on and un) is in Tagalog suffixed for the imper· tive and for the simple future, but as in Javanese the imperative is formed in a special I' ay by appending the vowel a to the verb, and as the future is, as in Malay, expressed by adverbs or modals, the particle also here finds no use as a suffix. In point of fact, no fealure can show better than this the peculiar character of the Tagalog ve.rb, for, as an, the other Tagalog passive particle, is suffixed in the imperative and in the sin..ple future, so the language, on importing the Javanese infix -in-, used it as a suffix for those two lenses. In the comparison here made of Tagalog and Javanese no notice, of course, is taken of Humboldt s hypothesis of a possible derivation of the structure of the latter from the former; or of what seems more probable, Crawfurd's opinion, of Javanese having borrowed pronouns and, possibly, some other words and forms from Tagalog. Both these conjectures may be well grounded, but in SQ far as the fact cannot be historically verified, we refuse to have this elelllent of doub~ introduced into the present inquiry. Nor has it been allowed to be mfluenced by what Humboldt says (2nd book, page 123) of the Javanese having borrowed from Tagalog and not Tagalog from the Javanese, the particle in. (1), His opinion on this point would (1) Die PaBBiv!orm durch EinBchiebuDg deB in iot dem Jav. mit dem iagali.cben gemeiDschaftliob. DBr UrspruDV BcheiDt aber in dem letzteren lU Jiegen, weil die Form dort weiter entwiokelt und mit zwei anderen, ganz Uhnlioheo io Verbiodung gebracht lit.

LXVIII.

T"IE TAGALOG LANGUAGII.

be entitled to more consideration than the above two conjectures, had he not. indicated in another part of the same book (page 198) that this and the particle t~m had been handed down from the Kawi. At any rate, if this supposition proves true, no further proof is required for accepting Crawfurd's opinion to the effect that whatever is found common to auy two of these languages, tbey have acquired by long interchange between th emselves, not that they have received it from a third language_ Having in foregoing cbapters referred to the peculiar character of the Tagalog verb and somewhat indicated the importance whicb, for purposes of com parative research , we at-tach to whatever has anything to do with this part of speech, the reader will, perhaps, Ieel inclined to regard the presence in Tagalog of two verbal particles which, in all probability, bave been taken from Javanese, as an indication of a probable common origin of both languages. We fully realize the importance of this fact, and we even should be driveu to admit nf one and the same immediate parentage, were it not for the fact that these two particles, althougb very important, are not esseutial to Tagalog Tbe indefinite character and superfluous office of the particle ttm have already been mentioned, ar;d it is only pertinent to quote here what Totanes (Arte de la Lengua Tagala, page 41, 搂 140), writing one hundred years ago, says about this point: "It is only to e noticed that it;! the mountain region the nse is very frequent of only the Doot with na prefixed, for the present tense of tbis kind of vel'b," (wn). (1). The passive particle in is mnch more necessa~y ; but it is not, however, indispensable. The langnage possesses otl er forms and means of expression which, tbough with loss, it is true, practically dispense with its use. Not to men tiou the frequency with which the other two passive forms, with the prefix y and with suffix an, take the place of that formed with in, by referring to what is the direct object of the verb in the active 'Voice, the method, frequently resorted to, of using na for the present and tbe past, and ma for the futUre, tense, prefixed to the root or to the passive verbal compound, and the use of the root, or of the latter prefixed with ma, for the imperative, is employed as a substitute for the form with in. Thqs, th e fO)'ms (ma)tangap co, natatangap co, natangap co, matatangap co, " be it, it is, was, will be received by me;' may be, and are frequently used, for tangapin co, tinatangap co, tinangap 'co, tatangapin co; and pagalis 'Ina, napagaaits mo, napagaUs 'Ina, 'Ina ' 'pagaalis 1110, "be' it, it is, was, will be takeu out by thee;" may be used for (pag)a1isin mo, (p)in(ag)aalis, (plin(ag)alis, (pag)aalisttl 'Ina. , Qne may be inclined to find iu the occasional use of an for the passive voice in Javanese some analogy to the same suffix in Tagalog; but in so far as tbis is th e case ouly in poetry and seems to be don e rather for euphony's sake than for any word路 building purposes, we may assume that the resemblance to the same Tagalog passive particle is merely accidental. In 't he word building methods, then, especially in verb路 building, the Javanese shows greater affinity to Tligalog than that which has been noticed of the latter to Malay; but as those elements and forms which we may suppose Tagalog borrowed from Javauese, although important, are not, however, essential to tbe latter, since if they were taken away still tbe langqage will be available as an in (1) eolo hay que notar que en 108 montes usan mocho de s610 la raiz COD na, antepuesta para el presente de esta especie. (""').

INTRODUCTION. strument for the conveyance of thought, we may conclude that the two languages are not related iu the same degree as Italian and Spanisb, for instance, are to each other: In Javauese, the imperative excepted, it is found that word· declension iu otber respects is the same or nearly the same as t.hat which has been uoticed in Malay, the grammar in both languages being formed on the some general priucipal of the expression by prepositions of the relation in nouus, the formation of the verb by the annexlj.tion of pacticles, and the absence of auy inflexiou for genier. As in Malay, there is, properly speaking, no article in Javanese and, therefor(j, no decleusion of this part of speech, as we have seen to be the case wit h Tagalog. Pronouns are likewise devoid of case endiugs and generally of plural forms, these latter, in what regards the personal pronoun, eveu to a greater extent than the same in Malay. Iu tbe Javanese verb, it is fouud that the formation of the imperative is effected hy what may be regarded a true inflective process, which is not found iu Tagalog, the appendage of a to the verb. (1) This and and the presence of the infixes -wn- and -in· made Humboldt believe (3rd hOOK, page 321) that Javauese has, more thau any other, the appearauce of an infiexional language. (2). ' We shOUld readily concur in this opinion of the great writer, if there were found in Javanese present and future inflective tense forms, aud if tbe lauguage bad case and plural inflective forms for the article and for the pronouns, as the Tagalog has. In what regards those forms which both languages have in common, the comparison shows, here as elsewhere, that Tagalog" while borrowiug, if it really ever borrowed, words, forms and methods from the Jav. 8nese and the Malay, has however, preserved its own. Such words, forms and methods as appear to be peculiar to itself are essential to the lauguage. 'Without them, a sentence could not well be constructed aud their elimination would certainly result in destroying the efficiency of the language as a vehicle of thought. V'le must, therefore, conclude that Tagalog is a language different from the other two To the comparison just made between Malay, Javanese aud Tagalog, ou those points covered by Humboldt's inquiry of the same and the other languages spokeu by the Malay race, a few notes on syntax are added here, which, it is believed, may go to strengthen the theory of the different origin, aud of the snperiority, of Tagalog. Nothing can be'ter expose to view the true character of a language than its syntax; and nothing can show better the different constitutiou oE Tagalog from Malay and Javanese and its superiority over these two languages than ~yutax comparison The syntactical value of words in Tagalog is not dependent on their position with regard to other words in the sentence, as it is largely the case with the same in Maloy and Javanese; but in their form or in the pre· .position which precedes them and makes knowu what their office is in the sentence. An adjeotive will always 'be au adjective, a possessive al ways a possessi ve, whether coming before or after the noun, Ot· after the object of possession . In uo case is the agent or the subject made known by the place it occupies with relation to the verb. (1) Trace. of a proce.. .imilor to thi. here mentioned, bowever, may be found in tbe inquisitive long .ound aM and eM uttered by Tagal. after tbe verb. and in the tenee.building metbods of otber Philippine tongue •. (2) Sie bat auE der einen Seite durch die EiD.cbiebuDg de. in und '"'' nDd durcb die LautverllDderuDg d.. Verbum., die .icb Diebt deutlich al. die Folge eine. angebliogteD Prliflxe. darthnt, den Schein. deD f1ectirenden I:'pracheQ naeller zu Btehn.

LXX.

THE TAGALOG

LANGUAGE.

The distinction hetween the adjective used as epithet and the same used as predicate is made clear by employing certain endings or separate particles not to be found in the other two languages. Thus, ang mar(tnung na tauo, or, allY tau(mg marunung means: "the wise mlln;" while at~g tauo ay ma1·(tnung, means: "the man is wise." It is in this way that the lack of a specific term for the expression of the copulative verb is counterbalanced and the notion of "being" is conveyed in quite as clear a way by ay as it is by ada and ja-ti in Malay, or by ana Ilud dadi in Javanese, or even sometimes in Latin as the following passage taken from the Bible (First Epistle of St. Paul to the Corinthians, chapt. 4, verso 10.) shows. Nos stulti propter Christum; vos Cami ay manga mangmang dahil autem prudentes in Christo; nos cay Cristo, nguni,t, cay6,i, maruru· infirmi, vos autem fortes; vos no· nong sa paquisamll cay Crjsto; cami biles vos autem ignobiles, (where ay mahihina, uguni,t, cay6,i, malasumus and estis are understood) lacas; cay6,i, may capurihan, data· poua,t, cami ay may capulaan. The presence in Tagalog of a pluralizing particle and that of one article of commou nouns, aud another of proper nouns of persons, and the greater syntactical value of the Tagalog adjectives, pronouns and verbs over the same in the other two languages have already been mentioned. It is also to be noticed bhat among the various ways of forming the comparative of equality and the superlative in Tagalog, that of affixation is preferably resorted to. Although reduplication is mainly found iu language to be a sign of rudeness, Taga~og employs it, h()wever, in smaller degree than, and for purposes different from, Malay and Javanese. The way in which it is used for the expression of tense, is tantamount to an inflexion, and it rarely a£fects the whole word, but the first two syllables and most frequently only. the first syllable of the root or particle. But the most peculiar syntactical elements in Tagalog are the ligaments, that is to say, certain particles adhering to the firat, or placed after the first, of two words between which some gram matical relation exists. The relation between the thing possessed and the possessor is expressed by a preposition; the one between the verb and the subject or the agent, when the latter follows the :verb, aud that of the predicate and the subject, when the latter precedes, are expressed without any ligament or other directive; all other relatiorls require the use of the ligaments Thei,r office in the sentence may be seen, for instance, in the expressions: alinmang tauo magcasala sa Dios, "every man sins against God;" and alinmang tauong magcasala sa Dios, "any man who sins against God;" ilOng babaye .<inisintlt co, "I love this woman;" ilOng babayeng sinisinta. co, "this woman whom I love;" iyang manfla tauong .maya(ya) man, "those rich people;" iyang manga tauo ay maya(ya)man, "those peoQle are rich." Humboldt (3rd book, page 291) says' "The ligament connecting method, on the other hand, seems, in all the Malay family of languages, peculiar only to the Tagalog." (1) . The second peculiar syntactical element lies in the rela· tlOuS which the passive forms with '!I and an of the verb in Tagalog establish with their subject. These forms, not found in any (1) Die VerknUpfnnllsmethode scheint Ubrigens der Tag. 8prache 1m Mal. 8prachstamm allein elgenthUmlich zn seiD.

INTRODUCTlON.

LXXI.

other language spoken by the Malay race, except in the Malagasi, where they are very properly desiglJated by the French grammarians as the relative forms of the verb, show the peculiarity of, gen· erally, taking as subject the thing which stands in the grammatical relation of indirect object or any of its divisions in the Latin or European contruction, and of embodying the relation established by the preposition and by the relative pronoun as well. It is in this way that the paucity of proper prepositions in Tagalog is palliated. Such a brief hint of the construction with these forms as can here be given will be found further on in the comparison made between the Malay and Javanese construction. As a result, therefore, of the existence of this peculiar syntactical element and of the high degree of expression found in the others, the Tagalog syntax is one of much greater freedom than that found in any other language of those supposed to be of the same parentage The loose and unconnected strudure of Ma,1ay and Javanese admits of very little inversion and, consequently, of very little variety. The gram· matical relation in those two languages depending largely on the position of the words, the construction comes to be a rigid one and allows no transposition of the various elements without otherwise forming a mere jumble from which it would be impossible to extract the meaning. Humboldt (2nd book. page 173) referriug to San Agustin's Grammar says: "Tagalog leaves generally the adjective to precede the noun, but it also does the contral'y and possesses other special means to make its relation with the substantive known.' (1) It is only natural, since a word in Malay and Javanese is determined to the condition of\ a noun or an adjective by juxtaposition that it can assume one only of the two, but not the two positions. 'fhas, "big house," is in. Tagalog.

---

Mal~y .

Javanese.

Riimah besil[. Omah gede. (2) Malaqulng bahay, or, bahay na malaqul. Did not bestir and gede mean both "big" and " bigness" in, respectively, Malay and Javanese, they, then, could lie put either before or after the noun, but there being no different form for the su~staDtive and for the adjective, their meaniug the one or the other must be made dependent on their positio!l with regard to other words. In Tagalog there exists, generally, a different form for each of these two kinds of words; thus, laqui=calaquihan, "bigness;' maZaqui, "big;" and the adjectivl), therefore, can take any of the two positions without the syntactical relation which it is intended to establish being thereby impaired. No one, we believe, will fail to perceive the superiority, in this point, of Tagalog over the other two languages. The same uependence on the position is found to exist in the case of two nouns. Note the construction in the three languages oE the phrase, "The king's palace: " Tagalog

Ang dalam nang hari, 01', ang sa haring dalam,

Malay,

Astiifia raja.

Javanese.

Kadston raja, or, kada· tone raja.

(1) DJe TagaHecbe E'pracbe 1I1•• t dae Adjectlvum gew6bnlicb vorau.geben tbut aber auch daB Gegentbell, uod beaitzt Mittel, die Verbinduog deeeeibeo mit dem Sobel. oocb be.oodero keontlicb zu macben. _ (2) Tbl. i. in tbe pop,;,lar language: In the ceremonial language, it will be griya ageng, wbere tbe constructIOn IS tbe ·same, only tbe form oftbe words beiog different.

Lxxn.

THE TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

In Javallese, it is true, tu ere exists the Ulethod , of illserting a particle between the two words, similar to that found in Tagalog; but in no case can the Tagalog construction of putting the noun of the possessor before that of the object of possession be used in either of the other two languages. No one, we believe, will fail to perceive the superiority, in this, too , of the Tagalog method. Humboldt, speaking of the various ways of using tbe person of the verb, says: (2nd book, page 162) "Moreover, it is worthy of notice that in Tagalog the pronoun follows the verb while in Java· nese, and regularly in Malay, precedes it." (1) Humboldt should have said that in 'l:agalog the pronouq, or rather the subject, may comjl either before or after th e verb, which is not the case iu any of the other two languages. Compare the sentence, "I eat," in: _______T __a~ga_l_o~gc·.______________M __a~ ________J~a_v_a_n_es_e_.______~

Aco,i, cun gmacain, or, cungmacain aco.

Hamba santap.

Aku mangan.

Over and nbove the greater flexibility, in this respect, of the Tagalog construction, it deserves to be noticed that cttngmacain is the form which cllmain assumes for the present tense, while santap and man· gan are the same form with the infinitive, a fact waich shows well the greater syntactical value of the Tagalog verb Of course, this freedom is much greater for the consiruction of the sentence with the verb in the passive voice. The careful atteution of the reader is invited to the rendering of the following complex sentence: 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 This letter (is written) by me upon this tabJ'e 9 10 · 11 12 13 14 wit h t his pen t 0--£ 0 r m y £ a the r . Tagalog.

Malay.

Javanese.

2 3 2 1 3 2 4·5 4 3 !tong slllat (ay sinusula.t) Surat ini tertulis oleh Tinulis dak serat 45 7 6 5 6 8 8 6 c@ (sa ibabao) nitong sahaya di·atas meja sa·du\\·ur papan 7 8 9 11 9 11 10 9 11 lamesa nang panulai ini deugan kalam ini sam b i kalam 10 1:l 13 14 12 14 13 12 14 13 (na ito) sa aquing ama. papada bapa·ku. karana banu ku.

1 iki 7 iki

10 iki

'Ne understand that the Malay and the Javauese construction could not well be changed, while the sentence in Tagalog will admit of the inmumerable constructions which the synopsis hereafter shows. Before showing these mauifold forms 6f cons truction 'in Tagalog, it is necessary to give' some idea of certain peculiarities of the lab· guage, without which the reader cannot well. understand the mat· ter of tbe freedom in the syntax which it is intended here to illustrate. 'fhe nominative case form of the common article is ang; that of the demostrative prO!loun for the near ohject, is itii. If ito co mes before the noun no article is to be used, for the rtemonstl'ati \'e is understood to take its place; but if it comes after the nOllO, the article should then be used before the latter. Thus, iu the above 0) Es ist Ilbrigena merkwiirdi(l:. dass im Tag. das Pron. dem Verbum nacbfolgt, da es im Jav. nnd eigentlicb Mal. ibm vorangebt.

Lxxm.

rNTRODUOTION.

sentence, to say: itimg slilat is the same in meaning as to say: ang sfrlat 11a (1) itf} , and this latter oonstruction being neoessary for the illustration belo\\', in order to indicate the same an a will be arlded .to the number borne by the uoun. Thns, 1·2=2a·l, or iu the words of 1 2 2a 1 the sentenoe, itrlng s/r/at=(ang sMaO (na(l) ito). The oblique cases may be indicated, either by the demonstrative, or by the article applied to the noun. Thus, nitrJIIll lamesa=nang lamesan.q itr), and, nang panftlat {lla(l)ito)-nilOng lJalllilat, or, iuuumb31's, 7-8=8a·7, anel lIa-IO=IO-U. The possessive case of the personal pronouns aDel, therefore, the possessive pronouns derived therefrom, it will be remembered, have twO forms, one prepositive and the other postpositive. Thus, to say: silluslilat co is the same in meaning as to say: aqlting sinusitlat, two different oonstructions which will be indicated by adding tbe letter b to the number borne by the prepositi\'e, and the letter c to that of the' postpositive, form. In this manner we haye iLl the sentence, sinltSlilat co=aqltillg sinuslrlat, and, sa aqlting am((=sa amci co, or, in numbers, 3 (ol 5(c))=(4 5(b))-3, and, 13b-H=lol·13c. Thus, we have: English. _1_"":-'

I5 \ 6

10 11

12 1"3

I 6 I 7 I tI I D \l1a110 112/13bllol The construction 1 . I 1 1' may also be: ~~ _' 1 _' I_'I 1_ ' '_' I_' (4·5b) 13 I 1 I 2 , ~ »1, I » • » - , - , - , Tagalog.

3 \ (Hc)

-->,-

- , , - , -=-! 2a ---;-

(-I.-5c)

,-I -, -. -, -, -,-,-, -, -, ~

1-1I~-' I;C:- - , - , -, -,

-,-1-.-,I-;~I -l1 -'

1-,- -,--,

-, -, 1-' -,- -,-,-,- -, -,

-1--'--------I I· , , ,-,- -,- -,1

(45c)

-;12a \1 '

'I' ,

I ,1 » , -; _1 I....:-.L_~J (4.5~-'~ 2.1~ ~ ~I~~!_ » _' _' , I » I ' I , »1 , , I ' I, , I ' ' 12 14 130 » I ~= (45b) , 3 I 1 2 (4·5b)

I' "

_,_CJ , , ,

2a \1 I 3 I (4-5c) I' " , , , I ' I' 6

' _1_ ' 8

Still the sentence might begin with: (Sa ibabao) nitimg lamesa etc., and the other elements might be constructed in the same various ways !l 11 10 of the synopsis; or it might begin with: Nang ]JQlIitlat ito and again the othel' elements might be tumed into the othel' vRriolls positions of the table; 12 01',

1:1

finally, wiLh: Sa aquing am,) and the same vBrious constructi ons ( I)

Na, helP, i. a ligament.

liS

LXXIV.

THE TAGALOG

LANOUAGE .

for the other two. No examples of the same are given, not to tax too much the attention of the reader. The precedillg synopsis shows only the Tagalog sentence constructed with the verb in that kind of passive which resembles most the same in the English language; but, as it has been already hin ted, the rerb in Tagalog may assume two other forms in the passive, and the reference, then, is not to what is the direct object of the verb in tbe active voice, which, in the passive, is the grammatical subj ect, that is to say, to "this letter;' but to some division of tbe indirect object, which, in the above sentence, may be, for instance, the person, "my father;" the instrument, "this pen; " or the place, "this table." Thus if it be intended to lay more stress on "this table" than on any of the other elements in the sentence, "this table," then, should be made the grammatical sllbject and put in the nominative case, 7 S with the verb used in the passive of an, saying: Itong lamesa 3·6 (4·5) 1 2 9 1L 10 12 13 14 (ang l)inagsusulatan) co nitong sitlat nang panidat ito, sa aquing ama. The sentence cons'ructed in' this way will admit of the same trans· positions which were explaine for the one constructed with the verb But he action of ",riting may also be in the general passive. considered in Feference to the gerson, the sentence constructed with "my father" as the grammatical subject, and the verb used in a 13 14 different form of the same an passive, saying: (ang aquing) ama,(i, 3·12 4·5 1 2 6 8 7 9·10 ang sinusularan) co itong sitlat (sa ibfl,bao) (nang lamesang) itO, nitong 11 panitlat. Still here the construction admits of the same transpositions which have been explained. Or, finally, the action of writing may be considered as to the instrument, the. sentence constructed with "this pen" as the grammatical subject, and the verb used in the passive 10 11 3·9 45 1 2 6 of y, saying: Itong panida6 (ay ysinusitlat) co nitOng sitlat (sa ibabao) 7 S 12 13 41 nitOng lame.~a sa aquing ama. Here too, the transpositions may be the same as those given in t.he synopsis, whicb, practically, amouDts to a number of constructions almost ine.xhaustible. Vve believe tbat no further data are required to show the dissimilarity of Tagalog from, and its superiori ty over, Malay and Javanese. We will not drop the comparison here made of Tagalog with tbe Malay and the Javanese without calling attention to certain ethica l expressions and peculiarities in the latter two languages which one might expect to find also in Tagalog, did the latter stand in the degree of relationship in which it is claimed it stands to those sources. We find, for installce, that in Malay and, although in a smaller degree, in Javanese a lso, there exist what is called Dumeral adjuncts, tb at is to say, certain specific or technical .terms used in counting as co·efficients to the numerals, the term being selected according to the class to which the object belongs. Thus, Malay employes the fo llow · Orang, "man," for persons; eko?', " tail,' for auimals; ing terms: buah, "fruit,'· for fruit, etc.; biJi, "seed, " for round objects; halei, lei, "fibre," for tenuous objects as feathers, etc; batang, "stern," for long objects; and otheFs, each for some other different thillg. In Javane e we find lemba?' for large flat objects; ler for hair, feathers, etc., as in Malay lei; and hiji for the same kinj of object for which biji

INTRODUCTION.

LXXV.

is used in Malny. In Javanese, too, there are collective numerals, in the same way as "dozen" in English for 12, so in Javanese for 7, 10. etc. Another feature to call attention to is the fact that in Malay there is one set of adjectives, /aki laki, "male;' lJerampuan, "female;" for distinguishing sex in man, and another set, jalltan, "male;" betina, "female;' for distingnishing sex in the lower animals. In Javanese these adjectives are for both man and the lower animals as in Tagalog; but instead of one for each gender, we find lanang, driya, kakung and ja/ar for the masculine, aud wad on and ostl'i for the feminine. The fact that in Tagalog there are native terms for the expression of the four cardinal points has an important be)lring on the tbeory of its snpposed Malay derivation; for these points would not fail to be designated in Tagalog by worus taken from the Malay system if the Malay element were fouud to be predominant in tbe language. The following are the terms for the four cardinal points in: English.

Tagalog.

Malay.

Javanese.

North. East. South. West

Hilaga. Silangan Timogan, ibaba. Oalonoran.

Utara. Timor Salatan. 13arat

Lor. Wetan. Kidhul. Kulon.

The Malay ti'tlOl' aud the Tagalog timogan are, probably, in reference to the island of Timor. 'rhis naOlE: was given by Malays to the island, because it lies eastwards in the direction from Java and Sumatra, while Tagals used tilllog(an) for "south," because it is to the south that the island lies in the direction from the Philippines. In Tagalog there is not found in the same degree that kind of abstraction or generalisation practiced in Malay, which results in clalisifyiug a number of objects under one head and then to use some epithets for the other individuals oE the. family. So, for instance, the Malay name for "a rat' is tiklls; (1) but it is equally so for "a mouse' with the epithets "large," "small," added, accordiug to whether "rat" or "mouse" is meant In Tagalog there exists a distind word (Zaga, bult/it, respectively, for each of the two individuals. Jcil'uk is in Mnlay a generic term for the "citron family, " and the word wilh an epithet for each is equally applied lo "the citron," "the orange," and "the lemon;" but in 'ragalog there exists a specific term, respect ively, l!lcban, cla/amlan, dtlyap Jor each of these varieties, with an additional term, ca"&f,yao, for "the sour or wild orange" Deviations oE this kind, it is believed, are not without valne in showing the different origin of Tagalog and ils superiority ovtor the other two languages. It only remains to say something about two other foreign ele路 ments found in Tagalog which, although having no bearing on the question of origin, still tbe reviewing of same may serve to show the importance of that other aboriginal or native element, the isola路 tiol? of "hich is intended in the present. inquiry. We, therehy, mean Chmese and Spanish. By reason of its insignificance, no review would have perhaps been made here of the first of these elements, were it not for the fact that such high authorities as Prof. Dr. Reinwald Brandstetter (2) and Humboldt himself think they have detected traces of a monosyllabic (1) IC1IB, in BicoJ, means "cat..' (2) "Tagalog uDd MaJagaseD:' a p8mpble~, lU~9rn-1902.

LXXVI.

THE TA GAr. OG LANGUA01, .

origin and of a monosyllabi c tend ency in ihe language. The first ' of th ese writers believes th at certa in fin al so unds occurring with a nu mber of roots are suggestilTe of one and the sa me meaning; h,ut the exa:nples he brings fo rwa rd do not bear out his assertion. He mentions, among others, the endings hot, in hothot and singhot, liS sug gestive of the action of "sipping;" boe, in aooe, gaboe, a/aboe, ooe·boe, as suggestive of the notion of "dust." That the action of sipping co uld rath er be identified with other endin gs, if th e t heory of endings suggestive of certain loeanings were tru e, the following terms show: ha.glti J'guil', hachac, hiqop, "to sip; " hithit, sipsip , soso, "to suck." That the ending hot is fo und with word s having a meaning different from that which it is claimed th at it sugges ts, sabot, " vow; ' eahot, "to slide;" sohot, "to appease;" a nd many others, sl~ow . The sam e may be said of the ending boc. It is found in taboe, ' ~bu ck El t;" pasoc, "to enter;" saloc, "ladl e;" etc., th e meaning of whi c h has noth · ing to do with the idea of " dust " It has been already indi cated (see pages x rv-x V) that development and permutati on of consonant sounds are still going on in th e la nguage, and th ese fnrm s, then, may be variations of the .same word, while hothot, hithi t, sipsil' and SOS,} may be considered as ono maCopceias. Humboldt also, in th e chopter he devotes to the monosyllabic origin of ever:>; langnage (pages cccciv-ccccvii of the Introductiou to bi s work), imq.gines b e fi nds in the recurrence of certain syllables, traces of a mono yllab ic tendency in the laug uage H e says in this respect: (first boo k., In odu cti on , page ccccii). "Iu tbe Malay Ian· guages, after taking off the affi xes, fr q uently, nay, most freq uently we might say, a dissylla ic radi cal remain whi ch, in its gra mm atical rela· ti ou to the co nstruction, is not fur ~h e r divisible. 'l'here, too, where it i£ a mon osyllable, it is then f requently, in 'f aga log even usually, redupli cated. The di s yllabic structure of th ese languages is, on this A f urther dismemb erm ent of th e radi cal account, often mentioned . word has, to my k nowledge, /li therto never been attempted. I ha ve made th e attemp t myself, a nd a lthough I have nob succeeded in properly accountin g for th e reltl natute of the elements of all these words, I am, however, co nvi nced that, in a g rea t number of instan ces, each of t.he two un ited sylla bl es can be traceu to a mono~yll abi c stem in the language, a nd that the reason .Eor the union call be explaineu. Now, as this comes to be the case despite our deficient means and i n comp l e ~e kn owledge, so we may well th erefrom conclude th e greater extension of this principle and t he monosyll abic origin of th ese languages ." (1 ) It is greatly to be regretted th at Humboldt did not f urnish us wi th a sampl e of any monosyllabic Tagalog stem which has been red u plicated for th e purp ose of rend ering it conformable to the general d issyllab ic btructure or th e language. As stated elsewhere, we (1) In den MalayiBehen Sprachen hleibt, naab Abl6sUDg der Affixa, Behr b itufig, ja man kann 1V0hi Bagen meiBteDtbeilB , eiD zweiBylbiger, in grammatiBeber Beziebung auf die Redefiigung Di eht weiter theilbarer, Stamm Ubrig. Aueh da, wO derselbe eiDsylbig iBt, wird er hil llfi2 , im Tagalisehen Bogar gewo bnlieh, verdoppelt. Man fi odet daher tlfter deB 1. WeiBylhi gen Baues dieBer Spracben erwilhnt. Eine Zergliederun g dieBer WortB tii mme iBt indeBB bis jet1.t, soviel icb weiss, nirgends vorgenommen worden. l eh habe sie verBueht; uDd wenn ieh aueb noeh nieht ds hin gelsDj!t bin, vollkomme De Reehen schaft Uber die Natur der Elements aller dieBer " orter 1.U geben, so habe ieh micb dennoeh Ober1.eugt. daBS in sehr vielen Filllen jede der beiden vereinigten Sylben al s e in ein Bylbiger Stamm in der Spraebe naebgewi eBen "erden kann, und dass die Ursaehe der Verbindung begreiAieh wird. Wenn dieB nun bei UDsreD uDvollstilDdigen HUlfsmittelD uDd uns rer maDgelbaften K~nn.tnis. der Fall iBt, BO Hlf.t Bieh wobl auf eine gr(\3sere AusdehDuDg dieses PTlnClpB und auf die urBprliDgliche EinBylbigkeit aucb dieser Sprachen BcbliefBen.

INTRODUCTION.

LXXVII.

do uot know tbat tbe language ever affords any mouosyUabic sub stantive stem. All monosyllabic words tberein fouud are meauingless, and the dissyllables cousisting of two equal components are rather to be considered as onomatopceias. He furLher mentions qnite a uumber of words, but there is no room in this sketch to review them all, and tllus, ouly the term laba s, "out," "outside;" will be here co n· sidered. :LaMs is by Hnmboldt divic!ed thus: lab as, aud lab is the syllable which he thinks to be suggestive of the meaning "out', and of derivatiou from a mouosyllabic !anguage. LaMs, as prouounced at present, should be di vided la-bas and uot lab-cis; but admittiug that lab-cis is the original aud correct divisiou, and that the pronull ciation la·bas is only due to the iufluence of Spanish, lab in lab-cis, should be cousidered as an auomaly. Were it the normal form, lab, then, would not fail to nppear in some tougue oE those spoken iu these Islauds, which it does not. The term in Bicol, is gOlta, luas; (1) in Bisayan, gallas; in Ilocano, ruar, auay; in IbauBg, tal, lattan; iu Paugasinan, ouay; Ilnd in Pampangan, lUltal. Loual is another term for 'outside" in Tagalog; and Humboldt uses it (3rd book, page 62 l} for the purpose of showing the accord of ad\Terbs in Tagalog with those in Malay and Javanese. It is just in this latter placQ that be should bave used laMs and not loual, for lottal is ratber a noun than an adverb. He trac:es the first syllahle of lab cis to lab-lab, "swamp;" and the second to as-as, "to rub away; " but one fails to see what tbe reason for this may be. Lab is not found as a prefix in any language of th e Philippines, tbe only case in which, within tbe wordbuilding methods oE tbees languages, such a derivation might appeal' as possible; and in default of this, it has first to be proved that it once existed as such in Tagalog or in some of the other tongues of tbese Islands. These are not, however, the ouly errors found in connection with the term . Labas is given by him as the equivalent oE "semen suis ipsius rnanilius elicere." The source from which he drew this fanciEu l equivalence is not stated, but we may as ume that it was some book of those composed by the Spanish friars, although not Noceda's Dictionary, certainly not the editiou of 1860. In the latter, among the uses of labas, is fouud (page 161) the following phrase: "pinalabasan nlO an.q cataoall mo, "est habere pollutionem"" The translation of this expressiou, as given in the dictionary, i!l indirect, for the direct one should have been "habuisti pollutionem," since pinalabasan is past tense, and the whole expression must be one used in inquiring at the confessional. In otber books there are given for the same thing the expressions: nilaliasan caycl allg cataOltan mo nang marumi, lin aliasan ca nang putiputi; but Humboldt seems to believe that the irlea of selE·pollution lies in labas, which is not tho case. In the above expression this notion lies in cataoan, "body;" mal'umi, "dirtiness;" plttiputi, "seUlen." The expression is intended as a euphemism aud is such as only a native could have used in conversing with a Spanish friar to avoid the puuishment which the using (~f the crude term would probably bring upon him. Speaking with hiS fellow countrymen he, then, would use bltsisi or ligli.f/, anrl not laMs. '1 his is another instance oE the errors liable to be in curred iu by using grammars as the only means of determining the character of a language. (I) LOllCUl, "out:·, is found in Noceda's Dictionary (page 195) as the (orm for "out" used in the Com;ntan.q. (IJomi1ltang was the name of the region the "rovince. 01 LaguDa aDd Batanga. now nccupy. and .180 tbat of the dialectical variation of '£agalog aa spoken there in the early days or Spanisb rule).

LXXVI1l.

'l'RE TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

Now, if by the monosyllabic tendency said to exist in Ta路 galog Is to be understood bhat form which some believe speech bas assnmed as a first stage in its development, no objection will be here rllised. If, however, direot derivation of Tagalog is meant from some MongoliAn sonrce. we may be permitted to say that no other language of' tbose spoken by tbe race shows itself more sdverse to cast thougbts iuto a monosyllabic mold. nor does any other make greater sacrifices to preserve its dissyllabic character. A root which is to he reduplicated, is reduplicated in full if it is dissyllabic, and only in its firsL two syllables if it is polysyllabic. In the formation of pretty little Dsmes, where there are always both suppression and addition of certain syllables in regard to the simple root, the formation is invariably made in snch a way as to have always a dissyllable resulting. Although euphony and smoothness of pronunciation nte things very fastidiously attended to in Tagalog, they are, however, often sacrificed to syllabic qnantity. The contraction of the componnd, so frequently used in the language, has no other pnrpose than the preservation of its clissyllabic character. Thus, from m pis, "fine;" nip scm, "rendered thinner" and not ni pi路san is formed; from a-sin, "salt;" as-nan. "salted" and not a si-nan is formed; etc., cases in which, it may be seen, the purity of thesyUables ni and a has been sacrificed for the sake of a dissyHabic compound. Although Tagalog has this dissyllabic cbaracter in common with the Malay and the Javanese, attention was called to the fact that monosyllabic words are more num erous in the latter two languages. No substantive word and no directive of those which can stand atone io the sentence is in Tagalog monosyllabic Even he negali've and afirmative ad verbs, which in most other langUAges are monosyllabic, are dissyllabic in Tagalog. If any of these dissyllabic words, as, for instance, baga, hindi, etc. is, after the native fash ion, shortened into ba and di, and these terms are to be used, the monosyliabic term will be used and pronounced as if it formed the first syllable of the fo llowing word; but if any of these ter:ns is to be used alone or is to close the sentence, the full form will then be used. Natives will say, for instance, e[ccw ba al1,q . ...... ? "art thou perchance he who ..... . ."? but they wi II say: iiidto ba.qa? "art thou perchance"? They say: di silO. na.osaVi, "they did not say;" but if they want to reply "no," they will say: hindi. and if the use of the contra\!tion is by them preferred, they, then, will say: di po aud not di alone. It is to this aversion of the language for monosyllables that the insignificant or entirely lacking influeuce exercised by Chinese thereon is to be attributed. Tagalog yielded easily to Spanish. a language with which, the po~ysyllabic cbaracter excepted, it has nothing in common; but it has sternly resisted the encroachment of Chinese, refusing to amalgamate or intermix with it, and this only by reason of tbe monosyllabic character of the latter. Chinese people have. from the earliest times of the Spanish conquest, settled in great numbers throughout these Islands and intermarried with native iuhabitants; yet, there are certain ly in the language not more than the odd dozen of Ohinese words which have been collected in the following table.

Chinese. Tcha. Pi路sau.

Liu

Signification,

Tagalog.

Tea. Cha or sa. Knife. ' Pisao. To propel a boat by ~ means of an oar at Lio -lio. { the stern.

Signification. Tea. Small knife. To propel a hoat by ) mellns of an oar lit . the sLern.

LXXIX.

I:nnoDUCTION.

Chinese.

Signification.

(A loouly 'wl.t,d pllh

Tient-sim.

of. a tree used a.s wICk for cocoa-nut 011 lamps).

Tagalog.

TientsIn.

(A kl,d,' P"" m.d.

Tan bun.

Miki. Mi-soaO. Pan-sit. So si. Xengkeh.

Slgnlftc~llon.

into a slender worm- Sotanj6n. hke form, med for soup). (A kind of vermicelli ~ used for a sort of Miqui. pastry). ) Do. do. Mismi. ~ (A kind of cake or relish made of miqut, Pansit. -miswi, etc.) Key. Susi. Clove. Sangqu!.

{ (Pith of a tree serving as wick for cocoa路nut oil lamps).

A kind of vermicelli.

Chinese

Do.

do.

Do.

do.

1Acalled. kind

of cake thus

Key. Chinese anise.

Terms used only in some districts, especially by Chinese mestizos. lnt-tian . In-rna.

His or their father. Godmother_

lntia. lmo'.

In-p6.

Aunt.

Imp6.

In kong.

Their grandfather_

Ingcong.

lng so.

Sister-in路 law.

Ins6.

Sam ko.

Third brother.

Samc6.

Sao - chi

Third sister.

Sans!.

Father. Mother. (G",d m,l>", th, grandmother's sister, and extE'nsively any old woman.) {The grandfather's brother, and extensively any old man).

r"''''I''I'', (M.., properly, the wife of the Ii l' s t - b 0 r n brother). \ The brother, third in age. ) The sister, third in age.

Spanish is the only foreign Aryan element found in Tagalog and stands to it in the same relation that Sanskrit stands to Java nese, or Arabic to the present Malay. In what larl!'e degree Spanish revived Tagalog by fnrnisbing it with new lexical matter has 8lready been indicated. To what extent did Spanish revolutionize the Taga 路 log prosodial character may be seen in t he different methods or syllabification found in the early grammars composed by the Spanish friars, as compared with 'the sawe fuund in those of a later period; and iu the different pronunciation of certain worJs by natives living in the highlands or in secluded districts, as compared with that of natives living in Manila or in other townships Such words as big-at, tab-a, dag路is etc. are now generally pronounced bi-gat, ta-M, da gills, etc. The number of Spanish words introduced into Tngalog is very gre-at, but is not easily determinable, as it largely depends on the will and on tbe more or less complete acquaintance- of the speaker with the language. Tbe actual number, however, of Spanish WQrqs incorporated.

LXXX,

TilE TA(lALO(l

LAN(lUAGE,

in the language which aTe understood by the whole population is very trifling when compared with the number made use of by people with a pretense to literary or scientific education, Most of these Spanish words were used from necessity; but some, which are syno· nyms of native terms, from caprice and the passion of imitation aided by the structure and assimi lative character of the language. which allows a ready introduction of foreign terms, Among the terms incorporated and thoroughly or partly understood by common and professional people are those incident to the CaMlOlic religion,\ which were introduced by the Spanish friars, for here there could be neither refusal to the admission of same nor supersed ure of nativo In co nversation, Spanish words are often llsed in ignorance terms. or for a useless display of acquaintance with foreign or infrequent words, The Spanish words used in the written language are generally the same as those used in speech; but. in fact, any number may still be introduced at the will 01' caprice of tbc writer with the probability. however, that many of them will not be uud erstood by the general reader and often, indeed, nOL even by the writer himself. It is not here intended either to exhaust the number of Spani h words in Tagalog or to go defilply into a matter that is treated more at length in the Grammar, wbere every Spanish word used therein has beeu noted and exp.iained, and rules for their proper use are given. It is only as an ill stration that we subjoin the following table of some terms borrowed from Spanish .

Spanish. Dios. \ irgen. Espiritu·Santo. Manzana. Topar. Caballo, Chapin . Confesarse. Filosofia. Vaso. Misa. Espano!. Peso. Tabaco. Padre. Cura. Padron.

Signification.

Tagalog.

SignIfication.

God. DioL God The :e:oly Virgin. Virgen. The Holy Virgin. Holy Ghost. Espiritu·Santo. Holy Ghost. Apple. Mansana(s), Apple. To butt TOjJa. Sheep, ram. Horse. Cabayb , Horse. Clog. (a kind of shoe worn by S . Shoe. people in tbe aplD. ) 16th. century.) \ To confess to the, C 'I ! To co nfess to the I priest, \ ompls~, 1 priest. Philosophy. Pilosopia. ' Philosophy, Glass, tumbler. Glass, tumbler. Baso, 01' vaso. Mass. Misa. Mass. Spaniard, Span· {c.astila· (CthorruSpt. } Spaniard, Span· IOn 0 f e o. . h { . I 1S 1. word Cus('illuf 1S . Dollar. Pisos, misos. .Dollar. Tobacco. Tabaco. Tobacco. Pare. Father, priest. Father, priest. Curate. Cura. Curate. Census. Padron. Census.

And now that the review or tho apportion to their respecti ve sources has been made of all foreign elements found in Tagalog, it will be well to pame a little and consider the quality and quantity of what remains in the language. That the remaioing portion should belong to the language of the aborigines, whoever they may have been, comes as a necessary inference or as a temporary or working hypothesis,

bT:\ODUCTWN.

LXXXI.

scn'ing us stall<.lI'(Iill~ for rur~her rc·en rch, or Illfiy be heltl in sllspense until it be verified or disproved by otiJer facts. To tbis pOrLiou beloDg, more or less entirely, ~he adicles, and in so far as these serve to establish the relation of case wi~h nouns, the prepositions as well; the pluralizing particle; ,the pronouns; certain peculiarities of the system of numeration; the conjuga~ive mechanism; the wordbuilding and declension methods; aud the en~ire syn tactical frame . The sinews, the ligamen~s , the articles, the preposit:ons and con· junctious, all smaller words which serve to knit and bind the lal'ger 'fhis into sentences belong, therefare, to this aboriginal element. element, then, is the basis, not the supers~ruc~ure, tbe core, the radical constitution, so to say, of the language. It is this element that causes Tagalog to be a differen~ language from the Malay and the Javanese, for in so far as it is composile 01' mingled, as it mus~ freely be admit~ed to be, it is only sucb in respect of its words, not in respect of its conslruc~ion, inflexions, and, generally, grammatical forms. The frame work is aboriginal, only a part of the filling in is foreigu. These faClS seem to prove: First, that Tagalog is a Philippine born language. Second, that the people with whom the language originated mnst have attained a tolerably advanced state of civilization. And third, that their descendants or continuers in the use of language, not only did not maintain the civilization of the parent people, bnt have even fallen into the lower cundition iu wbich they were found by the Spaniards. As a matter which some student may perhaps consider warthy of investIgation, and by reasou of whether it has some bea rlllg ,ou the poiut here at issue, such a meagre informatiou as is found in Humboldt's work about the relics which are fonnd of ' an ancient or recoudite language in the tradi~ions and ri~es of the Malay people, is given here before closing the chapter. In the firs~ book, Introduc,tion, page rn, the following passage is fonnd: "Among them (Mahrys), is found in several places, fragmen~s of a sacred lauguage Which ,eyen ~hey no longer uuders~aud, an~ the custom of restoring to life obsole~e expressions on cer~ain solewn occasions speaks, not only o[ exuberance, Iln~iquity Ilud profundi~y in the laugullge, but also o[ attention to the changeable designa~ions of Ihe objects in the course of ~ime." (1) Iu reference to what Clawfurd says iu his work " History of tbe Indiau Archipelago," we fiud the following in Humboldt · (3rd book, page 31-1): "According to Crawfurd, there seems to exis~ among ~he Bugis an ancient recondite language, still known to few, which he compares with the Kawi and ~he Pali." (2) And in the same book, page 295, speaking of the languages of ~he South Sea Islands, he says: "Iu many of those Islands there exists a sacred langnage, no louger lit all understood, which must be considered as no other 'thlln tbe one which was formerly spoken" And in a foo~'I1ote appended to this words, i~ is said: "Cham isso, in the 31'd. vol. of Ko~zebue's voyage of discovery, page 45. Mariner (II. 217) gi ves a sam pie, bu~ a very small one, of this language, as it is still used in funeral servic~s. (1) Man findet bei ibnen, an mehreren Orten, jel zt ihoen Belb.t uover.hlodlicbe BruchBUlcke einer heiligen Sprache, und der Gebrauch veraltete Auedrlleke bei gewiBBen Gelegeoheiten feierlich inB Leben zorUckzurufe n, zeugt nieht bioBB \'on Reichthum, Alter und Tiete der Sprache, Bondern auch von AufmerkBamkeit auf die im Laufe der Zeit wechBetnde Bezeicbnung der Gegenelllode. , (2) Es Boll, oBch Crawfurd, nnter den Bugi. eioe verborgeoe, alte, ooch von Weoigen gekaonle Sprache geben, welohe er mit dem Kawl nnd Pali vergl~icbt.

'· 11 ·

LXXXII.

TOE TAGALOG LANGUAGE

There are jOu-lId th'l'l"cin easily recogllieable Tagalog worcls still in pl'eSellt use." (I l.

wh~ch

are

It wilt be highly desirable that some one, better qualified than the author for researches of this kind, should infJ.uire into the relation which the matter in the above quotations may have with this aboriginal Filipino language which has been so often spoken of in this outline. Such a review of the work of Crawfurd as was said (page XXI) would be given herein, follows: Crawfurd, as already stated, published in 1852 his "t;irammar and Dictionary of the Malay Language" in two v.olQ.mes, the first of which contains a Dissertation and the Grammar, and the second, the Dictionary. It was in the Dissertation that he went into a comparative study of the Malay with tbe other languages of the Malay archipelago; and, among those spoken in these Islands, ,with the Tagalog and the Bisayan; using, for the comparison of Tagalog, as already indicated, San Agustin's Grammar and Noceda's Dictionary. As was to be expected of this gceat authori ty in matters pertain,iQg to tile Indian Archipelago, his study is a very able one in respect to the languages of the western portion of Malaysia, the Malay and Javanese especially. That part, bowever, in his Dissertation devoted to Tagalog and Bisayan shows that his acquaintance with the same was much poorer than that evinced by Hamboldt. Aside , from what he says in refutation of the theory of the Malay par e nta~e of the two Philippine tongues, there is little more that a 'fagalog student may share with him in his other views. His discovery of this different parentage, however. seems rather the result of an act hypothesis laid down a priori, than a conclusof compliance ~ith ion arrived at as he result of a logical deductive process. His ,revjew abounds in errors, both of expression and of appreciation, , beginning with that of referring to the language as the Tag ala, be路 c;:ause it is so named by the Spanish friars merely as a matter of ...grammatical agreement with the feminine noun lellgua, "tongue;" in .Spanish. On this I?arti'cular ' p0int, he says: (page cv) "The Tagala lJIay be considered the principal language of the island .of Lu~on, Th~ natiye word is Tagaleg and is, as usual in ' such cases, the name beth of the natien and of the language.' He then pases over to the alphabet, in the description of which he commits the errer menfiened in the foet路note of page XLI. Speaking of the ancient Tagalog alphabet (2) he says: (page cvii) "The Ta~ala alphabet is still in use in a few parts .of the island of LUgen, altheugh ' the Spliniar~s (not, I think witheut reasen) discourage it " ..... " That this ancient . alphabet could never have been used for any practical purpeses, no written native specimen .of same, besides, having ever been preduced, ,is explained in the chapter devoted to Orthography in this beek. In pages cviii-cix, C~awfurd examines, with varieus fortune, the Tagalog phonetic chl\,racter, and in the cemparison which he makes of 8amb with those of the Malay and the Javanese, there are fonnd accurate remarks, some of which have been noted when treating .of the same subject in this outlook. The grammatical structure of Malay and Tagaleg is next by him cempared, (pages cix-cxiv) and (1) Auf mebreren der dortigen Ioeeln gillbt es eioe, jetzt durcl;>aue unv~r颅 stiindlicbe, beilige Spracbe, die man eich doch auch nicbt andere, ale ebemale gesprocheo, lien ken, (1) Cbamiseo, hi> dritten Bande von Kotzebue'e Eotdeckungereiee B. 41>. Mariner (Ir. 217) giebt eine, docb eebr kleine Probe dieeer SpT&cbe. wie eie bei BegrabnieBen gebrancbt wird. In dieeer .befinden ,. icb einiga leicbt k.enntlic~e no~h_ be ute g~bri1uchliche Tagaliecbe Wijr~r. (2) See deBcription of thi. alphabet in the "Orthography,"

INTRODUCTION.

LXXXIII.

although he appreciates, upon the whole, properly the differences between the two languages, still there are some errors, both in his conception of Tagalog, and in his nomenclature, Referring to the latter, he says: "The adjective, which in composition follows the noull ..... " As far as our knowledge enables us to say, such a rule a8 this, Crawfurd could find in no Spanish-Tagalog grammar, certainly not in San Agustin's. If this were true, the adjective, then, in Tagalog would differ from the same part of speech in Malay only in the form; but although it can take the position that Crawfurd assigns to it after the noun, slill, that of coming before the same is far more common. Nor can any reason be assigned for Crawfurd having misquoted San Agustin in this and in other matters. Instead of ascribing the con路 sonant f to Tagalog (see again foot note, page XLI), the Spanish writer, on the contrary, calls attention to its absence from the I~guage in the following words: ''f, x, z and strong r are not found }n this language." (1) As to the position of the adjective, nothing is said in San Agust.in, nor was it necessary that he suould say anything on this point, inasmuch as he wrote in Spanish and for Spaniards who were conversant with Latin, and it was understood, therefore, that the position of the adjective was in Tagalog the same as in those other two languages; but Crawfurd should not, however, fail to bave noticed the two examples, "ang tallong magaling" vel "ang magaling na tauo,' "the man good, " or, "the good man;" found among others, in the short chapter which the Augustinian friar devotes to the subject. Crawfurd goes on saying: "There is but one demonstrative, itu, "this' or "that."" It is not easy to see how Cra wfurd came ' It was not, certainly, by any omission 01' mistake in to this belief In Chapter 1st, Parag. 6, is found the San Agustin's Grammar. following: "Adjective and demonstrative pronouns.' "Ito, Yaon, I!filn," of which he gives the declension. It is not surprising, therefore, that Crawfurd conceived an erroneous opinion of the inferiority of Taga10g; for there is perhaps no language in the world which does not possess: at least, two demonstrative pronouns, and two adverbs of place. Tagalog possesses three, one for "this," and two for "that," having, besides, some intermediate ones and traces, moreover, of the numerous others still found in the Malagasi and, to some extent, in the Bisayan (Panayano) and the Ibanag as well. In his review of the Tagalog verb, Crawfurd has this much to say:' "The Tagala verb is in itself sufficiently complex and has been made to appeal' more so by the the yain efforts of the Spanish grammarians to force it into a parallel with the Latin ........ . .... " "There are no means of distinguishing between the transitive and intransitive verb, as in Malay and Javanese ............. .. "The optative and subjunctive modes (sic) are formed by the auxiliary nava (naua is the correct spelling) which is described as equivalent in meaning to the Latin "utinam,"" There is perhaps as much of truth as of error in the above statements. We agree with Crawfurd in believing that the Spanish ecclesiastics, San Agustin, however, less than others, allowed themselves to be too much influenced by Latin in writing the grammars of the tongues spoken in these Islands; but their conception of the verb could hardly be poorer than Crawfw'd's, (1) No 80 balla en eots lengus j. "'. Z Y ,. fuerte, de III Lengua Tagala, Prolodia. Capitulu VlI路2,

Compendio del Acle

LXXXIV.

THE TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

even admitting that that of the former was never the clearest; for it is . a fact that the nature of the Tagalog verb has been rightly and thoroughly uuders tood only by Hurpboldt. What Crawfurd says of the language not affording the means of distinguisbing between transitive and in· transitive, causal and passive verbs; of time being expressed by tbe application of inseparable particles, without mentioning the peculiar feature of the reduplication of syllables; his giving of matulug instead of matutulu.Q as the future tense of tulug, "sleeping;" his statement to the effect that there is only one word for the expression of mood; and then saying tbat tbe an (by him written na) passive is that of most general application, shows well bow superficial bis knowledge of the 'fagalog verb was; while, on the otber hand, errors (whetber misprints OT misconceptions, no one knows) in the spelling, as ikan for icao, sayu for sa iyo, ningu for ninyo, sa ingu for sa inyo, etc., render his nomenclature disagreeable to every reader acquainted with Tagalog. In what be says of the optative and subjunctive moods being formed by naua, (tbis word is by no means an auxiliary) he does not misqnote his Spanish guide, for it is so stated by the latter. It is true that naua may be used for a kind of optative mood in Tagalog; hut it is not the only word, as there are others, both for this an:! for the true subjunctive or conditional mood, and the fact tbat !:an Agustin did not mention them is probably due to the ex· cessive compendiousness of Bis Grammar. After review~ng the Tagalog verb, Crawfurcl. concludes: . "From this sketch of Tagala grammar, it will appear that there is very little in common between it and the grammars of tbe Malay and Javanese. In Tagala, the relations of the noun are expressed by a class of articles appropriated to ~he purpose; and in the Malay, Javanese, and other languages of the 'West, by prepositions, as in the modern languages of Europe. In the Tagala f a plural is formed by a specific particle appropriated to this special purpose; in Malay and Javanese, by ordinary adject.ives expressing plurality. Gender is expressed, in Malay, by words expressing the sexe3. of which there is one set for man, and a distinct one for the lower animals. In the Tagalog there is but one set, equally applicable to both." Crawfurd, next, examines the Tagalog personal pronouns, and makes remarks, some of which bave been mentioned in this sketch (see pages XLIV aud XLV), and then he brings the malter to a close by saying: . "In the Tagala verb, there is haroly anything to remind us of the Malay or Javanese. We miss in it the forms of these two Ian· guages for marking the illtransitive, the transitive, causal and passive verb. 'rime is expressed, iu 'ragala, by inseparable particles; in Malay and Javanese by auxiliaries which are adverbs. In Malay and Javanese, mood is expressed by several different a uxiliaries, and in Tagala also by the same means; there being, but one word, and that differ· ing ent.irely from any 01 those used in the two westprn lauguages." . "It does not, then, appear, from a comparison of the phonetic character, and grammatical structure of the 'ragala, with those of Malay and Javanese, · that there is any ground lor faucying them to be one and the same language, or languages sprung from a common parent, and only diversified by the effects of time and · distance." . The preceding conclusions, though arrived at through a chain of partially misconceived facts, and through a somewhat defectil'e reasouing, are, in the main, sound and acceptable. What follows, illl-

INTRODUCTION.

LXXXV.

mediately and subsequently, is plainly a mistake; but it must be 'said in justificatiou of CPllwfnrd that he was induced into error by the misleading signification rendering method usep in F. Juan de Noceda's Dictionary. In pages CXIX'CXX, he says: "The languages of the Philippine Islands may be described, not as copious, but wordy. In the state of society in which the natives of the Philip('Jines were formed, ideas are considered more in concrete than in abstract, and by an importance being attached to trivial matters, a profusion springs up, which, in a more advanced state of society, are considered unworthy of retention, or which, if retained, would only be productive of perplexity and distraction." Crawfurd s assumption to the effect that a profusion of specific terms in a language is the natural growth of a rude state of civili路 zation is somewhat strange, and seems to call for further proof than his bare assertion. It may be compared to the one which an agriculturist would make if from the presence of a thick bushy undergrowth in a primeval forest, he would conclude the barrenness of the soil. As to the deduction, necessarily to be made from his statement, of the specific . being first and then the generic term, and , that, therefore, "'Peter" was earlier than "man," "oak," than "tree," "first, " than "one,' etc. in the human mind, aside from being contrary to sound reason, is not supported by th e history and the early use of similar terms in the English language. The instances are numerous of a term at first of a generic signification, being later restricted to mean some more specific thing. We have, for example, that all food was once called meat, and it is not infrequent to find it so used in the Bible, '" hile meat is now restricted to mean a particular kind of food. The same contraction of meaning underwent the once more general terms of weed=berbs, corpse=body, va路 yage=jonrney of any kind, starve (from the German stel'ben)="to die any kind of death," etc.. We are told, however, of a force in every language working in a contrary directiou, which expanded the former . meaning of "polite" to that of the present "polished," etc.; but the instances here are much fewer and have little promise for the future of the language and for that of the people who speaks it; for it is certainly a process of decomposition which, if allowed to go on unchecked, will eventnally bring the language down to decay and ruin. That a process of this kind was going on in Tagalog at the time in which it carne in contact with Spanish, is, perhaps, conceivable, but the language, having been revived by its association with tha~ of the rulers, and having since been reduced to the pri~ciples of grammar, has later recovered and has been brought up to lts present state of development. Crawfurd next goes into to the exami'uatiou of that portion of the Bisayan vocabulary which can best support his theory, emitting opinions which there is no room here to refute, and then, he says: "In Tagala there are 12 names for the cocoa-nut, including its different varieties, and conditions as to maturity and preparation for use. Of these, one only is Malayan, the word nil/g, which is obviously a corruption of ,'ur, the Malay, but Dot the Javanese, Dame for the coco-palm. In the SBme langnage, there are 11 words to express the verb "to boil," and 75 for the verb "to go." In this language also there are 17 words to express the various actions of beal'ing 01' carrying, oue of which only i~ Malayan, as "to clll'l'y

LXXXVI.

THE TAGALOG

LANGUAGE.

on the head," "to carry under the arms," "to carry between two," "to carry a child," etc.' The misleading character of the language books composed by the Span ish friars, especiaily tbat of Noceda's Dictionary, having been often ref~rred to in this outline and made accountable for the errors committed by Humboldt and Crawfurd , and for their opposite theories as to the origin and del'ivation of Tagalog, the author now takes advantage of this opportunity for showing practically how Crawfurd was led into the erron eous belief of tbese 12 names for the cocoa·nut fruit, by giving bere. as exactly as possible, both in the type and in the words, the matter pertaining to this subject as found in the Tagalog·Spanish portion, pages 467-468, of Noceda's Dictionary, edition of 1860. Dictionary.

Translation.

Coco tierno. Boco. pp. Tender cocoa-nut. Boco. pp. (1) Coco caido ·bognoy ..pc. Dropped off cocoa.nut.bllgnoy. pc.(l) Coco grande en que beben. lom·bo. Big cocoa·nut, out of which people pc. drink. lombo. pc. Coco que se come cou dscara y Cocoa-nut, eatable along witb the shell. pangosln. pc. todo pangosln. pc. Coco hecho jarra PanabO . pc. Cocoa·nut made into a jar. Panab6 pc. C t panabyaban I Cocoa-nut in the way of a cup. oco como IIza • pc. I panabyaban. pc. ('A'lOO tierno. cacaloyln. pp. Tender cocoa·nut. cacaloyl'n~ pp. Coco Pe<fUeflo que se ome con cas· Small cocoa nut, wbicb is lJIlten along ca1'a y todo. tabal. pp. witb. the rind. tabal. pp. Coco. Niog. pc. Cocoa nllt. Niog. pc. Coco que sirve de jarro. hongot. Cocoa nut, serving as a jug. hopc. . fijZot. pc. Cocos peque'fios de casca'r a dulce y Small cocoa· nuts, tbe rind ()f which is sweet and soft. tapya'Sln. pp. blanda. tapy,asln. pp. COCGS duloes que se comen con su Sweet cocoa·nuts, eatable along with the rind. tamysan . pp. cascara. tarnysafl. pp. Of t'he equivalents in bold type (which are alse! so printed in the Dictionary for the J!)urJilose mentioned on page XX[V, text and lioot-note) on'ly bognoy and lombo are at present understood, the forlller in the same signification of "dropped off," "faHen cocoa nut fruit;" and the latter in tbat of a "drinking·vessel;' this merely because the shell or nut, after scraped clean is mainly devoted to tbis purpose. Rut ' considering the manner in which natives, aided by the special character of the language, make application of certain actions to the places or instruments on which or with · which the action in performed, ' we may trace panfjosin to pangos, "to suck sugar-cane;" and consider that the term might have been applied to such specimens of the cocoa·nut fruit as the tenderness of which would allow of performing therewith the same actioo as performed with the sugar·caoe. Tamysan is not a radical but a grammatical form, I 2 ha",ing also a sense of l!Pplication. Tamis-an means, properly, I 2 "sw.eetlln·~d." It is also given in the Spanish-Tagalog portion of the (1) pp=penultima producta, or baving tbe accent on tbe penultimate syllable; pc=penultima ' correpta, or having tbe accent on tbe last syllable.

INTRODUCTION.

LXXXVII.

Eictionary (page 323) and described: "cocos dulces que se COLDen con la cascara. Es comintang." (1). Of the equivalents in regular small type, oueo is a term of general designation for the "bud' of every fruit or flower; panabO is, as Zombo, any drinking-vessel, or, more strictly, for it is not 'a radical, but a grammatical form, any "contrivance for drawing wilter from a source;" aud it has nothing to do with. the cocoa nut, except by reason of the frequency with which the nut of tiolis fruit is made into a drinking-vessel or a baling out instrument. Speaking properly, therefore, there is only one word, niog, for "cocoa-nut' in actual Tagalog_ The other five, panabyaban, cacalo,llin, tabal, hongot, and tapyasitl, given in the Dictionary, which, we must suppose, were once in use, and among which there might be one or more for the fruit, are to be consjdered as belonging t9 that aboriginal language which has been referred to so often in this sketch, and the inference, in this case, is that the native term was displaced by the Malay one, and not, either that the coco-palLD was introduced by Malays, or that there was no term for the fruit in the lauguage. The case of the 12 names for the cocoa-nut was selected from among the various others mentioned by Crawfurd; because it is the one of easiest explanation; but what is said above of the misleading character of Noceda's Dictiouary, and of Crawfurd's mis-understanding, apply equally to the latter's other assertions abont the action of "goiug," "boiling' and "carrying" in Tagalog, and to those he LDakes about others in the Bisayan as well. Crawfurd's statement as to the 75 naLDes for the action of going is the more strange, as for this action there is in Tagalog no radical term, and the word used fllr the purpose is only a grammatical form. One may easily realize to what a small number could be reduced the 75 names for "to go" ~f the Spanish jesuit had only used a nomenclature and form of expression more precise in his Dictionary, saying, for instance, vadear, c/'uzar, "to ford," "to cross," instead of ir Ii la otm llarte, ' -to go to the other side;" aeompallar, "to accompauy," instead of il' dos jlmtos, "to go two together;" b!'-Scar, "to seek," instead of iI' a busca,-, "to go for," "to go to seek;" etc_, etc. Crawfurd's next assertion is to this effect: "But the most advanced of the nations of the Philippines have each of them a native literature; aud in the Grammar of Fr_ Gaspar de San Agustin a sketch is given of the Tagalog poetry.' _ It would be greatly satisfactory to have some specimen of this pre Spanish native literature and poetry, produced by Crawfurd; for no one else ever found the slightest trace or them. The sketch to which he refers as given by San Agustin is, doubtless a reproduction of the answers given orally by natives to questions as to the way in which meter and rhyme were by them understood. At any rate, of the poetry morsels given by San Agustin in his Grammar, some have been committ~d to writing or composed by the Spanish friar, and others, as he himself declares, were composed by Father Herrera, both being, for the most part, on topics connected with the Catholic religion. With such a ,Poor ~.nd scal?ty array of f~cts and knowle.dge, Crawfurd (pages CXXll-CXXVll) goes mto the COLDpal'lSOn of Tagalog with every other I'hilippine tongue of which he has perused a grammar or a dictionary. He speaks of the Pampangan and of the language of (I) Swe~t cocoa-nut fruit. of which the pulp is eaten together with the ajlell. it ia ueed in the CominLang.

LXXXVITI .

THE TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

. 110co. but e\rent1,1ully he sticks to the Bisoyun for his comparison. . Of the Bisllyan he says: That the phonetic character corresponds letler ·for letter with the same in Tagalog; that the cases of nouns are the same in both languages, the articles of common and proper nouns being identical ; that the plural of the Bisayan noun is formed by , an appropriate worn wbich is tbe same us in Tagalog; tbat gender is exp ressed in Bisayaq by tbe very. same two words signifying masculine and feminine in Tagalog; that the Bisayan pronouns are the same as, and are declined as in Tagalog; that tbe demonstrative pronouns are the same in the two languages; that tbe' Bisayan verb is formed on the same principle as the Tagalog and nearly by the same terms; that there exists no substantive verl> in both languages; · tbat tense and mood are in Tagalog and Bisayan expressed, not by · auxiliaries, but by inseparable particles, which are generally the same , in the two languages; and that the passive verb and the verbal noun are also formed by inseparable particles in Bisayan and in Tagalog. Everybody, we believe, will conclude from the above identities the co mmunity of the parentage and derivation of the two languages; but I Crawfurd does not, for he ends by saying: "Judging, tben, by the identity of the phonetic character of the Bisaya and Tagala, lind the close parallel which runs through their · whole grammatical structure, we might be disposed to come, at once, to ,the conclusion, that they are mere dialects of a common tongue. Tbis is, however, opposed by the stubborn fact that the great majority .of their nouns, adjec ives, and especially particles are wholly different." In support of this view, he then gives the following list of what be calls particles in the two languages, saying: "I shall exhibillit a few oti each of these classes of words as exatl:~ples, beginning with tbe particles:" ENGLISH

Before. , Towards. .' In stead of. Acording to. Without. Whither. Hither. Above, up. Near. Far. . Whilst. . Then . Late.· Thus. Slowly. Also. o Much. Little. Enough. Even. Perhaps. No. Only, but.

TAGALA.

Bagu. Daku. Pasabali . Diyata. Vala. Saan. Ditu. Taas. Babau. Palak . Gunaguna . Nuon, llUUll . Hapun . Gayull . Dahan. Naman. Dami. Dahan, iki.1i ayu ayu Sukat. Pa. Lamang. Di. Kundi.

It is a matter of much

BISAYA.

Atubangau. Nayun, dapit. Satullgud. Saling, slibullg, ingun. Sauala. Rain. Dini, dinbi. Ibabau, itaas Talutug, kuta. Halagu. Sauala.pa. Sadtu. Olaie, hapun. Siling sini, subang·sini. Rinai·hinai. Sabungman. Maramu, dagaya. Dtiit. Ayau, sarang. Pa. Aikan, bala, naha. Dili, indio Di .

disappointment . for tho:Se c who haye

INTRODUCTION.

LXXXIX.

admired the profundity which Crawfurd showed in bis research into the other languages spoken in Malaysia aud into the history and ethnology of the Malay Archipelago, and of regret for those who have the Philippine philology at heart, to find him s? poorly prepared to pass qualified judgment on the character and onglO of the languages spoken in these Islands. With the exception of pa, lamang and di in the Tagalog, pa, dili=indi and di in the Bisayan, colulDn, which may be said to be particles in the sense in which "particle" is understood by Crawfurd, all the other terms are either compounds and even phrases, or substantive words, the latter being susceptible of becoming verbs and of being conjugated in the respective languages. 'rhus, diyatais a compound of di+yata; namti1t, of na ~ man; eundZ, of em! t- dZ, both elements of which exist also separately in the language. Bago, means "new" in Tagalog, and Crawfurd himself gives it in the list Immediately following of adjectives in the two languages; - atubangan, given by Crawfurd as its Bisayan counterpart, means "presence,' and sa atl,bangan, "in the presence of;' that is to say, "before" in reference to place, while oago, means "before·' in reference to time. Both daeo and dapit are given in Noceda's Dictionary as the equi. valents of the Spanish "hacia"=English "toward; ' but dapit has been omitted by Crawfurd in the Tagalog column, and given only in that of the Bisayan. Pasaoali (the rigbt spelling is pasubaliJ means, '.'to except," "to exclude;" but "neither "instead of," nor anything in connection with the idea of a substitute Satmlgod (it is important to note tJiat in what Crawfurd gives as one word Lhere are two, sa and tungud), which appears in the list as the Bisayan counterpart for "in· stead of," offers similar strange wandering of meaning. Tungud is in Bisayan a word of wide signification. It means "to belong to," "to be in front of," "to assign," "to lie," Rnd has, by extension, the conditional import of "were it not for, ·· "toward," etc; but it is not found that it can ever be made to correspond with "instead of" in English. Diyata means in Tagalog "therefore," "if so; " and out of the three words saling, subung, ingun, · given by Crawfurd as equivalents of the English "according to" in Bisayan, only s"oung and ingun are found in the language. Subung is used only in Iloilo, aud ingun means, "to imitate," "to do as," having only by extension th e signification of ".as," "like," "according to." Uala is in both lunguages the term by which "negation of the existence·' is expressed, and its correspondence in signification with "without" is more a matter of ethics than of grammar. Making application of the negative import found in uala, it may 1 2 3 1 2 3 be said: (ang asong) ualang buntot, ("the dog) (having no=without) tail;" lI;ud we may in this way consider that uala is the equivalent for "without;" but we are not to reckon this in the comparison as a sign of a different parentage of the two languages. Saiiala, given by Crawfurd in the Bisayan columu, is not one word, but two distinct words, sa and uala, having somewhat the meaning of the Euglish phrase "at a time when there was not." Not to swell this Introduction to the size and character of a grammar, further examination of Crawfurd's table is here omitted; but the reader may rest satisfied that similar errors exist in the other words of his list. . . Crawfurd has made a basis of his comparative system and a condltlOu for discovering the common origin and deril'ation of any two languages, the accord of both ill the prepositions; and it is a

xc.

THE TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

matter of surprise to see that he has omitted to use this method for his comparison of Tagalog and Bisayan. Had he done this, or rather, had he been in a position to do this properly, he would then have fallen upon the touch-stone for ascertaining the unity of the Filipino tongues. Of pl~positions in the sense in which this word is applied to the European languages, only the following are found in Tagalog:

Ang, for the nomina~ive case singular; of common nouns or proper nang, " po~se •.slve" " \ nouns of things. sa, "obJectIve ". " . Si, "} nominative possessive of proper nouns of persons. ni, objective cay, nominative Sina, plural; } of complex personal names possessive nina., indicating companionship. objective canti=quina., "

All the other directives 01\ particles called prepositions in our languages are in Tagalog words belonging to other parts of speech, which are used either alone or in connect-ion with the preceding particles for the other relations which may exist between two nouns. Thus, casama, "companion," is sometimes used for "with;' sa loob, "in the interim' of," from oob, "the inside," for "in," "within;" sa harap, "in the presence of," from ha~'ap, "iront," for "before; " but tne .true preposition in the la~ter two cases is a and the adjuncts are merely completive terms. ¥ow, these particles are, with some variation of form, common to all the languages spoken by the Chriotian native inhabitants in these Islands. It may perhaps be asked how languages sajd to be of such a complex structure, and for wbich sueh a high superiority over Malay is claimed, can get along well with this paucity of such important elements as prepositions a!;e considered to be. They, however, do, and . this fact is the most important characteristic of their common parentage and of their dissimilarity from the Malay, the Javanese and the other languages of tbe Malay arcbipelago. It is with the prepositions in Tagalog as with the relative pronoun, only on a much larger and more important scale. Tbe above directives are mainly to be used in sentences the verb of which is in tbe ' active voice; but it mnst be borne in mind that the use of the ODe or the other voice of the verb is not arbitrary in Tagalog. Tbe active voice is to be used when the action is represented in abstract, or as in reference to an indeterminate object If the reference is to a determinate object, or if time, manner, place, ,instrnment, cause, etc., is to ' be denoted, the verb in rfagalog shon ld be used in tbe passive voice. It is tben tbat tbose Tagalog verbal passive forms whicb generally refer to the instrument, cause, place, etc., for the action, connote tbe relation which is the provillce of tbe preposition to establish in other languages. It will be seen, tberefore, tbat while, for example, bz£miil, means "to buy;" tbat is to say, "the ad of a person who buys," yOili, means "to buy with," and "to buy in bebalE or for the s~ke of," accQrd· ing to the nature of subject; and that, on the otber band, bilihan, contracted into hilhan , weans "to buy from." Hwnanap, is "to look for;" but yhanap, is " to look for witb;" while hatlapan is "to be searched for on a person;" paghanapan, "to look for

'}tct.

tNTRoD UbTIO~.

at;" ann so on lor other relations in innnmerable other cases. (1) The touch·stone for ascertaining the unity of the Filipino tongues is therefore the verbal mechanism. Neither are they, nor could they b~ different ianguages because of what Crawfurd says of dissimilarity in th~t class of their words which he calls particles or prepositious. That the articles aud the verbal particles are e~sentially the same in all the tongues spoken by the Christian native population in these Islands, the following abbreviated table of verbal active, and verbal passi ve particles, and articles will show: PARTICLES. Active. ~ Passive.

VERBAL

ARTICLES.

---- ~I~~

TIlgalog. MUm, ago ma,na. In An

Ibanag.

Ilocano. Pangafl!

Bisayan

1M a g, Mang. m a, In An I map· p a. Ag, mang, mam, Um. En An I man. Na. En An I Man.

Pampang.!Man. Bicol.

Persons.

U m, In An ma,me

Mag'INa. nag.

On An OnMaga. Ma, na' un- An j

I Cay ITa, la,

I Ni Si I

S·1

:u~·

Ni IQuen

Ang INangl Sa y

Iti

Say= Na Ed so Nang Can Ing Ning Qi1g Nen

I Qui

Nin Can sa Sing= Sa Ni ICan= cay Ang sang

I Iscau Ni I

Things.

Ang

These languages, moreover, agree in phonetic character; in grammatical structure; in elementary 'Words, and in the great majority of all other words; in the conjugative mechanism; and in the syntax. Natives speaking these various tongues are able, with very little practice, to understand each other, (2) which is never the case with any other two languages of those sprung from a different truuk. When it shall be ascertained that the particles of the Philip. pine languages or those ,,"ords without the help of which a gram· matical sentence cannot be formed, and that the verbal particles and the conjugation are not essentially the same throughout them all, then, but not until then, these tongues may be considered as tongues sprung from different sources. It, only remains now to review what Crawfurd says (pages cxxvi·cxxvii) about the words of the languages of the western portion of the Indiau Archipelago in Tagalog, and of the place which they have and influence which, he thinks, they have exercised in the (1) The reader may, perhaps, derive some clearer notion of wbat is here intended to say by noticing tbe numbers borne by the compounds pinag'I<BlIlata71 ' BinuBltlatan, and YBin1<,!i/at in the examples given on page LXXlV.. (2) It will, perhaps, be well to e"cept from this general easo of intelligi. bility the Ilocano and the JbanRg tongue •• which although, no doubt, sprung lrom the Bame branch a. the Tagalog, .how, however, greater deviations trom their otllvr Eilipino sieter languages.

XCII.

THE TAGALOG

LANGUAGE.

language. After commenting on the character of the words which 'l'agalog borrowed from Malay , and after assuring his readers that in the majority of cases in which the Malay word is found without a synonym in Tagalog, the borrowed word is a generic term, Orawfurd says: "The absence, in the two leading Philippine languages of such generic terms as these now enumerated, indicates a rude state of society and language among the Philippine islanders previous to their intercourse with the more advanced nations of the western part of the 1ndian Archipelago; and points, at the same time, to lhe cause, which gave rise to the introduction of a considerable class of Malay and Javanese words." Further on in his Dissertation (page ccxxviii), in an attempt at showing the importance of the Malay element in the languages ' spoken in these Islauds, is found the following list. English.

Dog. Hog. Domestic fowl. Goat. Buffalo. Elephant. Duck. Cat.

Tagala.

Bisaya.

Malayan.

Asu, ayam . Babiii. Manuk. Kambing. Karabau. Gadia. Wk. usa.

Iru, ayam. Babiii. Manuk. Kanding Karabau. Gadya, garya. Itik. Kuring.

Asu, j. Babi, m; bawi, j. Manuk, j . Kambing, m. Karbau, m.; kabu, j. Gajah, s. Itik, m. Kuching, c.

•

H e, then, say: "Among these words there can scarcely be said to be auy tha are not either Malay or that have not come through the Malayan; nor can I find that any of them have native synonyms." Aside from the fact that in the above list ayam is a synonym of asu, and that there is also a Malay term for "cat," in the list below the synonyms are given for the other Malay terms, kambing and gajah excepted, which Crawfurd could not find. in Tagalog. English.

Dog. Hog. Domestic fowl. Buffalo. Duck. Cat.

Malay.

Asu. (1) Babi. Manuk. Karabaw. Itik. Kuchin.

Tagalog.

Aso. Babuy. Manuc. Oalabao. Hic. Pusa.

Synonyms.

Ayam, banagan. Pag·il. Ibon. Anuang, damUlag. Papan, bib!. Coting.

Crawfurd's conclusion is to the effect that, since there are no synonyms in the language, all the domestic animals denoted by the Malay words were imported into the Philippines, and he includes therein also the elephant, which is known, both in Malay and in Tagalog by a name taken from Sanskrit. In the same way as that for domestic animals, he gives lists for words of plants, metals, for terms rlliating to tIle mechanic arls, to the art of navigation, etc, jn order to show that a rude state of civili · (1) As" is given in our lists (see on page XXXV) as "n exclusively Javanese word, while in the above table Crawfurd gives it as one common to the Malay and the Javanese; but he himself describes it in his Malay Dictionary (page 10) in the following way: "As... (J) The dog. It is used in the Malay oDly

in the word gi.qi.as .., "the dog or canine teeth."

•

lNTRof>uclJlfoN.

XCII!.

zation must have prevailed in these Islands prior to the infusion of Malay, and to show also the influence exercised by the latter over the language. Or course, we cannot go into the examination of all his lists without trespassing upon the limits fixed for this outline; but the reader, here too, may be sure that errors similar to those which have been noticecl in the preceding paragraphs run throughout them all. Nay, one is eveu led to believe that Crawfurd has taken advllntage of the double vocabulary in Noceda's Dictionary to create in the reader's mind the impression of a poverty of generic terms in Tagalog, by giving, sometimes the obsolete or nativtl, and omitting the usual or Malay word, and by giving, other tim es, the latter and omitting the native term. In the long lists of pages ccxxxii-ccxxxii i, this has been done in the case of duga, "to sound; " alago!~ae, "tide; " sauo, "anchor;" words no longer understood in Tagalog, but contained, however, in Noceda's Dictionary, and, apparently, given by Crawfurd for the purpose of showing that these terms had to be imported rrom Malay; a thing which could not have been done if the usual native terms taroe, taob, and sipit had been given; while the vocabulary was turned the -other way in the case of bondoe, "mountain;" where the giving of bitql,id would show derivation from the Malay buquit. Specimens as these exhibited ill his work by Crawfurd seem to be mere selections of the werds or that kind which may best serve his hypothesis. As to the character and importance of the words which Til galog borrowed from Malay sufficient, it is believed, has been said elsewh&re in his sketch as to dispense with further commtlut again here. As to Crawfur 's assertion of the Filipino tongues being devoid of such generic terms as the lack of whi ch iucicates a backward state of civilization of the inhabitants of these Islands prior to their intercourse with the more advanced nations of the western portion of the Indian Archipelago, the following lists of exclusively Tagalog terms may perhaps be of use in contradicting his statement. Adjectives: Good. Bad. White. Red. PJ'etty. Ugly. Hot. Cold. Long. Short. Great. Small.

MabuLI. Masama. Busilac. Mapula. Mariquit. pangit. Mainit. Malamig. Mahaba. Maicli. Malaqul, daquila. Maliit.

Miscellaneous terms: Water. Earth. Man. Woman. Body. Soul. Hand. Mouth. Life. Property. Honey. Fish. Cotton. Brother Brother路in-law. Banana. Wax.

Tubig. Lupa. Taub. Babaye. Cataouan. Caloloua. Camay. Bibig. Bubay. Ari. Pulot. Isda. Bulac. Capatid. Eayao. Saguing. Pacquit.

Terms relating to the moral and intelectual powers: Memory. Understanding. Will. Reason. .

Alaaill.. Bait. Loob, Ibig. Catuir\1D, .

!CIV. Terms relating to social condition. Panginoon. Alipin. Angcan. Lipi. Otos. Cabagsican.

Master. Slave. Lineage. Nobi li ty. Law. 'l'yranny.

Terms relating to the art of wor. BaclL. Digtna. Caauay . . Campi. Bihag. Moso.

War. Conquest. Enemy. Ally: Captive. Corsair.

Terms for the designation of metals: Iron. Steel. Cast steel. Copper. Gold. Ore.

Bacal. Patalim. Bin!llon . Tangs6. Guint6. Tumbaga.

Terms for the desiguation of ag ricultural implements. Sodsod. Singcao. Panghucay. Pilapil.

Plough. Yoke. Hoe. Mound.

Terms relating to house路building, cloth路weaving, fishing, etc. Til e. Thread. ~et . Casting-net. Warp. Woof. Shuttle. Needle. Chisel. Ad ze. Plane. Saw.

Tisa. Sinulid. Lambat. Po cot. Hanayin . Hiliguin. Sicuan, bol6s. Carayom. lLocob. Daras. Catam. Lagari.

Terms

of navigation.

Prow. Stern. Paddle. H elm. Flood. Ebb. Mouth of a river, bar. Sound-lead. River. Sea. Cove. Storm.

Doong. HulL Sagu:in. Oguit. Taog. Cati. Uaua. Panaroc Ilog. Dagat. Looc. On6s.

It has already been noticed that the four cardinal points are known by native and not by Malay terms.

Verbs: To To To To To To To To To To To To

write. use. ascend. sow. swim. know. hear. weave. see. bathe. remember. caress.

To To To To To To To To To To To To

cast, found. give. breathe. seek. take out. walk. smell. sew. look at. play. wish. please.

Titic G:imit. Aoquiat. Sabog. Lang6y. Alam. Dingig. Hubi. Qui tao Ligo. AlaallL. Liyag.

Tunao. Bigay. Ringa. Hanap. Alis. Lacad. Am6y. Tahi. Ting-i. Lar6. Ibig. Guilio.

It seems well Dot to let the review of Crawfurd's book go without giving here the words with which he closes his inq'liry into the Philippine tongues.

INTRODUOTION.

xcv.

"The Spanish writers on the languages of the Philippines inform us that the 'l'agala alphabet has been borrowed from that of the Malays . This is, however, the mere assertion of men who h~d not at~ended to the subject, or, in a word, who really knew nothing at all about it. The Malays, as already stated, have at present no native alphabet; and the 'fagala alphabet is peculiar and bears little resemblance to any native written character of the nations of the western part of the Archipelago These writers further assure us, without showing any evidence for their belief, that all the Philippine lan/!uages are but dialects of a common tongue, which they tell us is the Malay, as the Ionic, the Attic, and Eolian, are dialects of Greek; the Sp!).nish, Portuguese, and French, dialects of Latin; and the Northern languages of Europe dialects of Gothic. All this i3 asserted of languages of which little more than a fortieth part is Malay, and which, in other respects, have hardly anything in common with the Malay." , "But we have a similar, although not the same opinion from' a different and far higher authority. The illustrious pbilosopber, linguist, and statesman, the late Baron William Humboldt, has in bis large work on the Kawi of Java, expressed the opinion that the Tagala of tbe Philippines is the most perfect li ving specimen ef tha~ Malayan tongue, which, with otuer writers, he fancies to have been' the parent stock from which all th e tongues of the hrown race in the Eastern Archipelago, the Philippines, the islands of the Pacific, and even the language of Madagascar have sprung. I 'cannol help thinking that this hypothesis, maintained with much ingenuity, must have originated in tbis eminent scholar's practical un9.cquainlance with any language of the many which came under his consideration, and that had he posses~ed the necessary knowledge, the mere rnnning over the pages of any Philippine dictionary would have satisfied him of the 路 error of bis th eory. I conclude, then by expressing my con路 viction, that as far as the evidence yielded by a comparison of the Tagala, Bisaya, and Pampanga languages with the Malay and Javanese goes, there is no more ground for believing that the Philippiue and Malayan lauguages have a common origin, than for co ncluding that Spanish and PorLuguese are Semitic languages, because. they contain a few hundred words of Arabic, or that the Welsh and Irish are of Latin origin, because they contain a good many words of Latin; or that Italian is of Gothic origin, because it contains a far greater number of words of Teutonic origin thau any Philippine language does of Malay and Javanese." After this, it becomes necessary to give the words of San Agustin which have elicited such a shltrp criticism on the part of the English writer: "I have availed myself of all of them (the grammars com posed by other grammarians before him) and of some on other tongues of these Islands, for, certainly, th ey are uot altogether diverse tougues, but rather dialects of one and the same language, wbich is said to be the Matay; as it is the case in Greek with the dialects Attic, Ionic, Eolic, and the common Greek; in Latin with the It~lian, Spa~:lish, Portuguese and French languages; and in 'the North, With the dialects of the ' Gothio or 'feutonic language." (1) As tQ (1) no tod08 mo ho valido, y do otr08 de lenguns de 08taa Ialaa, porqae cler!.amente no 80n to!.almente divera"a ~ntre ai, oino varioa dialectoa de una miama lengaa, que dicen aer la Malaya; como en la Griega los dialectoa Atlico, J'6nico E6lico, y comun. Y de la ~atina lao lengua8 I!.aliana, E spaflola, Portuguesa y Flan: eo.a, y .en el Norte 108 dlalecto. de la longua Godt 6 Teut6nica. San Agustin. Oompendio del Arte de la Lengaa Tagala. Pr610go. '

XCVI.

TIrE TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

tbe alpbabet, he says: "Finally, I will give here their ancient system of writing, at present used in the Comintang (provinces of Laguna and Batangas) and elsewhere. The characters, they have learned fro!!1 the Malays, and are seventeen." (1) That Crawfurd should have thus rebuked the Spanish grammarians (or rather Father San Agustin, for no other before him ever treated of the subject) for entertaining, in 1703, an opinion as to the derivation of Tagalog, which, in 1852 everybody entertained but Crawfurd, and which, even at the present day is, perhaps, entertained by everybody except the author of this book. seems really too hard . Nor does it seem fair to treat the passing remark of the Spanish friar in the way of an assertion or in that of the exposition of a theory, as Crawfurd does. As to the Tagalog alphabet, Crawfurd is, certainly, in the wrong. The charge he brings forward against the Spanish writer is based on a gratuitous assumption; that of San Agustin 's ignorance of Malay being written in the Arabic character. Now, this cannot with a shadow of truth be supposed of any Spanish friar of the seventeenth century in this part of the world, when Spain was still engaged in war and league with tribes to the south of Luzon, and ecclesiastics were, mainly, sen t, in preference to civil officials or civilians, on errands of peace and treaty to those places where the Malay language and the Malay writing character were used as the general means of communication. But least of all can this be supposed of San Agustin who, besides his vast p ilological knowledge, was twice appointed provincial of his order, a nd a such could not fail to be present at the Government councils where all matters of war and peace with other Malay tribes were treated . either was Humboldt ignorant of this, when in his letter to Mr. Jacquet he said: "I entirely agree with you, Sir, as to the Bugis alphabet. The consonants are nearly the same as in the Taga log alphabet.. ..." (2) nor was Favre ignorant either, . when, speaking on. this subj ect he says: "Mr. W. Humboldt's opinion seems to solve almost the point; f0 r, ill his letter to Mr. Jacquet about the alphabets of the Asiatic Polynesia, he believes that the one of the present Sanskrit might well be the pedection of an ancient alphabet; to which the first alphabets of the Asiatic Polynesia, such as the Tagalog, Bugis, etc. belong." (3) The reference here is, therefore, to a~ ancient alphabet which must have existed, in which, probably, both Malay and Javanese were writtfln, before acquiring their present systems, and also the one referred to by the Spanish frear could be no other. Crawfurd himself, in the passage just quoted, says; "'fhe Malays, as already stated, have at present no native alphabet, .... , thus implying that they, once, had one. Crawfurd's critic:sm of San Agustiu is, therefore, unjust, and seems to be a striking instance of that aberration into which the human mind is liable to fall wheu, influenced by prejUdice, it fin ds it, necessary to derive facts from the hypothesis and not to derive the hypothesis from facts. (1) Por ultimo pondre el modo, que tenian de escribir antiguamente, y al presente 10 osan en el Comintan (provincias de la L~guna y Batangas) y otras partes. Los c8n\cteres son aprendidos de los malayos, y son diez y siete, Prosodia i'arrafo 6. (2) Je suis enti erement d'accord avec vous, Monsienr, sur I'alphab.t des Bugis, Les consonnes soot it peu pres les memes que dans I'alphabet tagala .... . (3) L'opinion de M. W. de Humboldt semble presque resoudre cette ques路 tion, car, dans sa lettre it M. Jacquet sur les alphabets de la Polynesia asiaLique. 11 pense que Ie saoscrit actuel pourrait bien etre Ie perfectionnement d'un ancien ",lllbabet, aoque\ auraient appartenu les premiers alphabets de la Polynesie ssiatique . tels que Ie tagala, Ie bugis etc. :favre. Gra.m msire Javanaise. Introduct!o.n, page X. J

INTRODU CTION,

XCYII,

Craw[urd's greatest error WAS that of the Tagalog alphabet being of local invention, a belief which, as far as our knowl edg,e goes, uo other writer shares with him, For the maLter of the relatIons of the Tagalog alphabet with other alphabets of those used in Snmatra and Celebes the reader is refe rred to what is said in the Orthography, as nothiug ~lse is thought necessary to sa~ here against, this vie~ of the English writer, It seems only pertment to mentIOn that If alphabets are inv ented to meet the reqnirements of, the , lan&nages t~ which they are to be applIed, and thut If dne cons IderatIon IS had of t.he phonetic characters of Tagalog on one side, and of Malay and JaVAn ese on the other, su ch a n alphab et li S tbe Tagalug could have been invent ed only for one of the latter two langnages, au the charge of "practical unacquaintance" wbich Crawfurd makes against Humboldt, tbe author is the pel'son least qualified to pass competeut judgmeut, for, of tbe numerous languages rev iQwed by both writers. he is acquainted ouly with Tagalog. Nor be it uncl eI" stood that he makes any pretence to special autbo rity in the latter; bnt Hnmboldt's profnndity and Crawfnrd 's snperficiality mu t be apparent, not only to the Tagalog scholar. bnt also to the common reader; not· withstanding the fact that Crawfnrd. to all appearance, sncceeded, and Hnmboldt erred, in cla3 ifying properly the lang uage, Both of them wl'I)te admirable works; that of Humboldt, in almost every res pect; that of Crawfurd, also excellent as 0 tbe languages of the Malay An~ hip elago, the Malay and Ja\1anese especially To say Lhe same as to his resea rch into those of the Phili~pines 'Wonld be greatly satisfactory; but the errors here are too gross 'and too fla grant to be overlooked. Crawfurd's accomplishments in the ethnology and history of the Malay Archipelago, and his philological researcb into the Ie wi, tbe present Jayanese and the Malay are much more meritoriolls and free from error, • In con.sideration o[ this and in honor of the memory of this great writer, it might appear fail' to pass more leniently 011 him; but we do not know that any other scholar ever em barked Oil a controversy for determining the character and deri\Tation of a language, as Cra wfurd did for Taga· log. so ligbtly ballasted with real kuowledge and so heavily loaded with arrogance. The last attempt in this sketch will be at tracing the origin of the lallguag~, or rather, at marking an od uta lion o[ the course in which to steer for lauding at the place from whiCh, probably, it ori· ginally sprung Tbe nU'e phenomenon has been menLion erl of sucb a I eculiar language as the Basque, shut up in th e mid st of Indogermanic langua· ges; aud to all appearance, we are h ere cOIl [ronted with what se~ms to be, i[ not an identical , at least a similar case. One is natu.rally led to believe that the closest amuity o[ T aga log might be with SOlDe Chinese dial ect of those spoken O\1er the vast empire witbin sucb a short distance from th ese Islands, or else to fincl tbe language in closer relation than it stands to those spoken in and about that part of the Indian Archipelago in which. it is believed, Malay has originated; bnt, strange enough, the closest af6nity h ere is with the languages spoken in tbe far away island of Madagascar, a fact which may lead to im· portant disco\1eries as to the origin anel race of the primitive inhabitants of these Isla'lels. if some other genius uses the Tagalog for the same purposes that Humboldt used the Basque language, In several purts of his work. to qnote whi ch would be too prolix, Humboldt calls attentiou to Lhese arr-iuiti es in the grammar of the two languages; but thc deficiency , by ldm IrequeuLly complained

Tn!!:

XCVfTI.

'rAOALOO

LANOUAOE.

of, in the means at hand for the study of the Malagasi at the time in which he wrote, made him believe that the similarity found in Lhe two languages so widely separated, was snother proof of the derivation from one and the same parent language of all those spoken by the Malay race The matter bas since received the attention of some distin· guished writers among whom Mr. A. Ma l'l'e , and Prof. Dr. Rein· The autbor has wald Brandstetter, of Lur.ern should be mentioned. been fortunate enough to secure a copy of each of the little pam· phlets, " D~s Noms de Nombres en uSlige dans la Malaisie et dans la PolYDllsie," "Proverbes, Maximes et Consei ls tmduits du Tagalog," and "Madagascar et les Philippiues," written by the first of the above mentioned gentlemen and addressed to the Royal Academy of Sciences at Turiu; and one copy of the "Precis theorique et pratique de Langue Malgache," by Mr. Gustave Julien, Paris-1904. The author has also been able to peruse the excellent pamphlet "Tagalen und Malagasen," Luzern-1902-composed by the other above mentioned writer, Prof. Dr. Reinwald; and a copy of the' " Grammaire Malgache redil!ce paries Missionnairus Catholiques de Madagascar' -1 853 - ,from which and from the work of Humboldt be could draw the data offered in the following pages. To quote from among these various sources the one from wbich, in each case, the data have been derived would be proper. This, however, the author is nnllble to do, not only because 0 the tediousness which would result therefrom, but because he has no longer at his rlisposal the pamphlet of Prof Reinwald, having only been able to peruse it hurriedly [or a few bours and take some notes, nor can any other copy of it be obtainable in time to be utilized for the present edition of the book. This is the lI:ore to be regretted and the quoting of the source the more required in this qase, as it is, mainly, from this excellent pa:nphlet that lhe largest portion bf the comparative matter has been taken. . In the foregoing comparison with the Malay and the Javanese languages, the aim bas been to sbow all that Tagalog has peculiar to itself, that is to say, i bems not found in any of the otber two languages. Tn the comparison, which is to follow, of Tagalog and Malagasi, the aim will be to show all that the two langnages have peculiar to themselves, leavillg out wbatever other matter they have in common Thus in the lexical comparison, such with Malay or Javanese. words given in the lists of pages XXVI·XXXVIII as are COlnLl'JOL1 also to the Malagasi, will be here omitted, and the list only given of those found exclusively in the lutter and in Tagalog. (l) Before doiL1g this, however, it is believed necessary to say something concer.ning the MaJagasi alphabet and the Malagasi phonetic character, with a vie)v to show certain peculiarities and phonetic changes without which the analogy, in most cases, of the words found in the two languages could not be well understood by the reader. The Malagasi alphabet is described as consisting of the following Vowels.

a, pronounced as the same }etter in the English word It£ar;,1 "bell;" e, "bill," and the adv· i=y,

,. ., " as that of tbe " same in ""doll. ' pbatioaUy,

(1) Crawfurd, io pages cU i·clvi of bis Malay Aod Javanese word. found in Malaga.i.

))

erbial termination ly ; mO\7e, nnrl, emII

Di.sertation, gives a

liot of 165

INTRODUCTION.

XCIX.

'l'he souud 01' i is, iu speech, repeated after g, ny, h, k and ",Jr,. The reader will pot fail to note that although the character are not exactly the same still the vowel souuds are in Malagasi es· sentially th e same as in Ta2alog. Following the ahove plain of calliug atteution to those feat?res only which are exclusively common to the two languages, the fact IS here to he mention ed of both having practically the same dipthongs. Thus, Tagalog a1/., ao 0.11=11.1/ Malagasi al, ao 01', dipthongs wbicb, speaking strictly, are fouud neither in Malay nOl' iu Javauese. The simple cousonants are in Malagasi seventeen: b, d, i, h, le, I., In, 71, Il, p, ,', t, having, virtually, the salDe sonnd as iu English, and g, which is pronouuceq as the salDe letter in the English word "get;" ./, somewhat as Iz in the German word katze; Ii, as the some letter in the Spanish word nil10; s, » sh in the English word "she;" " John." » j A matter of difficnlty, it seems, in Malagasi words consists in the pronunciation of the complex consonants tl', d,', tltl', 'lid,', which is described as scarcely perceptible, that of tl' being nearly the same as that of the salDe cOlDbination in the English word "traveler." Another peculiarity of the pronunciation in Malagasi is that of the final syllable of words ending in \Towels, dipthongs and nasals, being frequent.ly dropped in ntterance. The con onan system of th e Malagasi shows, therefore, greater deviations from tbat of the Tagalog than those which have be'3n noticed of that of the latter from those of lhe Malay and the Javanese; but this may be due to the influeuce of a Sonth African 'rhis dissimilarity in the element in the languages or Madagascar. consonant systems of the two lauguages, especially caused by the pre· sence of the above complex cousonauts and by that of an in ~Jala· gasi, has a correspondiug influence over the phonetic charater o~ both, with the result that, in certai n Cllses, the composition of syllables in Malagasi is Euch as is never fouud in Tagalog, and that the di ssim· ilarity i,n the orthography and sound of Lhe words common to the two languages is frequeutly so great that their identity conld not be recognized but .for the meaning. The following itemized statement of phonetic changes. is given for the purpose of enabling th e reader t<!l uudel'sta ud better tho affillity of the words of the two languages appearing in the list which is later to follow,

Vo we ls.

Malagasi a=Tag. a, spmeLimes=» i, frequently dropped Mlllag!lsi e=Tag. i, sometimes = a,

as iu Malag. manga=Tag. mallga, "mango;" "" " vava=" bibig, 'mouth;" but at the end as in ·Malag. ol'a1!a=Tag olatl, "rain," as in Ma lag. rekitra=Tag. dicquit, "to glue;" but fe= II paii, "leg;" and u 1(, teno = t(mao, "to dilute." Malagasi (J= ao, " bin,go=" pingcao, "crippled;" buL sometimes = UY, n" 0/0= II apt,!!, "fire. In other cases, freely interclianged with II as in Tagalog, JJ

THE TAGALOG L ANGUAClE.

Consonants and Combinations.

Malagasi h=Tag. C=IJU, as ill Malag. h oh o=Tag COCr) . " nail. " hOl'ana= .q(t/Ctng, "grown up." {}, ,.= " " ozatra =" ugat, "vein." .1/, zari= yal'i, "finished." y, ;,= 11 a1'0= a.qao, " to defend ." ,{} , I, aribo= li uo , "thousand ." ,,= " /y= t, fotsi=" pltti, "wbite. " j', sot1路o= 0901'0, " lad le" tr= d, t1"itI"Y= dibcl;b, " breast." I eZa= diZa, " tongu e. ' d, 1= afo=" a1JII.I/, "fi re." f- " p, V= b, vato =" balO, "stone." ny, anm'ana = " rlyalan, "Dame.' n= i, (illa = " piying , "cica trix ." y= l' j'ony= pimay, "turtle." ay, 1', Ctnd"o = til'ao, "day. " tandei, "mark." tanel,'a = nel, ,,= climy = " limit, " five. " t, d= toko = " ton{}clJ, "tripod." k= " 'YI,q c, i murma= "im)Jon,' '10 be together, " mb= mlJ, ana= an, " Soratl'ana = "sulatan, "written upon ." eni ma= "animin, "divided ioto six," ~n a= in, ) 1=

At the end of words it is found: Malag. ka = Tag, c, as JD Malag ofaca=Tag. opac, "bark." haral' , "in fr ont. " tra= p, atrilca= " alan, "b illow," na = n, alO1~a = " y =" a, dimy = " lima, "five." The following Tagalog sounds vanish somet imGs in Malagasi: {}, as y, r, s,

h, ,QS,

ag, as,

Tag. bOll'; =Malag. " aying= lctl'o= " SUIn)JII= ., panhic= " bag ay = layag= laya8= lipas =

hao "new'" maina, "to' he parched with heat;" laulao, 'to play ;" ompa, "oath; " a1iika, " to go upstair ;,. hivey, "harpoon;" lay , "sail ; lay, " fu git ive; Ie/a, "to pas. off."

Afte~' the preced ing accou nt of the changes in sOllnds, th e read er will be in a posi tion to pereei \'e hett er the ftf finities between th e Malagasi. and 'Taga log word s given in th e following lis t.

Tagalog,

Malagasi. Vaoka. Vava. Volo maso.

Bohoc. Bibig. Pili k muh\..

Fe.

Paa.

Nify. Ati Vity. Hatokli'.

Ngipin. Atay. Binti. Batoe,

Signification, Hair. MouLh. Eye.brow. Leg. Tooth. Liver . Uoll' of the leg. Nape (of the neck.)

INTRODU CT ION .

OJ.

____M_'_ I~ ga_ sj_ , ________T_ 'ga~jOi~,_____________SI~ gn_ifl_ ca_ tlo_n,_______ l~elaku.

\'ovo-maso. Volo. Flbirifanii. Yavy. HimD.· Goaka. Oranga Tsatsakii. Oli tJ·u Totokii. Har8. Mauga. Tsabo. Bory=vory. Kotroka=kol'oklL Falda. Sotro. Fanapaka. Akalo=halo. LambA. F6takli. Zoro. Haty. Malaky. Matavy. Vao. Bingo. .l<'ornpouii Mandro Sara. Rekitrii. Maha, lala. Safotrii. ('1'0 cover.) Raratra. Lilitrii. Anteua. Voatra. Teno. Kohokoho . hi tru. Hilan ii' Akatrii. Leha. Rekitra, kiky. Lango. Ala. Tindri. Aifia. Hornok·omokii. Siokn Hila. Fandl'O.

palnd . Bobong naug mdn. Buto. Pilipisan . Babaye. Quima. Ouae. Olang. Sasac. Olay. Toea. Oala. Mauga. Sabog. Bola. C910g. Palapag. Soro. Pang-apa . Hal o LambfJn. Putic. Suloe. Galis. Malicsl. Mataba. Bago. Pingcao. Jpon . Mamb6. D aHl..

Dicquit.. Quilala. Sapo t. (Sbroud .) Ualat. Lilic. Hilltay. BuhRt. TLlDao. Cocooc. Hilis. lfilig. Acquiat. L~icad .

Ongat. Lung-6y. Ails. Tindi. Hing1l.. Momog. Pasiyog. Quita. Pamng.

Palm of th e han!l. Eye·lid. (Eye-roof). Down , hair. Temples. (of the [orehfad) F emale. Large shell. Raven . Spl'awn . A stnallliz8rd. Worm . Bill of a bird. Tortoise·shell. Man go. '1'0 scatter seeds. Froth. Thundering. . HUl·dl e. Spoon . Sickle. Rice·pestl £,. Robes . Mud. Cornel', angle. Itch . Swift. Fat. New. Cri ppled. To assemble. To bathe. 'To take to. To glue, tick . T o be acquainted with . To di sperse. To twine. To wait. Doing, lifting To cas t, to found. To cackle. To hew. To belld , to 1I1cline. '1'0 ascend. To walk. '1'0 bite. To swim. To take out. To press. T o brea th e. \ To wash one 's mouth i oleau . ']'0 hi ss. ']'0 see. The plain .

II.

Malagasi,

THE

TAGALOG

LANGUAGE.

Tagalog,

Bobon. Liuayuay. (Dawn.) Dilim. Umaga. T abobog. Sahiy. Banoy. Caloloun. ( oul) . Bibirangin. Babang. Pouit. lry. Hili. Foly. Sulid. Ohy. Hucay. FarRfara. Palapala. Diola. Limas. Haza. Caya (insfr. ~or ·hunt) OZR. Hugas. Dio. Ligo. Lalao. LarO. Abily. Alipin Raha. (Brothel' or sis er) Daga . (Aunt) . Baba! Bap,\l Haba! Abila! Ya. Bagll , ba. (con). \'01'0.

Diavolalla. (Moonlight) Alina. Marailla.. Tavo. Rnlohy. \ ·aoo. Lolo. (Butterfi.\" pit'it.) Bibila.m. Vazana. Yody=fory.

SignIfication, \Vell, foonLain, Night, dark. Moruing. Pumpkin. Ear, spike of coni. Hawk, A kino of snake. Cheek. Anus. Envy To spin, To dig oot. Scaffold (fo l' building.) '1'0 bale Oil t, Hunting. To cleanse. To bathe. To play. Slave. Oh how pretty! Oh! The inlerrogati\'e adv.

The preceding list, with exception of the particle va and the interjections haba and baM, affords, it is true, no instance of any word of the kind of those which are indispensable to the construction of a grammatical sentence, and it is well to say that the affinities between Malagasi and Tagalog are least to be sought in the lexical co mparison. Attention will be called only 10 the ethical relation found in connection with the meaning of some of the words in the two lau· guage~, for, in our opinion, both philologists .and ethnologists have hitherto showu undue disregard for this kind of terms in their reseal" ches into tb e languages and race characteristics of rude tribes. Even Humboldt who went so deeply into determining the origin of the primitive inhabitants of Spain and the tract they occupied on the Iberic Peninsula by using tbe Basque language in connection with names of places, neglected,. almost entirely, to use this method for the inquiry he made into tbe languages of the people inhabiting this part of the world. This, however, is perhaps tbe best source of evidence where the direct testimony of history is wantiug. If it were possible that a pbysical catacl ism should sever direct in ter· course between this part and the other continents of tbe world, or to drain off all source of historical record without, bowever, extin· guishing life and language, still the wOl'd Jeslwristo in Tagalog, or words as NU(f/)a· Vizcaya, San B ernm'd-ino, etc. would tell a tale of a past Christian Spanish influence. Ethical relations of this kind the Rnglish "to stea l away" and tbe German "wegstehl en," the English "to carry away" and the Italian "portare via," etc. show. In this connection names of places commemoratory of some histo· rical event lire of the higbest value. It is to he regretted that the llalDeS of

INTROD I:CTION.

urn.

places in these Islllud~, those imposed by ~h e S]Janiards ~r taken from Spanish excepted, hav e little or no ethnologIcal or phllo!oglcal valu e. 'J he majority refer to som e natural product abou~dmg. lD t he locality, nnd ' such as, for. insta.nce, lJ1ryc~mallan, "aboundlllg lD reed· can e;" Mayt((uig , "aboundmg lD water; etc , are sel.f explanatory: Others of the sam e kind are radi cals and less ex press Ive, as: Ank polo, " a tree," (ar/ oca1]JII$ COllllnunis); Calamba, :'a kiud oE s talk·streaked reed.cane;" L ipa , " nettle;" Ltwoan, "citron;' etc. Ot hers refer to some local circumstance, bearing on th e locati on or on th e con· dition of th e place, as Caloocan, "cove, or p lace a bounding in coves;" TOllctllan, " summit, or place co mmandin g an eXl ensive v iew;" Malate, "marsh; ' Mahayhay, " leveled ]Jlace;' etc. There are ot hers whi ch we may suppose to be co mm emoratory of so me event, as B i nangonan, "place of th e lif tin g;" NagsugM, "d iven; P tnamalallan, " place oC sorrow" etc.; bnt th ere ex isting no traditi on or legend attl1cbed to the names th ey al e, th ereEo{e, without ph ilological "alu e. The words coming next in ethi cal signi ficance are the inler· jections, wben tb ey are not mon osy llables or m ~re scream s, as co n· Decting two peoples lD the express Ion of fee llllg better th an any other kind of words. Of these we find two very important instances in the list, Malag. baba=Tag. bapa(a), and Malog. halJa =Tag. aUtia. Th: pretence in Malagasi oI th e pa n icle va, correspondin g wi t h th e Tagalog /Ja=uagft, is also of im]Jortan i!e in the co mpariso n, [or it is, iu both of them, tantamouut to tho 'sig n o r iDt errogatioD in 0 111' lang uages, which in Malay aud JavaD ese, is expressed by other mea us. Of the other term s in the li st, th e Malagasi 1010 , " bu ~tertl y," " spirit;' corresponding with tbe Tagalog cal%lta, "soul ;" an d th e Malagasi va!}y=Tagalog babay(p), (1) "woma n," " female;" deserve spe· cial notice. The Malagasi 1010 a ppears in radi cal shape, wbil e the 'l'ngalog caloloua is, in nil probability, a co mpound of tb e ki nd o[ ca , root t an in a so mewhat COl'l'Upt fo rm. The sign ificati on is by Prof. Reinwald. referred to th e spiritnalism fou nd in th e primitive As an eth ical word, th e religion of .the Malay Poly nesian people. Malagasi vavy=Tagal og IJabay( e) has an importance wbich can bardly be exaggerated. ID reference to th e allegori cal construction pl nced by the human mind on words for sucb thin gs, persous, and acti ons as the conception of which varies according to th e ideas or th e different nations nnd races, we may menti on th e di fferen t relation in whi ch the term for designating th e femal e indi vidull i passed froll] Latin into tbe Romance langnages. T he Latin term s are mulier, femina , and domina; but in the Spanish nl1~jer, the cons ideration is 1,0 the genns; in th e French f emme, to tb e sex; w hile in tb e Proven ~al dona, still fonnd in th e Catalan or Limousin dial ect and perhaps also in the Spanish dona and dtl el1a , th e consid erati o l~ is, more or less, to the social rank and to the position of th e individual in the matrimonial nnion . In ~r a l ay , only th e conside· ratiop to that state of dependence in whi ch th e femal e, is fonnd to tbe male individual ill Oriental instituti ons is attached to th e term. Pe1'alnlJUan, "woman," "femal e; ' is not in Mala y a radi cal or simple term, but a Gompound of the kind of p er' -j' root + W I . The root is amp", "upheld," "sustained," " protected;' cOl'l'esponding, (1) A notoriou. error i'a (ound in Fa,' re's French Malay Dictionary (2nd vol .. page 194) consisting in identifying the Malay word bi"i with the Tagalo~ babay(e) iOt!tead o~ identifying it with bin,ibin i , "ge ntlewomao, " "lady;" the redupli cllLion' here, Re

the CBse of nona, Ifgrn.od(llther:" {'Ita " fatber ," mosUl08 "spoiled child ,'

and other kindred and colloquial name. being s uggeotive o( affection or re. pect. '

mv.

THE

TAGALOG

LANGUAGE.

it seem, to the Tagalog an!jJon, "protectin g;" and thus, Mal. per-amplta1=Tag. in-ampon-an, "the one uuder protection " Despite the fact o[ Tagalog possessin!!: the same radical word and a nalogo ns nuun路building method, neither this nor any similar compound exists for the designation of the female individual of mankind, it being also strange that nothing, so far a OUT know ledge goes, of the word babaye or of ita a llegoric meanin g i fonnd in any of the languages of th e western portion of the Indian Archipelago. It is only in tile languages of Mada..gllscar that both the ~rrn and the a llegory are found. In th e Malagasi Grammar compi led by th e Catholi c missionaries it is said that when iu Malagasi "thin gs are spokeu of which consist of two parts, th e stronger or principal of the two is design ated by ny lahy ny, and the Thus, fanrJarinan路pari, from weaker or seconda ry, by ny vavy '1/,.1/. ha1'ina, "sugar-m ill ;" ny lahimpangariiiana," the upp er crus hing cylinder; ny vavimpana1'iiiana, "the lower tone or cylinder_ (1) In the persoual pronouns it is fonnd that only those of the first a ud second person siu gn lar, aho and hianao iu Malagasi, seem to offer some resemblance in the form to their Taga log co unterparts acb and ic{w; but the peculiarity of th e Malagasi personal pronouns should be mentioued of having all of them plural and case forms as the same iu Tagalog. Iu tb e com pari son with Malay attention. was ca lled (page X LIV) -to the existence ill, Tagalog of the article or' pronoun of companionship sina, and jt .is well to uote agaiu here that the uearest approacb to it is found in the Malagasi tlay=iley. In both languages it is fou d that tbe possessi ve pronouns and th e possessi I'e case pf the personal p ronouns are al i e. 'rue demonstra ' t'es are much more num erous in Malagasi than in Taga log, for, in the former, there is one for each of the various degrees of remoteness in the obj ect and fo r reF.erring to the same us being ill or out of sight. The fa ct most deserving noti ce i tbat oE these pronouns bei ng made plural by inserti on of the syllable 1"e in Malagasi, a thing which in Tagalog can only be> done by using the pluralizing particle. Traces, bowever, oF. th e uum erous Malagasi demonstratives are fo und in the T agalog adverbial forms clihan, day/a, nandiyan, etc; in the Ibanag, and in that variety of Bisayan whi ch is spoken in Panay. Tbe fact is also to be mention ed that the demonstratives are in both languages related to the ad \7erbs oE place. The uumerals are ill Malagasi much the sa me as in Mal ay and Javanese aod of.!'er, therefore, no gr~ater importance for the co mpariso n. A feature, however, whi ch is oE vaille in appreciating th e affi nities between th e two languages is the fact that tbe term [or I he expression of the ullity in Malagasi is not sa, as in Malay a ud Javanese, but isa, as io Tagalog. The importance whi ch, for purposes of comparison, is to be attached to the presence of th e prefix i in the fo rm at ion of this numeral and in that of the ordinals has alreadv been mentioned. Another feature bearing 0 0 the poiot oE the affiuity here und er cousideration, is fouud in the manner for the counting of the numbers between "ten " and "twenty ' whi ch is the same in the two languages, excep t in the eq uivalent of "leu" being exp ressed in Malagasi, while the same is ulld erstood in Tag,ilog. Thus, Malag. iro!! k-ambin 11.11 ./olo = Tag. labil1g is,! (sa POtlo) "ODe in excess" (oE teo) (1) E D parlant des cbosee compoeees de deux pi eces, la plus forte on In principale .'appelle "V lahv "V . et la plu. faib le, lly vavy"y. Example.: Fangari"an-pari de "arina, "moulio il. brocber la canoe;" " 11 lallimpangarinana, "Ie cilindre .up rieur qui eCrat;6," ?"y vavim.panfLJ"iiiaua, 'ola I)lerre ioferieure." GrSlmmaire MRI2'RChe redi gee par Ie. Mi.HiooDaire. Caibolique. de lIladl\ga8 r ar, page 67, chapler 247.

rNTRODUCTION.

CV.,

For the ordinals ~ra"'ga i uses the prclix jaha, whilc Tagalo;:: uses the prefix ica. In this, also, some analogy may be found, for tbe MaJagasi /aha corresponds to the Tagalog )Jaca whicb, in tbe latter, may be considered as the nominal form of maca, a prefix used in forming adverbial nnmsrals. The ad I'erb in the two languages affords little gronnd for comparison. It is ouLy well to say aguin here that adverbs of place are, in both, formed from the demonstrative pronouns. Thus, Malag. ity =Tag ito, "this;" Malag ely ='fag. dilu, "here;" and so on for tbe others. The prefix in l\Ialag. ha ='1 ago aa is found used in both Langusges for certain a(lI'erbs indicating past lime, as seen in Malng. halina =Tag. cagal)i, "last night;路 , eto. The affinities between Tagalog and 1\1a lagasi are chiefly in tLe grammatical forms. Those word-building Tagalog processes not found in Malay and in Javanese are, geuerally, found in Malagasi. Beginning with the abstracts it is found thllt, besides the widespread Malay and Javanese metbod of "'a, in Tagalog co, and in Malagasi ha + root+in Malay, Javanese and Tagalog, an, aud in Malagasi, ana, ~[aI8gasi po sesses also the special one of Tagalog lJa,qCfI. =Malagasi falLa ~ root, not found in the other two languages. Thu, Malog. jahalilla=Tag. pagcalalim, "dllpth." The method, Tagalog pa ,- nasaL root=Malogasi fa ' nasaL + root is used for nouns of instrllmeut and is in both lauguages attended witb the same phone.tic changes at the point of contact of the prefix and the root. Thus, in Tagalog, WE" have panit/at "pen ," from slrlat "writing;" and in Malagasi, fanjaitra, "naedle'," from zaitra, "sewing.' Tue Tagalog method mapag t root, used for frequelllative verbal Ilouns indicative of the persou who indulges ill certain questi nable acts, may be identified with the Malagasi m 'lla nasal . root. Thns, we have in Tllgalog mapagacsayft, "squanderer," from acsa!l(i, "waste;" and in MaLagasi mpanasa, "washer," from mana a. "to w'lsll.' Arljectives in Malaga i are, as in Tagalog, simple or compound. The adjective-auilding prefix rna is not [ouurl in any other language ontside the Tagalog and the Malagasi Thus, lila lag. mafa~路y=Tag. malaM . "fat.' Adjectives are also formecl iu both lallgllage~ from the verbal passive forms, as seen in Malag. lelana =Tag. dilaan. "charlatan;' from Malag. lela=Tag. dila, "tongue;" in i\ralag. !'a1路illrc=Tag. babayinill, "effeminate;" from Malog. vavi/ ='fag. I)avay(c), "woman" In both languages, too, adjectives of a certain kind oro formed by using the term by which possession is indicaterl before a radical denoting in abstract An assimilable ([uality. Thus, !\Ialag. mana1(ia1'fl.~~Tag. may pillad, "happy;" from Malag. zal'a = Tag. ]iiilarl, "happinoss." The dimillntive sense of adjectives is expressed by the reduplication; in Tagalog, of the radical; in Malagasi, of the whole compound. Thus, !lfalag. maintimainty =Tag. rnaitimitim, "blackish;" from Malag mainl!l=Tag. mai/im, "black." But, by far, the most important affinities Rre in the verb-build ing processes of the two languages. The radical is sometimes in both a verb by itself, as the Malag 101lga =Tag. gnlill.i), "to come from," shows; but, most frequently, however, the verb is formed frOID roots belonging to other parts of speech by the application of particles All these verbal particles begin with m in the two ISllgllages 8nd this consonant ~hanges to Malog .f =Tag.l1 for thc passive voice, they, besides, being 10 both, genemlly, the same and also used for th same or allalogous purposes . .It is a mark of comlTlon parentage and one more tban nlly other IIJdlCative of closer affiuity in lnngunges of the Tagalog type, that 0 f the use of the same particles for the expression of the verbal

CVI.

THE TAGALOG

LANGUAGE.

relation and for the fOl'matioll of identical or analogolls kinds of verbs or of analogous actions. 'fhe peculiarity to be noted first is that of phonetic chauges, sim ilar to those in Ma lay and Ja vanese, of th e initial consonant of the radical in the case of certain kinds of verbs, occurring also in Malagasi and Tagalog. Bearing in mind th at Tagalog c = 'lU, t, P =Malagasi h, t, f, we have in:

Tagalog.

Malagasl.

------------------------------------------Coha=rnoha, " to take;" locso=mocso, "to cross 路examin e;" pasoc=masoe, "to en ter."

Hay=may, "to burn;" tamy= mamy, "to sweetlln;" faty-maty, "to die ."

A more imporl ant feal ure of analogy is found in the fact of both languages' requiring the use of the verbal prefix beginning in T agalog with p and in Malagasi with j fo r the verb whi c h denotes tbe subordi nate action wh enever two verbal prefixes combine for expressing different actions or for denoting an action more co mplex than the one found in the simple verb. Thus, we have that Malagasi manOltlou=Tagalog rnagbago, "to renovate;" and that it changes to Mala路 gasi mampanoulou=Ta ga log rnagpapagbago, for "to cause to renovate. ' In the co mparison of the ver\>al prefixes in tb e two languages it is fonnd that the T agalog verQal particle about the origin and use of whi ch euougb has been said in the co mparison with Javanese. has also an eq uivalent in the Malagasi Olll, although the importance of om in the latter langna e is much less than that or um in Tagalvg. A s a n instance of the analogy of the particle in the two languages, the Ta5alog curnain and Malagasi homa71a, "to eat;" is mentioned. 'fhe Tagalog verbal particle mag may be identified with the Malagasi mi, used for the fo rm ation of, generally, transitive verbs in both languages, Thus, we have in Tagalog, magsabl "to say;" and in Malagasi mikapo7ca, "to strike." It deserves to be. noticed that Tag. mag=Malag. mi agree in forming correlative parties-meaning compounds, a kind of complex noun in the signification of which th ere is included a reference both to th e pvincipal and to th e secondary party, with the differen ce, however, that in 'fagalog mag is prefixed to the noun of the principal, and mi in Malagasi to that of the secondary party. Thus, we have in Tagalog, 'magamii, "father and child; " with mag prefixed to the nouu of the principal party. amc/, "father;" and in Malagasi, mianaka, " parent a nd child;" with mi prefixed to th e noun of the seoondary party, analca. "child " Mi is found in that dial ectical variety of Bisayan which is spoken iu Ceba and also sometimes in the Bicol tongue. The verbal prefix ma is used in Tagalog for intransitive verbs, and it is also so used, though not so frequently, in Malagasi . Thu., we ha ve in 'fagalog, matticot, "to be afraid; " from tacot, "fear;" and in Malagasi, mataiLotra, "to become frightened, " "from" tahotra, "fright." In other respects the Malagasi ma, sometimes coutracted into m , shows analogy with the Tagalog man in both prefixes being used for verbs the action of which denotes the use to whi ch certain instruments are pnt by the agent. Thus, in Tagalog, mamiuas. from bittas. "hook;" and 'in Malagasi, maminta, from 7)inta, " hook; " "to fish using a hook" in both Illnguages. Man, the verbal pl'eRx whi ch in Tagalog is used for various kind s of verbs, is found in Malagasi used also for verbs denoting actions of the same various kinds as in 'fagalog. It is well to Dote

"Ill.

eVIl.

J NTIlOIiuOTION.

Lhat Lhe same phonetic changes ill the initial consonant of the root to which the particle is applied take place in the Lwo languages, as he following table given by Prof. Reinwald, shows:

Tagalog. Root.

SLl/at.

Malagasl.

~--------~------~~-------~~---

Com pound.

Manulat

Tapis.

Manllpis

Pocpoc. Bonga.

Mamocpoc. Mamonga.

Slgnlflca1ion.

Root.

Compound.

l Tobitnally. write baÂˇ

Soratra.

Manoratra.

To wear an apron. To strike. To frudiEy .

Signific ation.

----~----~----

IFaf. y Fofoka. Vony.

To write.

I To weal' an Manory . l apron. Mamofaka. To strike. Mamony . To blossom.

The verbal prefixes, Tagalog maca =Malagasi maha are used in the two languages for causal and potential verbs, a striking instance oE similarity. Thus, Tagalog macabflhay=Malagasi mahavelonne, "to give, to impart life; ' and Tagalog macamaluy=Malagasi maha/aly, " to cause deatb; " Tagalog 11lacasaqu'it, "(0 canse pain; ' from saquil, "pain; " and Malagasi maha/aly, "to mak e. merry;" from fa/y , â€˘ merry." Although there exists in the form little similarity between th e Taga log verbal prefix mag1Ja and tbe l\lalugasi infix amp, still there exists analogy in the use of these particles in the two languages, for they are in bolb applied to form causative verbs, and verbs which refer to. the action as performed by an agent other than the subject. Thns, in Tagalog, magpadalrl di/ii, "to order to bFing," from dalel., "to tak e to;" aud io Malagasi, mallpanghaleITe, "to order to hri ng," from alen'e, "to bring .." 'rhere exists some analogy betweeu tbe Tagalog verbal prefix maguin :lod the Malagasi milia. MagÂˇu in is used to form verbs the aClion of which denotes the conversion of a thing 01' a quality into another. lIfiita is used to form verbs the action of which denotes change or gradual evolution in the conditiou of the subject, corresponding to "deveuir" iLl French and to "to become" in English , it being applied both to substant.ives and to adjectives. Thus, we hal'e in Tagalog, maguinhu!lop, "to be couverted iuto a beast," from hayop. "beast;" and in l\1alagasi mihabib.ll, "to become a beast," from biv.ll, " beast." The most signifiCimt feature of affinity is in th e particles used for tbe passive voice o[ the verb in the' two languages. Iu tbe comparison with the Malay and the Javanese, atteution ha been called to the imporlance which, for purposes of differentiation, is to be attached to the presence of peculiar passive forms in Tagalog, and to the wide separation which this fact indicates betweeu it and those two languages, reference having also been made to the force these facts have aga inst the theory of a common p&rentage of them all . Now, if the above views are correct, and if their scope has not been overrated, then the more force tbis fact is considered to have against the theory of a common parentage of Tagalog, Malay and Javanese, the more force wi ll be attributeci to the same for the support of the theory of a commou parentage of Tagalog and tbose !anguages with wh ich, as the Malagasi, it has these passive forms III common. The prefix i=y, the prefix, infix and suffix in, and the suffix an used i ll Tagalog for the varioLls passive forms of the verb, co rrespond to the infix ?1l and the suffixes i11a and ana in Ma lagasi, i being also found in the latter as a contraction of ina and used for the imperative. As to the forms ina and atza, they

cvm.

THE

'rAGALOG LANGUAGE.

may be regarded as identical with i n and an in Tagalog, the final a of the Malagas i suffixes being mute 0[' elidible. whd e, Oil the other hand, ina alld ana are still fOllnd in illcthblog for ihillOlQg "fal len;" casalanan for cusaiaan, .. in ;" and in otber Tagalog compounds. 'l'here would be also idelltitr as to their use in both la nguages, were it not fur the fact that ill Malagasj, i, reject ina and is used ouly for the imperative, whi le y=i in Tagalog requires in in the present allu the past and is user! with any other tenses. That 11 =i was once also in Tagalog suffixed to the imperative, the occasiollal use oC b1tcasi instead of V!ICSUm, "opell it;' pata?li, instead oj' pata.ljin, "k ill it," seems to illdicate. 'fil e fact of i na being ill JlIalaga i ollly a su[fix and that of in beillg sometimes a prefix, sometim es all infix 811d sometimes a suffix in 'l'agalog, is dne to tlitTerellces ill the cOllj uga tive mechanism or the two lallguages. III the co mparison we have:

Tagalog. Verb.

Magsulat. Maghaba. Magturo.

Passive.

Malagasl. Signlficallon.

Verb. _ ___P_as_sl_ve_,_ _ _S_lo_ni_fic_it_lo_h._

Sillll iat. WI'ittell. jl拢alloratra. Silloratm. Writtell. HabalD. \ 'fo bedl~llgth- Malaya. HI' I To be length1 elle. a ava illa. l elled. , \ To be \ns\ To be illdiManoro. Malloro. t cated. , Toruau.. 1 tructed.

The passive suffix ilia and the infix in have uot in Malagasi the same fixedlless w Jich their counterpart in has ill Tagalog. They sometimes become hin , ona. tla. no. 1m, etc, accordillg to the termillation of the ro ot to wbich tbey are applied . Tbe suffLx h路in for in is nsed ill Taga log "lith roots ending ill a n as pirated vowel, while on is in other F ili pino tongues t he passive particle which corresponds with in in Tagalog. The Tagalog instrumelltal passive with the prefix: y = i is路 not found in Malagasi, for, the reference to the instrument is in the latler exp ressed hy alia . 'fhe same thing is still found in a few instances in Tagalog and frequently ill the other Filipino tongues more the north in Lu zon . (1 ) 'l' he analogy bere seems to he with the Malagasi prefix a (Malagasi a, it has bee n shown, changes sometim es to Tagalog i) which is used for a kind of passive very similar to that fo r which y=i is ll sed in Tagalog. The following co mparison of th e translatioll in T aga log Rnd iu Malagasi of the English phrase " beat the dog with the staff," will show this aualogy in a clearer way.

Tagalog.

Maiagasi.

Yhampas nang aso allg tOllgcod.

Akapoca ny alika amill ny tehilla.

That in Tagalog. i is occolsionally suffi xed to the imperative has been already iudica ted Malagas i seems to have two oth er verbal pa sive preaxes , 1)ao and tofa, for which no couu lerpRI=ts are roulld in Taga log. On inquiry it is found that vao is somewhat the modern f onD assumed by th e passive with in, and that taftt is a particl u ed rather Ior reflectWhat is more important ive verbs than used for the pass ive voice. than this for th e point of the affinity betweeu the two languages (I) ' An instance

this is given in the example on page XV.

OIX.

INTRoDucrtoN.

is the f8ct tbat tbese here called middle passive, aud by the French O'r8JlJmarians relative, forms of the verb are in botu used for, practically, Llle same pLll'pO es. As in Tagalog, so in Malagasi these forms are em p· loyed whenever the sentence couls.ills, bes ides a direct complement, some other referring to the purpose, meaus, instrument, time, place, manner, I'enson, etc, of the Action. The verb in these passive forms dispenses in both languages with the use oC adverbs, prepositious or circumlocutory ways, imparting a wouderful concision Ito the expression. In both , too, the e forlm palliate ihe lack of tme relative prououns and conjunctir,ns, for, it will be seen, they connole tbe sense which in English is expressed by "where," "w ithin whi ch ," "upon which ," "wiih whicb, " "for, " "in order that," "of which," "by whom," " by what," " because,' "with wbom," "in what,' "for which,' " by which," "by means of," "[or tbe reason of which," " that is ihe reaso n why ," etc. , their em· ployment being, not optional, but necessa ry in Illany cases. This is the most striking feature of affinity in both languages and one more than any other sU/1gestive of th eir common parentage, as it would not fail to appeal' in some o[ the others which are supposed to be sister to these two, if the theory of th e deri vation of them all from one and the same parent language were true To render the com pari on of the vcrb complete it only remains to review the conjugative mechanism in the two languages, and in order to show at a simple glance the gl'eater analogy which exists. also here, than that which has been noti ced in the comparison with the Malay and the Javanese, the Taga log and the Malagasi methods are brought face to face in tbe following table taken from the pamphlet of Prof. Reinwald: . Root. Tenses.

Imperative. Present. Past. Future.

Tagalog siilat =Malagasi soratra, "writing." Tagalol! .

Manuiat. Nanulltllat. Nanulat Manunulat.

Malagas\.

!lIa n 0 l'atrn. " [anoratra. N anoratm. Manofatra.

The genernl analogy in the conjugative methods of the two languages is tha or their inHection resembling charac ter The tense form, it may be seen, is in both a single co mpound word and not a phrase consisting of the verb and a separate auxiliary word or adverb, as in Malay and iu Javanese. The close t and most important analogy li es in the chauge of th.e initial m or the verbal particle into 11 for the past tense, a tense·builJing process whi ch, as already showu, is round in neilher of the above mentioned languages. In the use of the reduplication or syllables for Lhe present and for the future tense, 'fagalog stands alone; but it .eems tbat, even iu this particular point, Malagasi shows Rome more affinity with Tagalog than any other language of those supposed to be of the same paren· tage .. Prof. Reinwald believes that the reduplicati\'e teuse·building pro· ce~s IS not altogetber unknown to the Malagasi, and he thinks to find traces thereof in tbe compounds loloha, " to carryon the head; " mao lIon~f'!/, "to dream;' as distinguished from the imperative forllls mall' doha and manofi.a For the future tense Malagasi uses, among others, the prefixes ha al~r1 lin: while 'l'ugn log emp loy. thr I'prlllpiiclltioll. The dissilllilarity iu tUl~ POlUt would. not be su great if tbe cuw[larisou lVere mud.e

ex.

THE TAG8LOG

LANGUAGE.

with other Philippine tongues, with the Ilocano, for instance, where the suffix to is used for the same purpose, or with the Tirnray, where the same tense is formed by affixation of fo. The form of the imperative, or rath er the indefinite form of the verb is so metimes used also in Tagalog, as in Malagasi, for the present tense, wl)ile it is more frequently so used in Bisayan and in other tongues of the~e I slanos. Iu the passive voice it is found that the insertion of in is in Malagasi, as it is generally also the cas .. iu Tagalog, used for the past tense, and that it frequently di spenses with the use of th e prefix no or of the auxiliary e,l a in the former language; while, for the future, ho is used before th e verb . In what is called the verbal relative forms Malagasi prefixes a for the present, n for th e past, and h for th e f uture, tense. The Malagasi tense-bui lding method in the passive, th en , offers greater di ss imilarity from that of 'Tagalog than that which has been noti ced' in th at of th e active, vo ice. The compa ri son of what may be considered to be the wordbuilding methods closes here, and it only remains to append some notes on the syntax of th e two languages . Notwithstanding the close affi nities in other departments of the grammar of the two, T aga log still shows in th e syntax its superiority over the Malagasi. There is in the latter a definite article, ny, and what may be considered an articl~ or a particle, i, of proper nouns of persons, as in Tagalog, and a nother, 1'a, not, found in the latter; but there is no declension of th se arti cles in Malagasi . The form ny is without change, both for the nominative, and fo r the possessive case, as may be seen, for instance, in the phrase ny tontpo nll trano, "the owner oE the house;" where the first ny is ill the nominative, and the last in the possessive case; while in 'Tagalog th e construction would be

as in the E nglish language, ang (may a1'i) nang bahay,

"the owner

(of th e) house " Nor does this deficiency fai l to be noticed by th e native inhabitants of Madagascar, fOF, the most intelligent Hovas con路 sider it sometim es necessary to nse the red uplication (and this shows that redup licati on is the first step to the acquirement oE inflex ion) in order to mark the possessive, saying: ny t1"al!() ny ny vahinis, "the house of the foreigners." The article i is sometimes prefixed to proper nouns of persons to indicate equality or fami liarity, and sometimes to those of places, two different for ms of usage in whieh it differs f rom the Tagalog si. The other personal a rti cle, l 'a, which expresses more respect, corresponds better in sense with the Tagalog si, although it differs from the same more widely in the form than the oth er. In Noceda's Dictionary is found, however, the word lacan, no longer in use at th e present time, as th e eq uival ent of the Spani sh title don, and it may be that it corresponds to the Malagasi ra. Nothing corresponding with the T agalog pluralizing particle manga is fonnd in th E: Malngasi , nor is the reduplication used for number, as it is sometimes the case in Malayan.:! Javanese with nUUlIS, and sometimes, too, iu Tagalog with adj ecti ves, the plural in Malagas i being only indicated by em ploying words which have independellt sign ifications not strictly compatible with the use made of th em to denote plurality . The fact must be noticed of both languages having 110 trUE: copulative verb anG no real relative prononn. The means to which Taga log resorts for palliating lhe defici eucy, as to the copulative verb,

exI.

INTRODUCTION.

are, however, superior to those resorted to by MalHgasi for the same purpose. In the latter, "to be," both as a. copulative and as an intransitive verb, is more frequently left understood than in Ta路 galog, as it. may be seen in the following illustration: Malagasl.

T'lgalog.

English.

1 2 2 4 4 1 ~ 3 1 H endry ny zaza. The boy is intelligent. Ang bata,i ,mabait. 4 1 2 3 4 2 1 4 l/ 3 1 Eto ny trano. Ang bahay ay dill>. The house is here. The impersonal "there is," 路'there are," etc, is in both languages expressed in a similar way, the Tagalog may and mayrooll corresponding to the Malagasi misy. Of relative pronouns, Malagasi has only iza.y, used both for persons and things. As in Tagalog, so in Malagasi , the special verbal passive forms dispense with the use of the relative pronoun. For the relation of possession with nOUDS Malagasi uses various means which may be considered as middle between those used in Ta路 ~nlog and those used iu Malay. The fiual vowel of the noun represbnting the object of possession is changed or dropped. 01' a nasal is added thereto according to certain rules. In this mann er the relation of possession is, neither entire y marked by the juxtaposition as in 1\lalay, nor is it marked by the use of a preposition as in Tagalog; but th e Malagasi method, however, a~proaches more of tbe Tagal. g than of that used in Malay. This is shown by the numbers above the words in the following phrase: )3

-I,

Tagalog.

English.

1 2 The clothes 5 children

3 of

4 the

1 Ang 5 bata

2 dam~t

3 -I, nang manga

Mal~gasl.

1 2 3 -I, 5 Ny akanjo路n ny zaza.

Although the means used for the comparative in Malagasi are, upon the whole, analogous to those used in Tagalog, still there are some differences which it is well not to leave unnoticed, as they show the superiority of the Tagalog methods. For the comparati,e of equality Malagasi uses adjectives signifying "as," " like," etc; as in Tagalog; but nothing is found of the other prefix comparative building Tagalog method. Thus, we have: English.

Tagalog.

Malagasl.

1 2 3 (Ang mauga) bata,i, 1 2 3 4 The children are equally 5 judicious.

For uses the syntactical illustrated

.j,

(para.pnra=magcapnres)

Samy

maba(ba)it, or, (sillg= 4 5 magcasing)bait.

5 helltll'y

ankizy.

the comparative of superiority with an adjective Malagasi reduplication. whi le 'ragalog uses either adverbs 01' the arrangement, or both these ways. See these various 'methods in the following comparative sentence.

CXTI.

T UE

TAGALOG

Engli s h.

Ma lagas l.

4 i) 3 a b u t), iy,i,i, 6 (m a bu t l. n ito), Ol' , 12 Ito, i,

1 ~ 3 -I5 This is good, th at is 6 beLter.

LANGUAGE.

Taga log.

1 2

4 5

1 3 -I6 Ity tsara, io tsa ra tsara,

ito, i , lD a bul ), i ya, i , 6 (Ialong !Dabu t!),

'(1 '0,

" 111<lre " where, in Tagalog, rna/mil nito, mea ns " good t han tbi s;" a ud Tbe presence iu Taga log of ce rta in eupb oni c endin gs or con· n ec! ives called ligaments, in tend ed for th e linking of word s and sentences to each other, bas been recorded (see page LXX) as anoth er pecul ia ri ty of th e language; b ut Prof. ReilJwald believes to have discovered traces of the same or very similar ligaitt7'es a lso i n Ma lagasi, and he gives the expression ?'an on O1'all a,' '']'aiIlY water ;" whi ch h e desc ribes as consistin g of (r(wo + (Ii gam elJ t) r om'l1a) . In treatiug of the method u sed i lJ lIIalagasi fo r exp res in g t he relati on of possessioll with nouu s, we bave come aCFOSS (see (h e exam pl e n y rrkrm.io·n ny z aza in the preced ing page) an in sta nce of thi s kind , in whi ch th ere seems to exist a a rUdi mentary fo r m of what is called ligam ent in Tagalog; but it does not appear that the Malaga i a ppenda ge ha s ever t he force of a r el a ~iv e I?ronoun , as it is th e case with th e Ta galog li ga ment. Of th e other arts of speeeb se " in g as directi ves 1'0 1' th e con · truction of words in to sentences, th ere are very few in both langua · ges. T he num ber of r ue p repositiolJs and co njun ctions is small , th e m ajority of these being words belongin g to other pa r IS of speech, or di rectives a ppearin g in th e co mpl ex forlD of prepositional ex pressi on . T hat th e two languages can better t han any others get on well wit bou t such impo rtant elements fo r th e ex pression of intelli gible th ought as t hese directives are co nsidered to be, has been shown in spea kin g of tb e midd le passive voice, or r elati ve fo rm of th e verb. The pre po itions, s{I·cay in Taga log, and qmy in Malagas i are found to sta nd each for " to,1) Clwith ," "by," \'io , Ilat," " from ," "fHuaug," dupan,' "agaiu st/' etc, in the t wo lauguages, in fact, for th ese and wha'e ver olh er prepositions are in En gli sh used wi lh (he objective case. I u the alm ost un bounded f reedo m of th e sy ntax Tagalog Sl ill remains u ni que; bu t the r ul es fo r the con Lrll ction of th e sent.ence show a relative degr ee of freedom ilJ Malagasi as welL Th e subject ill t he active sentence may co me befo re or after, m ost frequ ently, h owever, a fter, t he verb in th e two la ng uages; whil e th e constru cti on in sentences with the verb in any of t he var ious passive forms is th e sam e in both. See thi s illustrated in th e foHowin g sentences, th e subject of whi ch is, in Taga log and Malagasi, printed in ita lics. I

En g li s h.

The oxen ri ce.

a re eating

The hou se is alrea ly seen by m~ ,

T agalo g _

Ma Ja gasi .

Cungm acain nan g bigas ang manga liaca, 01' , ling 171anlja boca,i , cung· ma cain nan g bigas.

H oman l-ary nil omby, 01', 11.1/ omoy hom an vary .

Naqui q uit.a co na (W,q Mil al) , or, ~ng br1hay ay uaquiqu ita CO Ull..

Hilako sah ady 01' ,

l1y

b itako.

11!}

irann,

t?'al1 0 sabady

CXIII.

INTRODUCTION.

The pronou)) subject of the passive sentence, tbat is to say, the agent of the verb, is in botb language9 put in th e possessive case. The adjective used as predicate comes in Malagasi after tbe subject, while in Tagalog it may come before or after. See tb is in the following sentence, in which the predicate is in the two languages printed in italics: English.

Tb ese wbite.

people are

Tagalog

Malagasl.

Hbng manga taub ay ~ mapltti,01',maputi itbug Irety olona majatsi. { mango tauo. .

Tbe interrogative sentence is in both languages indicated, not by the syntactical arrangem ent, but by the use of an interrogative word, in Tagalog oaga=ba and in Malagasi I'a. But, by far, tbe most peculiar syntactical feature aud the one which binds the two languages together as mucb as it separates them from all others, lies in the word, clause or sentence which denotes . tbe instrument with whicb, the time 01' place in wbicb, the reason for which , etc., tbe action iii performed, being put in the nominative case in both languages and made the grammatical subject of the sentence, when the verb is used in some of the forms of the middle passive, or relative voice. In the fullowing illustrations, the Malagasi being taken from Julien 's Grammar, the printing in italics is used in the three languages to in dicate the element wh ich is the grammatica l subject of the sentence in Tagalog and iu Malagasi. English.

Tagalog .

Malagasl.

It is fOI' me that the I .deb ang ypinagtatabas ~ A d'd' .. t i nang mauana III. nang ( \' n t I IOn k 'ny ImpanJaltal'1 or. cuts ou ta 'SUi of clothes. L isllUg pauanamit. ra a anJo a 10. lt is with shalp-edged If Ang ganting t1{t hasa) H.I '/ a d' scissors tbat tbe tailor ang ytiuatabas uang ' d~ y mamm rrr .n?t n Il 'II nang aqulDg .) k I9n 'nyk mpanJal ra ny cu t s ou t my SUI't 0 fmanana clothes. pananamit. a aUJo o. It is on the floor that) 11ng ~路ahifJ. a Y tanbg Amoo ny ?路ihana no .. tlIe t al'l or cuts ou t my! gar na plDag t ab'a asan an d'd' I Ian ny mpauJalsuit of clothes. nan~ mauana I ~taug tra ny akanjoko. aqulllg pananaml . It is on aeeottnt of Anq paglami9, nCtng pet路 cold weather that the nahon ang slyang ytl- M(tngat.~utka ny alUl1'o tailor cuts out for me nat~bas n~ng mana- ~ ~~ andldlau. ny mpana 't f I th nahl nang Isaog panaJaltra akanJo ho aby. SUI 0 co es. namit sa aquin.

IU-l

1 t

The same analogy exists in the two languages in regard to the participial nouns derived from the above passive, or relative forms of the verb, as the following illustrations sbow: English.

Tagalog.

The knife to kill it I A with. \ ng itac na ypatay. The 'knife with 路 WhiCh} people have killed it, Ang itac na ypinatay. The knife with wbich I A it will be killed. \ ng itac na ypapatay.

Malagasl.

INy

antsy

amonoana

r azy.

{Ny antsy namonoana azy. {NY antsy hamonoana nzy. 15

THE TAGALOG LANGUAGE. CXIV. The comparison between Tagalog and Malagasi closes here. The cases of analogy fOllnd in the two languages are not perhaps so nu· merous as those found between Taga log, on one side, and Malay and Javanese. on the other; but tbe qua lity and importance of the affin· ities existing between the two languages surpass anything found in the comparison with any other language of those spoken by the Malay people, which has hitherto been made an object of reaearch. Most of what is peculiar to .Tagalog, botb in the lexical and in wordbuilding depar~m ents of grammar, is found also in Malagasi. Although in the comparison of the two languages, special attention was called to certain analogies found in both und not found in any other language of those spoken by tbe race, and particnlar stress has been laid on tbe peculiar common features of tbe middle passive or relative forms of the verb, and on the change of m to n for the past tense, still the real importance of these peculiarities can only be properly appreciated by the reader after he has made himself familiar with the language. These affinities are not explicable by any principle we can a ppeal to as habitually at work in the human mind, and when the fact oE the singularity of these methods and tbat of tbeir being used exclusively in the Pbilippine and Madagascar islands are properly estimated, we may with perfect logic and wilh some degree of confidence conclude thecomm6n parentage of the two languages, the long distance of the two countries from Qne another notwithstanding. Malagasi is described as consisting oE a Malay or, if this designation is objected to, of a Polynesian eleme ut and another element which is traced to tee African group a languages of the Bantu family. It is stated that the languages of tbe Bantu g~onp bave a complex structnre and an elaborate grammar much above 'the requirements and intellects of the people who speak them. The comparison of Tagalog with these languages, and then with those spoken in New Guinea may disclose facts of Irreat ethno· logical and pbilological value. It . is to be expected that an earnest research into these l ang uage~ may be attended with important resnlts, as everything seems to indicate that Tagalog is of South African origin. As Taga log and Malagasi, then, cannot be traced to Malay, and as the snpposition of the two languages having spontaneously sprung up in the minds of the inhabitants of snch isolated and remote islands is both unnatmal and absurd, it follows that intercourse and, therefore, migration must have existed. There remain, then, two difficult questions for solution .res pecting which rational conjectures only can be offered. How could the languages and the aboriginal inha· bitants of these Islands find th eir way into the island of Madadascar, or, conversely, how co uld the inhabitaus of Madagascar and their languages find their way into these Islands? Crawfurd, and Hnmboldt with him, believe that the co nnection originated from the Malayan, and not from the African side, an hypothesis which, however, may be too rash. The other que3tion is: At what epoch, then, conld such an event hove happened? This last question can be answered by saying tbat it must have happened at a very remote epoch in the history of man. As the subj ect is one of the greatest importance for the ethnology of this part the world, we cannot well refrain from giving here Crawfurd s views on the subj ect, as contained in pages cclxxvi·cclxxvii of his Dissertation. As his work bas uow become rare and a mere reference would be of difficult substantiation by the reader, the author llIo.y be accorded some excuse for this his last quotation from the work of the English writer. He says thus:

INTRODUOTION.

av.

"It remaiDs only to attempt some explanation of the manner in which the Malayan languages, and consequently, the tribes that spoke tbem, found their way to the far, and to them, unknown, island of Madagascar. I must make the same assumption here that I did in attempting to account for the dissemination of the Malayan languages over the islands of the Pacific. It was assuredly neither commerce, religion, nor conquest that engaged the Malayan nations in the enter路 prise, for they have never heen known to go beyond their own shores in pursuit of such objects." "Madagascar is about 3000 miles distant from the nearest part of the Malayan Archipelago. Monsoous or periodical winds, blow between them to the south of the equator; viz, the southeast and north路 west monsoons; the first in Austral winter from April to October, which is the dry and fair season of the year, and the last in the Austral summer,. from October to April, which is the rainy and boisterous season. 'fhe southeastern monsoon, with which we are chiefly concerned in this enquiry, is, in fact, only a continuation of the trade wind that blows in the same direction with it, to the south of the equator. A native vessel, or a fleet of native vessels, sailing from the southern part of Sumatra or from Java, must, of course, sail with this monsoon in order to have the .least chance of reaching Madagascar. Undertaking the voyage, however, such vessel or Ileet would have a fair wiud all the way and the sailing distance from the Straits of Sunda would be 3300 miles. Making only at the rate of 100 miles a day, a vessel or a fleet of praus would reach the eastern shore of Madagascar iu 33 days." "But it may he asked how Malays or Javanese, who never quit the waters of their own Arcbipelago, could come to contemplate such an enterprise. I suppose the adventurers to have been composed of one of those strong fleets of rovers that, iu all kuowu times, bave rangpd the &eas of the Archipelago, and w.hich do so, from one extremity to the other, even at the present day. I suppose them, while either iu quest of booty or ad venture, to be driven into tbe southeast monsoon or the trade "ind by a tempest. Unable to regain the shores of the Archipelago, they would, from necessity, and after some struggle, put before the wind, and make for the first land . That land would be Madagascar, for there is no other. In civilisation, the ad,emurers would be superior to the natives; their numbers would be too rew for conquest, but their power, from superior civilizatioLl, might be adeq ua,e to secure a compromise. They would settle-amalgamate with the in路 habitants, and convey some instruction to them, along \"ilh a portion 01 their languages. It is not necessary to limit such an enterprise to the single adventure of one nation, for in a course of ages there may have occurred several accidents of the same description. OnEl, however, might have sufficed, for the roving fleets of the Archipelago, like our own bucaneers, have crews of several nations among whom severul languages would be spoken, but the most general the Malay and Javanese." "A fleet that had been mOle than a month at sea, going, it knew not where, is not likely to have saved auy domesticated auimals, even supposil?g it originally to have had such, and consequently, we find no domestic animal with a Malayan name in Madagascar. It is not only possible, however, but highly probable, that from its stock of pro\'isions, it would save a few grains of rice, a few coconuts, and a few capsicums, perhaps even some yams and mango路seed, and all these in the Malagasi language bear, as already mentioned, Malayan names, and these only."

CXVI.

THB TAGALOG LANGUAGB.

We cannot but believe that this hypothesis is brought forward in An honest desire of giving solution to a momentous question; but at th e same time, we canuot help thinking that too much reliance has been placed ou the monsoons, as to its execution, and that it is too far scoped as to its effects. 'fbe case of a Malay vessel or of a fleet of p1"aUS sa iling iu the northern , then driven by a tempest into the southero, hemisphere, tben caught by the Austral soutbeastern mou路 soon, I,hen putting before the wind, and lastly reaching tbe shores of Madagascar must have been very rare in tbe history of mankind; but it is on e whi ch, however, in tbe course of ages may not appear as im possible. Tbat the adventurous enterprise should have been attend ed with th e results Crawfurd puts to its credit may appear as somewb at more questionable. We have heard of lepidopteri being blown out to sea, of migratory birds having dropp ed a seed in their flight, and of bran ches or seeds being taken by the Gulf Strearp, that gave rise to the existence of an insect, or to that of a plant in a spot where it, oth erwise, would never have existed; but it would be the first case ever recorded of a tempest路driven crew landing at such a remote and large island as Madagascar is, and communicating so great a portion of their language to th e aboriginal islanders. But we are here confronted with circumstances even more puziling tban those menti oned by Cr~wfurd which rendered necessary his inventi庐n of a fl eet of praus and a tempest for explaining th(' contact of the inhabi tan ts of the western portion of the Innian archipelago and of their languages wilh those of Madagll;Bcar, in th e greater distance of th e Philippines and th e greater affinities of the Philippine languages with those of the Mrican island. And it must agaiu be asked. How does it ha ppen that there are now so few affiuities found between Tagalog and Malay, wl'lile there are so many, and these of so much importance, found, betw een the tongues of the Philippines and those o.f Ma dagascar? H ow could intercoQ.!'se have existed between these two countri es far more widely separated than Sumatra and Madagascar? In what era did it take place'?' On whi ch side did it originate? Althougb th e question is one of the most important ever brought forward for determining the ethnological characteristics of a race, let us not, however, allow ourselves to be carried away by our fancy in trying to solve this intricate problem . Let the geologish the ethnologist, and the phi lologist, by means of their respective sciences search for such fa cts as may clear up the mystery which envelopes the past of one of the most charming and most beautiful portion of the world .

----~~----

GRAMMAR OF

TH E

TAOALOO LANOUAOE.

ORTHOGRAPHY. Tagalog is now written in the Roman letter introduced by the Spaniards and to the Spanish alphabet only one consonant had to be added to suit the peculiarities of the language. The earliest Spanish friars, however, refer to a native writing system which was still in use in the Islands at the time of their arrival, and which is described as consisting of the following seventeen characters , viz: SCB TANTIVE YOWELS.

..........

V'>

..-l-a.

E-r-I-i. O-o=U-u, .

CONSONANTS.

Bah

t::n Yah

ralt

Dah

Lft

c./)

.':I{)

Gah Ngah

Hah

Lah

t.o

'rl

Nah

Pah

Uah

Sah

Talt

Mah

VOWEL

UARKS

APPLIED

TilE

LETTER

Beh=bih. Boh=buh.

In this system, as noticed also by Crawfurd, every consonant was a syllable ending with the vowel a (pron. ah), which was und erstood, or inherent in, and followed it. There were two vowel marks consisting in dots to be placer! above or under the consonant. These vowel marks were for e路i, (pron. a路ee), if placed over; and for O-U, (pron. oh-oo), if placed under the consonant, and had the effect of superseding or taking the place of the inherent a. T he system seems in this point to have been, though inversely, in fl nenced by the Arabic alpbabet as applied to Malay, for here, too, there are but three substantive vowel characters: oue for a, anothe!' fo!' e-i. and a third for o -u" all otber in termediate vowel souuds being indicated by marks or diacritical points; for example, the kesrah and

TUE

T AGALOG

LANGUAGE

dammah=cllammah of the Arabic called by Malays, respectively, ba1is di-bawah; "the stroke beneath"; and baris di-adap, the stroke before or in front. (1) The scope of the three substanti ve vowels was that of serving as initials, 0 1', if medials 01' finals, to express the last vowel of the diphthongs. Considerable discrepancy is found in tbe accounts given as to the direction of the writing, some saying that it was from below upwards, some from right to left, while others say that it was from leEt to rig ht. Wbat seems most probable is that the direction, originally, was, as in the Malay, from right to left and that it changed to from left to right after the arrival of the Span iards, in conformity with the usage in the Spanish , Sanskrit, and Ja\7aneSe langnages Crawfurd speaking of th is alphabet winds up his remarks about it by saying: (Dissertation, page cvii). "The Tagala alphabet, then, has all appearance of an ori ginal and local invention; and, at all el'ents, there is assured ly no evidence to show that it has been deri ved frop1 a foreign source." Notwithstanding thi broad assertion by Crawfurd, we find that, besides the above mentioned vowel marks for e-i and o-u being analogous to those in the Malay system, there exists a resemblance of form belween the Tagalog nah and yah and the same cbaracters in Malny, together with resemblances of form in other characters not corres ponding in the b,,>o systems, whi ch seems to indicate that the Arabic alphabet has not been sbrange to the invention. We further find that the character for b in Tagalog is the sallie as in the Batak, tho e for p and n, nearly the SAme is in the Buo:is, systems. Th ese resemblances are between identiCA L chAracters, but t here exist also resemblauces in di ssimilar characters 0 th e alphabets of these languages. For instance, b, l, and t in Tagalog resemble, respectively, h . .Q and ng in Bugis; and 11, in Tagalog resembles a in Batak. Besides th ese, there are otber simi larities of a more substantial nature between the Tagalog system on one side and that of the Batak and all other Sumatran systems on the other, and even greater ones between Tagal og and Bugis, all of which practically precludes the possibi li ty of the system being pu rely a local creation without rela tion to IIny fore ign sou rce; for no such analogies as the e seem to happen as the result of chance or accident, n.or. as. that oE any commo n t.endency inherent in the hum an mind . T he dlm.d anty between the Tagalog alp habet and that oE the Bugis is not IIIUlted to a mere reser;nblan ce in tbe fo rm an d gene ra l arran gement of the chamctel's. but goes farther in to al'finities in other departments of the languRge that point to an at:)cient and intimate conn ection between tbe two natiollS. The Bugis alphabet co nsists of twenty-tbree characters, of which . elgbteen are simpl e and the remai nder compound, being com binations of tbe conso nants nlc, mp, m-, ch, and nch. It bas a substa nti ve a, but lacks the substantive characters for th e vowels e-i and o-u of tbe Tagalog system ; possessing, on th e other hand, three others fo r the con onants, j, 1- Rnd ii not found in th e latter. There are vowel marks ~or e, i, 0 a nd u, and one for the termination on.g, five mark points ID al l. The Bugis alphabet is, therefore, more co mpl ex and less impel'fec~ tban was the Tagalog; but the fact should not be lost sight of that beSides the Bugis alphabet now in use, another obsolete one exists which IS still to be found in so IDe ancient mauuscripts. (I). See th e application of these two marks to the MaJay words cli"clil1g, "a wall "; blmtil1.,!, "pregnant": in Marsden's Grammar, page 17.

ORTIIOGRAPHY,

In both systems the vowel a is inherent in every consonant, and vowel marks exist for those of the other vowcls, the Bugis possessing fhe, as above stated, there being distinct marks 1'01' e, anrl i, and 0 and It, with an additional one for the ending Ollg, three more, therefore, than in Tagalog, In the latter, nowever, th ere were substantive characters for the sounds e-i and 0 u when initials, which in Bugis can be ex pressed only by applying to the substautive vowel a the marks for th e e various sounds in the same way as it is don e to the consonants; while in Tagalog no such vowel dots were applied to isolaterl vowels, for the two additional vowel characters were s upposed to snpply tbeir place, The most striking feature oE the alphabets of th e two lan guages, and one which rendered them more defective than e ven so me of those oE tbe ruder languages of Sumatra, lay in neith er affording a ny mark for elidiug tbe vowel a and ca using th e sy llabe 0 1' the word to enrl in a consonant. This lack oE an eliding sign is less injurious to the Bugis language, where no consonant, nasals excepted, can follow ano~ber without tbe interv6'lltion oE a vowel, than could possibly be the case to Tagalog, which contains num erons worrls that terlDinate in consonants that are neither nasals nor aspirates, 'rh e liquids, l' sometimes, aud I, frequently, coalesce with other Co nsonllnts lin d a vowel in the same syllabe, and as there existed no contrivance in the alphabet to point out when this did or did not occur, it is not easy to see how certain words could finrl proper mea ns of expression in writting, 01' how they could come to be und erstood if written. On the other haml , the same and other consonants, often occurred as merlials and final s, and the absence of a mark for eliding the inh erent vo wel and Eorseparating the sound oE tl\.e consonant from that oE the yO wei could on ly add to the confusion .Nor did the alphabet possess any means of palliating these deficien cies such as are founrl in those of the languages oE Sumatra, th e Rejang for instance, which, besides baving a lDark 1'01' eliding the inherent vowel, another to signify a n a following tbe inherent vowel, two others for the nasals nand ng, has also a dist路 inct character for the aspirate following a vowel. A mark for ng would have been especially useful in Tagalog to express the same ending which, it will be seen, plays so importa nt a role as ligament and relative pronoun. Lltcking these and other snbstantial elements, the alphabet was practically a useless des ign , or, in the words of Fr. Gaspar de S. Agustin, "it was a writing as easy to read as it was difficult to understand, hecanse the read er mn st guess at the pronunciatioll and meaning. To show this, the two exampl es whi ch he gives, and wbICh are also reproduced by Crawfurd, will snffi ce. A word or sy ll able consisting of the two consonants 11 alld t, the inherent vowel being ullderstood, wonld make bata only in any of the la nguages of the weslern portion of th e Indian Archipelago, but in T agalog it might be read also as ha.ta.q, uantay, halal', haLite, hallta, lJatay , in all, seven different ways. Two letters I whicb, with a dot over each, should express lele or liti, might also be read as lilim , liIil) , lilis, lini n, lilie and lilig, making eight different mod es of pronnnciation; beca use the alphabet afforded initial, but not medial or ter minal consonants. It is well further to observe that the ouuds given as those into whi ch , by reason of such an imperfect system, the two characters coulrl be read are not accidental combinations, but, on the contral'y, fixed words of the ,lang.uage, baving 111\ of them independ ent and wid ely differing slgUificatlOns, It is not possible to conceive how such a pitiable system of writing as this could ever have been adapted to a language of such a

THE

TAGALOG

LANG u'AGE .

complex phonetic character as that of Tagalog and have beeu made available for the conveying and recording of thought. In all probability, it was never made use of for any practical purposes. being rather in the way of a toy than in that of a useful tool; as it could never have been 80 easily eradicated and superseded by the Spanish one, had it ever acquired any appreciable hold on the native mind. History, thus far, seems to lend support to the belief that it was not a real alpba· bet, for, as far as our knowledge goes, not a single inscription, not a genuine specimen written with its characters has ever been produced. Classed organically, the native consonants are as fo llows: Labials. b, p, m, 11. Lingual. y. Dentals. d, t. Palatals. c, g. Guttural. h. Nasals. m, n. Cerebral nasal. ny. Liquids. I, r. ~ibilant.

To these native consonants the Spaniards added the following: ch. f. i, II. 11, d. v, x, and z of th eir own system, with the view that the Spanish words which have been adopted might thus find proper means of expression, and, in some cases, that certain rules of the Span· ish orthography be ~ulfilled. In so far as the pronunciation of native words is concerned, ne rly all these addea consonants might be dispensed with, they being freq entIy reduced to or substituted for others of the native system, but a correct etymology renders their preservation indispensable. . 'rhe language is, therefore, written with the twenty·seven letters of the Spanish alphabet, plus one, the ny, which is peculiar to Tagalog. They are, as in EngliSh, divid ed into vowels and consonants, the for· mer being the usual five of our language, and the latter twenty-three, includ ing the semivowel y. In the order of the Spanish alphabet, these are represented by lhe following characters: A-a, B· b, C-c, Ch -ch, O-d, E ·e, F·f, G ' g, H· h, [-I,

J-J,

L·I , L1 . \I , M-m , N· n,

/iI·ft, Ng· ng, 0- 0, po p, Q- q, R-r, S-s, T-t, U-u, V-v, X-x, Y-y, Z-z.

The sou nd vowels of the five co rresponds nearly with lhat of the same letters in the English words:

A-a,

E-e,

I-i ,

0 -0,

U-n,

Far,

r es,

Mill,

Oh,

R u le,

the sound of a being uniform and incapable of interchange with that of any of other vowels. The sounds e and i on one side, a nd those of 0 and 1~ on the other, having in th e original native alpha· bet but one character each to represent them , are often confounded in pronunciation and largely interchanged so as to suit euphony or the speakers taste. i, however, being much , and 'u somewhat, more prevaient. The preference for the sound of i 0\7er that of e may be attributed to Tagalog having been, in this point, influenced by the Javanese ceremonial language, where, as it is known, a scale of as-

ORTIIOGRA PlIY.

cending respect exists which consists in the substitution of the low or broad vowels for the high or sharp ones, ending in i as a climax. This confusion will be found to exist only in the spoken language, for, if written, e, will always be pronounced as e in " bed " , or a in "dare": i, as i in "mill ", 01' e in "me"; 0 as 0 in "0 1' " ot' a in "baIL": tt, as /I in "bull", or 00 in " foot '. The interchangeability, therefore, here said to exist is to be nnderstood as meaning that the signification of the word is not affected by the writing or pronnnciation with one or the other of the two interchangeable vowels, except in a few instances of words in which the spelling has been fixed and of others whi ch show a preference for one or the other of th e tw o sounds, with ap路 parently no precise rule for the nse of either. .\. distinctiou can be made only with relative certainty in case of words borrowed from the Javanese, where th ere are separate and distinct chara c ers for each of these vowel sonnds. Properly speaking, therefore, th e elemen tal vowel sounds in Tagalog are only three, a, i and II , and it i. this pauci,y th~t accounts for the expansion giveu to the sound of the last two vowels; for th e wide space lying betweeu a and t拢, whi ch in other languages is divided iuto, at least, as mal'Y as (ive differtl'1t sounds, is here divided into only three and uo misconcep tiou can arise from pronouncing one way or the other. Of the consonants, those borrowed from Spauish are here first given some consideration, preliminary to that of tbeir sound , to show the change's they nndergo wh en changetl to their cognate affinities of the na~ive system. In writing Spani~h words, natives have two courses open to them: that of using the same orthography of the original language, and that of effecting such alterations therein as are necessa ry to ex路 press the words with the characters affo:clecl by their own system. If the latter course be adhered to, certain commutations or reductious of the Spanish sounds to others of the nati ve system must then take place, withont which that barsbness of sound will be produced whi ch is so carefully avoided by these peop le. The rules (which will be found also applicable to such English words as may, in future, pass into the language), relating to the passage of Spanish words into Tagalog may be here, therefore, briefly stated. The dental aspirate sound of toe Spanish ch is cbanged to the sibilant one of the Tagalog s, or to the softer one of sh, the latter being especially a,japted to the native organs though there exists no cbaracter for it in th e language. Thus, nll拢chacho, " boy" ; cbanges to musaso or remains unaltered , and is th en pronounced in a way sharing equally of the two sounds. . The labial and dental sound of the Spanish f changes to th e labial one of tbe Tagalog p, and thus, for instance, Filipinas, " Philipp. ines"; comes to be written and prououucerl P ilipinas. The strongly guttural sound that j has in Spanish is changed, if at the middle of the word, to the' softer oue of the Tagalog h, and thus, tor instance, t1'abajo, " work" . " labor"; may be written trabaho. If at the end, or at the beginning of the word, j changes to the sibilant, and thus, reloj, "clock '; and jabon, "svap"; are written 1'elos, and saMn. The palatal sound of th e Spanish II changes to the lingual one of tbe Tagalog y. and thus, for silla. "chair '; natives use siya. The palatal nasal sound of th e Spanish 11 is even 1D0re than that. of ch agreeable to the native ear. It is practically the sound of ny III the Tagalog word inyo, "yours"; (plural). It is to this combination or two consonants that natives have recourse for expressing this Spanish

TilE

TAGALOG

LANGUAGE

peculiar sound, as may be seen, for instance, in writing panyo, "kerchief"; for pa110, " cloth". The Spanish character q, or rather the combination qu, which has the same sound of c before a, 0 or u, but a different use, is generally preserved and only by natives unacquainted with its proper use in Spanish is sometimes changed to c, they writing, for instance, cerido or qerido, (pron. keh路nie路daw) instead of querido, "beloved". V-v is pronounced by most Spaniards as b, an impropriety in which th ey are also followed by natives. Thus, for instance, they write binD for vino, "wine" ; etc .. The palatal and sibilant sound of the Spanish x is variously written in Tagalog. Most frequently, however, it is changed to 路that of the sibilant s. In this way, ex amen, "examination"; may be spelled in Tagalog either esamen=egsamen or ecsamen. The dental lingual sound of the Spanish z is softened into the sibilant one of the Tagalog s, and thus, zapato, "shoe"; is written sapato. 'l'here are other permutations of one consonant. for another even in those w.hich are common to the two languages; a liquid for another liquid, as, for instance, l for r in lttgal for l!~,gar, "place"; of a liquid for a nasal, as I for n in sondalo for soldado, "soldier"; and of the dental d for the liquid I, too, in this latter instance. Changes a well take place in the Spanish vowels e and i, 0 and tt, the sound of which natives perpetually confound, (never, howeve1', that of a), there existing marked preference for those of i and u. So they write q ~iso for lJueso, " cheese"; cumpisal for conjesal', "to confess' ; etc .. Spanish words aRpear sometimes in the plural form, or are used with the article prefixel<). to them, and 't is in this way that we find p isos for peso, "dollar ; lamesa for mesa, " table"; natives believing that th e spelling with s and with la is that of the simplest form of the respective words. Very often, on the contrary, the s pf a Spanish word in the plural is dropped and the singular form is used with the pluralizing particle manga to indicate the plural. So they say, ang manga americano for lo~ americanos, "the Americans"; etc .. Hh has in Spanish no perceptible sound and is therefore sup路 pressed in Tagalog to preclude the possibility of being pronounced, as it would necessarily be the case, if preserved, in the lattel'. Thus, hora, " hour" ; is written oras, etc.. Suppressions of the vowel e also occur, as, for instance, in pusta for for pllesta, "stake", "wager"; mtllto for nltterto, "cadaver" ; "spectre" ; etc, . It only remains to be noticed that all Spanish words passing into Tagalog are considered by natives as radicals and as such are made by them to conform to the rules of their grammar, which sometimes require that th e initial consonant of the radical be changed or elided with certain particles which are applied to the latter for the formation of derivative compounds. Changes of this kind are exhibited in the words manabaco, " to raise tobacco "; or "to deal in tobacco"; from tab'aco, "tobacco" ; mangabayo, " to ride"; from caballo, "horse"; etc ..

ORTllnOH .IPilY.

PRONUNCIATION.

Vowels: Although what ha s beeu said above of th e vowels may appear sufficient to gi,e the student a fairly accurate idea of their sound, for tho purpose, however, of acquainting him a thoroughly as possible with th.e matter, it is hero repeateel and some exampl es given which, together with the meth od or syllabification , respelling and accentuation employed, will, it is believed, enable him to O\'ercome th e difficulties of pronuuciatlon likely to be eucouutered in hi s task. A -a is by far the most imporlaut and prel'aleut of the vowels, having uniform el.\' the sound of the same letter iu the Euglish worlls, "harm", "father". It sometimes appears 8 the only vowel of the word, and its uses as such and as initial, medial and final may be seen in the following words: abala (pron . ah-Mh·lalL), "occnpation"; aso (pron. !th soe), " dog '; banlft (pron . bahll-tri) , "design"; bala (pron. Mh·talt), "child". E·e, if written, should always be pronounced as the same letler in "bed " "tell", " pen '. This vowel occurs but rarely as a medial or a fiual and never as an initial in genuine Tagalog words. This i on accoun t of its sound which natives avoill as mnch as pos ible and is by them considered very dis(l.~reeable. Even lD th e few words in which it is retained, the pronunciation with e 0 1' with i is so wavering as to render its use almost superfluou&. The followiug "'on!., are given here as examples: lae (proll. ti lt·eh), "excrement'; maseilall (pron. mah·say-lfthll), "prudish' ; babae babaye (pron. Imh·Mh·eh·bah-M h-yrh). "woman', "female. l ·i is the souud which nnds 0 much more fayor with natives over that of P. For the two e-i there was, as explained, but a single character in the native alphabot. This sound has been before des· cribed as nea rly corresponding with that oJ' the same ,"owel in "mill", but is perhaps more accurately represented b.Y that of e in "e\-e", or ee in "feet', there existiug a good dea l of lati tude in tbe manner in which it is pronounced by native people. I t is freCJuently found as the iuitial letter forming, alon e, the first syliD ble of the word; as medial between cousonants; and as final of any word or syllable, in which it is preceded by a consonant. If final and preceded by a vowel in the sa me syllable, it has then to be written y as is the case too in Spanish. The following examples will illustrate its sonnd, positions and change. Ibig (pron. eli-big), "to wish"; minsall (pron. meall -sa hn ). '·once"; galis (pron. gah-lee.sJ, "itch'; pili (pron. p ee-ze~) . "to choose"; bftgay (pron. brih-9il), " matter'; ca7!l~y (pron, cah-hooej, '·tree". 0-0 is pronounced as the sam e letter in '·o h' ·, "oft" , not as in " hor ·, "got", but the sound may be expanded so as to include every gradation lying between the same aud that or It in "full ". 0·0 i more frequently fonnd as an initial than II. either formiug by it elf or coutributing to form the first syllabi o[ the word. and also ending th e la t syllable of the radical, in whi ch latter positi on it generall y changes to It in the derivative or componnd fOl'lDl'd by the appen dage of a suffixed part· icle. As medial in the syllable, either bet ween conso nants, or between COBsonants and vowels, and as final of any otber syllable thall tb o last in the word, 0 is not fonnd so frequently a 11, except in cases where (t precedes, for here a preference eems to exi t, the end ing ao, both of the syllable and of the word, being co nsidered more euphonic than au.

Tml T AGALOG LA NGUAGE

The follow ing examples are given to illustrate the matter: olal' (pron. oJh-lahp), " cloud"; orlot (pron. ol'-loht), "rebound; olo (pron. ohl·oh), "head"; loto, (pron. loh·toe), "cooked ' ; bondoc (pron . bohn·doke) "mountain" Mllarl (pron. bO-altn), " month', baon (pron . bah-ohn), "the grave"; calabrio (pron. cah-lah-bah-oh), " buffalo". U-'!£ is the otller alternative sound, in some cases predo minating over that of 0, of the third and las t vowel character of the native alphabet, being that of the same letter in "b ull", or that of 00 _ in "foot. As medial in the ylJab le or the word, u occurs more frequently than 0, for, a above said, . the latter, wilen final in the radical, generally changes to It in the de ri vative or compo und before a suffix, as seen, for instance, in ol'llkan, "bolster"; from o/b, " head". U-u is always initial if folJowed by i and forming with the laHer the first syllable of the word. It is also found, although not so frequently, as an initial under the same conditions as 0, and, more frequently than this latter, as medial in the sylJable and final of syllables other than the last of the word. Examples: uica (pron. ooi-cah) , "language"; ubi (pron. oo-bee), "yam"; unsiami (pron. oon·seah-mee) , "sickly"; c!mdt (pron. coon· dee), "put"; Mbuy (pron. bah·booy) "hog"; tltba (pron. too-bOll). " to grow". Consonants: B - b sounds as in English and occurs as initial and final, never as medial in the syllable. Examples: banig (pron . uah-nig), "maL"; aQa (IHo n. tah·bah), "fat" ; dibdib (pron. deeb-dib), "breast"; hablo. (prQn . hah-Iilo.k), "accn aLion". C-c occurs el~her before a, 0, u and any of the liquids I or t·, or at the end of the syllable 01' the word, in any of these two posit· ions having the same palatal so und only that it has in English before th e same vowels and co nsonants. It- ~s, however, but rarely found coalescing with the li q\lids and any of the vowels, a nd this never in the first syllable of genuine Tagalog words. Examples: cagat (prou. cah-g{tht) , "to bite"; cogon (pron. coh-gohn), "thatching straw"; cun (pron. coon), "if", "when" ; utca (pron_ sah co.h), "aHer"; l!wMn (pron. loole bahn) "citron "; ito.c (pron. ee-tack), "knife". Ok-ch. This double consonant is fo und only in Spanish words, where it is to be prouounced as the same letter in "church;" but natives make DO attempt at its pronunciation, softening its sound into that of sh a nd even into that of s. Examples: chino (pron. she-noh), ':chinese"; chapa (pron. chah'lJah), "chip". ' D-d. It is not so dental in Tagalog as in English . Its sound is nearly that of the same consonant in the word "draft"; but it becomes more and more cerebral as it is placed forward in the word until at the end it van ishes in to that of r witll which it is confo unded and, in fact, used indiscriminately by natives_ As initial, d is exclusively used, (rita, " here'; ?'iy{m and I'oon, "there"; are however frequently usecl for dita , cliyan, and cloon) and generally too at the middle when preceded by a consonaut; but the iuitial or final cl of th e radical generally changes ·to I' in the com pound, if by virtue of the prefixing or suffix ing of particles, its position in the word hecomes that of a medial between vowels. Thus, for instance, di tb, " here" ; but pa?'ito, "to come here "; pa/ad or l'alar, "bap py"; but capalamn, "happiuess". If the initial cl becomes medial with a consonant preceding, no change tllen takes place: da/a, "conveying"; magelala, "to convey"; etc" The other uses of the consonant way be seen in clugo, (pron . cloo·goe), " blood"; ~ondoc (pron. bohn-doke), "mountain"; cal'atid= capatil' (pron . cah-pah·ti(d)=l", " brother". Fj is a letter wanting in ail the cultured la!lguages of the Ma-

bR'NIOGRA 1'11,{,

lay Archipelago Qnd, among those of the Christian popnlation of the Philippines, found only in the Jbanag and in most of those spoken by the wild tribes of tbe whole Arcbipelago, Fj' occurs but in words of Spanish origin and is generally converted into p , as f. is a sound which natives and other Malays are unable to pronounce, (1) This conversion may be seen in words like Pilipinas for Filip'i nas "Phi lippines"; pecha for Jecha. "date"; etc .. G-g has in Tagalog the same sound as it has in English before a, 0, tt, o!' a consonant, and never that of ) , as it generally has wit ), us before e and i, Examples: gatas (pron, gah·tahs), 'milk"; daga (pron dah-gah), " rat'; bigat (pron . bee·gCtht), " heavy'; clagdag (pron. clallg-dahg), "to add" ; bigla (pron. bee·gluh), "suc:uen". That the palatal sound 9 has before a, 0, t~ may be preserved be fore e, i, and make it sound as in "get". "gift", tt should be inserted, as it is done in Spanish, tl in this case being silent (2) and a mere sign of prOD unciation as in the English words "guess", "gnilt" ; but nati ves often fall into the impropriety of omitting the '!I and of writi ng, for instance, ginto instead of guinto, "gold"; g£'IIoo instead of g !~ illoo, " lady"; etc.. The student is hereby cantioned against this practice whi ch, under the rules of the Spanish prosody and orthography here as elsewhere in Tagalog not to be departed from, renders tb e so und of 9 a strongly guttural one very unlike the one this consonant ought to have. Much greater care should be exercised in p ronouncing th e 9 of the particles mag, nag and pag as distinctly as possible, so as to avoid confusion with the other particles ma, na and p a which impart a different, nay, in many cases, quite a thoroughly opposed sense, and too much heed canno be recommended in view of the many striking Among mistakes to which any disregard on this point may give ri se. innumerable other3, the following words are, it is believed, well cal· culated to give the learner a good idea of the im portance of rendering the sound of 9 as distinctly heard as possible, He who inflicted a wound.

Ang nacasftgat.

H e who sustained a wound.

Ang nagcasftgat.

The defendant,

Ang nasasacdal,

The plaintiff.

.l llg nagsasacclal

To appeal'.

lJIlapa'laita.

To show,

M agpa'luita.

The co ncealing.

Ang p aglago,

The thing con· Ang patago . cealed.

Whenever any particle endin g ill 9 is to be prefix ed to a ['oot beginning with i, the hyphen between the two letters may be used instead of the insertion of tt , 'rhus, the compound formed, for instance, from iuig, "wish"; and pa,q may be written pag-ibig or paguiuig, "to wish ". Very freq ntly g, preceded by 11 , occurs at the end of syllables (1) F-f is found in the languages of' tbe islaud of Madagascar, especially in raelical words, but it generAlly cbanges to, p in the compounds, It is also found in tbe Gadang, a dialect spoken by the inhabitauts in and about tbe to,ionsbips of EcbagUe, Carig and others of the southern portion of the province o( Isabels on its houndaries with tbat of Nueva Vizcaya. (2) There are cases in wbich the" which is inserted between tbe 9 and sny of the vowels e or i sounds, both in Spanish and in Tagalog; but then the ere.ma or dieresis (oo) should be used . If, (or instan ce, tbe word 1tica, "language" ; IS 10 Tagalog to receive the prefix "'ng, thus (orming the compound magltica, "to proaounce"; tbe Crema over the il i. in tbis case neceseary, for, otherwise, tbis vowel which is pronounced in the radical would come to be silent in lhe compouud,

'rAE

TAGALOG

LANGUAG E.

and words in Tagalog. When at th e end of a I'd, ng may be an integral -par t of it or a mere enphonic ending, in both cases g having tbe mild, bnt still p erceptible, sonnd it bas in "dignity", "signal" and si milar En glish words. Examples: silang (pron, see-lang), " to rise" (the sun); balvng (pron. bah-ling), "to stagger " . H h is rather a guttural tban an as pirate consonant, but its sound does not cliffeI' f rom the one it has in English. It occurs only at th e beginning of the word or syllable, always before a vowel , and never in the position in wbi ch it should h ave been a n aspirate, that is to say, at the end of the word with a vowel pl'e ~ eding. (1) Examples: halagc), pron. (hah-lah·gtth), "pri ce"; halayMy (pron. hah-lyhahy), "to put linen to dry" . J-j is found only in panish words if n o alienation from the original orthography is m ean t. Its so und is th e strong harsll gn ttural of the German ch, which, as a bove said, nati ves co mmute to that of h. J j, a ltho ug h in pronunciation may be softened, is gen erally preserved in th e ortbog rap by of proper nam es, as Jose (pron. hoh.sa y) , " J oseph"; J es(rs (pro n. hay,slISs), "Jesus"; etc .. L ·I sounds a in English and is found as initial, medial and fina l. As medial, it is sometimes fo und coalescing in th e sa me syllable wi th ano th er co nsonant and a vowel, bnt never in th e first syllable of genni nEl Tagalog words. Exampl es: loclo (pron. loks-ah) , "j umping"; talaba (pron. tah·lah-7;(th) , "oyster"; s07s01 (pron . 80hl·sohl), "to goad"; cambal (~roD,. cahm·bahZ), " twiu"; saclit (pron. sah·clitt) , "sling " . . Ll·ll is a conso nant peculiar to the Spanish language a nd, th erefore, to be foun only in words ol'rowed from it. Its so und resembles that of tb e ame com bination in tbe Englisb word " brilliant"; but is, as already said, changed to that of !J by nati ve . E xampl es: llave=yabe (pron. 7!Jah-beh:=yah-beh), "key"; mcmtelJ.ltilla:=mantifJltiya (pron . mahn·tay·lcih· lyah:=mahn- tee-lcih·yah) . " butter" . M·m co rrespo nds with the sound of th e same consonant in English. It is found as ini tial an d fi nal, never as medial, of syllables 01' words. Before band 1', m a nd not n should be used. Examples: mahal (pron . mah-luihl) , " dea l' '; saUtmat (pron. sah-lah·matt), " thank '; gotom (pron. gah·tom). " hnnger"; sam bit (pron . sahm-bitt), "mourni ng"; tampaZ (pron . tahm-pahl), "slap". N-n bas in T agalog th e same so und as in English , occurring at the beginning, at the middle and at the end of the syll able 01' the word, and i written ?1l before band p. E xamp les: nacao (prou. nah cah-oh) "stealin g"; bangca (pron. bCtn,q·cah), " any specimen of small craft"; Janda (p ron. tahn dahl, " mark "; daan (pron. dah·ahn), "road". N·1i . This is another consonant pecul iar to the Spanisll, whi ch is fonnd in Tagalog only when words borrowed from that language appeal' written in the orig inal orthography, for, if t.lii.,e same are 'r ag· a lized, a re th en writhen with ny by natives. Its !lund is a palata l nasal, the neares t approach to wuich is found in that of the letter 11 (1) '1' he fac~ Lha~ " is [, equently found preceded by a l'olVel at the end i n Malay words wben written in tbe Roman character (in which position it is s ilent and only used for Lbe p"rpose of reudering th e vowel aspirate), and tbat of this consonant never being a final letter in Tagalog, constitutes a defect in the latter chargeable to Lhose who first made application of tbe Spauish alpha bet to the langUAge. Th e p ropriety of using" at the end in certai n 1I'0lds to mark the aspiration of the last vowel doee no t seem to have appeared to tbeir mind., nO r did t hey s.-em to realize the necessity of writing, for instan ce. gamla" and not gaqdd, and Babi" and not Babi for ~he formatio n of sncb deri vatives as cagallaaliall, aubihin, eto., thus doing away with one of the greatest diffic ulties i n t he languoge.

ORTHOGRAPHY.

when' is followed by the vowels io, as in the word '·o nion'· . only at the beginning of syllables other than the first of Examples: Espal1a:=Espanya (pron. ess·palm-yah), "Spain"; (pron . loss Mhn-yohs). "Los Baiios" (a town). Ny ng. This is the Jlost peculiar Tagalog consonant and one lor which there exists a distinct cha racter in all the languages of the Indian Archipelago. Its sound i3 a uasal cerebral one approaching that of n9 in "kiugly", or that of the final n in the French word "bien', and is produced by strongly expelling the breat h towards the roof of the month, so that a portion of the ail' should come forth through the nostrils. The student will do well, however, to have it pronounced by a native. lu writing this consonant the tittle above ii 01' above and midway the two characters should not be fOl'gotten, for, otherwise, donbt may arise as to whether the ng 01' the combination ng is meant, to show '.'!hich the two words man,iia, (divided thus ma.nga), "a particle used in Tagalog to signify the plural" ; and manga, (divided thus man'ga), "mango"; will suffice. Ng-ng comes only at the beginning of the syllab le or the word always followed by a vowel. Examples: ngayon (pron ngah'lI{m), "now"; sangcl (pron. sang·itIL), 'branch". \\' hen the ending ng belong~ to the word, it changes to niJ before the vowel of the particle added to the radical, as, for instance, in cagaliniJan, "soundness" ; from galing , "sound'" pop has the same sound as in English and occurs only as initial or final. Examples; para (pron. pah-raIL), "like"; pacpac (pron. lJackprick). "wing"; daqt~ip (pron. dah-lc,;ep), "to seize". Q.q. This is another Spanish con onant which is always followed by a silent u., qtt being used for a purpose analogous to that for which gl~ is used before e and i, that is to say, for the indicatiug before said vowels of the haud sound which c has before the others a, 0, lt, as in the English words "antique", "conquer ', etc .. Examples: qttebrada (pron. kay-braTt·dah), "wreck"; qnilala (pron. key·lith-lalL), "acquaintan ce" . In inserting u between q and e 01' i, no departure is made from the Spanish orthograpical rules , but, as already indicated, owing to ignorance on the part of the natives, and to a different use of q in Spanish when Tagalog first began to be IHitten, still q alone and not. 1J1~ is uSlld by some and is found employed in ancient books and dictiouaries. Thus. quibo, is written qibo; qllilabot, qilribot; etc .. R'I' has the same sound as in th e Euglish word "very". This consonant is frequently confounded with d, the native alphabet providing but one character for tbe two sounds. As initial, d, is almost exclusively used; at the end of the word d or l' may be llsed, but the writing with d is to be preferred. At the middle, l' is used between vowels; d, between a consonant and a vowel. . R-r is eVil1 more rarely than I found as liqUid coalescing With aoother consonant and oue of the vowels, and thiS never In the Examples: mal'ahil, (pron. mah-rah· first syllable of the words. (1) . heel), "perhaps"; lacail;=iacQ?' (pron lait-cacl=lah car), "walking"; toro (pron. tOh'l'oh), "pointing out"; acras (pron. ah·crahs), "to go the shortest way." in English '5or'11 occurs the word. Los Balios

(1) It is eveo doubtful whether r ever coalesce. at all, tor perhaps such ai acp-ci,. may be cODsidered Be divided thus ac·,"(is, and it seems as it the Influeoce of Spaoish ooly would render it pronounced a·c)'(is, or it may be that the word io its preseot form is but a contraclioa of SOme ancieot 03e with !\ vowel elide.:!. ~YOTd8

i4 S·s has in 'fagalog the sou nd it has in bhe ttng\ish WordS "sin" , " this", nsver that of the English z, or that of s in " these" , It occurs as initial or final, not as medial in the syllable. Examples: ,o,iyu (pron, see'yah) , "he", "she"; basa (pron . ba· sah), "wet"; pillsan (pron , peen·sahn) "cousin "; laMs (pron. lah bass), " outside". 'fhe sound of th e Spanish consonants c, before e or i, and z before the others, a lingual one stronger than thlat of the English th in the word "thing", is, as indicated before, changed to that of s. Thus Spanish words as cebolla, Cicer{m. Laza1'o, Zoilo, zueco etc. come to be Tagalized into sibu!la. Siser{m, L risa7'o, Soilo, sueco, ' T-t so unds as in English in the word "tape", and occurs only at the beginning and at the end of words and syllables, never at the middle of the latter. Examples: timay, (pron. tQ.nie), " true" , " real"; colcol (pron . cot/-colt), "to excavate with the claws"; lJatuy pron. (pahtie), "dead"; at (pron, aU ), "and ", U-tt, like y, performs in 'l'aga log the double office of a consonant and a vowel, being a consonant at the beginnin!! of words and syllables, and a vowel in any other po ition, As a co nsonant, its sound is th e labial one of the English w in " way", and it wo nld have been probably so wri tten, were it not fo r the fact that no snch character is found in the Spanish alphabet. It illay be considered as occurring only at the begin· ning of words and syllables always followed by a vowel. Examples: uacas (pron ooah cass), "consuillmation "; uica (pron. ooee·cah), " language"; btma (pron . Mh,004h ), "every"; illa (pron . ee·ooah), " poniard ". V·v is anotb,er co nso nant borrowed from Spanish, to which Spaniards a nd natives alike give the sound of the labial b. It oc· cu rs only at the beginning of words and syllables, and is s till retained in certa in names of places as, t Ol' instance, in Cavite (pron . cahbee·teh), "Cavite"; Nueva, Vizcaya (pro n. nooay·bah bith· cah-yah), "Nueva Vixcaya" . X· x , another of the consonants borrowed from the Spanish language, is also rarely used in Tagalog. Its sound in Spanish is, as in English, one that may be represented by that of the combinations ks 01' [JS accord ing, respectiv ely, as to whether it is followed by a consonant or by a vowel; but natives make no attempt at its true pronunciation and have substitu ted for it that of s. X· x occurs but at the beginning or at the end of the syllables. Examples: :'..Iix=alis (pron. ith·lic!cs=ah·/ces), "Ali x" (the name of a street); aux i/io=ausilio (pron . aoo-gsee·lioh=aoo·see·lioh), " help", "assistance". Y .y, as a consonan t comes only at the beginning of the syll· ab le or the word, always fo llowed by a vowel, both of which mu t then belong to th e same syllable, for, although at the beginning, if alone and fo rming a sy llable by itself, it is then a vowel and shou ld be wri tten i. (I) y.y as vowel, not as consonant, comes at the end of the syllable or th e word and must in this position he pre· ceded by another voweL Its sonnd is the same as that it has in th e English word "yes" . Examples: yacap (pron. yah-cahp), "embrac· ing"; cli yata (pron. clee-yah·tah), " therefore '; baybay (pron, by·by) , "beach". It has already been said that y Tagalizes the Spanish 1I, as is illustrated in sibttyas for cebolla, etc.. Z -z has also been taken from Spanish into Tagalog and is the last conso!1ant in the alphabets of th e two languages. As illitial of (1) y.y, I· i , a Tagalog verbal paasive particle, altbough forming by it· eelf the first syllable of tile compound wben prefixed, ie, for teaching purposes ouly, written y and not i throughout thi. grammar,

ORTHOGRAPHY.

the word or the . syllable, z always occurs in Spanish before a, 0, u, and has therein the same sound or c before e, i, that is to say, that of the English th in the word " thing". but, as natives find this souud rather unnatural, they generally softeu it into that of the sibilant. Z and not s is however used in Zambaleg (pron. tham-bah-less), "Zambales"; Zamboanga (prou. tham路/)o/i路,i/m-gah), "Zamboaoga"; La Paz (pron. fait-path), "La Paz"; aod other oames of place. The native sounds of the Tagalog, it will have been noticed, can be expressed with ease and precision by the Spanish characters, and tbe Spanish alphabet, with but one trifling addition, was made to correspond letter for letter with the nati ve one. . Thus Tagalog is iodebted to Spanish for that fairly accurate accord of the spoken aod the written languages which exists in the latter and renders the writing and prououncing of both languages such an easy matter for learners to grasp and to master. This benefit those only cao properly appreciate who have ever undertaken the acquisition 01 aoy of the ~lalay insular languages writteo The student of with other alphabets, whether uative 01' foreign. Malay, Javanese, etc., must determioe be[orehaod whcther he intends, either to speak, 01' to write the language only, 01' whether both objects are embodied in his aim, and. in the latter case, tho difficulty of obtaining any C1uency in reading the uative character 01' of acquaintiug himself with any of the arbitrary foreigo systems or transliteration employed oiteo appears so great a even to discourage bim from making The lcarner or Tagalog, 00 the contrary, can, from tbe a beginning. first lesson, know how to write properly auy native word he uel-er beard before, if it be distinctly pronourlced. The fact must b~ apparent therefore, to aoy unbiased miod that the using of the Spanish alphabet, even if it were abstru e or misapplied, in the way above described for more than three centuries as a vehicle for the expression of the native sounds, cou ld not fail to give the orthography of the language that degree of fixety which seemed practically to protect it against disturbances from outside. This, however, did not prove to be the case. A portioll o[ the native elemeot, whose pedantry, since 1900, has been exercised in framillg all kinds o[ independent systElms, has found means to destroy this fairly settled stability of their 011'0 language by sub tituting k and to for, respectively, e and u, and by introducing some other fanciful novelties, thus causing serious confusion for the reading and und erstand ing or all former literatnre, on the one side, and for the composing or new books, on the other. The new spelling has been adopted through ostentation by some; by others, strange to say, through fear of appearing apathetic in what is considered as a patrioti c duty; by all, however, through unconsciousness of the harm such oovelties are causi ng to the language. We are far from believiog the Tagalog orthography as irreformable, but would like to see that such changes as may I:>e necessary be made in accordance with linguistic principles and not from caprice and political prejudice. Thus the language is, in this respect, now in a state of confusion and doubt, aud it is difficult to say at thIS wri tiog whether the new fashion will become more widesrread aod geoeral; but even in the case of its early collapse, students can hardly fail to come io contact with specimeos o[ it. In order to enabl e them to understand such deviations, it is thought convenient to give here some more precise informa.ion as to what lhese modernisms consist in, by

Tn짜.

TAGALOG

LA7>'GUAGE.

exhibiting In t he table below a number of words ,vriLten in this so cnlled model'D orthograpby and comparing them with 'same as written throughout in this book.

W ords. As written by modifiers.

Araw. lkaw. Huwag.

Ag. Ng. Kina. Kanya. Dalawa. Tawag. Gawin. Ikalima. Kay. Wika. Bigian. Ginto. Diyos.

Al written in this Grammar.

Arao. Icao. Houag. Ang. Nang. Quina. Caniya. Dalaua. Tauag. Gaoin. Ycalimil. 'ay. vica. Biguian. Guinto. Dios.

Signification.

Day. Tho u. Do not. The. Of the. '1'0 them. Him , her. Two. Calling. Done. Fifth. To (him). Language. Given to. Gold. Goel.

'rhe preceding table does not covel' perhaps all forms of these modernisms in use, hoI' can it be said with any assurance that otber innovations may not spring up in the future, due to the spirit of presumptiou which pervades a portion of the nati,e mind; but it is believed that whate,' er others Illay exist or may be invented in th e f uture will be so much on the lines of tbe abol'e ones as to be easily understood by the student without further explauations to be given.

Spec ial Remark. Students consulting Spanish-Tagalog dictionar,jes should not forget the indiscrimin ate u e oj' so me letters; e and i, 0 and tt, c and s or 1, d and r, y and i, y and ll, j and p, ,que, ,qui, ana ge, gi, qu and 1. When a word is not found written with any of these characters, an attempt should be made to guess at its cognate affinity, and to seek it elsewhere. In such dictionaries only radical words are arranged alphabetically, and as in the case of certain derivatives the initials of the radical are sometimes changed or elided, care should be taken, therefore, first to separate the root from all particles with which it may have been combined, and then [0 restore or to replace, as the case may be, such initial letter or letters as may have been changed or elided , so as to arrive at the unmodified crude rad ical word.

PROSOny.

PROSODY. If the discussion oE Prosody is taken up at. this carly stage, it. is (luly ror tbe purpose or aCf]uuinting tbe student with tl,e accent and metbod of accentuation employed, for no meter or rhyme con路 sideration is or can be intended with a language possessing no poetry and scarcely any prose compositions. The pronunciation of Tagalog, although 80ft enough' and, at any rate, much softer tban that of any of tbe other languages spoken more to the uorth in Luzon, is however uot so sort as that of 1\1alay, a language in which, as a rule, no consonant can follow another without a vowel coming between , while in Tagalog two or three consonants may come together coalescing with one or more vowels in the same syllable, and labials, nasals, dentals find palatals also occur as fiuals in the syllable or the word, thus bringiug forth a phouetic character tbat comes nearer to that of Spanish aud Javanese tban to tbat of 1\1alay, The pronuuciation, however, is not so rough as the study of the written forms may lead us to believe; for freedom of eynta.'" does much in softening it, and tbe roughness too is largely reduced by various other contri,(ances in peech, 60 that 110 aile wbo ever heard Tagalog spoken by Iaidy educated Ilatives will fail to classify it as one of the smootbest lauguages in the world. Altbough trisyl abic and polysyllabic roots ilre not wanting, the language is bowever mainly dissyllabir. When a root is found to consist of three of more syllables, it may be presumed that the word is either some ancient derivative 110 longer used as sucb, or that tbe last syllable was elidible in the langufige rrom which it originally Whatever may be thought of the theory of a monosyllabic sprung, origin, the fact is, however, that no un contracted self-significant Tagalog word is found to consist of only one syllable. No Spanish -grammarians have ever attempted to turn away rrom It the prosody of their own lan guage in explaining that of Tagalog. seems as if they had proceeded on tbe tbeory of a commou prosodical character, or with an aim to the unification, of the two languages; for , a few remarks on the acoent excepted, no further consideration is given in their grammars to the remaining prosodical matter, thus implying tbat all other Spanish rul es of pronuuciation were equally app li cable to Tagalog_ '1'0 speak of an i-:lentity of the prosody in the two languages would certainly be to say too much; but still no sound reason seems to exist here for departing from the rules in Spanish, in view of the close similarity 10 th e phonetic character o[ the two languages. These rules,. modified however in the woy which it is considered to suit Tagalog peculiarities, are, therefore, bereinaCter stated:

Division of Syllables_ '''hen a cousonant comes between two vowels, it joins the second vow l. Examples: a 路M "oh"; va-Ia. "child "_ Combinations of a labial or a palatal and a liquid bet ween two vowels may be

THE TAGALOG LANGUAGE

considered

liS

coming under this rule.

Examples: i-eli, "shortness';

g1"a·cia, (Sp.) "grace ' .

Exceptions: a). Radi cals ending in an aspirate vowel, in so far as their last syUable is concern ed. Examples: bas·a "to read"; ha-lag ·ct, "value", b). Dissyllables consisting of two equal portions. Examples: ac·ac, " notch"; 01-01, "mad". \Vhen two consonants come between two vowels, to each vowel a consonant is joined. Examples: bun·tis "pregnaut"; hin-hin "quiet". (1). When three consonan ts come between two vowels, the two hrst consonants are joined to the first vowel. Examples: dang cal "span " (length measure); bang· ca, " vessel" , Examples: Every final conSOllant jOillS the preceding vowel. la-on , "year " , to'o c, "cove' '. Deviations trom the above rules should be marked with a byphen. Examples: oal-on, "well" , "fountain "; mtw-ha, "face"; bu·laclac, "flower "; pag-ga-ua, "doing" ; etc:.

Composition of Syllables A syUable in Tagalog may consist: al· Of a single vowel, as a in a-ca·la, "to guess ". b). Of one vowel and one consonant, or conversely, as ~n in in-sic, "chinese"; ha i ha,ha, " length ". c). Of one V01\ el bet ween two consonants, as pan in pan hie, "to go upotairs". d). Of one vowel and two conSollants, provided one of the latter be not a liquid , as ang in ang· cam, " race ', "ancestry ". e). Of one consonant, one vowel an d two consonants under the same conditions as in d)., as ling in ling-cod, "to wait upon ". fl. or two consonants and one vowel, one of the former being a liquid, as cia in ba-cl6., (2) "astonishment". . 'Words consisting of tlVO equal portions are excepted, as seen in bu-laclac, " flower". g). The same combinatiolls as in f). followed by a consonant, as ela?' in ba·clal·, "fishing enclosure"; cro t in si-Cl'ot, "a kind of game played with pebbles". (3). b). Of one co nsonant, one vowel and two consonants in certain conditions to be explained und er the accent, as IDes-in loes-b, "j umping". rfhis last division may not appear unquestionable, but, at all events, this seems the best means of marking the aspiration of the final vowel of th e radical and of thus indicating th e formation of certain compounds, a thing the importance of whicb can only be appreciated by the student when he comes to speak the la nguage. \

(l) Derivatives in wbich any of tbe prefixes mag or pag enlers, if followed by a vowel, as, for instance, magaral, p ag(iml, may be considered divisible ma.qa·..al, lJa-ga-ral , or !IIag·(i, ,·al, pag a·,·al. The (urmer is more in use now-a-days and ahows tbe influence of the Spaniah prosody; the latter is more congenial to the language. (2) Another instance of the influence of Spanish, (See foot-note page 13). (3) Combin:1tions f). and g). are not fouod in the first syllable of genuine Tagal.og words.

Diphthongs and Trlphthongs. The corning together of two or three vowels is frequ ently enconntered in Tagalog, but it should be clearly uud erstood that only in certain cases the vowels thus joined can be- said to constitute a diphthong or a triphthong. The vowel soun ds as to th eir diphth ongal power may be divided into two classes; wcak and strong. 'Weak vowels are i and u; strong vowels are a , 0 and e. No combination of the strong vowels among th emselves can be made into a diphth ong or a triphthong, but each of th ese vowels is pronoun ced separately from the others and forms then a syllable by itself. Any combination of the weak vowels between th emselvt's will fo rm a diphthong; that is to say, the sound of th e one so coalesces with that of the other that both sonnds are pronounced in bu t one emission oft he breath. Diphthongs may also be form ed by com bini ng a strong vowel with an unaccented · weak one, because the accen t prevents lhe fusiug of the two vowels into a diphthong, t.hus cansing each vowel to belong to a distinct syllable . • Within the scope of th e prosodi cal character of the language, a triphthong can only be form ed by the weak vowel i being twice combined with the strong one a , bu t other trip hthongs may exist ill words of foreig!1 origin which have been adop ted iu T aga log. The weak vowel u of th e dipMhong 110 is often dropped by native writters, ouly the strong 0 remaining. In this way they write poo for pOtlO, "ten"; bao for OaltO, " widow"; etc.; bu t i f due consideration is paid 0 the fact that u, in these cases, is to ta ke the place of the liqllid I 'as exhibited in p olo and balo (the same words in Malay aud Bisayau) which has been elided iu pass ing into Tagalog, there seems to exist no sound reason to warrant such a dropping. Tagalog diphthongs are, therefore: ay, in bayMy, " beach" . oy, » tabOy, "to drive". uy, • Mouy, "pig". ia, qttiapo, "an aquatic herb" . io, g!tilio, "affectionate". Ita, » tiltta, "laughter". ui, .uica, "language" . tlO, • battOn, "victuals" . A triphthong may be considered to exist in Biay, " a native colloquial little name for Mary; and similar co mbination s. Ay is a favorite diphthongal ending, whi ch there is every reason to believe has been taken from the aboriginal language. The Accent.

Let the statement be made that nowhere in Tagalog is the accent or syllabic emphasis so strong and distinct as in th e languages of Europe. 'fhe accent is in Tagalog 0. rather difficult thing, and those follow a vain phanlom who seek to prescribe exact modes of accentuation for words regarding the pronunciation of which even natives are not agreed and in whicJ the accent may vary from une locality

TilE 'l'AGAt.OO

LANGUAGE .

to another. The experience ot the Spanish friars snfficiently proves this; there are words in thei r di ctionaries written with no less than three different sorts of accent. The use of the accent is in the mean timl: being made a matter of mu ch arbitrary practice. The written Si)anjsh accent indicative of the syllable upon which a pal'ticulal' stress is laid has been somewhat injudiciously applied to Tagalog. Some grammarian go so far as to admit of seven different manners of accentuation; some, I'om; and some others, three; which they represent by (') acute, (') grave, and circumflex, ("). There are even ' others who use only either the first or tbe first two; while most writers do not seem to acknowledge any, for, whatever they may think thereof in theory, they, at least, use none in practice leaving rather to the reader's presupposed knowledge to pronounce in the proper The way or in the manner that may best suit the local peculiarities. fac t is that the Spanish accent has been cArried away from its province in an attempt to explain lingwst peculiariti('s which could have found better means of expression by other orthographi cal signs. But all these apparent inconsistencies and intrincacies of accent and pronun ciation owe th eir difficul ty to th e rules by which the Spanish friars attem pted to define them and vani h with practi ce in the language; fo r it was intended to explain certain modifications of the vowel sounds by a charact er ",mch in Spanish is solely emrJloyed fo r th e purpose of marking the vowel of tIl e yllable on which a particular emphasis is to be laid . What co n sti tut~s the real diffi culty is the fact that th e accent is in Tagalog sometimes mad e depen ent on mod ifications of the original meaDi ng (some" at as in " to r co rd", " th e reco rd" and other English words) and on the emphasis with whi ch the speaker wants to draw attention to particular words in his speech. So, when natives want to speak emp hatically, they use the accent on a syllable on which it would not be otherwise. It is for this purpose that the accent is f requently changed with the imperative by rend ering the last syllable of th e word conspicuous, and students shoul(l not, th erefore, be either surprised or discouraged if th ey find the sam!3 word sometimes accented one way and sometimes ano~her in the g ram mar; for, apad from what has just been said of a change of sense an d indication of emp hasis, in some cases even natives could not well say which is th e acceQted syllabJEI of certain words. '!'he omisssion of accent marks may find some excuse in the case of natives writing to each other, where 1\ thorough familiarity of both parties with the language can be afely relied upon to ' remove any doubt as to the meaning in tended; but it becorn,es so necessary for guiding stud ents and beginners, as even to justify the author in creating a system of accent.uation if oue were not already in existence. 'file , paaish accent, therefore, will be used t.hroughout this book to indicate th e vowel of the syllable where a particular emphasis is placed. This is not, lik e tbe one of whicb we shall peak later on, a co nventional sign, and the student is recommended to preserve it and to use it in bis wl'iting of tbe language. The reso rting to the Spanish system of accentnation may pel" haps be tbought by s me to afford no adequate me~ns for t.b e pUl'po e of explaining prosodial Tagalog peculi arities; but, on the oth(!!' band, to go into the intricacies and d ifficulties, only known to those who made the attempt, of the jesm, teshclicl, hamzan, ?Vesta, rneclclah, angca aud all other orthographicaJ distinctions used in Malay, Ot' to go back

PROSOD\'.

to the systems of the Spanish friars, could only give birth to confus· ion in th e student's mind and render his task even more wearisome. We find the Spanish system of accentnation to possess greater means of adaptation to the langnage than those more comp li cated systems which were invented for a class of" langnages lI"ith which neither Spanish nor Tagalog has any radical connection. 'fhe llecess ity, or, if this is nor admitted, the advantages at least, of th e use of this accent may be seen among many others, in the following words: galas, "milk '; and [lala , "path'; [lrilill.q. "source", "origin' an [la/ill[1 "sound " "healthy '" ialjo. "wo" and tayiJ "erectin g '. etc.; wh~re only using ~ccent marks can it be indi cated, in th~ written language, which of th e two word s expre sible with the same letters is meant. By this method and by paying attentioll to the foregoing rnles, students, it is believed, will be as isted in the attainment of a desirable pronun ciation. It sho uld be noticed, hOll"e\'el', that there exists, both in pronnn ciation and in writing, much latitude in the use of the accent, and that learn ers may find th ese and other similar words either unac· cented or otherwise accented in other books. Two of the most impol'tant word·building particle, it will be seen, are the suffixes i n and an. R efcrence htl a lready been marle to the radical often ending in an aspirate vowel, and it ha been ex· plained aloo th at 11, the, consonant which in J\I.1IIlY is appended to the vowel in the same position, in order to denote the aspiration, has been omitted in Tagalog for centuries ast sin ce tile language came to be written with the R man character. 'fhe fint Spani h grammarians evidently believed that thi aspiration 0[ the vowel could be indicated better by what was cal ed acento br61;e gral'e by some of them, and l1m·t/· tima lJ1'oducta grave by oth ers (1). 1'be 11 , which in such a position as the one referred to above, should be si lent in the radical, being tben a mere sign of th e aspiration, deLaches it elf rrom the yO weI and becomes th e inHi al consonant oE th e la~t syllable, which it contribu tes to form with th e above mentioned su[fixed particles in the compound. In this position h recovers the gu1tural sound it ha at the beginning of a syllable, as it is not then a sign but a real consonant. See this illustrated , for instance, in the Malay, mallah, 'raga log, manet, "inheritance". and their derivatives: Malay, ca mana11·an; Tagalog ca·ma· na·han, "portion allotted"; the Malay, 11Il1t'ah, Tagalog, mont, "cheap"; and deril'atives: Malay, ca·mttrah· an, "Iiberality"; Tagalog, ca·mora·han, "insult", "injury", uWl'on g". As a consequence of the om ission of h in the radical, it becomes necessary to replace it in the compound, and, that this may be done, the su I'fixes in and an are, therefore, to be written hin and han. In speaking, the pl'Onouncing or the last vowe l sound detached from that of all other letters in the radical, may be considered to mark the aspiration suffi cien tly, but til is is by no means the case in writing, and there existing no s ig n to gu ide the reader as to thi s Important point, the author has thought it convenient to use the Greek note of breathing or grave accent (') for the pnrpose. This ~nark is even more essential than the other in guidi ng the student 10 IllS task, espec ially if ' he is to acquire th e language unassisted; as he could not otherwise know Ilow a great many componnds were to he formed ; but it is, how ever, a conventional sign and it rnay be used or not as the student may wish.

(1) Se6 IQtroductioa to the Dictiouary of P.ldre JuaQ de Nocella

A few examples, it is believed, will suffice to wartant the adoption of this mark. Basa, "soaking"; basain, "wet"; base)" "read· ing"; basahin, "to be read"; sarna, "wicked"; casarnaan, "wickedness"; samcl, "accompanying"; casamahan, "company". There are Tagalog words in which the stress of the accent is on the last syllable, but in the great bulk, however, of radical words the accent is on the penultimate. The only radicals found in which the stress of the accent is on the antepennltimate are some of those ending in ao, as amo, "day"; ealao, "hornbill" (a bird); etc., where the ending ao forms no diphthong, the words being pronounced and divided thus: a·m·o, dr,·la·o. When particles a re prefixed to the radical, the accent of the latter is preserved in the compound, as, for instance, in ~~mal'ao, "to be sunny"; from iil'ao, "sun'; 1,agcas(t/at, " penmanship "; from sit/at, "writing '. The accent of the radical is likewise preserved in the compound even in the case of particles being snffixed when the stress is in the last syllable of the radical, as, for instance, in up ban, "seat"; from ~I:pb "sitting' ; easamaan, "wickedness", from sarna, "wickedness" . In the case of particles being suffixed to radicals, or prefix.built derivatives otherwise accented, a prosodial change tben takes place, by which the accented syllab le should keep in the compound the same relative position it kept in the radical, the accent advancing one syllable for the purpose. 'I:bus, from sidat, "writing"; is formed sll·la-tan, "writing paper"; from a'Ta-o, " day"; is formed ea-a·l·a-O·an, "anni versary " ; etc.. Method of Accent uati on .

Directions for the understanding of the method of accentuation adopted in this work fo llow: For the proper use of the acute accent, words are div ided into two classes: grave and acute. Grave words are those in which the stress of the accent is on the penultimate; acnte words, those in which the stress 0 f the accen t is on the last syllable. . Unaccented words ending in a vowel or in n or s are to be pronounced grave. Unaccented words ending in a consonant (n and s excepted) are to be pronounced acute. Any deviation from the above rules will be IURrked with accent marks. Examples of unaccented grave words are: acala, "to think"; hayan, "town':; galas, " milk"; ga~li, "gait". Examples of accented grave words are: gamit, "use"; alae, "arrack". Examples of unaccented acute words are: bon doc, "hill"; quidlai, "lightening". Examples of accented acnte words are: api, "offence"; bucas, "open"; salamin. " looking-glass". The few Tagalog words in which the stress is on the ante· penultimate syllable will always be accented, as naeao, " stealing "; hieao, "ear ring"; etc .. The last syllable of rad ical words the final vowel of which is found thus marked ( ' ) should be pronounced acute in a peculiar way. The vowel, as it were, detaches itself from ·the preceding portion of the word and has th e aspirate sound it would have if it were followed by h, a consonant with which it is fonnd appended in Malay and other kindred dia lects. Thns. words as bata, "stone"; sabl, "say ing ; etc.; are to be pronounced as if they were written bat-bh, sab-ih. For the prol?er acceutuation care s!lould be taken in the case of

PROSODY.

words ending in ng to discriminate between this ending as an integral part of the word and the same as th e euphonic connective some hint of which is given in. the sequ el. Thus, in balitan.fJ tfcnrty= tfmay na balita, "authentic news"; and balitling na tfmay= trlnay na balitang, "genuine balitang, (a measure of &urface); the first word, it may be seen, is the unaccented grave one bali ta, " news"; linked to th e adj ective tfmay, and it would have to be accen ted if the endin g ng belonged to the word In the case of balitang , ng belongs to th e word and accent marks are here used, hecau se, If unaccented, the stress would then be on the last and not on th e penultimate syllable. In th e same way and for a similar pUl'pose, accent marks are 01' are not used , respectively, in salamln mahal, " precious lookin g-glass"; bayang malaqui. "large town". Words ending in y or in two vowels are accen ted on the vowel of the syllable bearing the stress. This is done with a view tc avoid any doubts which may arise in the student's mind from th e fact that y is sometimes a vowel and sometimes a consonant , and as a means to show when the two vowels form a diph thong and when not.

The accent In relation to the structure and meaning of words.

Some knowledge can be derived with rega rd to the accented syl. lable of a word by considering its stuucture and meaning. As gen· eral rules whi ch, of course, admit of many exceptions, the follo wing are given: Acute words are: a). Radicals ending in a consonant, both syll ables, or th e last two syllables of which are equal or similar in their fOl'mati on. Exa mples: camcam, "to take away"; tastfls, "to unsew" ; bttlac-lac, "flower"; calisq!~i8, "fin of fishes" ; haloq •• ipquip, "fo lding of the arms". b). Radicals and derivatives th e last two syllables of which end in ayj as bayMy, "beach" j talaytay. "to circulate". c l . Radicals and derivatives ending in a conso nant preceded by one vowelllnd two consonantsj as tampai, " slap" ; baloctot, " intermingled". d). Emphatic imperatives j as patayin, "kill it"; hamp asln, " whIp him". e). Contracted verbal forms; as dalhin; "carry it" j oucsan, "open it". (1). Grave words are: a). Polysyllabic radicals ending in conso nants and consisting of two equal dissyllabic parts, as gonamgonam, "to muse" j galangg£tiang, "reverence"

b). Dissyllabic radicals ending in vo wels and co nsisting of two eLiual parts; as coco, "lukewarm"; caca, a colloquial word for "eldest brother". No rule can be given for words not comprised in th e above divisions. As for the meaning, words denoting celerity a re, generally, acute, as lipad, "to fly" ; tanan , " to run away" . Those importing motion in quite a general sense are acute or grave according to the degree of acceleration in the action. Thus, ltt1nacad is grave and ~l) The comparatively rough phonetic character of the language may largely be attrIbuted to tbia fact; for a syllable which would be pure in the regular compouods dalahin, b"caBan, becomeij impure io tue contracted derivatives in order to eatiafy to the leaning tbe language ahow. (or djae yJll\bic worde.

Til E

T JI(lALOG

LA ;\Ol' .I GE.

mans "to walk" in the natural way; whil e nlO.fjlacarl, whi ch means " to walk much", "to walk winly"; is ac ute. \\' ords denoting slowness are generally grave, as /iguil " to cease'; hinto, " to stop", "to halt" .

Peculiarities. Under certain conditions to be ex pl ained in th e gramm ar , words haying mutual dependence are linked to eac h oth er by means of cer 路 tain conn ectives adh eri ng thereto , or placed betw een th em, either to suit euphony, or to establish particul ar relati ons. The particl.es made use of for this purpose are .fj, su ffixe d to words \lnding in n ; ng, a ffi xed to those end ing in one or two eq ual vo wels; and na, placed between those end ing in a consonant (n excepted), or two different vowels and th e fo llowing wo rd to be linked th ereto. . Ay-ai, y-i, are likewise co nn ecti\'es used between words es tablish路 ing ome verbal relation , generally so, between th e subject a nd th e verb. Tb e illustrations hereafter will co ny ey to th e student such a notion of th e matter as may be sufficient fo r hi m to nnd erstand the offi ce of th ese particles, a,t t his early stage. B ayan, " town " ; malaqui, "large" ; bayang malaqui, " large to wn"; mab utl, "good"; tauo, " man" , "person" ; mabuting tall O, or taltong malmli, "good fellow" ; malicot, " naughty" ; anac, "son or daughter" ; malicot na anac, or, anac n~ malicot, "naugh ty son, or daugbter" ; oOlldoc, " mountain"; mattias, " high " ; ang bnne/oc ay mat as, "nhe lbou ntai n is high" . At-t is som etimes a conn ective u ed between ca usa l conjunctions and the word followi g, as in eli aca p m'm-oo?!, sa 1Jagca,t,. aco,i, may gall a, " I shall not go t here, because ~ have business". Some word s un dergo certain coutractions on account of briefness Iu ay, a nd at, for in stance, a may be dropped when or euph ony. When it ends the word immed iately precediug ends in a vowel. in n, both th e n or the word and the a of the co nn ectives may be dropp ed. the pra ctice in such a case having been established of th e putting of th e t or y-i remaining or the co nn ectives between two commas, (1) aR in g(,b l ,t,arao, fo r gabl a t amo, " night and day" ; carunnn{ja,t , cabanalan, for canmnn.qan at caban alan , " wisdom and .virtue" ; si P ed1路o .i , mabuti , fo r si P ed,-o ay m aouti, "Peter is good" ; iya,i, mahalia, for ivan ay m ahaba, " th at is long" .

Reading and Pronouncing. Every letter (tt between 9 and q and e or i excepted) having, whatever its positIOn, the same unvarying sou nd , it foll ows tb at the reading of Tagalog omes to be u simp le process, co nsisting in giving to each letter its pro per soun d, that is to say, th e one assigned to it in th e chapter路 devoted to th e orth ography, and thus pronouncing each sy llable phonetically. Students wh o attemp t to acq uire th e language unassisted should en deuyor, before passing on in th e Grammar, to acquaint themselve fu ll y with th e fo regoing remarks, and tb en to read and pronounce aloud repeatedl y and as correctly as poss ible th e following. (i) T hi s seems to be but a n exte n. ion of the comma or apostrophe, which in Malagasi is use,l [or the purpose of ind ie-sting " pause in s peech, sud also for repla 'iog t he s nbstant ive verb a nd avoid ing ambi guity.

PROSODY . EXERCI~E.

READING AND PRO:\OUKCINO

Tag. Pron. Trans.

Ang

paugaral

Ahng

pah-nga-mhl

sah

boon-clOke.

Thl!

sermon

ou the

mountain.

bundoc.

Tag. Pron. Toons.

.Cay6

siyang

aSln

nang

Gah-yoe

eye

see-yahnq

ah-sdn

nahng

are

just

salt

of the

Tag. Pron. Trans.

cun

ang

as in

tuugmabang

anb

Goon

ahng

ah-seen

(eye

toong-malt-bUng)

~ye

ahn-oh

the

salt

Tag. Pron. Trans.

ang

ypagasin.

Uala

nang

anb

man

ahng

ee-pah-gah seen.

Wah-lah

nahng

ahn-oh

palt

man

what

Tag. Pron. Trans. Tag. Prou. Trans. Tag. Pron. Trans. Tag. Pron . Trans.

the

cundi

cah-boo-loo.;hahn, coon-dee

value

nguni,t,

earth:

but

(become savorless) then

wherewith to salt. (It) has not

cabuluhan

lupa:

loo-pah: l1goo-nee't

uIlang

ytapon

oopahng

ee·tah·pohn

except

for

what

more ever sa

labas

sah lah-Mhs

to be thrown to the outside

,yacapan

nang

,nanga

taub.

aht

y ·cah-p han

nahng

mah·ngah

tah-woh.

and

to be trampled upou

Cay6 Gah·yoh

Ye (are)

of (by)

the (plur.) · people.

ang

Hao

uang

sanglibutan .

ahng

ee-lah-oh

nahng

sahng·lee boo-talmo

the

light

of the

whole rouudll ess (world)

Ang

is/wg

ciudad

natatay6

Ahng

eess ahng

thew-daltd

nah

nah-tah-tah·yfJe

city

that

stands erected

The

one

Tag. Pron. Trans.

nang

isimg

sah

ee·lJah·Mh·oh

nahng

eess-ahng

boondoke eye

above

of (on)

one (a)

mountain so

Tag. Pron . Trans.

heen-dee

mah-ee· talt-tah-goh.

not

can be bid.

Tag. Pron . Trans.

hindi

pinaniningasan

ang

isang

Aht

heen dee

pee·nah nee·nee-ngah-sahn

ahng

eess-ahng

Aud

uot

is set in flames

the

one (a)

ibabao

hindi

bundoc

maytatago.

------------------------------------------

Tag. Pron. Trans. Tag. Pron . Trans.

ilauan

ee- laoo·alm

aht

ee-lee·nah-lah·gfty

light

and

is beiug put

islLllg

tacalan.

yl iualagay

cuudr

eess·fdmg lah-cah-lf;lvn , coon-dp,;

sah III

sa sah

one (a) rice measure, but (is placed) at the

ilaJ im

nang

ee-lah-leem nahng

under la lag-Y!l,n

of nang

/ah-Iahg · yflhn nahng

tand

of the

----------:4------

TH E TA GAT,O a

LANGU AGE.

Tug. Pron. Trans.

ilno ee·lah oh light

at aht and

Tag. Pron. Trans.

manga nlli ll·ngah the (those)

na nah that (are)

Tag. Pron. Trans.

Lumiuanag na gay6 n ang inyong .£oo·mee·wah·nahg nah gah ybhn ahng een·ybhn Let shine then so the your

Tag. Pron. Trans.

harap nang manga tauo upan maq uita ni lS. hah·rahp nahng mah·ngah tah·woh oo-pahn mah-kee-tah . nihl-a front of the (plur.) men so that may be seen of them

Tag. Pron. Trans.

ang ahng the

Tag. Pron. Trans.

canilllDg purihin ang cah·neel-(m; poo-l'ee·heen ahng their (by them) to be honored the

Tag. Pron. Trans.

sa sah in

inyong een-ybng your

lungmiliuanag lung·mee·Zeewaknahg shines

sa sah to

lahat lah Mtt all

nang nahng of

sa bahay. sah bah-high. in the house.

manga mah-ngah the (pl nr)

.. , ....

gauang gah-wang works

. . .-

ilao sa ee-lah·oh sah light in

mabubutl mah-boo-boot·ee good

at aht an d

Am a na na inyong een·ybng ah-mah nah nah your Father that is

THE

ARTICLE.

THE GRAMMAR. Preliminary Remark. The most obvious division of Tagalog words would be intto roots and compounds; but we are however induced, from a consideration of the advantages that attend the employment of known and current terms, to conform to that which is generally adopted for the study of our European languages rather than to attempt to create a new oue. We, therefore, will treat of the same parts of speech as are recognized by Western grammarians and will endeavor to show those Tagalog words or expressions which may be considered to correspond therewith.

FIRST LESSON.

UNANG PAGARAL

THE ARTICLE.

The nearest approach to the English definite adICle "the", in Ang, it will be the singular, is found in the Tagalog particle ang. seen, not only corresponds with the English article, but stands, also, for a relative pronoun, and even sometimes has the force of a caus路 It is used only before common, abstract, and ative ('onjunction. proper nouns of things. Proper nouns of persons (personal names) take in Tagalog, contrary to the English usage, their proper definite article si. As for other proper nouns, natives say: Ang Pasig, ang Pilipinas, ang Maynila, ang Cavite, ang N oviemb1"e, etc.. "The Pasig", "The Philippines" , "Manila', i'Cavite", " November", etc.. The indefinite article a or an may be expressed in Tagalog by the numeral adjective isd, "one". The (sing.) Sir. Have you? Yes, Sir, I have. I have. (some.) Have you any hat? Yes, I have a hat. Have you my bread? Yes, I have your bread.

Ang. Po.

I io~hJ.yr60n ca po? (indeterminate). I

ioNa sa iy b baga? (determinate). 00, po, mayr60n ac6, or, ac6,i, mny路 r60n. (inuet.) Na sa aquin po. (det.) Mayr60n . c,Mayr60n ca pong sambalilo? (1) 00, mayr60n ac6ng sambalilo. ioNa sa iyb baga ang tinlipay co. 00, na sa aquin ang tinapay mo.

Common, abstract, and proper nouns of things in the singular, possessive pronouns and clauses serving as subject to a sentence, are generally preceded by the particle or article any. (1) CvrruplioJl .( Ille Sp.lUi.h

w~rJ BJ",b,.ero. "Il~,".

THE

TA GA L OG

LANGUAGE

The subject of a sentence, whether a noun or pronoun, may be placed either before or after the verb it governs, as may best sui t euphony or e.mphasis, Mayroon and its root may are constructed between two nomin atives, MaY1'oon may be used alone, may always requires some object of posses ion following. "'£0 have", as an active "erb, followed by a noun in an indeterminate sense, is trauslated by mayor mayroon. If tbe noun which is in English the direct com plement of the verb "to have" is deter minate in sense, "to have " is tben translated with na and the objective case (ab lative of place 01' locative) of the noun or p ersonal pronoun which is tbe subject in English; t hus, na sa aquin ang tinapay mo, meaus Sa is sometimes used before literally: "your bread is with me", ca!l, in connection with th e so called dative of acquisition. Sufficient illustrations for th e majority of cases to which the above rule is applicab le follow, that tile stud ent, from the outset, may thus get accustomed to this peculiar fo rm of Tagalog construction , What.? Which?, which one? Who? What table have -you? I have your (thy)

able,

Which has? (indet.). Do. (determ .), Who has? (iudet.). Do. (determ.). Which kin g has money? Which bishop has my letter? My king has money. Your (sing.) bishop has my letter, ,Vho has so me water? Who has your (sing) salt?

c,Ano?, Gano baga? _ c,Alin?, c,alin baga? c.Sino?, c,sino caya? Anong lamesang mayr60n ca? { Anong lamesa ang na sa iyo? Ang iyong lamesa } . . ang na sa aqulU, { Ang lamesa mo c,Al! ng mayr60n? c,Na sa aUn? i,Sinong mayr60n? c, Na sa canino (baga)? (1). c,Allng haring mayr60ng salapi?, c,Na sa alingobispo (b~ga) ang sulat co? MaY1'60ng salapi ang hari co. Na sa obispo mo ang aq uing slllat. c,Sinong (caya) mayr60ng tubig? c,Na sa canino baga ang iyong aain?

The rule as applied to the interrogative ana, when obtaining in the objective case, is, by reason of the indeterm) uation of this pronoun, a somewhat variab le one, both expres ions i anrJlZl/ lamesa ang na sa iva? and i animg lamesang mayl'oon ca? being used, with a teudency however to the latter becomiug proponderant. Numeral adjectives are not considered as determi native, uuless they th emselves are otherwise determined by some word having a determinative character. ' Example: llIaY1'oon acong dalauang paco, "I have two nails"; allg dalauanr; paco ang na sa aquin, "I have th e two nail s". (Literally, "the two nails are wiLh me" .) Properly speaking, the interrogative seuse is not indicated ill '£agalog by auy sign or particu lar manuer of coustruction; but by the employment of such words as baga., (2) caVa, etc., their use being ( I) Sa oanino iB the locative caBe of sino. For declensionB, .ee Sixth Leeson . . (2) Baga will fre~ u ently be met with written and pronounced ba. Notice should be taken of the commo n native habit of Bhorteninl( word. by dropping syllablee, 80metimes at tbe beginning, sometimeB in the middle, and sometimee at t l.,e e nd . In this faBh ion, they Bay: ba (or baga, la for /timatlg, Ta..i. (or EBta· ,';81,,0, dapotla for tlatapOIta, etc , much in the sa me wav aB we say colloquially: "ed ' for "adverLisemeut", "Frisco" for "San Fraucisco", fl Bros' for HBrothers ", "ClLS" for "citizeotl', etc ..

THE

ARTIOLE.

optional. The interrogative signs taken from Spani.sh .are, ~owever, largely used, and should be placed both at the beglOnlOg,. (IOverted) and at the end of the sentence.. The tone of the VOIce, alone, may sometimes mark the interrogation sufficiently. Table, Meat, flesh. Salt.

Lamesa. (1)

Laman, (Tag.); Cal'ne, (Span.). Asio. r AS1{Cal. (corruption of the Spanish word Sugar. 1. ae(lcar). Water. Tubig. p . (writing paper. Sulatan, (Tag.); papel, (Span.). apel. (written upon. Sulat. My, mine, or, of me. (possessive). Aquin, (prepositive); co, (postpositive). Thy, thine, or, of thee, (poss.);) your, yours, or, of you, (poss.) .\. 1yo, (prep.); mo, (post.). (in the singular.). My hat. rAng sambalilo co, or, ang aquing sanl1. balilo. Ang lamesa co, or, ang aquing lamesa. My table. Ang tinapay mo, or, ang iyong timipay. Your (sing.) bread. \ ang sambalilo co? Have you my hat.? { ioNa sa iyo baga 路} ang aquing samba路 \. lilo? 00, po, na sa rang sambalilo mo. Yes, Sir, I have you\ hat. { aquiLl . 1. ang iyong sambalilo. lNa sa iyo baga { ang lamesa mo? Have you your table.? { (or caya) ang iyong lamesa? ( ang lamesa co. I have my table. Na sa aquin 1. ang aquing lamesa. Ang hari. The king. Ang obispo. (Span.). The bishop. ( Ang lamesa mo. 1 . I have your table. 1. Ang iyong lamesa. fang na sa aqull1. What.? (nominative). lAno?; lano baga?

'rhe above illustrations show that the possessive pronouns and the possessive case of the personal pronouns are alike and have two forms, one prepositive and the other postpositive. The relative cbaracter of ang may be seen in laZing sambalilo ang na sa iyo?, ang iyong lamesa ang ria sa aqtlin, and similar sentences.

FIRST EXERCISE. Have you any bread.? Yes, Sir, I have some bread. Have you my bread.? I have your bread. Have you the meat.? I have the meat. H ave you your meat:? I have my meat. Have you the salt? I have the salt. Have you mv salt.? I have yeur salt. Have you the sugar.? I have the sugar. Have you the wtiter.? I have the (I) The Spanish word mesa used with the article lao In adopting Spaniah w01'(ls, nativee ftometimes p'eeerve the article aDu sometimes the 8 of the plural, which they believe to form a part of the word.

THE

TAGALOG

LANGUAGE

water. Have you your water? I have my water. What paper have you.? I have my paper. Which table have I.? Thou hast my table. Which king has sugar.? Your king has sl1gar. Which king has my hat.? My king haa your hat. Which bishop has water.? Your bishop has some water. Which one has my paper? My bishop has your paper. Who bas some money.? I have some. Who has my bread .? ~ou have my bread.

SECOND LESSON.

YCALAUANG PAGARAL. GENDER.

InBexion for gender is unknown in Tagalog, and the sexes are generally distinguished by the addition of such words as lalaqui, "male;" babaye, "female;" in the case of living beings. The following are the only cases in which gellder is expressed by different words: am e)" "father;" ina, "mother;" amain=mama, "uncle;" ali, "aunt;" coya= caca, "eldest brother; " ati=ate, "eldest sister;" binata, "lad;" da/aga, "girl; " tandang, "young cock;" dumm'aga, "pullet;" "young hen;" bayao , "brother·in·law;" hipag, " sister· in-law." J ohn . Ortiz. Mr. Robin so u. Mr. Branagau. Dr. Martin.

•

Si Juan . Si Ortiz. Si Sen r Robin so u. j Si Senor Brauaga u. l Ang Senor Branagan. Si Doctor MarUu. { Aug Dr. Martin.

Christian uames and surnames in the singular and nomiuative When used with titles, tbey case require the particle si before them. may be preceded by the same particle or by that of common nouns, accord ing to whether stress is laid ou the name or on the title. The father. The mother. The brother. Tbe sister. Eldest brother. (first bOrD.) Eldest sister. My eldest brother. My eldest sister. My fa th.:r. My mother.

Ang ama. Ang iua. ling capatid na lalaqui. Aug capatid na babaye. (1). . I ) Coya, cacao } (ll Ati, ate. co oqUJa names . Si coya, si caca; ang coya co, aug caca co. Si ati, ang ati co. Si ama. Si ina.

The article si of proper personal nouus may be used also before com mon nouus to indicate living beings unique in kind and pertaiuiug to the speaker, it carrying io itself the idea of possess!ou with regard to the speaker without tbe use of the possessIve pronouu being req uired ,"Vhen anillJals are named after persons (1) When in the language of Madoga.cor things are spoken of, which con si st of two elements, thot cnns;dere~ .s .hA feehler of Ihe two is denoted by vavy. Tl1is i~ probably the origiu vi Lu~ wv,d baMy=ba~aye.

GltNDER.

or bear specific appellt.ltions by wbich thev are known, snch nonns may likewise take si in the nominative. • TllDs, of a horse known as Babieca, may be said, si Babieca. The use of si in reference to a person who is not an intimat,e relation of tbe speaker is mockery. Thns, to say, for instance, si nono co icao, "thon art my grandfather"; when the person addressed is not tbe trne relative, would be understood to be a jokE'. Thou, you, (sing). House. Rice-field, farm. Book. Power, authority. Force, strength, violence. God. Leaf, book·lenf.

lcao, (prep.) ca; icao po. (polite) Bahay. Buquid, or, bllquir. Libro , (Sp.); aclatan. (Tag.) Capangyarihan. Cabagsican, calacasan, capilitan. Dios (Sp.); Bathala. (Tag.) (Dahon, (Tag.); l'ohas. (corr. of Sp. l word lioja, " leaf.")

lcao is used alone aud precedes tbe verh; ca, follows it. The house of J bn. John's house. Tbe power of God. God's power. The leaf of the book., Book·leaf. Love. Loving. (pres. participle.)

An g babny ni Juan . Ang cay Juang bahny. Ang capangyariban nang Dios. Ang sa Dios na capangyariban. Ang dabon nang libro. { Ang sa librong dahon . Dahon libro. SinHI. Pag.ibig.

Common and proper nouns of persons in the possessive case are immediately preceded, respectively, by the particles nan,q or sa, ni or cay; sa and cay being used when the object of possession comes after the possessor, as seen in ang capangyarihan nang Dios, allg .-a Dios na capangyarihan, with the -remark however that the former is more largely used. In nOUDS common to both genders, the distinction of sex is made by adding lalaqui, "male"; for the masculine; babaye, "female"; for the feminine. Dios is used as a common noun. Compound nouns in which one of the members qualifies the other are generally formed in Tagalog in a manner contrary to that of English, viz: by naming first the principal noun and secondly the qualifier; the ligament generally, and sometimes the article, as seen above, being employed for the purpose. Declensions.

(1)

The particles used in place of articles are declined thus: (I) For a better understanding of this malter, we consider lbe Englisb ob· jecli .. e case rlivided ioto dative ca•• (indirect object), acetO,aUve (dire. t object) and ablative, •• io Latio, aod the ablative case subdivided into cau8ative, localiv. and i.,trulllental.

THE

ART I CLE

CO~ m O !i' ,

FOR

AND

TAGALOG

PROPBR

LANGUAGE .

NOUNS

OF TU[!i'OS

Nom.

The,

Poss.

Of the.

~' HE

SING ULAR.

Aog. Sa, nang; og. 1(contract). (1) · Dative. To, 01' for, th e. Sa. Acc. The. Nang, sa. Object. Sa. Abl \ Causative and locative, In, by, at, the. . I Instrumental. By, througb, witb , the. Nang.

ARTI CLE

FOR PROPER NOUNS

Nom. Poss. Object. (all its divisions).

DECLEN SION

Nom . Poss.

· i

Dat. Obj ect. Acc. Abl.

PERSONS ,

TRE

(2). Of. To, at, in , by, with, etc .. WITH

A COMMON

S INGULAR.

Si,. Cay, ni . Cay.

NOUN.

The. Aog. Of the. Sa .... or, nang. To, or for, the. Sa. sandatil.. weapon, 'Nang, sa. The. locative. In, at, the. Sa. lnst. By, with, the. Nang DECLENSI ON

WITH

A PROPE R

NOUN

8F PERSON .

Nom, Peter. Si Pedro, Peter's, of Peter. Cay Pedrong,.. . ni Pedro. Poss. Obj ect. (all its divisions.) P eter; by, to, etc., Peter. Cay Pedro.

Not to have (active verb), not to pos ~ss; there is (or ,are) not, (in· \ UahL defiwte). mayr60n. To have (active verb.); there is (or} M are). ay, I bave no table. {Uala ac60g lamesa. Ac6,i, ualang lamesa. . f GUaia baga sa iyb ang carne, 01', laHave you not the meat. l mangcati.? There is some salt. May asio, mayr60ng asin . Th ere is no sugar. Ualang aslical. He, or sbe. Siy a . Is th ere any paper on the table.? GMayr60n bagang papel sa lamesa? There is no sugar in th e water. Ualang asucal sa tubig Is there any bouse 00 the farm? GMay bahay cay:l. sa bliquid.? There is oone. Uahl. H ave you tbe leaE of the book? i Na saiyb baga angpohas nang libro.? I have it. (indeed). Na sa aquin nga. (1) Nang is contracted into "9. Such abbreviated form, allhough frequently met with in other books will not he found in this gramm ar, 8 S it would be de· stru ·ti ve of the prosody and the student mIght be thereby misl.d in to a false pro· nun ciation of this important particle. (2) There is no equivalent in Engli h.

NUMBER,

AND

THE

AD.rECTIVE.

11[0,1/ is llsed without auy ligament. (1) As for nwyroon and /lair;, wheu they come be [ore a pronouu, tbe uomiun.ive of tbe sentence, the ligament, wbicb ought to have been llsed with snme, passes over to the pronoun. IE the nominative comes before, the ligament may be employed. iMayroon cang papel? Ualr; acung papel. Otberwise: i1cao,i, mayroong lJapel? Aco,i, ltalang ]Japel. Nga is an intensive or completi,'e postpositive particle largely llsed iu Tagalog, whicb carries the sense to its most completc expresion, as in, na sa aqltin nga, " I bave it ind('ed;' ualr, iiga, "there is absolutely non e: It sbould be carefully distinguisbed from na. The foregoing pbrases sbow tbat when the subject in a sentence comes befo re tbe verb, the verbal li gament ay-i shonld be placed between . No ligament is used in the contrar~' case.

SECOND EXERCISE .

Has my father any salt.? He has none. Have .vou a mother? I have. Has the king any sister? H e has none. Has tbe bishop any brother? He has. Has John any water? John has some water. Has he any house? Certainly, he bas a house. Has God an.v power? Has God love fur man? Yes, God Yes, indeed, he has power. has love for man. Is Hiere any book at your hou e? Ye, at my house there is a book. Has yOll\' mother's love any power? Yes, indeed . Whi cb book h ave yon? I have Peter's book. Wbat farm has your father .? He has tbe king's farm. ,\'hat has Peter? Peter has John 's book. Has be not my sugar? H o has it not. For whom is the table? The table is for my father. lIa\'e 'you not an." money? I have no mon ey. H ave I not Peler's meat? You bavo it not.

THIRD LESSON. YCATLONG PAGARAL NUMBER, AND THE ArIJECTIVE.

A defi nite plural number is ex prcssen in Tagalog by tbe nse of the particle manga, a plural cardinal num eral, or such collective nnmeral adjectives as paua, lah a!, ililan , "all." Sometimes. however, the number remains indefinite and should be gathered from the Wh en tbere is nothing to show wheth"r singular or plural context is meant. tbe nonn may generally he assumed to be iu the plural or used in the partitive sense. The. (plural). Yon (pluralf, yeo We.

Ang manga; mgn. (abb.) (2), Ca)'o; cay6 po. (polite). Tayo, camf, quita=cata.

(I) See Lee BOD Fourth . (2) Ma"ga , is often abbreviated into "',qn: but lor the B.me reaSODS 8S explained for "g. in the first note of tbe precediDg lesson, sucb abhre\' iation will not be .used in tbis grammar. .

3,*

THE

TAGALOG

LANGUAGE.

They. Sila. No. Not. Hindi, uala. Di, hindi, dili. Do not. (prohibitive). H ouag. Clotbes . . Looking glass. Dam it. Salamin. (na ng muc路ba). Money, silve r. Salapi, pilac. Und erstanding, j udgment. Bait, cabaitan, pag路isip. Anything which is good, the idea) B S uti (root.word). of goodness. Good. (adj.). Mabutl. Anything bad, the idea of wickedness Sarna. (roo t word). Bad. (adj.). Masama. Anything pretty, the idea of prettiness Diq uit. (root word). Pretty. Mariquit. Anything beautiful , the idea of bea uty. Ganda. (root word). Beautiful. (adj.) Maganda. Ugly, wicked. Pangit, lupit. Anything old. T anda. (root路 word). Old. (in age.) (adj .) Matanda. Man , person, creature. (Latin homo) Tauo. Dog. Child. Aso. Bala. Horse. Cabayo. (corr. of Sp. word caballo). Mare. Cabayong babaye. Judicious, prudent. Mabait. The looking路glasses. Ang lOanga salamin. The men , the perso ns, the people. Ang manga tauo. Iy brethren . Manga capatid co. J Ang aquing manga batao 1\1y children. lAng manga bata co. Ang iyong manga salam in. Thy looking glasses. { Ang manga salami n mo. An g tauong matanda. The old person. { Ang matandang tauo. Ang batang mabait. The good (judicious) child. { Ang mabait na batao Ang cabayong mabu tl. The good horse. { Ang mabutlng cabayo. J Ang babayeng maganda. The beautiful woman. l ABg magandang babaye. ( Ang manga asong mariquit. Ang manga mariquit na aso. Ang maririquit ua aso. The pretty dogs. Ang asong mar~riquit. ) Aug mauga asong mari riquit. Ang mauga maririquit na aso. Aug manga cabayong babayeng pangit. The ugly mare3. Ang manga pangit ua cabayong bahaye.

One. Two. One person, a person. Two children.

1511,. Dalauu . Isang tauo. Dalauang baht.

Common nouns and adj ectives are put in the plural by usi ng the particle manga, to be placed between that which indicates the relation

NUMBER,

AND TilE ADJECTIVE.

of ca,e and the noun or any attribute thereof. If however a possE-sive pronoun is used in the prepositive form , man.ga is then inserted be路 tween the particle expresive of the case 路and the pronoun , and is dropped with the cardinal numerals, as seen, respectively, in allY aq!ling manga bala, and in dalaltllng batao Nouns in tbe vocative case (nominative of address) or in apposition drop ang in the plural, as, for instance, in manga capatid co, "my brethren ;" caming manga ame 1-ica1l0 "we, Americans." The adjectives formed by a root-word and the prefix ma may also be put in the plural by repeating the first syllable of the root if such syllable consists of one or two letters, and the first two letters thereof if consists of more, the use of manga being optional. As to this reduplicative form without manga, it will be well to say here that it points out ratber intension that plurality, and that the one with the particle is more to be recommended. The nominative case of tbe first person pronoun has three forms in the plural: tayo, cami, quit~cal{Z. l'af/o, should be used when both tbe speaker and the person addressed are included in the notion; cami, when only the speaker is concerned. Thus, an American speaking to a native must say: tayo,i, mamatay " we are mortal ;" mortality beiog a condition common to both, while in the case of a quality not shared by natives as, for instance, wealth , he should say : caming manga amel'icano,i, mayaman, "we, Ameri cans, are wealthy. " Tayo and r.ami, although distinctly plural, are, however, used for th e singular by royal or highstanding personages when th ey aduress inferiors. Quit~cata is exclusive, or dual; as exclusive, it means, you (thou) and I alone; as dual, it is possess've with regard to th e speaker and nominative with egard to the person spoken 10. This peculiar sense it developes with a verb in the passive form when the agent is the pronoun of the first, and the subject that of the second, person, both in the singular, as seen, for instance, in hahampasin quilti=cattt, "thou shalt be whipped by me;" "I will admnister thee a whipping.' A root is a primitive word whieh denotes but tbe simplest idea of a thing, a quality or an action, and depends for it mort:: precise signification, or for the development of its original meaning, on its position in the sentence, or, more frequ ently, on th e particles which are prefixed, infixed or suffixed thereto. These primitives, whictl are for the most dissyllabic, form , so to say, the raw material, while particles are the mortar used for the building of speech. Particles constitute, therefore, the living and most impor~ant element in ~he language. A thorough knowledge of the language and the perspicuity of style depend almost entirely on the proper use of particles. The indefiuiteness of the meaning as found in some roots is net such, however, as to prevent tbeir elassification as nouns, adjectives and ,erhs, in so far as the primitive, in its crude or simple form, may sometimes be used as noun, adjective or verb without a particle. It may be said, ~herefore, that there are nominal, aojectival, and verbal roots. Roo~s pessesing substantive force may be made to mean a quality hy prefixing tbe particle ma, as seen in the above instances, they being thus converted into as many adjetives. Roots baving an adjectival force may be, aOO generally are, expressed witbout any elaboration, as seen in pangit. Ma is, therefore, the prefix most frequently used to form adjectives frem substantive roots Adjectives are also formed from verbal reots by employing other affixes in several ways to be explained in subsequent lessons. The illustrations in the vocabulary show that adjectives in To.

TilE

TAGALOG

LANGUAGE.

galog may come before or after the nouas they qUlI.lify, here, too, euphony affordlDg the rcason for their employment in oae way or 路a nother. Declensions. TilE

Nom. Pos . Dat. Acc.

Object.

Ilocat. an d l Ab!. )I .causat. lDstrum. ental.

DECLENSION

o~-

ARTICLE

T il E

PLURAL.

'fhe (plural) Of the To, or, for the :: The

Ang manga. N aug manga, sa manga. Sa manga. Naag manga, sa manga.

In , at, from, elc., the.

Sa manga.

By, with, etc., the.

Nan g msnga.

A COM MON

NOUN

THE

The. m the. Dat. To, 01', for the. The . ACe. r ocat and Fr01ll. in, I houses. at, etc., the . lAb!. J c usat. ius rum路 'With, by, f rolll, ental. the.

NOIll.

Poss.

Object.

DECLENSION

o~'

NOUN

Nom. Poss.

Object.

~~~" locat. and Ab!.

J causat.

I in st rulU'

l ental.

TflE

RAL

WITn

P L URA L.

Ang. Nang, sa. Sa. Nang, sa. Sa manga bahay. Nang. AN

ADJECTIVE .

The. Ang. Of the. Nang, sa. To, 01", for the I manga asong Sa. The. ugly .l N ang, sa. J pangit. lli at, dogs I I manga pangit fro!)), etc., the, Sa. l na aso. " 'ith, by , elc. , Nang. the.

Proper nouns h a~e no pima!. It is however a peculiarity of Tagalog that propel' nouns of persons be preceded by simi, the plural of si, not whell persolls bear ing th e same name are meant; hut whell th e principal persoa, the oae who is as the head of the family or association, is to be represented together with his or her intimate relati'ons or whith those connected with him ill other respects. SinO- is declined as follows: illa. Nina, cana, qnin3. Cami, q uiu:L

Nom. Poss. Object. (all. its divisious. )

Thus, for instance, "Jane and her family" (or persons in any intimate connection with her) is declined as follows:

. (

Nom . Simi. I Poss. Jan e and her people.j Nina, cana, quina, ) Juana. Object. (all its divisions.) ) . \. Can a, quin!!..

TUE LIGA~fENTS, ANa TilE RE~DEI\[NG o~' TilE VERD "TO BE'

Edward and his people. The farm of Thomas' family. Astor & Coy. To Russell & Coy.

Sina Ednardo. Ang bliquid nina Tomas. Ang cana Tomas na bliquid . Simi Astor. Can ling Rusel.

THIRD EXERCISE. Ha I'e we uuderstandiug? Yes, we ha va. II!lI'e they any good clothes? No, they have none. Have you (plur.) any bad looking路 lIa I'e I your pretty horses? glasses? Yes, we have some bad ones les, you hal'e them. Have the judicious children my beautiful dogs? Yes, they have your beautiful dogs. Have they my fine books? No. Which hats have we? You have Peter s hats. Has John myoid brothers' good horses? He has them not. Has Peter's father my children's old horses? He has them not. Have old people love for children? Yes, Sir, they have 10 e for children. Have John's family any good houses? No, they have no good houses, but (1) they have Bome pretty farms. What farms have Peter"s family? Pe.ter's family have beau tiful farms. Have they tl e ugly houses of John's family? They have not the ugly houses of John's ramily. Are tbere any books on the tables? 'l'hel'e are no books on t he tables. Ha I'e your sisters any old dogs? No, they have no old dogs.

FOURTH LESSON.

YCAAPAT NA PAGARAL.

THE LIGAMENTS, AND THE RENDERING OF THE VERB "TO BE"

As has been indicaterl in foregoing chapters, the Tagalog language is distinguished from Malay and other insular languages by the employment of certain endings or separate particles intended to link words, clauses and sentences to each otber. The proper use of such connectives or linking 路particle is more a matter oE practice than o[ theory, as euphony, in many cases, determines whether tbey shall be used 01' not. Hereafter we gi ve such explanations as may be useful at this stage; but this matter being both so important anrl abstruse, we refer the student to the last lesson in the grammar, where some further rules are 路given on the subject. The mutual relation between a substantive and its qUAlifying word should be indicated by a ligament suffixed, or placed after whichever of the two words comes first in the sentence. According as the first of these, whetber th e substantive or the qualifying word, ends in n, one or two different vowels, or a consonant (n excepted), the ligament employed should be g, ng, or na, respectively. Examples: batang malicot, or, malicot na vata, "mtughty boy;" itong is(t, "this other;" tyung dalaultn,q libro, "those two books;' ianong taltrlf, "what person?; " /irao na mai!llao "clear day'. (l)

But, cundi.

THE

TAGALOG

LANGUAGE,

'The subject, be it a noun or a pronoun, of an active arfirmativ~ sentence should be linked to the verb by means of ay,i, when the subject precedes the verb, but not when this order is inverted, Examples: .AeD,i, pUlIgmapasoe, pungmapasoe aeo, " I enter"; ang ibo,i, hungmuhuni, hungmuhuni ang ivon, " the bird sings", Two clauses having mutnal connection aconld likewise be linked by ay-i, Example: C!t1~ dumating si Pedro ay umalts ea, "if Peter arrives, go away ". A clause serving as subject of an active affirmative sentence should be linked to th e verb in the same way, when such clause precedes the verb, but, ordinarily, not when this order is inverted, as: ang pa9-ipig sa Dios ay naeapagpm'i sa tau D, or naeapagpupul-i sa tauD ang pag ,ibi,q sa D ios, " to love God ennobles man " or, "it ennobles man to love God". However, the ligament may be preserved even when the subj ect fo llows the verb, when for the sake of greater emphasis, the verb is preceded by a relative pronoun, or used, in Tagalog, in the participial sense, as: ang naeapagpuri sa tauD ay ang pag-i big sa Dios, "what ennobles man is to love God", In compound active sentences the principal and the secondar,V sentence a re linked to each oth er by means of at-t, when a conjunction of cause is used, as: hindi aeD nacababasa, sa lJagca,t, ua/a acOng salamin , "I cannot read, because I have no spectacles '. When an -nterrogative word is used to start a sentence, the verbal ligament is replaced by the nominal one, which , in this case, stan ds for the article or the relative Rronoun, as: i,sinong nagnaeao~, "who stole?;" i, anong abi mo? " what do you say? 'j literally, "wbo is he who stole, " " what is that which you say?;" it being indifferent to say sino ng or sino ang nagnaeao?, anong or ana ang sabi mO!! j The latter forms are however preferable," as being both more idiomatic and more empathic, The liga ments are not generally nsed before monosyllabic words or expletive particles, nor before the particles serving to establish the relation of case, for example; damit sa {wao arao, " daily wearing apparel " lalaqui man, babaye man, " be it mau or woman " j ang ealoualhati an 0 gloria baga, "bliss, that is to say, glory 'j i tD ,i, cana=quma Ped1'O, "this is for Peter and his family ', The ligament is also dropped before the possessive pronouns if put after th e nouns they qualify, as, salapi niya" eaniyang salapij "his or her money". The numeral adj ectives drop the ligament when they come before the restri ctive prefix ea, as in apat eatauo, "foul' persons onlY"j No ligament is used between the subject and the verb if the form er is prec('ded by some negative or prohibitive particle, for instance: Di aeo eungeumaeain, "I do not eat"; houag lumaead, "don 't walk " houag sabihin, (1) "don 't say if '; hindi eami magnanaeao, "we are not thieves, " The verbal ligament may also be dropped for euphony'S sake if tbe word serving as the subject ends in i, Ex,: .Ang pantali napatidj "the tying-rope parted". We have said elsewhere that the a of ay and at may be dropped when coming after word, ending in a vowel, and that if (1) If however hfma,9 is followed by the pronoun, the ligament ph ,uld be ueed, Ex,; hQuag cang IUlficicad, "don't walk"; hotl~g mOllg 8a~ihi", "do not 811Y it,"

THE LIGAMENTS, AND THE RElIDERING OF TilE VERB "TO BE ."

they end in n, both the 11 and the a may be dropped .,!,,'fhis is not generally the case when at and ay are followed by a monosylltlbic word as, for instance, in sa cagalingan at sa cabanalan, " for goodness a nd virtue ; ang caloloua, ay sa Dios, " the soul is for God' . The preceding rema rks refer to ligaments considered as euphonic characters; but they may, too, stand for the substantive verb and for the relative " that" and "which" and can not then be dropped. For the rendering of the verb "to be" into 'l'tlgalog, the student will do well first to pay close attenti on so the following expressions: Na. (and a name of place in the local abl. case). (d d b f I ) a. an an aver 0 pace Na cay. (anda name of person): Na CaDll=qulUa. (and a collective personal name). Ay,i, nga, baga, g, ng, na. Sa bahay , na sa bahay. Sa simbahan, na sa simbahan. J Sa escuell! (Sp.) or escuelahan , na sa / escuela.

路 t (. th T o b e a,t t 0 be IU , e c.. IU e sense of to dwell, to resid e, to live at to find one's self at). ,

To be. (copulative verb). At home, to be at home church At church,,, school At school, "

Here. Dinl, d:tb. There. 1\ indicating a place near the I Diyan f . person spoken to. Th I indicating a place far away f D6 ere. 路/ from both interlocutors. on . To be here. To be there. (yonder). To be there. (far away). Where.?

路 ) I IS

Where

are

he? she? it? tbey?

'Where is my eldest hrother.? He is at home.

Narin l, naritb. Narivan. Nar6on. lSaan?

I \ lNasaan?, (,saan nar60n.? c,Naslian baga si coya?, or, ang coya co? Na sa bahay slya. I Siya,i, na sa bahay. (,Saan nar60n ang ina mo.? Na cay Enrique siy6.. Na sa simbahan siya. Na cana Docot. l ala sa. Nanay, nanay, inang. (colloquial) . Tata, tatay, tatay. (colloquial). Gleao baga.? Abaal, ieao nga; icao nga pala.

Where is your mother.? She is with Henry. She is at church She is at Docot's family . Not to be at. Mamma. Papa. Is it you.? Ohl yes, it is you. Is your papa at the farm . (or CODn- j . try)? I c, Na sa bUqUld bpga ang tatay mo.?

No, Sir, he is not at the farm, be .1 Di po, uala siyn sa buquid, na sa is in the forest. I gubat siya.

TilE

TAGALOG

LANGOAGE

"To be", whenever it asserts presence, is rendered by na and a nonn of place in the local ablative cnse, or by prefixing na to any word demonstrative in character, as seen in na sa bithay, nal'ito.

Guiut6. Pilac. Patalim. Bacal. Cahoy or cahuy. B6bog. Bulac. Singsing, Panulat, (Tag.); pluma (Sp .) \ Ang ama co,i , mabutL My father is good. 'I Mabutl ang ama co, (better), ang aquing . am a,i, mabutl. ,I Aug aquing capntid na babaye ay My sister is beautiful. I maganda. Is his brother bad, wicked. Gr- [asama baga ang caniylmg capatid? His brother is bad, but mine i good. Ang capatid niya,i, masama; nguni ,t, j ang aqui,i, mabait. (judicious). Is their ring a gold one? GGuint6 baga ang canilang singsing ? Yes, their ring is a gold one, 00, ang singsing nila,i, guiut6. Gold. Silver .Steel. Iron. Wood, lumber. Cllrystal, glass, (m atter). Cotton . Ring. Pen.

Whenever .. 0 be" is the (lopula and has no other value than to assert some attribute of the noun, it is not translated in Tagalog by any specific word, b~t the meaning m y be conveyed in several ways. If a noun or an adJective is used as the predicate of another noun or of a pronoun, it is enough to iu er U!J i between them to indicate the copula: ang amit C9,i, mabait "my father is prudent", As ay-i is not, generally, used, in interrogative sentences when the subject comes after the verb, the copula is then expressed by some expletive O( completive particle; Gguinto baga iy{mg singsing? "is that a gold ring? " Sometimes the ligaments or the arrangement of words serve to express tl1e same relation of copula, as when a relative pronoun is understood. For instance: ang banal na tauo, "the virtuous man" , ('1', "the man that is virtuous".

FOURTH EXERCISE. 'Vh re is your father? My father is at home. 'Where is my brother s son? He is at church. Wh ero is their daughter? Their daughter is at cblll'ch Where is OUl' son? Our son, is at school. Is the cbild here? No, the child is not here, be is in the country. Are your sister s children there. (yoneler)? My sister's cbildren are not tbere, (yonder.), Where are they? They are at home. Is it he? It is ne. Is it you? (plural). It is not we.. Are my mother's hrothers there? My mother's brothers are not there, th ey are at Juhn 's. Is the mountain over th ere? Yes, it is over there. Is YOlll' ring a gold one? No, it is a silver one. Is your table a wood one? No, my table is a glass one. Have your bishops any iron rings? No, they have no iron rings; they have ~ome gold rings. '

DEMONSTRATl\'E PRONOUNS.

FIFTH LESSON.

YCALIMANG PAGARAL.

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.

Declensions are hereafter given of all the Tagalog demonstrative pronouns. They cau be used both adjectively aud substantively: when used adjectively they geuerally precede the uouu. Declensions.

This. Yad, yeri. Of this. Diul sa, nirt To, 01', for this. Diul sa. Dat. This. Diul sa, uid. Acc. Object. Ilocat. and At, iu ,. upon, t Dinl sa etc., thIs. f Abl. causat. instrum - By, wi.th, I Niri. r etc., thIs. ental.

Nom. Poss.

NEAR.

That. Of that.

Nom . Poss.

Nito. FAR.

Yaon.

You.

sa,} N' . I Diyan sa, Doou niyaou. Iy oon. I niyan.

To, 01', for that. Diyan sa, That. { D.iyan sa, Acc. l1Jyan. locat. and In, at, upon, I N' . that. \ Iyan sa. etc., Abl. \ causat. { instrum- By, with, I Niyau . ental. \ etc., that. Dat.

Object.

l yan.

Ito. Ditb sa, nito . Dito sa. Ditb sa, nito. Dito sa.

Doou sa. Niyoou. D60n sa, Niyoon, 01', uiyaon. niyoou. Doonsa. N' '6 J Niy60u, 01', I) a u. I niy6n.

In the possessive aud direct object cases the particle sa, which precedes nouus and other determiuative words, fol lows the demons路 trative pronouus, th e reason being that it refers to th e thiug poiuted oui aud not to the pronoun. The possesssive with sa should be used in answering a questiou, as: Acanino bagd, itong sapatos?, "whose shoes are these;? dito sa bata, "this boy 's." The two forms of the possessive case should be used in the way and iu the cases already explaiued for those of the perFoual pronouns.

This person. Itong taub, Hbng tauong itb. (emphatic). Of that child that child's. { Niyan g bR;ta, niyaug bataug iyau, diyan sa , batang Iyan. (emph.) To, 01', for that bishop. { Doon sa obispo, J 60n sa obispong ya6n. (emph.) These men (persous). { Itbng manga tauo, ang manga taubng ito. . !tong manga taubng itb. (emph.). J Diyan sa manga asong carne. TllQee dogs' meat. I Ang carne niY!lllg manga aso, fi

Trm

'{'AGALOG

LA NGUAGE.

I 'ld

\ D60n sa manga batao 0, 0'" or ose el l ren " 1 D60n sa manga batang ya6n. Th b k (b ' t) \ Niya6n manga libro. ose 00 S. 0 Jec . '1 Niya6n manga librong ya6n.

It will be well to note the inflective character of the declension of Taga log demonstrative pronouns, which canses the relation of case to be expressed by the pronoun if it comes before the noun, and by the latter if the pronoun comes after. Thus, " that boy's book, " is translated: ang lib,'o niywng bata, or, ang libro nang batang iyan . Guiniiean. \ Sinulid. (r00t.word, stili,', "to spin"; Thread. I sinttlid, "spun"). M edias. (Sp.) (plural). Stocking. Calahati. Half. Fork. T enedor. (Sp.) ,Balat, (Tag.); cum-o). (Sp.) Leather. f Sapin, (Tag.); sapatos. (eorr. of Sp. Shoe, boot. i w. zapato). ' Wool, down. Balahibo, (Tag.); lana. (Sp.) J Sinlas. (corr. of Sp. W . Ginta); ga/on Ribbon. t (Sp .). ) Ang lupa, ang sangcalupaan, sangThe Earth. (the I daagdigan. Earth. (matter). Lupa. Catl, eati han. Land, beach. Gun. Baril. Anom an; balang na ... Something, anything; any. I c',Mayr60n cang anoman? H ave you anything. '1c',May anoman ea? May'r60n, mayr60ng anomaq ac6. I have something. Nothing, not Auything. Uala. I have nothing. Uala ac6ng anoman. Ang cayo. The clotb. Saban. (corr. of Sp. word, jauon). Soap , J GAno baga ang na sa iyo ? What (what thing) have yon? 1 Anong mayroon ca? Ang iyong plumang patalim, or asero I have yonr steel pen . { (Sp. acero) ang na sa aqulll. Wbat (indet.) have you.? GAnong mayr60n ca? I bave some bread. May tim\pay ac6. Wine, any kind of liquor. Al ac. Uoffee. Cafe . (Sp.), cape. (corr. of Sp. co/el . T ea. Sa. (Cbinese). Cheese. (Juiso. (corr. of Sp. word queso). \ Ang aquing candelero. (Sp .) My e!lt;tc1le~lick. ( Ang eandelero co. (Tag.); sasangan. String. L1ibid, hlbir, tali, pisi. Tying-string. Panali. (root-word, tali, " tying '); pan tali. Something, anything good. Anoman mabutl. This. Yari, yeri, ito. That. (thab near you.) lyan, yan. That. (far from the interlocutors.) Ya6n, yon . Straw .

DEMONSTRATI VE PRONO UNS.

This book. That table. (neal' yo u). That church. (far away). The neighbour. Neighbours. Crown . Palace.

libro, yarlng li brong yari, itbng libro, itbng librong itb. l Yadng Tyang lamesa, iyang lamesang iyan. \ Yaong simbahan, ya6ng simbahang ( ya6n. Ang caapidbahay. (1) Magcaapidbahay. (two). P6tong, or, ptitong. Falasio. (corr. of Sp. word palacio).

The particle in prefixed to a root beginning with a vowel or inserted between the first consonant and vowel of those beginniug with a consonant, or consonants, forms a new word, which may be considered as a sub.tantive participle, indicative of tbe result of the action. Tbus, from sulid, "to spin"; sinulid, "wbat has been spun" ; "the thread ". Sang is a collective particle wbi ch if prefixed to a root indi路 cative of a divisible thing, expresses, with the suffix an, the whole contents thereof. 'rhus, from ll,lpa, "earth"; sangcalupaan, "the world" "all the inhabitants tbereof.' When may is used for "to haye", it must be followed by the thing possessed. " No," in ~e ponse to a question with the verb "to have" is generall y tran~lated hy tlal{I; in response to other questions, h indi is generally used. F an, prefixed t a root indicating a mauual action, forms the instrum ent which serv s to execute it. Thus, from sillat, "to write;" panic/at "pen;" tali, "to tie;" pallali "tyiJ;lg-rope." The change of sand t into n will he explained in further lessons. As to the ahove demonstrative pronouns, yal'i=ye1"i and ito stand for "this; " yal'i=yeri being less in use than i to. lyan, yaonyon, stand for " th at; " vyan, pointing out a thing near the person addressed, and yaan路yon pointing out objects far away from both inter路 locutors. They are made plural either by introducing manga between them and the noun , or by placing th em inmmediately after the noun, at the end of the phrase, with manga, of course, preceding; as seen in: Hong 1'Ila1lga tauo, and, ang manga tauol1g ito, "these people." 'ra路 galog em ploys the repetition of the demonstrative pronouns in thE) nominative after the noun to render them emphatic. Oa is one of the most imporLant prefix particles and is used in several ways. When ca is prefixed to noUDS or verbs denoting, respectively, persons, or collective reciprocal actions, it indicates one of the corresponding parties. If the compound so formed is prefixed by mag, it becomes then plural without requiring the employment of manga, which can, however, be used, and indicates two, at least, of the parties, as seen in magcaapidMhay .

FIF'l'H EXERCISE. Have you my gold ribb on.? I have it not. Have you anything.? I have nothing. Have you my steel ,Pen.? I have it not. Whi ch pen (I ). A compJund of apir, "lO join"; btillay, "hou.e'; and ca, particle indicating cOlDplnionenip and rejtrictinl( the senss to ons alone of the corresponding partiee.

TH E

T AGALOG L ANG UAGE .

have you.? I h ave my good silver pen. What have you.? I have nothing. H ave you my steel or my sil ver pen.? I have your steel pen . Have you my soap.? I have it not. H ave you my candlestick.? I have it not. 'Nhich candlestick have yo u.? I have my gold candle· stick. Have you my string.? I have it not. H ave yo u my good wine.? I have it not. Have you th at book.? I have it not. Have you that meat.? I have it. Have you anything good.? I have nothing good. What have you pretty.? I have the pretty gold ribb on. Have you any· thing ugly.? 1 have nothing ugly; I have someting fin e. What have you fine? I have the fine dog. H ave you your glass pen.? I have it not; I have your fork. H as he· this or tbat crown.? He has this, he has not that. Have my sisters the clothes of these chil{!ren.? They have not these chi ldren 's clothes, they have th ose of their brothers Is that pen for that man.? That pen is not for that man, it is for those women.

SIXTH LESSON.

YCAANIM NA PAGARAL.

INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.

Declensions a the Tagalog interrogative pronouns, i ano? "what. " 'which?"; ialin,? "which"?; (discri minative), and isino¥, " who"? follow. '1'be first two may be used as adjective,s and may be preceded by the article ang; sino, (1) can neither be used as an adjective nor expressed with the article. (2).

•

Nom . Pass. Object. (all its divisions).

What? Of what? , Vhat?

GAno? lang ano? GSa ano?, .. .. c:8a ao o?

Nom. Pass. Object. (all its divisions)

Wh ich.? .Uf which? Which?

GAlin? Gang alin? GSa alin? ..... GSa aHn?

Nom . Pass. Objective. (all its divisions)

Who? Of whom, whose? Who m?

GSino? Geanino?, Gnino? GSa canino?

iSino? is exclusively used for persons and rejects the article. The form inino? of the possessive case is to be considered as but an aph. eresis of ieanino?, a shortening according to the fashion refe rred to in the second note to th e F irst Lessou. It should only be employed as an additional confir matory inquiry when the answer to the question origi nally put has not been hea rd or understood. Thus, sup passing th at an inquiry has been made to this effect: ieanino baga itong dami t?, (1) In a ll probability, Bino is but a contracted compound embodying the part· icle B; aDd the interrogative an", 8S iB likewise the C8se in Malay with apa, "what"; ,iiipa, C1whoH. (2) On the Bouthern boundarieB of Tllyeh8B Province, it iB not uucommOn to hear DativeB Bay: 8inotlg laud, thereby beBtowing upon BinD lin adjeoUva\ oharaoter.

lNRERROGATIVE

PRONOUNS.

" whose clothing is this?;" and that the answer, for instance, "that boy's" "diya'/t sa batang iyan, was uot und erstood, and that thereby a second inquiry, " whose?," "whose do you say", becomes necessary, this reasuranceseeking "whose " should be rendered by "nino? The plural is formed in various ways: the prououn is repeated, or the particle manga is inserted between the pronoun and the noun, or both the repetition and manga may be used, as illustrated hereafter: eSinosino?, esinong manga?, "sino·sino ang manga,? "who" (plural); ano·ano?, a1/bng manga,? "ano ana ang manga? "what;'? "alin-alin?, "aZing manga? "alin·aUn ang manga,? "which,?" "which ones? These pronouns, it may be said, find uo use for the accusative case, the Tligalog interrogative sentence eiiher carries along with it the verb "to be" understood, or is constructed in such a peculiar way as to require some of the other cases. "Sino·sino ya6ug tauo? Who (plural) are those { "Siuoug manga tauo ya6n? men? (people). "Canicaniuo (1) iyan manga singsing? Whose (plural) are those riugs? J "Sa canicanino baga ya6u manga samFor whom (plural) are those hats? 1 balilong ya6n? J "Ano auong singsiug na ito? What rin&s are these? 1 "Anong manga singsiug na ito? J "Alin-aling p!!.yong ang na sa i) o? Which umbrellas have you? (2) / "Aliug manga p!!.yong ang na sa iyo? Ang sa comersi~nte manga candelero ang na sa aqulD. I have the merchant's candlesticks. Aug m:mga candelero nang comersiante ang na sa aquin. "Sa aUn-aling manga bata itong manga pacong ito? For which children are these nails? "Sa alln~ mauga bata itong mauga pacong ito?

The poaessive case with sa should preferably be used in answering a question. _Alin, may serve for persons and things; ano, only for things.

Who are you? (sing.) Who are they? What do you want? (sing.) What are you doing here? What is his business here? What do you wish? I wish. You (sing.) wish.

"Sino ca? (baga). "Sino-sino (baga) sila? "Ano ca?, i,ano ca baga? J GAano ca dito,? "ano ca dito?, lnagI aano ca rito? lAano siy!!. d60n,? lnagaano siy!!. r60n? GAnong ibig mo? Ibig co. Ibig mo.

(I) It is a general rule tbat tbe reduplicatioos of syllables or words, wbich OCcnr so frequently in Tagaloll, do not pass beyond, respectively, tbe second letter or second syllable thereof. Tbus, canicanino, instead of eaninocanino, since canino ie three· syllable. • (2) Altbougb the Eoglisb interrogative obtains here in the accusative, ita Tagalog counterpart fails to agree witb it; "to have", botb in tbe determinate and indeterminate seoses, as already said, requiring in TagAlog to be conslructed bet. weell two Ilomillatives.

•

THE

TAGALOG

He or she wishes. We wish. You (plural) wish. '1.'hey wish.

LANGUAGE .

Ibig Ibig Thig Ibig

niya. natin, ibig namin. ninye. nila.

Ibig, in this sense, is a passive and invariable verb for tei "wish", " to desire." Natives avoid using the third person prououns in reference to thin gs. They generally repeat the noun or try to construct in such' ~ manner as to render it unnecessary to use the pronoun. Exa.mples~ Gmaoutt baga ung libro?, "is the book good?;" mabutl nga, "it is good ," '.'certainly, it is;" instead of mabuU . siya. .

~ ~

Ang mapagcalacal, mangangalacal. (from caltical. "merchandise"); ang comersia1lte. (Sp. comerciante) . , Aug taga Pransia, ang pranses. (corr. The Frenchman . of the Sp. words Francia and frances. ) . Payong. Umbrella ~ Panbucas nang prougo, (Tag ); tirabusbn. Cork-screw. /' (COI'l'. of the Sp. word tirabuzon.) Anloague. Paco. Carpenter. Nail. (ir n spike). Pam cpoc. (root, pocpoc, "to strike")~ Hammer. S erb s.a. (corr. of the Sp. word cervezaJ Beer. Ti'flta . (Sp.). Polot, pulut. I nk H oney. Tougcod, tungco or tungcor. Walking stick. D edal. (Sp.). Carayom. Thimble. Needl e. P{n. Aspiler. (corr. of the Sp. word alfiler). Orasan (corr. of the Sp . word horas, and a.n to denote the place where Watch. hours are mark路ed.) . . \ Aug ingles, (Sp.); 路 ang taga Inglate路 The Englishman. I ?Ta. (Sp.) . 2~t1Ja . (co.rr. of the Sp. topar, "to but. ") Sheep, ram. Laman nang topa. Mutton . Mantica. (COLT. of:theSp. word manteca.). Butter, lard . Button. Boton, (Span ish) 01', bitones. C6mot. Bed路sheet, quilt. Man. (always postponed). Hindi man ..... hindi man, 01', hindi rin. Neithel' ...... nor. Hindi... ...... hindi naman. ) Ac6 man, icao man. Neither I nor you . I Hindi man ac6, icao ay tiindi rin . . Have you the needle or the pin .? \ <',Na sa iye baga ang carayom 6 ang / !lspiler? I have neither the needle nor the UaJa sa aquin aug carD-yom man , ang pin. ( aspiler mario Who!? (sing.). <',Sino,? <',sino baga? ) <',Sinong mayr60n,? <',sino ang may' Who has? (indet.). I r60n,? <',sinong may? Who has? (det.). <',Na sa canino? (baga). Hac. (Tag.); cuchiyo. (8p.). l(uiie, cutlass. The merchaut, t!J,e trad esman.

INTERROGATTVE

"-ho has any knife?

PRO 'OUNS.

\ <.Sino caya ang may itac?

1<.Sinong mayr60u itac?

<.Na sa cauino ang itac? Ang tauo ay may itac? Na sa taub aug itac. S6pot=supot. <.Na sa canino ang supot ? Ang supot ay na sa babaye. <.Na sa caniuo baga? (ang suput). Na cay Pedro,t, cay Juan . ,ang suput). 0, (S(; cun. (Tag 1. (little used). MagUln .......... magUln. Man .... .... man. Maguin sa gabl maguin sa arao. Maguin sa bahay maguin sa simbahan. \ Lalaqui man, babaye man; maguing Be it man or woman. I lalaqui, maguing babaye. What countryman are you? I <.Taga saan ca? (baga). What is your country? \ My country is Spain. Oastila ac6; ac6,i, castila. I am a Spaniard. Taga Espalla ac6; ac6 'i, taga Espalla. S . d \ Epal1ol, (Sp.); castila. (corr. of the Sp. I word Gastilla) palllar . Of what country are those people? \ (,'fa ga s~an caya ya6n manga taubng I ya6n .. Those people are Ohinese. Ya6ng manga taub ay mAnga insic Those people's country i Ohina \ Ya6ug manga tau6ug ya6,i, taga i::)ong. song. Vaso. (Sp.). Glass. (tumbler). Rice. Bigas. Ganta.{ a measure about 1/25 of the lSI Peck. English bushel. \ a op. My house is a nipa house. Ang aqning bahay ay pauid .

Who has the knife? Tbe man has a knife. The man has the knife. Purse. Who has the purse? The woman has the purse. " ho has it? Peter aud John have it. Or. Either ......... or. Be it .......... or. Either by night or by day. Either at home or at church.

The particle mapag, prefh:ed to verbal or substantive roots, forms the frequentative noun for whatever the root means. Man, und er the same conditions, forms a verbal noun indicative of what a person is engaged in customarily . .Taga, placed before . suan or before the name of a place 01' country denotes origin . An, affixed to a root, denotes place, or the thiug or person on which or on whom the action is eccomplished. The custom exists in certain localities amoug natives to represent the active subject again at the end of the sentence by the third person pronouu . Ang tauo ay may itac siyel, " the man he has a knife;" yaong manga tauong yao,i. manga insic situ, "those people they are Ohinese." Tile student is hereby cautioned against this manner of expression which, although uot entirely ungrammatical, should be used sparingly. Wood house. Gold ring. Steel pen.

Ballay na cahoy. ::iingsing na guint6. Plumang patalim, as(!)路o. (Sp. acero).

路 l

word

THE

T AGA LOG

L ANGUAG E

Compound Euglish nonns oue or which expresses the matter a thing is made of, are generally expressed in Tagalog by means of the ligaments, the noun expressive of tbe thing preced ing that of the matter, as seen above. One glass of water. Two gantas of rice.

Isang vasong tubig. Dalauang salop na bigas.

The relation between the vessel and the contents is likewise ex路 pressed by the linking particles. Clothing for children . Writing路table.

Damit sa manga batao Lamesang qniuasusulatan, lamesa sa { pagsulat.

Compound nOUl:lS, one member of which denotes the use for which tbe other is intended, are generally formed by inserting the particle sa, which is also used as a trasJation of the English preposition "for".

SIXTH EXERCISE Has the king the glass or the steel pen? The king has neither the glass nOli the steel pen. Which pen has tbe bisbop? Have you the stocking? I have The bishop has the fine pen. neither t he stocking nor the pin. Has the Englishman the corkscrew? The Englisbman has neither the cork-screw nor the needle. Is the merchant here? No, he is not here. Has the Frenchman my umbrella? He has not your umbrella. Is the cork-screw on the table? The carpenter has it. Who has the hammer? '],he carpenter has neither the ham mer nor the nail. Which merchant has any beer? The merchant of my town has two glasses of beer. Whose ink is that? It is my brother's. What honey have the Englishmen? The Englishmen have some good honey. Which My mother's daughter walking-stick has your mother's daughter? bas no walking路stick at all, she bas her thimble, ber needle, ber pin and my watch. Are there any sh~ep in Spain? Yes, there are some. Is mutton good? It is very good. Who has my mother's bed- sheets? Peter has them. Is my knife made of iron? No, it is made of steeL For which person is that purse? That purse is for my sisters. Are you Spaniards? Yes, we are Spaniards. Who have my rice? Is that ganta yours or my son's? Tbat The Englishmen have it ganta is neither yours nor my son's. Where is John? John is not bere, be is either at church or at school. Is he not at home? He is at home. What is yonr (pl.) country? Our country is France. What countrymen are those people? They are frOID this country. Tbis house is Are those people Cbinese? They are not Chinese. not a wood house. Those looking-glasses are not silver. These rings are not gold. What are you, gentlemen? We are carpenters.

PERSON AL AND P OSS ESSIVE PRONOUNS.

SEVENTH LESSON.

YCAPITONG PAGARAL.

PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.

Declensions are given hereafter of all the Tagalog personal pronouns from which the possessives are derived. That of the fi rst person has three forms in the plural: tayo, cami, ql,itli=cata, " we." Tayo is used when the person addressed is inten ded to be included, and is therefore the only pronoun to be used wi th the first person plural of the imperative. Gami, on th e contrary, li ke the royal "WE" in English, excludes the person addressed, an d is therefore the correct pronoun to use in prayers addressed to the Deity. (Juita=cala, is very little used in the nominative case; it is rath er dual and partakes of the possessive case. These pronoun s affo rd the only distinction in number which exists in Tagalog, the sort of plural for med. as already indicated, by reduplication, excepted. DeclensIon of the personal pronouns. FIRST

PERSON .

SING ULAR.

Nom. Poss. Object.

I. Of me. Me. (all div. of the object.).

Nom. Poss. Object.

Thou. Of thee. Thee.

Ac6. Aquin, (prep.); co, (postp .). Sa aquin.

SECOND

P ERSON.

You. Of you. You. (all div. of the obj .). THIRD

Iclio, (prep.); ca, (post.). I yl>, (p rep.); mo, (postp.). Sa iyo.

PE RSON .

Nom.

He, sbe, it. (i). Siyli. (1). P~ Of him, of her, of it. Caniylt, (prep.); niylt, (postp.). Object. Him, her, it. (all div. of the object.) Sa caniylt. FIRST

PERSON.

PL URAL . GENERAL

Nom. Poss. Object.

PLURAL.

(both the speakers and ~ the persons spoken to in· Tayo. cluded.) Of us. (of all of us). Atin, (prep.); natin, (postp.). Us . (all div. of the objed .) Sa atin.

We.

(1) Siya, "it;" is not geoerally applied to inanimate tbings, un Ie •• the latter be personified as i. sometime. tbe case in fables, pro,·erb., etc ..

THE

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

RESTRICTIVE

om. Poss. Object.

PLURAL.

{We. (th e persons spoken to not I ' \ CalIll. included). Of us. Amin, (prep.); namin, (postp.). Us. (all div. of the object.). Sa amino DUAL.

Nom. Poss. Object.

We. (tbou and I alone). Of us. Us. (all div. of tbe objl3ct.).

Quita. Canita, (prep.); ta, (postp). Sa canita.

ANOTHER

Nom. Poss. Object.

DUAL.

We. Of us. Us. (all div. of the object.).

Cata. Ata, (prep.); ta, (postp.). Sa ata.

SECOND PERSON.

Nom. Poss. Object.

You. 路(ye). Of you. You. (all div. of the object.). THIRD

Cay6. Inyo, (prep.); ninyo, (postp.). Sa inyo. PERSON.

Nom. They. Of them. Poss. Object. Them. (all dif. of the object.).

Sila. Cani la, (p rep.); nila, (postp.) . Sa canila .

P erso nal pronouns, like possessive pronouns, have two forms in th e possessive case. Aquin, i yo, caniya, amin, canita, inyo, canilet, are prepositive, that is to say, precede tbe noun, and the verb when the latter obtains in any of the various passive forms; co, mo, n1AJa, natin, namin, ninyo, ta, nile/' and the conelative quitti (as dual) follow it. The nominative ca is likewise put after the verb in active affirmative sentences. 'fhe two forms quita and ca/ti are used indiscriminately. If, however, an adverb, especially a negative or prohibitive particle, is u sed to start a sentence, wbether declarative or interrogative, the above postpositive forms of these pronouns take their place before th e noun or the verb. Sufficient illustrations follow to acquaint the stud(;mt with this p eculiarity. This is not my property. 路 Do not kill it. He did not say so. H e is not our father. Do not do it. (plural). They did not co mpose the book. Do not go there. (siug.) She is not my moth er. Are they not your relatives? When will yo u (sing.) come here? Where didst thon run? Sit dowp here.

Hindi co ari ito. Houag mong patayin. Hindi niya sinabl.

Hindi

{nati~ } ama siya. namlD

Houag ninyong gaoin. Di nila quinathll. ang libro. Houag cang par60n. Hiudi co ina siya. (,Hindi ninyo baga canaganac sila? (,Cailan ca paririto? (,Saan ca baga nacatacbo? Dito ca umop6.

PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.

Sometimes, too, the postpositive forms are, for the sake of euphony, placed before the pronoun , especially so when the latter is immediately preceded by an adjective, as, for instance, in: ang mastpag natin caoabayan si Guin60ng Manalo , "our industrious fellow countryÂˇ man Mr. Manalo. " As already stated, the Tagalog possessive adjective pronouns and the possessive case of the personal ones are alike, the former preserving, with regard to the noun, tbe same position the latter keep with A.ng aql~ing Mhay=ang btihay co, "my house;" regard to the verb. aquing ibinigay=ioinigay co, " I gave it." Unlike their English equ ival ents, they are preceded by the article of common nouns and declined The same restrictive and dual and made plural in a similar way. senses existing for amin, atin, canitel, and namin, natin, ta, as personal pronouns, exist too for them when employed as possessives. Thus, from the expresion: nacadating na ang ating amel , "our father has already arrived;" used by any of two boys spenking to each other, we may conclude that both interlocutors are brotb&rs. Compare further in the Lord's prayer the rendering of the phrase: " Our Father who art in Heaven," amit naming stt)lgmasalangit ca; where the use of 'latin would seem to be basphemy. Our children. (one of the parents } Ang atin man~a anac. IS speaking to the 'other.) Do. (speaking to strang rs.) Ang aming manga anac. My hands .

(Ang aquing manga camay. manga eamay co.

1 Ang

Your (sing.) fingers.

~ AAnngg iyong man ga daliri. l manga daliri mo.

His or her eyes.

{ Ang caniyang man ga mata. Ang manga mata niya.

Our sister. (brothers or sisters speak- 1Ang ating capatid na baba\le. J J ing to each other.) Do. (peaking to strangers.) Ang aming capatid na babaye. Your (plur.) silk clothes.

{Aug iuyong dam it na suUB.. Ang damit ninyoug suLia.

Their knives.

{Ang canilang mBnga itac. Ang manga itac nila.

The possessive absolute pronouns are expressed by the prepositive forms of the possessive case preceded by- the article. Mine. â€˘ Yours, thine. His, hers, its. Ours. Yours. (of both of you.) Theirs. )

{I'I".I

Ang Ang Ang Ang Ang Ang

aquin . iye. caniya. amin, ang atin. inyo. canilll.

The dative case with the article is also used for this purpose. Thus, any sa canil(" may be employed for "theirs; " etc ..

THE

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

Girl, maid, lass. Youngman, bachelor, lad. Tailor. Bakel'. Silk. Gown .

Dalaga.. Binata, bagong tauO. Manananahe, (Tag.); sa.9tre, (Sp). Panadel'o, (Sp.); magtitinapay. (Tag). Sutia, (Tag.); seda, (Sp.). Quim6n, (Tag.); batao (Sp.). 1 Sisiu, man6c na sisiu; poyo. (corr. of Chicken. 1 Sp. word pollo) Pencil. Lapis. (corr. of Sp word, lapiz) . Friend. Caibigan, catoto. Intimate friend. Key. Cas\. Susl. Sicolate. (corl'. of Sp. word chocolate) Chocolate. Trunk, chest. Oaban. Bayong, bacol, batolan. Bag, sack, basket. Lady, younglady, mistress. Maguinoo, guin06ng babaye. Bote. (corr. of Sp. word, botella) Bottle. Pea ant, countryman. Magsasaca, magbubuqilir. Servant. Alila, lingcod. Kinsman, relation. Camaganac, hinlog. There, thither. D60n. Par60n. (active and passive.) (1). To go there, thither. U=opo (root); umup6. (active.) To sit down. Saying, to say, to tell. (something). Sabl (root), magsabl; sabihin, (passive). Talk to speak t' "" t t l Osap (r?ot); mang6sap. (active). Cain, , , ea 105 , 0 ea . cumam. Oiea (root), magiiiea (act.), salita. To speak, to pronounce; vocable. Sowing, to scatter se ds. Sab g, magsabog. To 'do, to make. (sometb,ing). G~~~m).oot); gaoi~ . (contracted pass.

To go to the farm.

Pasabuquid, mapasabuquid.

If pa is prefixed to an ad verb of place, the verb of motion in the direction indicated by the adverb is formed; when prefixed to a noun of place, sa should be inserted between, that the verb of motion towards such a place may thus be formed, as seen in: pal'oon, pasabiUJ.uid.

Reference has been made elsewhere to the existence of verbal primitives or roots possessing of verbal force, and it will be well to say here that they are fewer in number than those considered to be of a substantive or and adjectival character, and that verbs in Taga· log are mostly formed from nouns, from adjectives, and from any other parts of speech. A verbal root expresses a state or condition of being and sometimes, too, it denotes that a subject is put in such state, thus corresponding to the passive sense The notion of being, or action, as contained in the root, is vague; but a notion of a more distinctive character, as well as the accessory ideas of tense, mood, voice. etc. are dependent on the application of certain particles. Coming now back to the preceding examples in the vocabulary. it is true that some notion of "sitting •. "saying." "conversing,' etc. is cont· ained respectively, in the roots upo. saM. osap. etc., and that the same may, under certain circumtances 01' in incorrect speech. be expressed by the simple root; but only when they appear in the form of urnopo. magsabi . mangosap. etc .• have they acquired a definite verbal character. (1) In Tagalog intransitive as well as passive form.

transitive verbs may assume a

PFRSONAL AND POSSESSI VE P RONOUNS .

Peter is writing. Si Pedro,i, sungmusulat. Th~~~ seats (chairs) were made by { Itbng manga upoa, i, guinaua co. Let John sit down there. Umop6 diyan si Juan. .. b' Buy me this trunk. (In Tagalog I B'lh let this trunk be bought) . r I in mo sa aquID ltbng ca ang ltb. BU(':f (folr)t mte tbhat Silkht)gOwn. I Ibill mo ac6 niyang quim6ng sutIa. r rago e e c. e boug . The servants are eating mangoes. J Ang manga alila,i, cungmacain nang I manga. The farm ers are sowing rice. J Ang magbubuquir ay nagsasabog nang 1 palay. The subject, be it a noun or pronoun, of an active sentence is put in the nominative case: if the Tagalog sentence is a passive one, the agent should be put in tile possessi ve case. What else should I say? He and 1. (both of us). You (sing.) and Joiln. (both of you). He and their mother. (both of them). You (sing.) and they. He and his master. Jesus and His mother, Alfred aud his children.

lAno pa ang sucat cong sabihin? Cami niya. Cayo ui Juan. Sila nang canillmg ina. Oayo nila. Sila nang caniyang pangin60n. Mag-ina ni Jesus. Si Alfredo nang caniyang manga anac.

When two personal pronouns or a ronoun and a noun join in an active sentence, th e 1?ersonal pronoun, e it singular or plural, may be put in the nominative case and in toe plural, and thE' noun or the other pronoun in the possessive case of the proper number. The orderly arrangement of first, second and hird person should be kept, Ill! it would be a fault to say: silt'!, mo instead of cayb niyii, to indicate ' "he and you." The same peculiarity exists when a collective or companionship noun formed with mag is coupled to a personal name, mag being always associated with the noun of the principal corresponding party. These forms of. construction peculiar to Tagalog are, however, obsolescent and are being replaced by the more natural ones of the Western languages. From the demonstrative pronouns, the following largely used ad路 verbs of place are derived: Here. Here.

(indicating a place very I D' 1 { near to th e speaker). \ ID . (indicating a place eq ui' l distant from both in ter路 Ditb. { locutors.).

(indicating a place nearer} to the person spoken to Diyan . { then to the speaker.) There { (indicating a place far I D6 . from both interlocutors). Ion. To come here. Parinl, pari tb. (motion to the place Where} To go there. { the p e r son addresse d Pariyan. stands}. ' Do do Vo . (to some far away ly . I P .' '. ing place.) \ aloon , There.

THE TAGALOG

LANG UAGE.

SEVENTH EXERCISE. Has this man the pencil? He has it not. Have I the choco路 late? You hav~ neither the chocolate nor the sugar. Has my friend your stick? He has not my stick, he has my umbrella. Is your house pretty? Our house is not pretty, but it is good. What is that you have in YOUl' hands? What I have iu my hands is a pencil What is that they have in their fingers? What they have in their fingers are rings. What have I on my eyes? It is spect路 acles that you have on your eyes. Have we a soul? All of us have a soul. Where is the girl? The girl is at home. Who is the father of this young mau? The father of the young man is the tailor. Who has the baker's silk? My sons have the baker's silk. Where are her chickens? Her chickens are at the farm. Who has our friends' pencils? Nobody. Are they our friends? They are our intimate friends. Who has my relative's chocolate? His friend has it in the trunk. Where is the lady's bag? The lady's bag is not here. Where is the chest-key? The peasant has it. What are those bottles made of? Those bottles are made of glass. Have you any male servant? I have no male servant, what I have are two female servants. Are your relations at church? No, my rela路 tions are not chupeh, they are in town. Where is the church? The church is on the mountain. Is that lady his mother? She is not We are good friends. Who his mother. Are we good friends? are your friends? I have no friends. Are John's relations your friends? They are my friends. Buy him (for him) this gown. What is my friend poing? He is conversing with your children . Who made these tables? (Trans. by whom etc.). The carpenter What is my sister made them. (Trans. they were made etc.). doing? Your sister is eating bread.

EIGHTH LESSON. YCAUALONG PAGARAL.. THE SUBSTANTIVE.

Substantives are either primitive or derivative, the former being those which in their 'original signification are substantives. A diffi路 culty which attends the classification of Tagalog words into various parts of speech, according to the system applied to European languages, consists in the number of words which, while yet unmodified by particles, are either verb or substantive, adjective or adverb, according to the context, or, more generally, according to parbicles which precede or are prefixed to them. The noun, as a rule, undergoes no change to denote number, gender or case, the latter being expressed, as in English, by preposi. tions. Those denoting a quality in abstract are mostly formed from primitive adjectives, by prefixing ca and suffixing an or han thereto; as, from banal, "virtuous;" cabanalan, "virtue;" from daquila. "great, " "Ilxoellentj" cadaquilaan, "greatness," "excellenoe; " bago, "new;" cavaguha11,

THE

SUBSTANTIVE.

"newness." Some roots as, for instance, climong, "wisdom;" bl,ti, "goodness;" al'ml, ':filthiness;" etc., are by themselves abstract; but how faintly this propedy is marked thereon is shown by their readiness to put on the helmet and buskin of the abstract compounds, and generally to come forth in the more complex array of camnungan, cabutihan and carumihan, without thereby however losing their character of true abstract nouns. The formation of nouns is sometimes attended with certai n changes, either in the particle or in the tirst syllable of the root, in order, as it would seem, to render the coalescence with the particle more agreeable to the ear Substantives in Tagalog are formed from all parts of speech, but especially from adjectives (adjectival or quality roots) and verbs. The present lesson is intended to illustrate some of the most usual ways to form nouns, and to indicate others which the learner is not yet in a position to understand well at this stage. Substantives used in a geaeral sense take the article in Tagalog. "Riches are mere vanity,' ang cayamana,i, ua/{mg caboluhan. Clean, pure; purity. New. Old, worn out. Crashed, broken into pieces. Entire. whole, sound_ Cat. Uncle. Aunt. White thing. White. (adj) Black thing. Black. (adj .) Great, large thing. Great, large, grown up. (adj.) Great, excellent, remarkable, cons路 picuous. Virtuous. Sound, health, kindness. Wisdom. Wise. (adj .). Whiteness. Blackness. Greatness, growth , bigness. Greatness, excellence. Virtue.

Malinis; calinisan. Bago, Luma. Jlasag. Bob. Pusa, 路Amain. Ali. Putl. (root). Maputi; Him. Maitim. Laqul. Malaqul. I D '1 \ aqUl a. Banal. Galing, cagalingan, Dunong, or, d6nong, carunungall. Marunong. Caputlan_ Caitiman. Oalaquihan. Oadaquilaan. Oabanalan .

Abstract nouns may be formed by prefixing ca and suffiixing an-han to the root. Divinity_ Manhood, humanity. Manhood, masculineness. Womanhood. Wisdom, learning. ability. essence.)

Pagcadios. Pagcatub. Pagcalalaqui. Pagcababaye_ (in} Pagcadunung.

The prefix pagca may likewise form abstract nouns, especially of common aod proper nouns or adjectival roo~s expressing attributes of mind, the nouns so formed partaking more or less of the verbal character.

THE TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

Accompanying, Embarking, Aiding, Quarrelling, Teaching, Like. Face,

companion. Sama, fellow路passenger. Sacay, assistant. Tulong, quarrelling-person, I Aua { enemy. I y, school路mate. Aral, similar, coequal Para, face-resembling I Muc-ha { person. t '

casama. casacay, catUiong.

!caauay. caara!. capara.

camuc-ha.

If ca is prefixed to a root denoting an idea of association, fellowship, reciprocity or likelihood, a verbal noun indicating one of the mutual parties is thus formed. If two of the mutual associated parties are to be meant, mag should be prefixed to the associative noun already formed, as shown in the following illustrations:

Two companions. Married couple. (husband and wife). Two brothers or sisters. Two brothers-in路law. Two sisters-in law. . Two friends.

Magcasama. Magasaua. Magcapatid. Magbayao. Maghipag. Magcaibigan .

IE three or more of the corresponding parties are to be expressed, and this kind of composition is resorted to. ca, then, should be repeated , if the noun is not dual in character, and the first syllable of the root if it is only fo~ ed with mag. Three Three Three Three

or or or or

more more more more

brothers or sisters. companions. brothers-in-law. married couples.

Magcacapatid. Magcacasama. Magbabayao. Magcaasaua.

In common nouns denoting ' correlation of consanguinity or mutual dependence, mag is prefixed to that of the priucipal correlative party to express his or her association with the secondary corresponding party. Father and son. Mother and daughter, Master and servant.

Magama. Mag-ina Magpangin60n.

If more than one of secondary associated parties are to be expressed, the first syllable of the principal one should be repeated.

Father and children. Mother and children .

Magaama. Mag-iina.

Mall is also prefixed to one .of the associated parties when it is coupled to a proper personal noun, but then the latter should be put in the possessive case.

Jesus and His mother. George and his son. Mary and her father.

Mag-ina ni Jesus. Mag-ama ni Jorge. Mag路ama ni Maria.

An-han, if suffixed to a substautive root indicative of a natnral produ'ct, th e noun of the place for such product to be found, is formed.

'rilE

Paddy, Cocoa-nut, l'ugar·cane, Plant, Stone,

Sl'BSTANTIVE .

Palay, rice field. cocoa-nut plantation . Niog, Tubb, sugar-plantation. Halaman . garden . Batb. quarry.

palayan. niogan . tubohan. hal amanan . batohan.

If ca is prefixed to these first deri\Tatives, the second derivative thus formed will be more collective. Rice-field. Tract abounding with. Planta.tion of I Do . do. plantam-trees. \

Palayan,

capalaya n.

Saguingan.

casaguingan.

The same suffix forms, wi th verbal roots, the place where the action is performed. Bath, Cell, Dancing,

bath·room . sleeping-chamber. . ball.

Paligo, Silid, 8ayno,

paliguan. siliran, or si lid . sayanan .

From verbal roots, too, nouns indicative of the instrument for the perfornance of the action are formet! by prefixing the particle' • pan. which generally becnmes pa be(ore U. ]1. s. t, and pang before a vowel. In roots the filst syllable of which begins with c or d, not only these consonants are droppod, but also the last letter of the the particle changes to ny. Striking, hammer. Writing, pen. Shaving, razor. Boring, auger. Tying, rope. Clinging to, hook

Pocpo , pamocpo(' Bulat, panulat. Ahit, pangahit. Bntas, pamutas. Tali , panali. Cauit, pangauit.

In a way peculiar to Tagalog. verbs in any tense or voice, or verbs indicating the various changes the action undergoes, may be used as nouns by merely substituting It/!.q for the noun or pronoun representing the agent. As this matter properlY belongs to the verb, only a few hints are given here, and the leal'Der is r ferred to furth er explanations in the corresponding chapters. The entering. Ang The giving. Ang The teacher, he who is actually I A teachinl!. \ ng The student. he who studied. Ang The future purchaser. Ang The sold commodity, the thing) A which is being sold. \ ng The seller, he who has been a seller Ang The walking, the manner of walk· i A ing, the gait. \ ng What is being prohibited. Ang Rain wet, rain damaged , the thing ~ th~t has been damaged by th e Ang

pumasoc. pagbibigay. ungma ara l nagaral. bibili . b'b'll ypmag I I . nacapagbill . la d pagca ca . ypinagbabaual. in olanan, ang pinagolanlln ,

flU II ,

THE TAGALOG LANGUAGE,

Went, (thither), Came here, Went there,

(to the place where )\ the person addressl ed stands),

f I

Napor60n, Naparito, naparinL Napariyan,

Went home, Napasabahay, , To be goinO' ((ma~'king pr~sent{ b i motIOn to a dIstant Napapar60n, or, naparoroon, th ~ place), ere, To be going Into town, Napapasabayan, or, napasasabayun, ( Napaparito, or, naparirit6, To be coming on, here, 1 Napaparinl., 0)' , naparirinL Father-in ,law or mother·in-Iaw, Bianan. (lalaqui 01' babaye), Son or daughter·in-Iaw. Munugang. (do do). Shod, little, small. Maliit, munt£. Nobody, no one. Uala sinoman , isa ma,i, uala, Buffalo. (animal). Calabao, damulag, Bird. Copper, Name. Ibon, Tangs6. Ngalan, pangalan, Broom. Foot. Mouth. Ualis, pangualis. Paa, Bibig.

SO:~bOodI~, :~:~er~n~ho~~~~~:y, i Sinoman,

balang na tauo , Any, anything, whatever, what- I A a " b' I nom u, anom",ng agay. soever. Whichever, whichsoever. Alin man , alin mang bagay, How much?, ~ow ~apy? (when a I Ma caano? Ila? 'Ia b ' ? number IS IllqUlred aften). \ (, g (, n, (,1 n aga How much? (when easure is} G o? inquired after). (, aan An interrogative pronouu followed or suffixed by the adverb man is thereby converted into an indefinite one.

EIGHTH EXERCISE. Did your uncle go there? My uncle did not go there, it ie my aunt who went there, Did your wife's friend come here? He did not come here, he went home. Did Alfred and his master go to your house? They both went to our house, Where are John's two They went to town. Did they go there? Yes, they companions? went there, and the three brothers Cruz are coming. Did not Peter and his father go to the country? Peter and his father did not go to the country, they went to church. Are the wife and the husband going thete to the forest? They are going to the town , Is your cloth.ing new or old? My clothing is old. (worn out). ArE~ their looking-glasses entire (sound) or broken? They are are not broken, they are worn out. Are my mother's sister's cats white or black? My mother's sister's cats are neither white nor black, Is your sister's virtue great? My sister's virtue is great. Is the wisdom of God, great? The wisdom of God has no equal. Who are wise? '£he sound are wise. Is the purity of our souls a beantiful tiling? The purity of our souls is a beautiful tbing Who are fellow-passengers? Peter, John and Mary are fellow ·passengers. How many companions are you? George and I are companions, How many enemies came

RELATIVE PRONOUNS.

here? No enemies came here. Are Mary and you alike in face? Yes, Mary and I are alike in face. HOlv many brothers ere they? They are two brothers. Are you master and servant? Yes, we are master and servant. Are you fath er end son? No, we are not father and son. Are they sisters·in·law? Yes, th ey are sisters-in·Jaw. Are they friends? No, tbey are not . fri ends. ~id John a~d bis brother ~o into tbe forest? John and his brother did not go mto tbe foreat, tbey are at school. Did the father and his ch ild ren come bere? '1 he father and his children did not come here. Did Jan e and bel' mother go to church. (mass)? No, Jane and hel' mother went to Cavite. ,"Yho is at home? No one. Where did my uncl e's buffalo go? Your uncle's b~ffalo went into the fields . Did his bird go into your father·s-in·law house? No, it went into my so n's·in-Iaw. What is your name? My name is Anthony. Wh ere is my servant's broom? Your servant's broom is not here. Is yo ur foot well? It is not wel l. Where are the teeth? The teeth are in th e mouth. Has anybody gone to iloilo? No one has gone there. Has Mary 's brother her pen? Her brother has not her pen; but he bas her letter Has the carpenter the steel hammer? He has not th e steel hammer, he bas his brother's in-law razor. Who has tbe carpenter's auger? The blacksmith has the carpenter's anger. Has the tailor my son' 3 tying rope? The tailor has not your son's tying· rope; but he has your book.

NINTH LESSON.

YCASIYAM NA PAGARAL.

RELATIVE PRONOUNS.

As in the case of the substantive verb, there is nei specific word in Tagalog for the relative pronoun; but ang and th e link ing particles sOlDetimes, and sometim es the merc arrangement of words, s~rve to perform the functions of relatives, mucb in the same way as that which has been explained for expressing tbe copula, and after the manner the English relative i~ Il.Ilderstood in phrases like "tbe man you saw", "the boy com ing here." elc.. (1). The use of the relative pronoun in Tagalog generally reljuires its antecedent to be preceded by the article. The illustrations in this lesson will convey to the student further enlightenment on the subject. That, which, who, whom . (relative. l N (I ' k' " I ) pronouns). J a, ng, g. ID -mg par.lC es . What, that which, the one which. The man who is coming here is my father.

Ang ............. , ang na. Ang tauong napaparito,i, ang aquing ama.

(19 It may perbaps give the le~rn~r some clae as to tb is aeeming anomaly to 8ay here that every word aod every relatioo between words carry aloog with them in Tagalog. reBpectively. tbe Bubat<ntive verb and the relat ive pronoun under· Blood. It i. in this way that EurOpea"8 8peaking tbe laogus ge when ueiog, f"r iDelaDce, the word aad the expreB9ion bata"g .."lieot are led to believe that they uYi "dog", "Daughty boy ", WlIBJ} thoy real'y Sdy: ··to be a dog," ' ·the boy that II Dlughty."

as":

T HE

T AGALO G LANGUAGE.

This woman whom yo u love is my sister Tile letter which you wrote to me. W hat I have is my sister's-i n-law u mbrella. T hat. (conj un cti on). Tell J ohu's so u to go into the co nn try. Do not tell h im that I am here.

It6ng babayeng sinisintlt mo,i, capatid eo Ang sulat na ysioulat mo sa aqui n. Aug na sa aqn in ay ang payong nang aquiog hipag. Na. Sabihin mo sa anac ni Juan na pasabuql1id siya. \ H ouag mong sabih in sa cani ya na , ae6, i, narita.

In the preced ing examples th e Engli sh relative prono un is express 路 ed by lihe ligame nts, whi ch, in this case, caullot be suppressed. Students must un derstand that t he mere replacing of th e verba l ligament by the nominal one or by ang , with the obj ectiv e ca e ~efo re a ver b, is a s ure iudication of th e ex isten ce of a rel ative pronoun. Attentio n should be paid to the di fference of sence ill the fo llowlIlg phrases: That man is coming here. T he man that is com ing here.... You love this woma n. 'l'his woman wbom you love. You wrote the letter to me. T he letter that y u wrote to me. I have my sister's inola umbrella . What I have is my si ter's路ill la w umbrella.

I yang tau b ay napaparitb. Aug taubng napapari tb ........ .. ... .. Ytbng babayeng lt b, i, sinisinta mo. Ytb ng babayeng sinisinta mo. f:linul atan mo ac6. A ng sulat na ysinulat mo sa aquin. ) Na sa aquill ang pa) ong nang aq ui ng h ipag Ang na sa aquin ay ang payong nang hi ag co.

Lan angan , daau . Street, road. Way, tho rouhgfare. Daa n High-road. Cal路saaa. (corr. from Sp. word calz ada.) Will, good-will, d isposition, iuward da 16 b i b feeling. agan ng 0 , C,," 00 au. Alaala. Memory, recollection . Gratitude, gratefulness, ob liga tion . {Ut~~~rt).a 160b . (lit., debt from the

Nobl e, precious, dea r. Rascal, im pudent fellow, cru el. Stone. Stone q uarry. H ead. Bolster. Cousin . Cook. Ox or co w. But. (conjnn cti on). Other. An other, one more. F oreigner . Stranger .. Sea. Seaman . Pocket-book, porfolio.

Maha!. T ampalasan, (acsiL Balb. Eatohan. Ol b. Olona11 , onan . Pin san. ( 'ragapagsa ing, cosinel'o. (corr of Sp . ( word , cociT/e1路o). B aca. (COlT. of Sp . word, vaca .) Cundl, da lap6ua, ng un!, subal i, alintana . Iba, isll. 1sll pa, ibll pa. Taga ibang lupain . Taga i bang bayan. Dagat. Taga ragat, magdadagat. Tag6an nang sulat. (li t.; h idi ng.place for papers.) cal'tera, (Sp .); supot nang Bulat. ' ,

RELATIVE PRONOUNS.

Garden, orchard. Plant. Corn, Grain. Granary. Principal, head, leader, aristocracy.

lord''II

Halamanan. Halaman, pananim . Butil. Tamb6bong, camalig. G'''' . h UIDOv; cagUlnoo an.

In the above instances ca and an are used to form nouns in· dicative of the place where the thing or matter referred to by the root is to be found; and, in the case of persons, the collective noun which considers them a~ an entity or a body. Hair. Forehead. Lip. Neck. Shoulders. Orphan. Strong. Feeble, weak.

Buhoc. Noo. Labi. Liig. Manga balicat. Olila. Malacas Mnhina.

This one, this other. Tbat other, that over there.

Itong is1L, itong iba. Iyang isa, iyang ibh.

1sa·itollg iSli, circnmscribes more the number of thing3, among which the one pointed out is, than i trmg iM, etc ..

Is this stone for this house?

J (,A ng batong ito,i, dito sa bahay na

! i t6 bnga? No, 'it is for that othe'r, that over I H' d ' d' " . a there. [ tn I, Iy"n sa IS .

J lltong tinapay na ito, d60n sa batang 1 ya6n? It is for that other. D60n sa isa. Before (adv .), a while ago . Cangina, dati, sandall lamang. Afterwards, by and by. ~lamea, mamaya·maya. Yesterday. Cahapon . The day before yesterday. Camacalaua. (pa). Some days ago. Camacailan arao. Just this morning. bbfore in the } Canginang umaga. morning. When? (,Cailan? Is this bread for that ollild? ~

Camaca is a plural prefix which indicates as many past days ' as are expressed by the root to which it is joined. Three days ago. 'fen days ago.

Camacatlo. Camacap6uo, mncadaluanpouo.

"To be", not having a specific expression in Tagalog, the rela· tion of tense is generally conveyed by some adverb or word expressive of time if not otherwise inferred from the context. Now·a·days, ho· wever, the expressions: naririto, nari,·iya.n, narorooll, for the present tense, are employed. We were yesterday in the country. Cahapo,i, cami nar60n sa buquid. Were they bere at our town some lCamacailan pa,i, narito baga sila ea days ago? ating bayan? When was your father's.in.law ~ lCa!lan' baga an~ ama nang iyong father at your son's-in-law? blanang lalaqUl nar60n sa. babay nang manugang mong lalaqUl?

THE

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

H e was there this morning. Nar60n siya canginang nmaga. Were you? ever Mary's household I GAlila ca baga sa daM nina Marfa? servan t r 00, ac6,i, alila nila noon dati . Yes, I was formerly their servant. J GNariyan=papariyan ca baga sa aim· Will you be at church? I bahan mamaya·maya? Ac6,i, nariyan=papariyan mamea. I shall be there. Siya mamea ang cay Mariang asaua. He will soon he Mary's husband . 'The above instances are intended to give the student a hint as to how the use oEadverbs oE time may sometimes disp ense with th e employment of the proper lenses of the verb, and are in every respect grammatical; but they are not idiomatic speech. and the same expressions wouldbe better rendered in Tagalog by converting nouns into verbs and conjugating. them in a way which will not yet be understood by the learner at this stage of th e work.

NINTH EXERC£SE. Whose are these trees? My father's. Whose do you say? My father's . Whose chilQren are those? ·Mine. Woich gun has he? He has his own. Was ydUl; wife on the street yes terday? She was there th e day before yesterd\lY. Was auy body on the road? Nobody was on the road. Has mBin a good disposition ' towards God? Yes, man What is memory? Memory is has a good disposition towards God. a power of our so ul. H as my mother·in·law an ox? She has two oxen . H as the foreigner some of these plants in his garden? No, he has not any of these, but he has others. Is the sea large? The sea is large. Where are the seamen? The seamen are at the garden of our neighbour. H ave they any grain? They have no grain. What have they in their pocket· books? 'l' hey have money therein . Where are your granaries? My granaries are at the rice-fields. Where are the aristocracy of this town? The aristocracy of this town are at church. How many plants have you in his garden? I have no plants in his garden. Was his hair black? His hair was black. Where are located the forehead, the lips and the neck? On th e head. Is the orphan boy strong or weak? He is weak. Is that man coming here your brother? My brother is the one going there. Are those letters for your father? The letters for my father are those on the table. Is that one the woman whom you love? The woman I love is my mother. What shall I say to my Biste.!'? 'fell your sister not to go to Iloilo. Shall I tell them to go into th e conn try? Do not say that. Which of theae two books is for my cousin? Tbe new book is for your cousin, this other is for your son. Is that bottle for this child? No , it is for that other. Did you go to the garden before? I did not go there. When did John come here? It was some days ago that John came here? Did yuur sister's-in·law mother go into towo yesterday? She went there the day before yesterday.

lNTE~SIVES .

TENTH LESSON.

YCAPOUONG PAGARAL. INTENSIVES.

The sense of nouns, adj ectives and verbs is in T agttlog very frequently intensified, eitber by the reduplicati on, so metimes of a syllable or syllables, sometimes of the entire word , or, by the employment of enclitic particles, or by using both the3e ways. In addition to the above, th ere are other independent parti cles and expressions which intensify th e se nse of the preceding word , these corresponding closely in meaning to "certainly, " " indeed, " "most, " "exceedingly," "own," "self" and similar English terms, tbongh some of them may be considered as expleti,es and are so metimes un· translatablt:. A few have already appeared in foregoing lessons and others will appear in their proper places, but it seems advisabl e however to acqupint the student with them at this early stage in view of the fact that natives make a very ex tensive use of th em, as they give force and precision to what th ey say. Although other words and exp tess ions may be rated as inten· sives, only the following are here co nsidered: baga, caVa, mona, mandin, naman, nanga, n.qa, ngani, pa, pala, po , ?'in, sal'ili, siya , siVa nga and siva naua. All of them, excep t sm'iii, come immediately after the word the sense of which is in tend ed to intensify . Baga and cava are the well known in terrogative parti cles, the latter being the more emphatic B aga merely inq uires , in cava th ere lies the implication that the inquirer's opinion is kno wn to the opposite party and concurrence therein is . required. Are you, perchance, John 's uncle s son. Whatl, are yon, perchance, a king?

GTcno haga ang anac nang amain ni Jnan? Ay an b, hari ca cays?

Baga may be used in an affirmative se nse as an alternative conjunction, serving as explanatory to the preceding word or sentence, as in: Bliss, that is to say, the glory of God.

Ang caloualhatfan , gloria baga nang Dios.

Baga may likewise be used in a co nditional or dnbitati ve se n· tence, it being then an expletive term rendering the expression round an enphonic. If you, then, love your parents.

\ Cun cay6 nga,i, sungmisint a= ungmi· ) ibig sa inybng manga magulang, or, t cuu cay6 bsga .. .

Cava may be used in the secoudary clause or sentence as a coordinate causative conjunction . He had to tell me something, that is the reason why he came.

~Io y

sasobihin siya sa aquin , caya nil.· paritb.

THE

TAGALOG

LANGUAGE .

Mona may be parsed as an adverb of time, but is used exple路 tively in a way for which there exists no exact equivalent in English. Tt nearly co rresponds to the German "nul' "or its corresponding English "only" in phrases like: "only, do say it, please", etc. Only wait. Do noL ....... yet. .

Bintay ca mona B ouag mona.

Mandin, nanga, nga, ngani and elin or l路in co rrespond all of them to "yes indeed," "most certainly," "absolutely" "self, " and similar Eng. li sh expressions. Wby! Is it you? ,il cao baga? It is I myself. Ac6 nga. Bow! was it the women who stole? (gAng mangn babaye baga pala ang 1 nagnacao? Yes, the very women themselves. { 00, a~g manga babaye din, or, nga, . nanga. Even they themselves did . Sil!i nga, mandfn. It is you, indeed, it is you yourselves. Cay6 nga, cay6 ngani . Ac6 rin, ac6 din , ac6 nga. I myself . They themselves. Sila rin, slla nanga. Nam(m, as \In intensive, is a word of which it is difficult to give the right signification, but it is hoped that the examples which follolV may convey to the s uden t a fai l;.!Y accumte idea of its mea ning and uses. If a native goes into a store for some com modity and finds t1 e price thereof exorbitapt, he, in all probab ility, will give went to his opinion, saying: mahal naman. If the arrival of some one beco mes uncertain or is despaired of and a native is co nsuned a u the matter, he wi ll reasure him, thus secking his advice, by saying: da)'ating namam. If two natives enter into a controversy over some qu estion , he who assum es that he has the better of the a rgum ent will wind up his remarks and put a stop to f urther altercation by sayiug: icao naman. Thus, naman comes to be somewnat analogo us to such English words and expressions as "also," " too," "anyhow,' "all the same," "into the bargain ,' "for=with all that", etc., used either expletively as counecting th e sense to mental reflections, or as an intimation that the speaker refrains from further comment only fo r the sake of peace.

Pa means "yet," "still," "even ," when th ese English adverbs are used to denote that such a result as the one in questiou was not to be expected. Even the teacher could not und er路 Di nacatalastas ang maestro, at Gicao stand, and you can? pa? . . Over and above my having fUr-} . . . nisbed bim with clothes and Slya, l, pma:~~mta,t, plllacam co, ito pa food, still this reward? ang gan

Pala is also interrogative and is used lish conjunct ion "then ," "therefo re."

the sense of the Eng-

So then , was it you that cried? lcao baga pala ang nag-iyac? Po, the contraction of poon, "lord;" or, more probably, the Malay intensive pun, which nati ves use profusely, is the equivalent of the English "sir" and like this is only used in the vooative case.

INTENSIVES .

00, po. Di, po. Icao po, cayo po. l cao 10. po.

Yes, sir. No sir. You, your lordship. As you like.

Sa1路ili is used adjectively for the English "own" and comes be fore, not after nhe noun .

J saw him with my own eyes. I paid it out of .my own money.

Naqu ita co siya naug aquin sariling

1路 mata. J Binaynran co nang nquin sariling I

~a路

lapi.

Siya, the third person pronoun in the singular. is used as iutensive in a sense which in cludes those of the demonstrative and the relative. When so used, it comes to be as an emphatic means of recalling to memory the subject of the sentence, and refers to persons and things both in lhe singular and in the plural. Si Jose, siya ang nagnacllo. Ang aquing in a, siya ang nagtan~is. .1 Ang; ~alaugohang siya ng ypinatay sa Drunkness is what l!;illed him. I caDlyu. ICiio Ilga, siyll. ang nagsabi nco. You yourself is what I said. It was the Spaniards who disco v- Ang munga castila ang siyang tungmodas=nacatuchis nang lupain Am erica. ered America.

Joseph, it was he who stole. My mother, it was she who wept.

Siya, as an intensive, somewhat corresponds with all genders aud numbers of the English reflective pronoun when used adjectively in reference to nouus. The blacksmith himself made it. The aunt herself returned it back. Wealth itself caused his ruin.

Ang panday bacal, siva ang gungmaua. Ang ali siyang nagsaoli. J Ang cayamana,i. siyang yquinasama 1 niyu.

Siya. nga, "just so", "just that way", denotes an absolute coin cidence in views or opinion with what has been previously said. Look here, is it in this manner that mats can be made? Just that way.

Tingmin mo, c'.ganitb baga aug paggaua nang banig? Siya n~a?

Siya naUli is optative aud stands for "amen," "may it be so," "may God grant it," etc .. May he arrive io peacel. ....... in order that we may thus attain the glory of God, amen.

IDumating naua siya nang banayadl. .. . nang macamtan naming ang caloualhatlang nang Dios, siya naua

The full force of the preceding idiomatic words and expressions can only be appreciated on learning the Janguage aud hearing them used by the natives. 9

TAE

TAGALOG LANGUAGE .

Though T, even 1. T "oug" P eter ca me here. AILhough a mau be virtuous.

Ac6 man. Naparito=pumarilo man Si Pedro. nanal man aug tauo.

Alan is a pos tpositive particle which circumscribes the sense of th e word precediu g in an appositive sense. Is it, by c hance, th eir fath er that lCanilllng am a caya ya6ng tauong man who is com ing here? napaparito? Siya uga. (pala). Yes, indeed , it is he himself. Was it b e ... tbat ... ? lSiya baga ang ... ? How! how now, are th ey, th en, here lAy an6, narito nga bagS. sila sa in town? bayan? 00 , ngani; 00, nga; siya nga. Most ce rtainly . h th at tr ue? t.Totoo baga iya n? Yes, indeed, it is absolutely true. Totooug tatoo, totoo nga, tatoo rnandln . Why, is it you wh o say so? lAy ano, cay6 nanga ang nageasabl? Of course, it is we. Ay and, caml nga 15 this yo ur child? t,Ito pal a ang anac rna? It is. Siva nga . (pala). Ohl how tall! jA baa! , maJaqul=mataas nga .1 13 that th e same womnll, you love? I Iyan~ .bat~aye~g iyan nga baga Ilug slulsm '" mo~ The vel' y same. Siya rin, (nga). Week, II week. Seven . Twelve. T o mention . Iu th e middle. l\路loon, month. January. Feb ru ary. Ma rch . April. May . Jun e. July . August. September. October. November. Decemb er.

--=------

The mont,b of March . Year. Have you the letter which my brother had? I have not th e letter which your brothel' had. I Ilave tl1e Iett er w h'I CI1 tl ley II a. d Whi ch horse has he?

IS/lOg lingo. Pito . Lablng dalaua. Tura , magturan Na a guitmi. B6uan. Enel路o . F ebrel'o JJfarzo. Ah,路il. ]lfayo. J lmio. (Spanish). Juli o. Agosto.

Sep tierno1'e. Oetuore. Noviemo re. Diciembre. ( Bou ang Marzo, or, bouan na Mana aug ngalan. Ta6n. lNa sa iyo baga ang sulat nang aquing capatid?, 01', na na sa aquing capatir? Dala sa aquin ang sulat nang capatid rna, 01' , na na sa iyong capatid. { Ang aqnsulat in. na na sa canila ang na sa

lAliug cabayo ang na sa caniyll?

Wh en possession is meant, th e English personal pronouns in relative clauses, or discriminative sentences may be rendered in Tagalog b y th e possessive alles, the verb "to have" remaining untrauslated as seen above.

INTENSIVES.

Monday. Tuesday . Wednesday. Tbursday . F riday . Raturday . Sunday. The beginning. The middl e. The end.

L im es. Maries. Miercoles .Tueves.

(Spanish).

Vierll es. Sabado.

Lingo (corr. o[ Sp. woru , Domingo) Ang mula. Ang pag.itan, paguitan . J Ang catapusa n (time), ang l Jang~n. I (time and place). Ang pono. Sanga. Culay. Madilim. Madilao, dilao. Marula, pula

The trunk of a tree. Branch . Color. Dark. Yellow. Red. What?, what th en? (in a tone of I \ G.\ ), auo? surprise).

TENTH E XERCr 8. What tree is th at? T'lis t ree is oak. (moluuin). Are its leal'es large Bnd beautiful? Cedainly W hose sons are th es" children? They are my sons. And that oue, whose soo is ha? He is my frieud's. How many months are there in a year? There are twelve months in a year. Na me them . J an nary, etc.. How mauy days are there in Ii week' Th ere a re seven day in a week. Name them. Sunday, etc.. What month i s thi s? T he month of April. Will you be bere iu the .nonth of April? I will not be here in the month of April. I will When do you go to the farm? I go (will be here in the month of July. go) to t he farm on Thursday. Are you not in lown on Tuesdays? I am in town on Sundays. When do you (will you) go to Manila? I go to Manila on Saturday. I s he goin g to church Oll Sunday? He is going to church on Sunday. What day is t his? (to day). It is Friday. Wh en do they go to the gard en? Th ey go to the garden at the commence路 ment of the week . What is the last dai in the month? Th e eud of the month is Wednesday. Wh at month is at the end of the year? The month at the end of t he year is December. What color is the trunk of that tree? Th e color of the trunk of this tree is red. Is it not yellow? No, it is brown. I s the day dark? No, it is not dark. Wha t day is at th e midd le of the week? Thursday i3 at the middle of of the week. Wh at then? Nothing at all. Why!, Is it that there is no God here on Earth? Yes, indeed, there is one God here" everywhere. W hy! Is it the brother of Peter who went there? It was he himself who went there. Whatl Are you ~ere? Of course, I am here. T ben, is God grea~? Of course, He 18 great. Is i~ you th en , who are thertl? Of course, it is I. Is it you yourself who went ~o Man ila in October? I myself went there Who stole some boo ks? I t was the women who s(,o le some books. ~here is God? Wh erever you go, there is God I s that true? It !8 true. Have yon seen J ohn at church? No, sir, although he may be III .town, he does not go to church . I s that which he is saying trull? It 18 the very truth, sir, I myself saw it with my own eyes.

TErn

ELEVENTH LESSON,

TAGALOG

LANGUAGE

YCALABING ISANG PAGARAL.

NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. Cardinal Numerals.

The numerals in Taga log are exceedingly simple. They always precede the noun. Cardinal numbers, from eleven to nineteen inclnsive, are formed from the digits by preceding the latter with the particle labi "more;" used as a coefficient. Multiples of ten np to ninety inclusive, have the termination pouo, "ten;" (polo, the word for " ten"; in the Bisayan and Bicol dialects being also userl in sell eral places). Intermediate num Above one hundred, bers arc, formed simply by adding the units. iscLng daan; and "one thousand," ~sitng liM; the numbers proceed with equal regularity: 326, tatlong (Man, dalauang POIW,t, anim; 2,641. cialau cL;lg liM, anim na j-aan, apat na p ouo,t, isa. Certain te ms for high numbers have been borrowed from the Sanskrit language and have been, as in Malay and Javanese. misapplied to Tagalog, namel . laesa, (Sansk. lalcsha, 100.000), and yota, (Sansk. ayota, 10.000.). 'l'he numbers represented by these words in Tagalog are: isang lacs{=sang laesa, ,路 ten thousand; " isctng yol=sang yota, " a hundred thousand;" s 19polwng yota, " one million ." To express a quan tity which approaches what in English is call ed a round number, it is sometimes convenient to state the latter qualified by the figure in which it is deficient, using th e word (J{tlang =colang, :'Iess", "save;' as is done in 'the old-fashioned phrase "forty stripes save one." 'rhus, instead of isang dlian siyam na pouo,t, ualo "one hnndred nin ety eight;" the phrase colang nang dalaua sa dalauang daan, may be used. The student will do well to acquaint himself with the Spanish numerals, for th ey are largely m~de use of by natives in counting One. Two. Three. Four. Five. Six Seven . Eight. Nine. Ten Eleven . Twelve. Thirteen . Fourteen. Fifteen. Sixteen. Seventeen . Eighteen. Nineteen. Twenty. Twenty-one. Thirty .. Thirt y-two. Forty. Forty-three. Fifty. Fifty-four.

Isa. Dalaua. Tatlo. Apat. Lima. Anim. Pilo. Dalo. Siyam . Saugp6uo. Labing isa. Labing dalaua. Lablng tatlo. Lablng apat. Labing lima . Lablng animo Lablng pito. Lablng ualo. Lablng siyam. Dalau!mg p6uo. Dalau!mg p6uo,t, isa. Tatlong p6uo. TaUong p6uo,t, dalaua. Apat na p6uo. Apat na p6uo,t, tatlo. Lirnang p6uo. Limang p6uo,t, apat.

N UMERAL

ixty. Rixly路 five. Seventy. :Seventy路six. Eighty. Eighty.seven . Ninety. Ninety路eight. One hundred. One hundred and nine. Un e hundred an d twenty. Two hundred. Two hundred and finy . Three hundred. Three hundred and sixty nine. Four hundred. Fi ve hundred. Six hundred. Seven hundred. Eight hundred. Nin e hundred. One thousand. Eleven hundred. Two thousand . Nin e thousand. Ten thousand. Thirty thousand. Seventy thousand. Oue hundred thousand Two hundred thousand One milli on . How much? (inq uirin g as to prictl). Price. How much is the price oE th at? Six dollars.

A DJEOTIVES.

Ani m na p6uo. An im na p6 uo,t, li ma. Pi tong p6uo. P itong p6uo,t, anim. Ualbug p6uo. Ualbng p6uo,t, pitb. iyaru na p6uo. Si yam na p6uo,t, ua lo. Sang daan, isang daan . Sang daa,t, siyam. Sang daa,t, dalauang p6uo. Dal"u1mg daan . Dalauang dao,t, li rnitng p6u o. Tatl bng daa n . T lltl bng daa,t, anim na p6110, t, siyllm . Apat na daan, a pat nil raan . Limang dlia n. Anim na daan . ~ i to n g daan. Ualong daan Si yam na daan . Sang li bo, isang li bo. I sang li bo, t. isang daa u. Dalauang li bb. Siyam nn libo. Saog laesa, i aug Inesa 'lIa tloug laesa. Pitbll g laesa. Sang yota, isallg yota. Dalauang yota. Sang p6uong yota, sang angan nngao. i,Magcano? H ala ga GMageanb aog balaga niyan? An im oa lJiso . (Sp. peso).

Cardinal numerals may he preceded by th e article in a determinate sense, as in English . Ang tat/ling l'isos na ybinigay co sa i yo, "the three dollars I ga ve you . ' Labi, whi ch precedes the digi t numb ers to form the first denary, means " more;" and is linked to th e number, In the saru e way the di fferent parts of a co mplex num eral a l'e linked to eaoh other by means of the ligaments. H the number is not a round one, at路t comes before the last ex p r~ ss i on oE the quantity, and not, as in English, before the denaries. Only, but, Ouly ooe. Only two. The only . A hundred only,

Lamau g. Jsll lamang, iisa, Dalaua lamang, dadalaua. Saug p6uo Iti mang, sasangp6uo , Saug daa n lamang, sos!lngdaan.

A number may be restri cted in sellse in th e commo n way by the advel'b, lamang , or by repeating tue first sy llable 0 1' the first two letters thereof j f consisting of more than two. L amallg sho ul d be used after the numeral the sense of wh ich it is iutendod to res trict,

THE TAGALOG

LANG UAGE.

Ordinal Numerals â€˘.

Ordinal numerals are formed from the cardinals by prefixing to the latter the particle ica=yca, the first being altogether, and the three following somewbat, irregnlar in formation . Cardinal nnmerals beginning with a drop it to form the ordinal. Ordinal numerals a re generally preceded by the article as in English . T o precede, to go befure. The first. The second third . fourth. fifth. ~ixth.

seventh . ,. eight. ninth. tenth. eleventh. twelfth. twentieth. thirtieth. fil'tietb. eighty-ninth hundredth. thousandth . ten thousandth . 3.843rd .

Ona, pangongona. Ang naona, ang un a. Ang ycalaua. " ycatlb. " ycapat. " ycalima " ycanim . " ycapilb. " ycaualb. " ycasiyam. " ycasangpouo . " ycalablng isa. " ycalablng dalaua. " ycadalauang pouo I' ycatlbng pouo. " ycalimang pouo. ycaulllbng pouo,t, siyam. " ycasangd:ian. " ycasanglibb. " ycasnnglacsa. j " ycatlbng libb, ualbng daan, apat I na pouo,t, tatlb.

1u complex llumbers only the fir~t and most embracing one is made ordinal in 'ragalog, contrary to Ihe Euglish practice. The very first. Ang caonaonahan. The last. Ang hull. The very last. Aug cahulillUlihan. The very first man was Adam. Ang caunaunahang taub ay si Adan. Ohl my G:od! I, the very last 110h! jDios co!, aco, ang ,cahulihulihan among BlDners. nang manga macasalanan. The extreme ordinal numeralS may be intensified in Tagalog by using the prefix ca, the suffix an and the reduplication of the root. Much. (num. adj.), many. Maraml. (from daml). ve~n~~Ch , a great deal, a great Maramlng maraOJi.

The majority, the most.

All. Enough. (adv). More than. (a cardinal following) . More than eight. More. (comparative).

Ang caramihan. Lahat, ang labat. ) Siya na, husto. (corr. of Sp. word, justo). number I\ L a b'IS sa, h"t IgUi sa. Labis sa ualb, higuit sa ualb. Lalo, lalo pa.

NUMERAL

ADJECTIVES.

Pa. (always postponed). \ Ang lahat na tauD ay hind! manga All men are not virtuous. I banal. Slicat na ang sabl mo. You have said enough. I lLalo ca pang mataa3 sa canyang ca路 Are you taller than bis brother? I patid na lalaqui? Lalo ac6 ng mat:las sa caniya. I am taller than he. ' f th I. k ? ) lAng canilang ama, mayr60n pang H as th elr a et any more c lIC ens sisiu? He has still more. Siya,i, mayr60n pa. Now. (at present). Ngay6n. llan . Some, few. Ilan l!imang, iihin, Ot路 iilan lIl-mang. Only a few. More (adv.), still, even.

nan, may likewise be made ordinal, beiug as qltantieme in French; dlw, die, das, den wievielste(n) in Germau; by prefixing ica=yca tbereto. What day of tbe month is to路day? To-day is the tbirteenth What place (in order) have they?

,ilcaihing arao ngay6n nang b6uau? ICalablng tallo ngay6n . .;,Icailan baga sila!"

Manga, before a cardinal numeral imparts a seuse of indet路 ermination. th? \ l1Jaog bayong ang nR sa canilll?, 01', H b h ow many ags ave ey I mllyr60n sila.

Some twenty of them, about twenty. M~~l~ apaJ~~~ng p6uo, or, is/lUg dalaManga, although plural, may, iu this sense, be used for singular. _"-bout one peck (ganta) of rice. Maogll sang sal6p na bigas. Manga, alone, and not all.ll n;langa, comes before nouns in the plural when they are useu indefinitely or io a partitive sense.

Houses. Men, people.

Manga bahay. Manga tauO.

ELEVENTH EXERCISE. 63 .- 12B.-2l5.-519.-631.-911.-1 . 3~2.-3.000 . -7.B9-+.-10 .6 l4.

-25.BI3.-37 .OlB.-70.BOO.-IOO.526.-362. 214 -836. 565 .-l. 23~.036.3.434.60B. What is tbe price of that cheese? Tbree dollars. How many honses has your fatber? He has none. Has your sister many looking-glasses? She has twenty. Have your parents all the rings? They bave not all. How many children has the brother of Anthony? He has seven. Are all of them prE:tty? 'fhree are pretty, the others are ngly. How many brothers has your uncle? My uncle has five brothers. How mllny of them are male? (1). Three of them' are (ij In Tagalog. as heretofore explained. capatid includes both brothers

and sisters.

TrLE

TAGALOG

LANGUAGE.

mal e, tb e otbers are female. H d my allU~ .n any trees? She bas How so me. Wbere a re ~h e two brotbers路in 路law? Tb ey are at Cebu ma ny wom en were there yesterd ay? A gre a~ many . A re there no Are there many dog~ books at home? We have mauy at home. there? There a re only a fe w. How many cats has my cousiu? There H e has only one. Are th ere twenty birds a t your farm? are more th an tw enty. Wh ere a re they? Tbey are on the brancbes of trees. Wh o to ld yo u th ere a re many church es in Manila.? My friends told me so. H ow man y so uls have we? We fJave only one H ow many fi ngers are there on your band? There are only foul'. W bere, then, is the ot her? Well, tben, the ot her is hidden. How many trees (tru nks) a re th ere ill this gard en? There are a great m any. H ow ma ny of t he m have bra nches a nd how many qave none? 'r hose not ha ving branches are only a fe w. Who was the fi l'st man? The fi rst man was Ada m. And th e firs t woman? Eve, What place in order has yo ur sister at school? Sbe is the fifth in Are you pel" order. What nu mber have yo u? I have th e 638 &h. cllance a great perso nage? I a m the last of men. Are all men bad (wicked)? No, only so me of t hem a l'e wi cked. Are all women Have you 路 in your town j ud icious? T he majority are judicious. more than t hree pens? I have more th an si xty. Is your friend Have older tha u his brother? H e is ta ller, but he is not older, yo u sti ll more s<\ns? I lla\'e two more. What day of th e week is to day? To day 111 Tuesday . An d wh at day of . the month was yes路 terday? Yesterday was th e 25th . H ow many do llars (about how many) have yo u? I have some thirty dollars.

J TWELFTH LESSON. YCALABING DALAUANG PAGARAL. NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. (continued). Adverbial Numerals.

The adverbi al num erals are f ormed by prefix ing maca to the card nals, the fi rst being a ltogeth er. and the second and th ird somewhat, rregul ar. Once. Twice. Thrice, three tim es. F our ti mes. Fi ve Six Seven Eight Nine T en E leven Nineteen A bundre A tbousand " How many times?, how often?

Minsan. Macalaua. . Macaitl b. macatl b=macatatJIJ. Macaapat. Macalim a. Macaa nim. I\Iacapitb Macaualb. Macasiyam. Macasan gp6uo. Macalablng isll. Macalablng siyam Macasangdaan. Macasanglibb. c,Macaihin?

NUMERAL

ADJEOTIVES .

The restriotion in sense my be made by repeating the firdt two letters for minsan, and the first syllable of the particle for the others, besides the common way of using lamang or both lamang and the rapetiton. Mlminsan. M" calaua. Mamacasangp6uo. Mamacasangdaan.

Once on 1" only once. Twice only, only twice. Ten times only. A hundred times only.

These same adverbial numer.lls are u3ed in some local ities to denote multiplication, in the same way as the suffix "fold" in English; macalaua lalong malaqui, "twofold (doubly) greater or large." iNacailan? is used by some people for c,macailan? Properly speaking, c,nacailan? expresses past time and c,macailan? present or future: c,Nacailan canr/ nagcasala?, "how many times did you comm it sin?" c,Macailtin cang paparoon? "how often will you go there?" Beses (corrupt Spanish word for veces) , (times) is sometimes used. ;,flang beses?, "how many times?" "how often?" . How many times did you come GNacaillin=macaihin naparitb ca caha here yesterday? pon? Twice. Macalaua. How often does your sister go c'.Macailan bagang nagsisimba ang ca路 to mass? patid mong babaye? Every Sunday. Lingo lingo. Distributive Abslract Numerals.

These are formed by repeating the entire cardinal numeral if dissyllabic, and its two first syllables. if polisyllabic, without any ligament. One by one. Isaisa. Two by two, two at a time. Daladalaua. Three by three, three at a time. Tatl b tatlb. Four "four, four Apat lipat. Five "five, five Lima lima. 1'6U " ten, ten Sangp6uo sangp6uo' Labl lablog dalaua. Dozen " dozen, a dozen" " How many at a time'? c'.Illin ilan? Thousand by thousand. Sanglisanglibb. Hundred by hundred. Sangdasangdaan. Every day. daily. Arao arao. Every hour, hourly. Oras oras. Every month, monthly. Bouan b6uan Ellery year, yearly. '1'aon ta60. Every week, weekly . Lingo lingo . Every Sunday. Do. do. Every Tuesday. 'rouing martes. Every Saturday. Do sabado. II

Partitive Numerals.

"The half" is expressed by ang calahati. The other partitive in the singular are expressed by the ordinals with the article, the word bahaglti, "share, ' "portion;" being optionally used at 10

nu~erals

T HE

TAGALOG

L ,\NGUAGE.

the end. Fur the plural , tbe cardinals are used; tbe partitive, in the nominative case, and tbat indicative of the parts into wbi cb tbe unity is considered divided, in the possessive, with bahagu-i fo llowing: The half. The third. The tenth. Three fourtbs. The seveu eighths.

Ang calahatl. Ang ycatlbng. (bahagui). Ang ycasangp6uong bahagtli. Tatlb nang apat na bahagui . Ang pitb nang ualbng babagui. Distributive Determ in ate Numerals.

These are formed by prefixing tig to peating the first syllable from five u pwa rds. One to each one, one each. Two to everyone. Three Four Five " Six Seven Eight Nine Ten Eleven Twelve A dozen " How mauy to everyone, at how; many everyo ne? H ow? In what manner? How is, are?

tbe cardinals and by re路

Tig-isa Tigalaua. Tigatlb. Tigapat. Tiglilima. Tigaani m. '1'igpipi tb. Tiguaualb. Tigsisiyam . Tigsasangp6uo . Tiglalablng isn Tiglalablng dalau n. Tig-isang dosena . (corr of Sp docena) . (fig-ii llin? c:',Paaub? i,Maanb?

Tig may also come before cardinal plural numerals indicative oE the fixed or stamped value of a thiug, without any repetition of sy llable. Thus, "five dollars coined piece," JUay be exp ressed, sa/ap ing tiglimang p 路iso; "flfteen cents stamp, " seyong tiglabil1g limang sentimos; although na is more in use. [u the southern provinces, tig serves to express tbe season in which anythi ng occurs or is proper to be made: t'i gani, "harvest season;" tigpamahao, "breakfast time." Th e distributives for unities of price. measure, etc are formed by prefixing man to' tbe root-word of the standard unity, tbe first letter oE the root undergoiug the same cbanges as have been explained fo r th e nouns ()f instl'llment iu the Eighth Lesson.

Bushel. 'fw enty -five cents value. Twenty-five pound weight. One ouuce weight of go ld. Half a real, $ 0.06,! One real. HalE a do lla r. Inch. H andbreadth measure. Dollar. Fill'thiug.

Caban. Cabati. Aroba. (Sp. aI路robn) . Tabil. Sicolo, sicaualb. Sica pat. Salapi, isang salapi Sandali, sang dali. Dangcal Piso. B elis. (corr. of Sp. word mql路auedi).

NUMERAL ADJECTIVES.

At one bushel $ 0.25 " 25 pound weight oue ounce gold weight. half a real half dollar one real one inch handbreadth one dollar " one farthing

per head.

The body. 'rime, weather, occasion. Opportunity, awaiting au portunity.

op-

Mangaban . Mau gabati. Mangaroba, Manahil. Manicolo. Manalapl. Manica pat. Manandali , mandali.路 Manangcal, mandangcal. Mamiso. Maubelis.

Ang cataouan. Panah6n . Oapanahonan.

\ lIIabuLlng panah6n, maganu!lllg pa I nah6n. Rough weather lIfasamang panah6n. At dawn, morningj early in the I 0 morning. i ma ga. To-morrow morning. Bucas nang umaga. In the morning. Sa umaga. Daga, bulilit. Daga. Mouse. Rat. Louse. Louse, crablouse. Culo_ Toma. Pig, swine. eoII'. Babuy. Anacan, ina hin . Boar, wild boar. Babu)' damo. To give, give. Magbigay . (indet.). Gave. Tagbigay. (indet.). The giving Ang pagbibigay. To be given. lbigay. How many times didyougive bread? c;Macaihln nagbi gay ca uang tina ray? Seven times Macapito. How many at a time to be given? lIlang ihin baga ang pagblbigay? Lima lima. Five at a time. Do you go to church every day? c;Napasasasimbahan ea baga arao arao. No I to h ch Iy ce a e k ( Hindi, napapasasimbahan ac6 mimin,go c ur on .on we. I san lingo lin go. Does he come here every Friday? GNapaparito siya baga touing viernes? No, he comes here every Sunuay. Hindi, napaparito siya lingo lingo. How many to be given each? lTig-ilan baga ang pagbibigay? Two dozen to everyone. Tigalauang dosena. Give (sing) one bushel per head Mangabau aog ybigay mo. Give (plur.) 25 cent;; per head. l\laogllhuti allg ybigay ninyo. How much money sball I give to C;Tig-ilan baga ang ybibigay cong each oue? salap!? Give one real per head. Mauicapat aug ybigay mo. Shall I not give at the rate of one t H' d ' b . b'b"? dollar to each? J l III 1 aga mamlso ang y 1 Ig"y co How is the weather to-day? c;Maauo baga aug panah6n ngay6n? The weather is fine. Aug panab6,i, mabutl. C; \ug pllnah6,.i, hindi baga masama? Is not the weather rough? Certainly, it is rough. Masamang toloo. When do you go to Paraflaque? lCaii!iu ca pasusa Parafiuque? Bueas nang umaga. To-morrow morning. Fine weather.

76,

'fBE TA GALOG

Does your fath er come here in the morning or in the evening? In th e evening.

LANGUAGE ,

GAng am a mo baga,i, napaparilb sa umaga 6 sa gabl? Sa gabl.

TWELFTH EXERCfSE Whi ch ' book ha ve you? I have the first. And where is the second? My brother bas it. Is not October the ninth month of the year? No, Sir, October is the tenth. H ow many times did your child purloi n? Only once. Did your uncle go three times to . the garden? H e went to the garden only once. How do you give yoU!' books? I give them one by one, but my master gi ves them three by th ree. Do you go to school every Thursday? I go there every day. How many hours are you at school in the morning? I stay there two hours. What day of the week do not your children go to school? 'T hey do not go to school on Sundays. How many pens did you give to everyo ne? I gave seven pens to every one. How many did you say? I said seven pens. How much rice does their fath er give them? Their fa ther gives one ganta each. And their uncle? ,Their u ncle does not give t hem even a far thing each; their aunt gave them once 25 po und weight each. Is the weather fine in the month of October? T he wea*er is rougb in the month of October. Whea will you go to th e garden? I will go there to-morrow morning. Are t here mRny mice in your house? 'fhere are very few. Are there rats at you r fa rm? There re rats and birds. Has yOUl' son any lice in h is head? H e has nome, but in his clothes there are crablice. Have you many swine? I have only only a boar and a sow .

. THIRTEENTH LESSON.

YCALABING TATLONG PAGARAI.

DEGREES OF COMPARISON.

Comparative of Equality.

The comparative of equality is formed in ' several ways, accord路 ing as to wh ether a quantity, a qu ality or a thing is to be compared. Before going however into furth er explan ations about the m!\tter, the stud ent should first beco me acquainted with the following words and co mbinations used for the purpose. So.... .. .. ....... as. As . .... ....... .. as. So ... .. .. .... .. as. As Il}uch .... ... as. As many ... ..... as

\ Para, &ing, casing, maeasing, {a, gango" pares, capares. J Para... ni, parang; sing, casing, magcal sing. (prefixed to the root). ( Go" (prefixed to the root of the adverb, j and ra, prefixed to the root of the { quality). . Capara, eaparis, capanlay, magcasing. J Capara, capares, capant6.y, parapara, I ma~capares. I

DEGRERS OF

COMPARISOlf.

Para co . Para nang aquing ~apatid. Para niya. Para ni Alfredo. Para nang aquing pinsan. Pal"S nang bato, parang bato Ganito, gaito, para nito. Ganito ca .. , gaito ca ... , para nito ca ... Ganiyan, gan60n, para niyan , para { niy6n. Ganiyau ca ... , gan6?n ca .. , para ni, { yan ca.. ., para Dly6n ca., Ganga nito, para nitong manga ito. Ganga nito ca.. Ganga niyan, ganga n60n. Ganga niyang ca ..., ganga n60n ca .. .

.As I.

As my brother. As he. As Alfred. As my cousin. As stone. As this. ........ as this. As that that. As these. ........ as these. As those. ........ as those. ..â€˘.... liS

The comparison of quality is formed either by prefixing sillg or casing to the root expresive of the quality, or by placing pam after the adjective in full, with the possessive case of the thing or person serving as standard, at the end; the inflective formation being preferable. Si Pedro,i, singdtinong (or casingdu ) nong) ni Juan. lSi Pedro,i, marunong na para ni Juan. Itong cahoy na ito,i, singtigas (or ca' singtigas=catigasj nang bato. Itong calloy na ito,i, matigas na para nang balo.

Peter is as wise as John.

This wood is as hard as stone.

If an idea of assemblage is to be expressed, casing with tbe prefix mag may be used. The same sense is expressed by Si11g and the repetition of the first syllable of tbe root.

Richard and his father are equally Ang magama ni Ricardo,i, magcasing' wise, dunong. Richard is as wise as his father. J Singdudunong=magcasingdunong ang 1 magama ni Ricardo. For comparing two things, mag casing may be u~ed between the nominative case of the one and the possessive of tbe other, or they may both be used in the nominative with mag casing followiog. As much .bread as wine.

As many knives as pens.

Pa1'es, capares,

~ j

Ang tilllipay magcasingdaml nang alac. Ang tinapay at ang alac ay magcasin' daml, or, caparis nang alae ang daml. Aug manga itac casingdaml nang mao nga panulat, or, magcapara singdaml. Ang manga itac at ang manga panulat ay magcasingdaml, or, magcasioda, ml ang itac at aog panulat.

magcapa1'es,

may be used before the adjective

78 when both objects compared have been previously expl'essed, prefix ca impading a sense of companionship or likeness.

the

Ang manga bata nang amain co at ang sa manga aquing pinsa,i, magcaca路 paris nang taas, 01', casingtaas nang manga anac nang aquing manga pinsan.

My uncle's chi ldren are as tall as my cousins'.

, Ga is prefixed to the possessive case of the demonstrative pronouns, thus formi ng adverbs or adverbial.comparative expressions; and if the comparison is made with an adjective, the latter takes ca, So, in this manner; so, as th is. So, in that manner, as that. As large as this. As old as that:

Ganitb, gaitb. Ganiyan, gan60n. Ganitb call1qul. Ganiyan catanda.

Ga is also prefixed to the interrogative pronouns ano and alin in the nominative when the extent of a quality is inquired after.

To what degree is she virtuous? To which is it equa in beauty? It is pretty like that.

<,Gaanb siya cabanal=banal? (,Gaatin cariquit? Ganiyan cariquit.

When ga or gapa is prefixed t a verb, it imparts a sense of mockery or lndicro s imitation of tile action. As if you .were selling, you pretend I Ganagbibill ca gayang nagbibill ca are selling. I '

~!i~fn:~eg'~:l:a:~~:;~:~~~'eat deal' Ganagtatangis siya, or, gayang,

Ganga may be employed as plural.

As these, As thosp. .... .as these. ..... as those.

Ganga Ganga Ganga Ganga

nitb. niyan, ganga n60n. nitb ca ... , niyan ca..... , ganga n60n ca .....

The comparison of quantity may be made by expressing the two objects compared in the nominative case with magcapal'es or magca pantlily and the root of quantity prefixed with ca at the end, the translation being literally "such a thing and such a thing are equal in quantity." The p03sessive case of a proper noun may be used for the possessive pronoun. My brother has not as these.

many books

. M{ uncle has as much lllk as my ather.

Ang aquing capatid ay ualang ganitb caramlng libro. Ang tinta nang aquing amain at ang na. ng aquing ama magcaparis=mag casingdaml.

Capara may govern the pos.essive case, or the nominative of a COmmOn ilOUll, Para para is generally used to denote plurality

_ DeGREES OF

Jewel, jewelry. Comb. Ear Work. Eyelash. Wrist. Flower. Ankle Armpit. Rich, wealthy. Riches, wealth. State, condition. Is he well?

COMPARISON.

Hiyas, alhaja . (Sp). ::suclay. THiuga. Gaua, p8g-g8U1i. Pilicm8l8. Galang-galangan. Bulnc·lac Bocb nang pall, b601, sacong. Qniliquili=caliquili. Mayaman. Cayamanan. Laga)'. lMabull baga ang lagay niya?

THIRTEENTH EXERCISE. You and your son are well? We are well. Has your male cousin any flowers in his garden'? Yes, Sir, he has many Howers. Has he any other plants? Yes, Sir, he has other plants. Who have big houses? The wealthy have big bouses. Are there any good houses in your towu'? Yes, . Sir, there are SOl'1e ~ood houses. What other things have you? We have some oxen. Hnve you much more money? 1\'l y baker has a great deal more. Has he more paper? He has more. Ha the sailor as mu ch coffee as tea? He has as much tea as coffee. Has this man as many friends as enemies? He has as mauy oE the former as oE the lilt! er. Have they as many shoes as stockin~s? They have no stookings. Is my brother's hat a~ pretty as mine? Your brother's is as pretty as yours. Are you as wise as my uncle? I am not so wise as he. Is John 8S virtuolls as my sister? They both are equally virtuous. Is that crystal as hard as stone? Stone is uot so hard as this crystal. Is iron as white as silver? Iron is not as white as silver. Is ink rs black as this? My ink is as black as that. Is my father 's steel as good as our uncle's? Both of them are equally good. Are th ese dogs as beautiEul as those? These are not so beautiful. Is bread thus made? Yes, in that manner. To what degree is my fatber old? Your father is a~ old as mine. To which degree is my aunt's servant wicked? He is as wicked as a thief. How pretty is my bird? It is pretty as a flower. Is Anthony as judicious as I? Both of you are judicious. What does he wish? He wishes to feigu as if he were weeping hard. Are they as red as those? They are as red as these. Is your jewelry as precious as my sister's? My jewelry is not so pre· cious as your sisters·s. How many combs have you? I have two. h your ear as black as my nose? It is as black as your wrist. Where have you your ankles and armpits? My ankles are at my feet, my armpits (at) under my shoulders. Are Cruz's family rich? They are rich. To what degree are they wealthy? They are wealthy as a king. Is your ~rother-in-law well? He is well. Are farmers as strong as villagers? '!lllagers are uot so strong as farmers. Is the tailor as wealthy as my aunt's sister·in·law? Your aunt's sister·in·law is as wealthy as the tailor. Are Americdns as industrious as Natives? Native3 are not so indus. trious as Americans, but they are as good seamen. Are women as tall a9 men? Men are not so beautiful as women, but women are not 80 tall as men.

THE

TAGALOG

LANGUAGE.

FOURTEENTH LESSON. YCAL~B'NG APAT NA PAGARAL DEGREES OF COMPARISON. (continued). Comparative of Superiority.

The simplest way of forming the comparative of superiority in Tagalog is to put the object with which the comparison is made in the ablative case (locative) by the use of the prepositions sa or cay. (1). "Virtue is more precious than riches," an.9 cabanala,i, mahal sa cayamanan; "Peter is richer than John," Si Ped"o,i, mayaman cay J.uan, "my brother is taller than I, " ang caputid co,i, mamas sa aqt'in; but it is both more idiomatic and more emphatic to insert the adverbs lalo, "more;" pa, "stiU;" or lalo pa, "more still;" between the things com· pared, with the same construction. Thus, ang cabanala,i, lalong mahal sa cayamanan; Si Pedro .i, mayaman pa cay Juan; and an.Q capatid co lalo pang rnatlias sa aq"in, express .better the comparative of superiority. Labis and labis pa milY likewise be used instead of lalo. Pa, alone, is used only in comparing a quality; lalo pang, both with substantives and adjecti ves. M db' ore (an a su stantlve) ... than.

1Lalo Lalo .. (the substantive) sa. pa (the substantive) sa .

r(The adjective) .........

sa. Lalo (the adject )......... sa. Lalo pa (the adj.) .......... sa. (The adj .) pa sa. Lalo .................. . sa. Lalo pa .............. ... sa. -Er, -r .......... .. .. .. than. Pa .... .. ................ sa. Labis sa. Labis pa ............. sa. More gold than silver. Lalo ang guint6 sa pilac. More water than wine. Lalo pang=pa ang tubig sa alac The countrymen have more oxen Ang manga magsasaca.i, mayroon la· tban tbe villagers. long baca sa manga tagabayan . My father bas more bread than Ang ama co, i, mayroon lalo pang tina· butter. pay sa rnantiquiya. Icao,i, mayroon lalo pang pilac sa You have more money than I. { aquin, 01', masalapi ca sa aquin . But the Judge has more than either Nguni,t, ang Hocom, mayroon pa sa of us. ating lahat. · t . . tl Ith 1 Lalong mahal ang cabana Ian sa caya· VIr ue IS more precIOus lan wea . manan. Si Juana,i, lalo pang bata sa aquin, or, Jane is younger than I. { (better). Si Juana,i, bata pa sa aq uin. More (and an adj .).. .. than.

(1) Cay fa ·i• • ometime. employed. even when a common and not a prop· er noun followB, for the purpoBe of rendering the Be~Be clearer (Bee FirBt Le.lon), ae, for inBtance, in: ma/lal a1lg pI<ri 8a buhay, "honor iB more preciooB than life; " hut a. the expreBBion in Tagalog, if acc08t.d in thie manner, mi~ht ,ive riee to mi!' conception . mahal a"g pun cay .a buhay. may be ueed to make it .lear tbat here a comparieon i8 intended.

DEGREES

~Iy sisters are poorer than th ey.

C OMPARIS ON.

\ Ang manga capatid cong babaye,i, unc· ha pa sa canila.

I am shorter than my consin .

Malii t pa ac6 sa aq ning pinsan. Siya,i, lalo pang cayomangni sa can i· yang capatid na lalaqni, or, (better). She is swarthier than her brother. Siya, i, cayomangui pa sa caniyang ca· patid na lalt1qu i. . '1 t th \ Ang manga lalaqui malacas pa sa i ' en are s ronger an women . I manga babaye. Lalo pang maganda ang manga babaye Women are more beantiful than sa mauga lalaqu i, 01', (better). Ang men. manga babaye maganda pa sa mao nga lalaq ui.

TDe absolute comparati ve of su peri ority is frequently exp ressed by the positive or simple degree of the adjective when this lalter has been left understood in the first member of the sentence. Of (between) both of us, which is Sa ating dalaua, c;a!(n baga ang marit· the wiser? nung? 1cao ang maritnnng. Thou art the wise,.

, Comparative of Inferiority .

The comparativ~ of inferiority, both for quantity and quality, is generally formed by eversing the term. The adverbs c6lang " less;" and alangan, "insufficient;" may also be used in this respect, as seen in the following comparati ve sentences. It should be noti ced, however, that cOlang has the fo rce of a direct negative, as: calang n ang bait, " injndicious, " " not jud icions; " c61ang nang pilac, " penniless. " Ang manga americano,i, lalong masi· pag sa 'f agalog, 01', ang manga Tagalog ay alangan nang sipag sa manga americano. Natives' wealth is less than A . ~ Ang cayamanan nang manga Tagalog ricans'. me ay alangan sa cayamanan nang mao nga americano. \ Lalong maram 1. ang manga babaye sa Men are fewer than women. ( manga lalaqUl, 01', ang manga lala· qni culang nang daml sa manga babaye. Natives are less industrions than Americans.

The Superlative.

The superlative relative degree is formed in the sa me way as the comparative of superiority, the arti cle preceding the comparative adverb, and the word lahat or any other completive term closing th e senlence. Who are the richest?

Which of us is the wisest?

GSillo sino ang lalong mayaman? ) GSino sillo ang maya man sa Jahat? GAlin ang lalo pang marlinong sa atin? { (Lit. , the wiser of us.)

TilE 1'AGALOG

L ANGU AGE.

Wbich of tbeOl is tbe most iudu - GAlio Fa cao il a a og musi pag sa lahat? trious? ( (Lit., tile ind ustri ous over a ll.) Aog aoac co a og lalo sa caoila. My son is the most. I (Li t, the mo re of th em.) I

Absolute sup erlati ves are formerl in several ways. The simplest way is that of using sO llle of the fo llowing adverbs: Very, much, exceedingly. Lubha, masaquit, labis, totoO. Extremely. Di sapala, di hamac, d i palnc. Of tb ese, those that are simple in stru cture, may come before or atter th e word (hey qualify ; th e compouod ooes, afte r it Luil-7uJ, aud lab i' have a sense of excess somewhat as th e Eo 路 glish " too " or 路路too mnch;" masaqnit, a seose of pleo.ty as wben " hard" Totoo is a term ot ass urance; t he is used in English arlverbially. others are adverbia l expressions, mean iog " not paltry," " uot calculable."

di hamac. di sapala. di palac. \ She is extremely virtuous. S ' a . b ~ lub-bang. ~ 1Y 1,1, a 路 totoo ng. siyang banal. oa na. lab is. Aog: D ios ay totoo ng (or lubhang) maGod is extremely wi e l"Unong. Peter is very ill. Lub hang maysaqu it si Ped ro ( Ang cani lang anac na bll baye ay lab is Their daugther is very eautifu l ) n3:ng ganda. Ang can iyahg paogi n6on ay mabagsic His master is very cruel { oa masaqu it. H eaven is exceedingly iligh. Ang langit ay mataas na d i sapala. Ang p6to ng oang H a ri ay mahal oa The king 's crown is very precio us. d i ha mac. Honesty is much esteemed. Ang capu riha, i, totoong m inamahal. Banal siya

Another way of fo r ming the absolu te superl ative is by repeating the adjective in fu ll and inserting the proper ligamen t bet,ween. Very red. Extremely black.

Mapul1mg mapula . Ma itim oa maitim.

The p lural of superl atives is formed by employ iug th e plura li zing particle for the simple adjectives , and ei ther by usin g the pa rticle or by repeating the first syllable of root, for those prefi xed with mao Most industri ons maids. Very ngly dogs. The extremely good app les.

J I\<f anga

masipag na masi pag na dalagll !

t jMasipag na masipag na dalagal Manga aso ng pangit na pa ng it.

I Ang ma nga mab u1lllg mabu tlu g ~

mansa nas. \.n g mabubu ting mabubu tl ng mansanas.

T he adjecti ves may also be made sup erl ative by repeating the root (or its two fira t syllables), c(! being prefixed, and alO or han suffixed.

DEGREES OF GOMPARtS ON .

Deep, profound. Very deep, moat profound. Sweet. Very sweet, sweetest. Wholesome Very wholesom e.

Mal li lim . Calali mlalim an . l\I atamfs. Cata mista mi san . 1Ilaguin hana. J Cagui nh agu inh a ua han, or, mag ninba路 1 Ul111 g maguinhaua. .

Superlatives (\[' superlnti ve ex pressions may be formed in a less simple way, by using a negative word and any compara ti ve ter m denoting equality, contention or fellowshi p before the p os essive case o[ the root denoting th e quality. the li teral translation being " match less." "unrivalled." Capara. Uapares. Matchless. Uatu lad. Unrivalled. Di , nailing Cauangis. 10 . Cahambing. Cabalimbana. Imcomparable. Capantay. \

lo,og

Th' fI . hi' b t ' \ Wjng bulac-lac na ilo,i, ualli.ng capa IS ower IS mac ess In eau y"1 ri s nllng gandlL. K' R' h d . II d . \ Si Haring Ricardo, i, ualang lloging I~g lC ar was unrlva e 10 cnpantay nang tlip&ng nang unang ravery. ( panah6n . Kindred, relatioll ship Cbnsangnineolls relation . Relation by affinity . The skies, Heaven. Coal. Charcoal. Star. Custom, habit, temper. Sick. Apple. Painter. Picture, paintin/!, image. Tbe roof. The roof of the house. The thatching straw. The thatching straw plant. Nipa路plantation . Cruel, bad tempered. Prayer.

Camaganacan, cahinloga n. Cadugo. Cabahiy. L angit. Om'bon (Sp ); uliog na balo. (Tag.). Oli ng. Bitouiu. Asal, ugal i. Maysaquit. \ .lIIansallas. (corr. of Sp. word man'/ zana.) Pill/ol', (8p .); mau hib ibo, (Tag .). L al'a uan. An g bu boug Au g sa bahsy no bubo ng. Au g paui d An g n ipa. aug sasa. Sasahan. tlIabagsic. Dusal.

FOURTEENTH EXERCISE. Has your servant a good broo m? H e has one. Have the hnsbandmen any of these or of those bags? Th ey have none of these nor of those. Who bas a good trulilk ? My broth er has one. Has he a leather or 'a wood trunk? H e bas a wood one. Has th e carpent er !Uany iron nail s? He has wan,\' . Wh o has some gun s? Th e Arn eI' JeallS have some. Have you the woo d hamm er of th e Frenchm!lll or that of the Englishman? I have neither. What is more precious thun weallll? Virtue. Who is lhe greutest of all? God. Who ate

THE

TAGALOG

LANGUAGE .

younger than my brothers? Your uucle's children are younger. Am I shorter than Peter? Yes, he is taller thau you. Which of these three flqwe rs is the prettiest? The prettiest is that one on the toble. 'Vho are stronger than women? Men. Are buffalos ' less swift than horses? They a re less swift. Are Americans fewe r than natives? They are more. Is the neighbour 's brother your relative? He is not my consanguineous relatioLl , but he is my relation by marriage. How many peo ple a re your kiudred composed of? They consist of seveu . male and fou l' fema le relations. Do virtuous people get into Heaven? Only virtuous people ge t in to Heaven. I s coal different from charcoal? Yes, coal is different from charcoal. Are there many stars in the sky, by night·time? Yes, there are a great mRny. Is your male cousin good ·tempered? No, he is cruel. 10 your mother sick? No, she is well, but he painter is sick How much is the dozen of those a pples? Twenty cents. Has your aunt many pictures in her house? She has three pictures in her house. Of what material is the roof of your neighbor's house? 'rhe roof of my neighbo r's house is of thatching straw What is the plant of thatching straw. Nipa. Are there a ny nipa fields in your province? Yes, th ere are . some. ,\There is voul; master? He is at chullch. Is he cruel? No, Le is not cruel, he is kind. \Vhat· prayer is that? Our fa ther: (The Lord s 'Prayer.) H ow many perso ns are there? There are three; John, Alfred and Ri cha rd . Whi ch is the wisest? The wisest is John. Which is the eldest? The eldest is Alfred. Which is the whitest? '[ be whitest is Richard. IYhicl of yo ur sisters is the most beautifnl? Jane is beautiful, Mary 'j more beautiful ; but Clara is th e most beautiful of Are Ameri cans very indus· the tbree. Oh! Clara is very beaubifu. trious? They are ex remely industrions. Is honey very sweet? Yes, honey is very sweet. Are buffalos ugly? Yes, indeed, they are ex· ceedingly ugly. What a nimal is very pwift? The ' horse is very Bwift. Are birds swifter that horses? Yes, birds aTe swifter than horses. Are natives very swa rthy? No, they are net very swarthy. Are your eyelashes very black? They are very black. Is the sea deep? 'rhe sea is very deep. Are a pples wbolesome? They are very wh olesome. Are birds swift? Birds are matchless in swiftness. Is your father virtuous? My father is matchless fo r virtue.

FIFTEENTH LESSON.

YCAL.\BING LIMANG PAGARAL. DIMINUTIVES.

It has been said in the preceding lessou that the rednpli cation of an adj ective iu f ull and th e using of the proper ligament between forms a kind of superl ative. N ow, the repeating of the root of a a .co~pound adjective without auy ligament serves to express th e <ii· mlllutlve.

Idle, lazy; a little idl e, somewhat !1atamad; matamadtamad . lazy. Savory, tasteful; a little savory . 'Masarap; masarapsarap. f:our, sourish . Maasim, maasimasim . Salt, salted; salbish, brackish. Ma:Uat; maalalalat.

DIMIN UTI VES.

Rapid, fleet ; moderately spee d y. Rough, uneven ; rather rough Is the del Rosario family's servant industrious? No, he is ratber lazy. Wbat is sourish? These oranges are sourish.

J Matulin, malicsl; matulintulin , malicsL

licsL Magaspaug, magaspanggaspang. GMasfpag bags ang aula nina del Ro· sario? Hindi, siya, i, matamadtamad. GAno baga ang maasimasim.? J Hong . manga dalandan ay maasi1 maslm. Do you wish to have a little water? G1big mo baga nang cannting tubig.? I do not wish to have any, because Ayao ac6 nang tub ig, sa pagca,t, mait is saltish. alatalat. I

The preceding is the inflective fo rm to lassen the mean ing of an adjecti ve, but munti, caunti, "small," "little;" before or after ihe word, may likewise be used. Gaunti is more used as an adverb. A little cotton . A smail book. This milk is pretty good.

Caunting hUlnc. Tsang munting libro, isang lihrong { munti. !tong gatas nn ito,i, mabutibntl.

Common nouns may be made di minutive by repeating thp. root and using the affix an or han. The term thus resu lti ng is not' only a diminutive noun, but it is moreo ver applicable to any graph ic representation of the thing, aud, in many cases, the sense imparted is one of contempt or derison of the original meaning. Little bird or painted figure of a} Ib 'b OUI onan. bird. Little person, abject fellow, or ~ painted representation of man , Tauotauohan. manikin. Petty king, ringleader, one who in I H .'h ' I a[J annn. play personates a kin g. Physician, person who cures. Mangagamot, (Tall.l; medico, (Sp.). Quack, medicastel'. Medimedicohan. (1). Who has Mary's little prayer book? { GN~ sa canino ~aga ang cay Mar£aog h brong muntI na dasalan? I have it. Na sa IIquiu . . Oolloquial J:'retty nam es of persons are largely in use among natlves, ' and although. io some cases, th e origiual name has beeu so distorte~. as not to pre3erve a single letter of th e simp le, the mnst usual way IS, however, to prouounce · the last tw J syllables aod to chana€! th e last vowel to oy fOl', male and to "ay fo r female persoos. 0 Francis Frederic. Mary. Margaret.

F~ank .

Fred. Mng. Madge.

Francisco. Pederi co. Marla. Margarita.

Isco.

Quic6y. Ic6y Biaogue. 'fi tay.

(1) The 8tudent should caretullv note that in redupli catin g a syllable or a wo,d, tbe reduplication does not pass beyond. the 8econd letler of Ibe syllable, a~d tbe. aecond 83(lIable ot tbe word.

86 Monosyllahic. and dissyllabic personal names are not generally made diminutives. 'rhere are other suppletory ways of lessening the meaning of substantives, one of which, especially for the abstract Olles, is with may before and with din after the abstract. He is pretty well off Siya,i, may cayamanan din . My mother is reco vering slightly I A . a ' I d' her strellghth. \ ng 10 CO,l, may ca acasan !D. Verbs are very frequently made diminutivE' in Tagalog, as will be seen in subsequent lessons. Lamaug, boco r Bocor, taagi , liban . Mayr60n ac6ng isang caibigan lamang. Naparitb silling lahat tangi,sa aquin. Labis, lubhang lDaraml Cav6,i , mayr60n alac na labis. Sila,i, may lub-hang maramlng libro. Lara, paminta. (cort',' of Sp. word Pepper. IJi mientaJ. Suca. Ugat. Vinegar. Vein or I' ot. L81amunan (root-word, lambn, "to '! hroat. swallow) Brains, marrow, pith. Utac Nerves. Manga litid. Cocoa nut oil. Laugis. Tinaia, large eaJ路t~en jar ab(lut 20 { Ta a an. p y gallons 1D capaCity . , Veil , auy hole dug in th e ,ground J Bal.on . to get at fresh water. 1 Shirt. Baro . Beast, any animal whatever. Hayop. Dead . Deceased people. Patay, namatay. Nangamatay Om'a, (Sp .); pare (corr. of Sp. word Priest, curate, parson . . , { padl'e, "father."). Priest, minisleT of God. Cahal.ili nang Dios. Sangol Baby, infant. Impudent, unchaste. Impudence. MahllJay. Uallalayan. To belong to, to agree to, to fit,} 0 I co . to suit, to bear .towards. Ang ating calol6ua ay sa Dios (din) t b d Our soul is ~o God, our 0 y 0 naoocol; ang ating cataoua,i. sa Inpa { earth. (naooeol) . But (adv.), only Hut. (prep.) . I hav e but one friend . All of them came here but me. Too much,. too many. You have too much win e. They have too many books.

FIr? rEENTH 'EXERCISE. How many shoes has your ' wife? She has only two Who is lazy? The female servant is a little lazy. What is the most tasteful fruit in tpe Philippines? The pine apple; hut the banana is some-

wbat

taste~ul.

1$ tuis wat",r salt waLel'? Nu, it is ooly sllltish, Arc youug

TH E VERD.

UM YERDS

chickens fl eeter than hens? Uhickens, while they are still small, are only a liLt/e fleet. Is that apple tastel'ul? It is rather insipid. Will you have some brearl? . T wish to have som e. Do you not wish to go to school? I wish to go to c.hurch, but my fri end Frank does not. Have you a good deal of mouey? I have only a little. How is that milk? This milk is sourish. WhA t is that picture? That picture is that of a bird. Are there many figures in that picture? 'rhis picture Is his brother a physician? He is only has twenty figures . a quack. What i that painted on that pictnre? It is a house. Is your baker well? He is sick. Is he very sick? H e is pretty nearly recovered. Did they all go to church this mol'tling? No, they all went there but him. How ruauy gods are tll ere? There is only one. How much money has the priest? The priest has too much. What is that yvu have in that bag? It is paper. Does he wish to have some vinegar? H e does not wish to have any, for he has a so re throat. \VlIere are roots? Roots of trees are in the earth. What are brains? Brai ns are the roots of Ilel'ves. Is th ere any cocoa·nut oil in that tinaja¥ There is none, this tillaja is empty. Where is there any water? There is water in the well. Is your fatber dead? Yes, my father is dead. Where are now th e so uls of the dead? Those of virtuous people are in Heaven , those of the wichd are ill Hell. \\ hat is a priest? A' priest is a ministe\' of God. What is impudent? There are many actions that are impudent. Are beasts and mpn alike? No, beasts and persons are differentl beas,t& bear towards earth, men bear towards God.

SIXTEENTH LESSON.

YCALABING ANIM NA PAGARAL.

THE VERB.--UM VERBS .

Verbs in Tagalog, as most other parts of speech, are either primitive or derivative; the former Ilre those which in their original signifi cation are verbs, the latter are fo rm ed from primitil'e verbs sub stsntives, adjectives or any others parts or speech by the addition of prefixes, suffixes Ol' both, or by the insertion of particles . The derivative verbs may be subdivided into primary or secondary according to whether the root is combined with one or seve ral partizles. Primitive verbs are for the most dissyllabic in structure and may be either transitive as bigay, "give;" or intransitive as to/ag, "sleep;" but a transiti ve sense may be given to an in transitive ve rb and vice· versa by the appli cation of particles. . The root is sometimes ambiguous as aral, "instruction;" bill, "bartering;" (£lang, "indebtness;" from whi ch are formed both the transitive verbs "to teach," " to sell," " to lend;" and also the neuter verbs or rather those which, although not strictly intransitive inasmuch as they admit of an accusative, are neverthele s considered by natives in the light of intransitives, as, ·' to learn ," "to buy," "to borrow. " The verbal particles are num erous, but one and the same root does not take them all, because some are to it useless and there are others the sense of which conflicts with the signification of the- radical. Their role in the · verbal play is not .. confined to express the subordinate